Skip to main content

Full text of "Car Service Manuals: jeep 2016-compass"

See other formats


2016 


Compass 


OWNER’S  MANUAL 


VEHICLES  SOLD  IN  CANADA 

With  respect  to  any  Vehicles  Sold  in  Canada,  the  name  FCA 
US  LLC  shall  be  deemed  to  be  deleted  and  the  name  FCA 
Canada  Inc.  used  in  substitution  therefore. 

DRIVING  AND  ALCOHOL 

Drunken  driving  is  one  of  the  most  frequent  causes  of 
accidents. 

Your  driving  ability  can  be  seriously  impaired  with  blood 
alcohol  levels  far  below  the  legal  minimum.  If  you  are 
drinking,  don't  drive.  Ride  with  a designated  non- 
drinking driver,  call  a cab,  a friend,  or  use  public  trans- 
portation. 

WARNING! 


Driving  after  drinking  can  lead  to  an  accident. 
Your  perceptions  are  less  sharp,  your  reflexes  are 
slower,  and  your  judgment  is  impaired  when  you 
have  been  drinking.  Never  drink  and  then  drive. 


This  manual  illustrates  and  describes  the  operation  of 
features  and  equipment  that  are  either  standard  or  op- 
tional on  this  vehicle.  This  manual  may  also  include  a 
description  of  features  and  equipment  that  are  no  longer 
available  or  were  not  ordered  on  this  vehicle.  Please 
disregard  any  features  and  equipment  described  in  this 
manual  that  are  not  on  this  vehicle. 

FCA  US  LLC  reserves  the  right  to  make  changes  in  design 
and  specifications,  and/or  make  additions  to  or  improve- 
ments to  its  products  without  imposing  any  obligation 
upon  itself  to  install  them  on  products  previously  manu- 
factured. 


Copyright  © 2015  FCA  US  LLC 


^ ^ ^ W M 


SECTION 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 


PAGE 


INTRODUCTION 

THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 
UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 

UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  

STARTING  AND  OPERATING  

WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES 

MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 

MAINTENANCE  SCHEDULES  

IF  YOU  NEED  CONSUMER  ASSISTANCE 

INDEX  


. .3 
. .9 
103 
213 
333 
451 
489 
543 
553 
565 


Information  Provided  by: 


Information  Provided  by: 

CZ)  = /M_  = ?^ 


CONTENTS 

INTRODUCTION 

■ INTRODUCTION 

4 ■ VEHICLE  IDENTIFICATION  NUMBER  7 

■ ROLLOVER  WARNING  

4 ■ VEHICLE  MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS  ...  .8 

■ HOW  TO  USE  THIS  MANUAL  . . 

5 

■ WARNINGS  AND  CAUTIONS  . . 

7 

Information  Provided  by: 

CD  = /M_  = F=? 


4 INTRODUCTION 

INTRODUCTION 

Congratulations  on  selecting  your  new  FCA  US  LLC 
vehicle.  Be  assured  that  it  represents  precision  workman- 
ship, distinctive  styling,  and  high  quality  - all  essentials 
that  are  traditional  to  our  vehicles. 

This  Owner's  Manual  has  been  prepared  with  the  assis- 
tance of  service  and  engineering  specialists  to  acquaint 
you  with  the  operation  and  maintenance  of  your  vehicle. 
It  is  supplemented  by  Warranty  Information,  and  various 
customer-oriented  documents.  Please  take  the  time  to 
read  these  publications  carefully.  Following  the  instruc- 
tions and  recommendations  in  this  manual  will  help 
assure  safe  and  enjoyable  operation  of  your  vehicle. 

NOTE:  After  reviewing  the  owner  information,  it 
should  be  stored  in  the  vehicle  for  convenient  referenc- 
ing and  remain  with  the  vehicle  when  sold. 


When  it  comes  to  service,  remember  that  your  authorized 
dealer  knows  your  Jeep®  vehicle  best,  has  factory-trained 
technicians  and  genuine  MOPAR®  parts,  and  cares  about 
your  satisfaction. 

ROLLOVER  WARNING 

Utility  vehicles  have  a significantly  higher  rollover  rate 
than  other  types  of  vehicles.  This  vehicle  has  a higher 
ground  clearance  and  a higher  center  of  gravity  than 
many  passenger  vehicles.  It  is  capable  of  performing 
better  in  a wide  variety  of  off-road  applications.  Driven 
in  an  unsafe  manner,  all  vehicles  can  go  out  of  control. 
Because  of  the  higher  center  of  gravity,  if  this  vehicle  is 
out  of  control  it  may  roll  over  while  some  other  vehicles 
may  not. 

Do  not  attempt  sharp  turns,  abrupt  maneuvers,  or  other 
unsafe  driving  actions  that  can  cause  loss  of  vehicle 


Information  Provided  by: 


control.  Failure  to  operate  this  vehicle  safely  may  result 
in  a collision,  rollover  of  the  vehicle,  and  severe  or  fatal 
injury.  Drive  carefully. 


r A WARNING:  higher  rollover  risk  ^ 

Avoid  Abrupt  Maneuvers 
and  Excessive  Speed. 

Always  Buckle  Up. 

See  Owner's  Manual 
For  Father  information 

4 

80bfe0f0 

Rollover  Warning  Label 

Failure  to  use  the  driver  and  passenger  seat  belts  pro- 
vided is  a major  cause  of  severe  or  fatal  injury.  In  fact,  the 
U.S.  government  notes  that  the  universal  use  of  existing 


INTRODUCTION  5 


seat  belts  could  cut  the  highway  death  toll  by  10,000  or 
more  each  year  and  could  reduce  disabling  injuries  by 
two  million  annually.  In  a rollover  crash,  an  unbelted 
person  is  significantly  more  likely  to  die  than  a person 
wearing  a seat  belt.  Always  buckle  up. 

HOW  TO  USE  THIS  MANUAL 

Consult  the  Table  of  Contents  to  determine  which  section 
contains  the  information  you  desire. 

Since  the  specification  of  your  vehicle  depends  on  the 
items  of  equipment  ordered,  certain  descriptions  and 
illustrations  may  differ  from  your  vehicle's  equipment. 

The  detailed  index  at  the  back  of  this  Owner's  Manual 
contains  a complete  listing  of  all  subjects. 

Consult  the  following  table  for  a description  of  the 
symbols  that  may  be  used  on  your  vehicle  or  throughout 
this  Owner's  Manual: 


6 INTRODUCTION 


*55* 

METER  M FUEL 

C 

•RARNWOOM 

V 

RMOSMELOMPCR 

#■ 

unnoMuu 

ID 

•ROSEAU 

TUM  SIGMAS 

• 

UPPER  AM 

MATEO  SEAT 

S 

DOOM  LOCK 

ADJUSTABLE 

Cl 

ELECTROS* 

ESP 

BAS 

LECTRONC  STABRITY 
PROGRAM  i BRAKE 

■ 

run. 

C 

RCARRRNOOW 

& 

NASnRLIOHTRR) 

ID 

LOW  SEAN 

wnacthot 

UPPWAMKCRRrR 

HEATEO  SEAT 

(1) 

MIOESONT 

BRAKE 

Q 

SNAKE  STETEN 
WANMPJjQ  NLRKWO 

fuel  false* 

Ci 

REAR  YANOON  1 

& 

MeiMElD  RASHER 

'** 

: OOMEuOHT 

#0 

•RONf  KM  U0R4T 

HOOO  RELEASE 

• 

T 

LONER  AIR 

<© 

CONVERTIBLE 

£ 

AWD! 

ALL  WHEEL  A 

(@) 

AA.URE  Of  AKTUOCM 

•er. 

;00; 

0£ 

CJ 

LMTCATE  RELEASE 

i: 

<3 

M 

CLSCTNONIC 

4WD! 

BRAKE 

BRAKE  SYSTEM 

Q 

BATTERY 

DEFROST 

m 

HEATEO  MANOR 

HEATED 

<8> 
WPMMELD  1 

? 
HSTRURMT  RAVEL 

A 

TT 

SEAT  SELT 

OPEN 

®> 

RMCDOOI 

LONER  AM  OUTLtT 
TMJRPHOECK 

OMOSEAT 

(I'1? 

SINCE 

RECOORITIOR 

DRIVE 

A 

BRAKE 

TOW/ 

HAUL 

TOM  1 HAUL 

TRT 

A 

LONER  A AC  HONS 

a/Q 

A 

4 

LOW 

o 

STEERMOEURO 

© 

AHO  MASHER 

J- 

5RS 

RIPQRG 

Af2 

'ft 

RELEASE  MAACLE 

CHRDSIM  (LATCH) 

kr 

BWTTOR 

OD 

A/C 

PUSH 

J3 

OFF 

TRANS  HOME  COOLANT  SUPPLEMENTAL  MUIWU  OOORAJAR  CCHVEKTMLE  CCNYERTBLE  NORM  SEE 

OIL  TRUE  TEMPERATURE  RESTRARIT  SYSTEM  AJRSAOOEF  TOPDONN  TOPIM  Ml 


ELECTRONIC 

STABILITY  ^ _ 

control,  ope  010533317 


Information  Provided  by: 

' -’1  CD=/M_=F^ 


WARNINGS  AND  CAUTIONS 


This  Owner's  Manual  contains  WARNINGS  against 
operating  procedures  that  could  result  in  a collision  or 
bodily  injury.  It  also  contains  CAUTIONS  against  proce- 
dures that  could  result  in  damage  to  your  vehicle.  If  you 
do  not  read  this  entire  Owner's  Manual,  you  may  miss 
important  information.  Observe  all  Warnings  and  Cau- 
tions. 

VEHICLE  IDENTIFICATION  NUMBER 

The  Vehicle  Identification  Number  (VIN)  is  found  on  the 
left  front  comer  of  the  instrument  panel,  visible  through 
the  windshield.  This  number  also  is  stamped  into  the 
right  front  body,  on  the  right  front  seat  crossmember 
under  the  carpet  and  the  vehicle  registration  and  title. 


INTRODUCTION  7 


Vehicle  Identification  Number 


8 INTRODUCTION 


VEHICLE  MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS 


Right  Front  Body  VIN  Location 
NOTE:  It  is  illegal  to  remove  or  alter  the  VIN. 


WARNING! 

Any  modifications  or  alterations  to  this  vehicle  could 
seriously  affect  its  roadworthiness  and  safety  and 
may  lead  to  a collision  resulting  in  serious  injury  or 
death. 


^ Informatio 

• A CD  = 


/M_=; 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


CONTENTS 

■ A WORD  ABOUT  YOUR  KEYS  12 

□ Ignition  Key  Removal 12 

□ Locking  Doors  With  A Key 14 

□ Key-In-Ignition  Reminder 14 

■ SENTRY  KEY 15 

□ Replacement  Keys  16 

□ Customer  Key  Programming 17 

□ General  Information 18 

■ VEHICLE  SECURITY  ALARM  — 

IF  EQUIPPED 18 


□ To  Arm  The  System  18 

□ Rearming  The  System 19 

□ To  Disarm  The  System 19 

□ Vehicle  Security  Alarm  Manual  Override 20 

■ REMOTE  KEYLESS  ENTRY  (RKE)  — 

IF  EQUIPPED 20 

□ To  Unlock  The  Doors  And  Liftgate 21 

□ Remote  Key  Unlock,  Driver  Door/ All  First 

Press 21 

□ Illuminated  Approach  — If  Equipped 22 


10  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


□ To  Lock  The  Doors  And  Liftgate 22 

□ Sound  Horn  With  Remote  Key  Lock 22 

□ Flash  Lights  With  Remote  Key  Lock/Unlock  . . .23 

□ Using  The  Panic  Alarm 24 

□ Programming  Additional  Transmitters 25  | 

□ Transmitter  Battery  Replacement 25 

□ General  Information 26 

■ REMOTE  STARTING  SYSTEM  — 

IF  EQUIPPED 26 

□ How  To  Use  Remote  Start 27  j 

□ Remote  Start  Abort  Message  On  Electronic  Vehicle 

Information  Center  (EVIC)  — If  Equipped 27 

□ To  Enter  Remote  Start 28 

Q 


□ To  Exit  Remote  Start  Mode  Without  Driving  The 

Vehicle 29 

□ To  Exit  Remote  Start  Mode  And  Drive  The 

Vehicle 29 

□ General  Information 29 

DOOR  LOCKS  30 

□ Manual  Door  Locks 30 

□ Power  Door  Locks  31 

□ Child-Protection  Door  Lock  System  — 

Rear  Doors  34 

POWER  WINDOWS  — IF  EQUIPPED  36 

□ Power  Window  Switches 36 

□ Auto-Down 37 

□ Window  Lockout  Switch 38 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  11 


■ LIFTGATE  39 

■ OCCUPANT  RESTRAINT  SYSTEMS 40 

□ Important  Safety  Precautions 41 

□ Seat  Belt  Systems 42 

□ Supplemental  Restraint  System  (SRS) 61 

□ Child  Restraints 75 

□ Transporting  Pets 96 

■ ENGINE  BREAK-IN  RECOMMENDATIONS  ...  .96 


■ SAFETY  TIPS 97 

□ Transporting  Passengers 97 


□ Exhaust  Gas 98  M 

□ Safety  Checks  You  Should  Make  Inside  The 

Vehicle  99 

□ Periodic  Safety  Checks  You  Should  Make  Outside 

The  Vehicle  101 


Information  Provided  by: 


12  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 

A WORD  ABOUT  YOUR  KEYS 


Ignition  Key  Removal 


The  authorized  dealer  that  sold  you  your  new  vehicle  has 
the  key  code  numbers  for  your  vehicle  locks.  These 
numbers  can  be  used  to  order  duplicate  keys.  Ask  your 
authorized  dealer  for  these  numbers  and  keep  them  in  a 
safe  place. 


1.  Place  the  shift  lever  in  PARK  (if  equipped  with  an 
automatic  transmission). 

2.  Place  the  ignition  in  the  ACC  (Accessory)  position. 

3.  Push  the  key  and  cylinder  inward  and  rotate  the  key  to 
the  LOCK  position. 


021410235 


4.  Remove  the  key  from  the  ignition  switch  lock  cylinder. 


C3  = /M_E=F=? 


Vehicle  Key 


Ignition  Switch  Positions 


1 — LOCK 

2 — ACC  (ACCESSORY) 

3 — ON/RUN 

4 — START 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  13 


NOTE:  If  you  try  to  remove  the  key  before  you  place  the 
shift  lever  in  PARK,  the  key  may  become  trapped  tem- 
porarily in  the  ignition  switch  cylinder.  If  this  occurs, 
place  the  shift  lever  in  PARK,  rotate  the  key  clockwise 
slightly,  and  then  remove  the  key  as  described  above.  If  a 
malfunction  occurs,  the  system  will  trap  the  key  in  the 
ignition  cylinder  to  warn  you  that  this  safety  feature  is 
inoperable.  The  engine  can  be  started  and  stopped  but 
the  key  cannot  be  removed  until  you  obtain  service. 


2 


WARNING! 

• Before  exiting  a vehicle,  always  shift  the  transmis- 
sion into  PARK,  apply  the  parking  brake,  turn  the 
engine  OFF,  remove  the  key  fob  from  the  ignition 
and  lock  your  vehicle. 

• Never  leave  children  alone  in  a vehicle,  or  with 
access  to  an  unlocked  vehicle. 


i Provided  by: 

/M = 


(Continued) 


14  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Allowing  children  to  be  in  a vehicle  unattended  is 
dangerous  for  a number  of  reasons.  A child  or 
others  could  be  seriously  or  fatally  injured.  Chil- 
dren should  be  warned  not  to  touch  the  parking 
brake,  brake  pedal  or  the  gear  selector. 

• Do  not  leave  the  Key  Fob  in  or  near  the  vehicle,  or 
in  a location  accessible  to  children.  A child  could 
operate  power  windows,  other  controls,  or  move 
the  vehicle. 

• Do  not  leave  children  or  animals  inside  parked 
vehicles  in  hot  weather.  Interior  heat  build-up  may 
cause  serious  injury  or  death. 


CAUTION! 

Always  remove  the  Key  Fobs  from  the  vehicle  and 
lock  all  doors  when  leaving  the  vehicle  unattended. 


Locking  Doors  With  A Key 

You  can  insert  the  key  with  either  side  up.  To  lock  the 
door,  turn  the  key  to  the  right.  To  unlock  the  door,  turn 
the  key  to  the  left.  Refer  to  "Maintenance  Procedures"  in 
"Maintaining  Your  Vehicle"  for  further  information. 

Key-In-Ignition  Reminder 

Opening  the  driver's  door  when  the  key  is  in  the  ignition 
and  the  ignition  position  is  LOCK  or  ACC  sounds  a 
signal  to  remind  you  to  remove  the  key. 

NOTE:  With  the  driver's  door  open  and  the  key  in  the 
ignition,  the  power  door  locks  will  not  lock,  and  Remote 
Keyless  Entry  (RKE)  transmitter  will  not  function. 


1 Provided  by: 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  15 


SENTRY  KEY 

The  Sentry  Key  Immobilizer  System  prevents  unauthor- 
ized vehicle  operation  by  disabling  the  engine.  The 
system  does  not  need  to  be  armed  or  activated.  Operation 
is  automatic,  regardless  of  whether  the  vehicle  is  locked 
or  unlocked. 

The  system  uses  ignition  keys  that  have  an  embedded 
electronic  chip  (transponder)  to  prevent  unauthorized 
vehicle  operation.  Therefore,  only  keys  that  are  pro- 
grammed to  the  vehicle  can  be  used  to  start  and  operate 
the  vehicle.  The  system  will  shut  the  engine  off  in  two 
seconds  if  someone  uses  an  invalid  key  to  try  to  start  the 
engine. 

NOTE:  A key  that  has  not  been  programmed  is  also 
considered  an  invalid  key,  even  if  it  is  cut  to  fit  the 
ignition  switch  lock  cylinder  for  that  vehicle. 


During  normal  operation,  after  turning  on  the  ignition 
switch,  the  Vehicle  Security  Light  will  turn  on  for  three 
seconds  for  a bulb  check.  If  the  light  remains  on  after  the 
bulb  check,  it  indicates  that  there  is  a problem  with  the 
electronics.  In  addition,  if  the  Vehicle  Security  Light 
begins  to  flash  after  the  bulb  check,  it  indicates  that 
someone  used  an  invalid  key  to  try  to  start  the  engine. 
Either  of  these  conditions  will  result  in  the  engine  being 
shut  off  after  two  seconds. 


2 


If  the  Vehicle  Security  Light  turns  on  during  normal 
vehicle  operation  (vehicle  running  for  longer  than  10 
seconds),  it  indicates  that  there  is  a fault  in  the  electron- 
ics. Should  this  occur,  have  the  vehicle  serviced  as  soon 
as  possible  by  an  authorized  dealer. 


Information  Provided  by: 


16  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


CAUTION! 

The  Sentry  Key  Immobilizer  system  is  not  compat- 
ible with  some  aftermarket  remote  starting  systems. 
Use  of  these  systems  may  result  in  vehicle  starting 
problems  and  loss  of  security  protection. 

All  of  the  keys  provided  with  your  new  vehicle  have 
been  programmed  to  the  vehicle  electronics. 

Replacement  Keys 

NOTE:  Only  keys  that  are  programmed  to  the  vehicle 
electronics  can  be  used  to  start  and  operate  the  vehicle. 
Once  a Sentry  Key  is  programmed  to  a vehicle,  it  cannot 
be  programmed  to  any  other  vehicle. 


CAUTION! 

Always  remove  the  Sentry  Keys  from  the  vehicle  and 
lock  all  doors  when  leaving  the  vehicle  unattended. 

Duplication  of  keys  may  be  performed  at  an  authorized 
dealer  or  by  following  the  customer  key  programming 
procedure.  This  procedure  consists  of  programming  a 
blank  key  to  the  vehicle  electronics.  A blank  key  is  one 
that  has  never  been  programmed. 

NOTE:  When  having  the  Sentry  Key  Immobilizer  Sys- 
tem serviced,  bring  all  vehicle  keys  with  you  to  an 
authorized  dealer. 


Information  Provided  by: 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  17 


Customer  Key  Programming 

If  you  have  two  valid  Sentry  Keys,  you  can  program  new 
Sentry  Keys  to  the  system  by  performing  the  following 
procedure: 

1.  Cut  the  additional  Sentry  Key  Transponder  blank(s)  to 
match  the  ignition  switch  lock  cylinder  key  code. 


4.  Insert  a blank  Sentry  Key  into  the  ignition  switch.  Turn 
the  ignition  switch  to  the  ON /RUN  position  within  60 
seconds.  After  10  seconds,  a single  chime  will  sound. 
In  addition,  the  Vehicle  Security  Light  will  stop  flash- 
ing. To  indicate  that  programming  is  complete,  the 
Vehicle  Security  Light  will  turn  on  again  for  three 
seconds  and  then  turn  off. 


2 


2.  Insert  the  first  valid  key  into  the  ignition  switch.  Turn 
the  ignition  switch  to  the  ON  /RUN  position  for  at 
least  three  seconds,  but  no  longer  than  15  seconds. 
Then,  turn  the  ignition  switch  to  the  LOCK  position 
and  remove  the  first  key. 

3.  Insert  the  second  valid  key  into  the  ignition  switch. 
Turn  the  ignition  switch  to  the  ON /RUN  position 
within  15  seconds.  After  10  seconds,  a chime  will 
sound.  In  addition,  the  Vehicle  Security  Light  will 
begin  to  flash.  Turn  the  ignition  switch  to  the  LOCK 
position  and  remove  the  second  key. 


The  new  Sentry  Key  is  programmed.  The  Remote  Key- 
less Entry  (RKE)  transmitter  will  also  be  programmed 
during  this  procedure. 

Repeat  this  procedure  to  program  up  to  eight  keys.  If  you 
do  not  have  a programmed  Sentry  Key,  contact  your 
authorized  dealer  for  details. 


Information  Provided  by: 


18  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 

NOTE:  If  a programmed  key  is  lost,  see  your  authorized 
dealer  to  have  all  remaining  keys  erased  from  the  sys- 
tem's memory.  This  will  prevent  the  lost  key  from 
starting  your  vehicle.  The  remaining  keys  must  then  be 
reprogrammed.  All  vehicle  keys  must  be  taken  to  an 
authorized  dealer  at  the  time  of  service  to  be  repro- 
grammed. 

General  Information 

The  following  regulatory  statement  applies  to  all  radio 
frequency  (RF)  devices  equipped  in  this  vehicle: 

This  device  complies  with  Part  15  of  the  FCC  Rules  and 
with  Industry  Canada  licence-exempt  RSS  standard(s). 
Operation  is  subject  to  the  following  two  conditions: 

1.  This  device  may  not  cause  harmful  interference,  and 

2.  This  device  must  accept  any  interference  received, 
including  interference  that  may  cause  undesired  op- 
eration. 


NOTE:  Changes  or  modifications  not  expressly  approved 
by  the  party  responsible  for  compliance  could  void  the 
user's  authority  to  operate  the  equipment. 

VEHICLE  SECURITY  ALARM  — IF  EQUIPPED 

This  Vehicle  Security  Alarm  monitors  the  doors,  liftgate, 
and  ignition  switch  for  unauthorized  operation. 

When  the  alarm  is  activated,  the  interior  switches  for 
door  locks  are  disabled.  The  Vehicle  Security  Alarm 
provides  both  audio  and  visual  signals,  the  horn  will 
sound,  the  headlights,  park  lamps  and/or  turn  signals 
will  flash  repeatedly  for  three  minutes.  If  the  disturbance 
is  still  present  (driver's  door,  passenger  door,  other  doors, 
ignition)  after  three  minutes,  the  parking  lights  and  tail 
lights  will  flash  for  an  additional  15  minutes. 

To  Arm  The  System 

1.  Remove  the  key  from  the  ignition  switch  and  get  out 
of  the  vehicle. 


2.  Lock  the  door  using  either  the  power  door  LOCK 
switch  or  the  Remote  Keyless  Entry  (RKE)  transmitter 
and  close  all  doors. 

3.  The  Vehicle  Security  Light  in  the  instrument  cluster  will 
flash  rapidly  for  approximately  16  seconds.  This  shows 
that  the  Vehicle  Security  Alarm  is  arming.  During  this 
period,  if  a door  is  opened,  the  ignition  switch  is  turned 
to  ON/RUN,  or  the  power  door  locks  are  unlocked  in 
any  manner,  the  Vehicle  Security  Alarm  will  automati- 
cally disarm.  After  approximately  16  seconds,  the  Ve- 
hicle Security  Light  will  flash  slowly.  This  shows  that 
the  Vehicle  Security  Alarm  is  fully  armed. 

Rearming  The  System 

If  something  triggers  the  alarm,  and  no  action  is  taken  to 
disarm  it,  the  Vehicle  Security  Alarm  will  turn  off  the 
horn  after  three  minutes,  turn  off  all  of  the  visual  signals 
after  15  minutes,  and  then  the  Vehicle  Security  Alarm  will 
rearm  itself. 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  19 

To  Disarm  The  System 

Push  UNLOCK  on  the  RKE  transmitter,  or  insert  the  key 
into  the  ignition  switch  and  turn  the  ignition  switch  to 
the  ON  /RUN  position. 

If  something  has  triggered  the  Vehicle  Security  Alarm  in 
your  absence,  the  horn  will  sound  three  times,  and 
exterior  lights  blink  three  times  when  you  unlock  the 
doors.  Check  the  vehicle  for  tampering.  The  Vehicle 
Security  Alarm  is  designed  to  protect  your  vehicle. 
However,  you  can  create  conditions  where  the  Vehicle 
Security  Alarm  will  arm  unexpectedly.  If  you  remain  in 
the  vehicle  and  lock  the  doors  with  the  RKE  transmitter, 
once  the  Vehicle  Security  Alarm  is  armed  (after  16 
seconds),  when  you  pull  the  door  handle  to  exit,  the 
alarm  will  sound.  If  this  occurs,  push  the  UNLOCK 
button  on  the  RKE  transmitter  to  disarm  the  Vehicle 
Security  Alarm. 


20  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Vehicle  Security  Alarm  Manual  Override 

The  Vehicle  Security  Alarm  will  not  arm  if  you  lock  the 
doors  using  the  manual  door  lock  plunger. 

REMOTE  KEYLESS  ENTRY  (RKE)  — IF 
EQUIPPED 

This  system  allows  you  to  lock  or  unlock  the  doors  and 
liftgate  or  activate  the  Panic  Alarm  from  distances  up  to 
approximately  66  ft  (20  m)  using  a hand-held  Remote 
Keyless  Entry  (RKE)  transmitter.  The  RKE  transmitter 
does  not  need  to  be  pointed  at  the  vehicle  to  activate  the 
system. 


021410235 

Three  Button  RKE  Transmitter 
NOTE:  The  line  of  transmission  must  not  be  blocked 
with  metal  objects. 


i=D  = / M_E=F=? 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  21 


To  Unlock  The  Doors  And  Liftgate 

Push  and  release  the  UNLOCK  button  on  the  RKE 
transmitter  once  to  unlock  the  driver's  door  or  twice 
within  five  seconds  to  unlock  all  doors  and  liftgate.  The 
turn  signal  lights  will  flash  to  acknowledge  the  unlock 
signal.  The  illuminated  entry  system  will  also  turn  on. 

Remote  Key  Unlock,  Driver  Door/All  First  Press 


For  vehicles  not  equipped  with  the  EVIC,  perform  the 
following  steps: 

1.  Push  and  hold  the  LOCK  button  on  a programmed 
RKE  transmitter  for  at  least  4 seconds  but  no  longer 
than  10  seconds.  Then,  push  and  hold  the  UN- 
LOCK button  while  still  holding  the  LOCK  button. 


2 


2.  Release  both  buttons  at  the  same  time. 


This  feature  lets  you  program  the  system  to  unlock  either 
the  driver's  door  or  all  doors  on  the  first  push  of  the 
UNLOCK  button  on  the  RKE  transmitter.  To  change  the 
current  setting,  proceed  as  follows: 

• For  vehicles  equipped  with  the  Electronic  Vehicle 
Information  Center  (EVIC),  refer  to  "Electronic  Vehicle 
Information  Center  (EVIC)/Personal  Settings 
(Customer-Programmable  Features)"  in  "Understand- 
ing Your  Instrument  Panel"  for  further  information. 


3.  Test  the  feature  while  outside  of  the  vehicle  by 
pushing  the  LOCK/UNLOCK  buttons  on  the  RKE 
transmitter  with  the  ignition  switch  in  the  LOCK 
position  and  the  key  removed. 

4.  Repeat  these  steps  if  you  want  to  return  this  feature 
to  its  previous  setting. 


Information  Provided  by: 


22  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

NOTE:  Pushing  the  LOCK  button  on  the  RKE  transmitter 
while  you  are  inside  the  vehicle  will  activate  the  Vehicle 
Security  Alarm.  Opening  a door  with  the  Vehicle  Security 
Alarm  activated  will  cause  the  alarm  to  sound.  Push  the 
UNLOCK  button  to  deactivate  the  Vehicle  Security 
Alarm. 

Illuminated  Approach  — If  Equipped 

This  feature  activates  the  headlights  for  up  to  90  seconds 
when  the  doors  are  unlocked  with  the  RKE  transmitter. 
The  time  for  this  feature  is  programmable  on  vehicles 
equipped  with  the  EVIC.  Refer  to  "Electronic  Vehicle 
Information  Center  (EVIC)/Personal  Settings  (Customer- 
Programmable  Features)"  in  "Understanding  Your  In- 
strument Panel"  for  further  information. 

NOTE:  None  of  the  courtesy  lights  will  operate  if  the 
dimmer  control  is  in  the  "defeat"  position  (extreme 
downward  position),  unless  the  overhead  map /reading 
lights  are  turned  on  manually. 


To  Lock  The  Doors  And  Liftgate 

Push  and  release  the  LOCK  button  on  the  RKE  transmit- 
ter to  lock  all  doors  and  liftgate.  The  turn  signal  lights 
will  flash,  and  the  horn  will  chirp  to  acknowledge  the 
signal. 

Sound  Horn  With  Remote  Key  Lock 

This  feature  will  cause  the  horn  to  chirp  when  the  doors 
are  locked  with  the  RKE  transmitter.  This  feature  can  be 
turned  on  or  turned  off.  To  change  the  current  setting, 
proceed  as  follows: 

• For  vehicles  equipped  with  the  EVIC,  refer  to  "Elec- 
tronic Vehicle  Information  Center  (EVIC)/Personal 
Settings  (Customer-Programmable  Features)"  in  "Un- 
derstanding Your  Instrument  Panel"  for  further  infor- 
mation. 


i Provided  by: 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  23 


• For  vehicles  not  equipped  with  the  EVIC,  perform  the 

following  steps: 

1.  Push  the  LOCK  button  on  a programmed  RKE 
transmitter  for  at  least  4 seconds,  but  no  longer  than 
10  seconds.  Then,  push  the  PANIC  button  while 
still  holding  the  LOCK  button. 

2.  Release  both  buttons  at  the  same  time. 

3.  Test  the  feature  while  outside  of  the  vehicle  by 
pushing  the  LOCK  button  on  the  RKE  transmitter 
with  the  ignition  switch  in  the  LOCK  position  and 
the  key  removed. 

4.  Repeat  these  steps  if  you  want  to  return  this  feature 
to  its  previous  setting. 


NOTE:  Pushing  the  LOCK  button  on  the  RKE  transmitter 
while  you  are  in  the  vehicle  will  activate  the  Vehicle 
Security  Alarm.  Opening  a door  with  the  Vehicle  Security 
Alarm  activated  will  cause  the  alarm  to  sound.  Push  the 
UNLOCK  button  to  deactivate  the  Vehicle  Security 
Alarm. 


2 


Flash  Lights  With  Remote  Key  Lock/Unlock 

This  feature  will  cause  the  turn  signal  lights  to  flash  when 
the  doors  are  locked  or  unlocked  with  the  RKE  transmit- 
ter. This  feature  can  be  turned  on  or  turned  off.  To  change 
the  current  setting,  proceed  as  follows: 

• For  vehicles  equipped  with  the  EVIC,  refer  to  "Elec- 
tronic Vehicle  Information  Center  (EVIC)/Personal 
Settings  (Customer-Programmable  Features)"  in  "Un- 
derstanding Your  Instrument  Panel"  for  further  infor- 
mation. 


Information  Provided  by: 


24  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


• For  vehicles  not  equipped  with  the  EVIC,  perform  the 

following  steps: 

1.  Push  and  hold  the  UNLOCK  button  on  a pro- 
grammed RKE  transmitter  for  at  least  4 seconds  but 
no  longer  than  10  seconds.  Then,  push  and  hold  the 
LOCK  button  while  still  holding  the  UNLOCK 
button. 

2.  Release  both  buttons  at  the  same  time. 

3.  Test  the  feature  while  outside  of  the  vehicle  by 
pushing  the  LOCK /UNLOCK  buttons  on  the  RKE 
transmitter  with  the  ignition  switch  in  the  LOCK 
position  and  the  key  removed. 

4.  Repeat  these  steps  if  you  want  to  return  this  feature 
to  its  previous  setting. 


NOTE:  Pushing  the  LOCK  button  on  the  RKE  transmitter 
while  you  are  in  the  vehicle  will  activate  the  Vehicle 
Security  Alarm.  Opening  a door  with  the  Vehicle  Security 
Alarm  activated  will  cause  the  alarm  to  sound.  Push  the 
UNLOCK  button  to  deactivate  the  Vehicle  Security 
Alarm. 

Using  The  Panic  Alarm 

To  turn  the  Panic  Alarm  feature  ON  or  OFF,  push  and 
hold  the  PANIC  button  on  the  RKE  transmitter  for  at 
least  one  second  and  release.  When  the  Panic  Alarm  is  on, 
the  headlights  and  park  lights  will  flash,  the  horn  will 
pulse  on  and  off,  and  the  interior  lights  will  turn  on. 

The  Panic  Alarm  will  stay  on  for  three  minutes  unless 
you  turn  it  off  by  pushing  the  PANIC  button  a second 
time  or  if  the  vehicle  speed  is  5 mph  (8  km/h)  or  greater. 


Information  Provided  by: 


NOTE:  When  you  turn  off  the  Panic  Alarm  by  pushing 
the  PANIC  button  a second  time,  you  may  have  to  move 
closer  to  the  vehicle  due  to  the  radio  frequency  noises  of 
the  system. 

Programming  Additional  Transmitters 

Refer  to  "Sentry  Key"  in  "Things  To  Know  Before  Start- 
ing" for  further  information. 

If  you  do  not  have  a programmed  RKE  transmitter, 
contact  your  authorized  dealer  for  details. 

Transmitter  Battery  Replacement 

NOTE:  Perchlorate  Material  - special  handling  may  ap- 
ply. See  www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate 

The  recommended  replacement  battery  is  CR2032. 

1.  If  the  RKE  transmitter  is  equipped  with  a screw, 
remove  the  screw.  With  the  RKE  transmitter  buttons 
facing  down,  use  a flat  blade  screwdriver  to  pry  the 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  25 

two  halves  of  the  RKE  transmitter  apart.  Make  sure 
not  to  damage  the  elastomer  seal  during  removal. 


021432709 

Separating  Case  Halves 

2.  Remove  and  replace  the  battery.  Avoid  touching  the 
new  battery  with  your  fingers.  Skin  oils  may  cause 
battery  deterioration.  If  you  touch  a battery,  clean  it 
with  rubbing  alcohol. 


26  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

3.  To  reassemble  the  RKE  transmitter  case,  snap  the  two 
halves  together. 

NOTE:  If  the  RKE  transmitter  is  equipped  with  a screw, 

reinstall  and  tighten  the  screw  until  snug. 

General  Information 

The  following  regulatory  statement  applies  to  all  radio 

frequency  (RF)  devices  equipped  in  this  vehicle: 

This  device  complies  with  Part  15  of  the  FCC  Rules  and 

with  Industry  Canada  licence-exempt  RSS  standard(s). 

Operation  is  subject  to  the  following  two  conditions: 

1.  This  device  may  not  cause  harmful  interference,  and 

2.  This  device  must  accept  any  interference  received, 
including  interference  that  may  cause  undesired  op- 
eration. 


NOTE:  Changes  or  modifications  not  expressly  approved 
by  the  party  responsible  for  compliance  could  void  the 
user's  authority  to  operate  the  equipment. 

REMOTE  STARTING  SYSTEM  — IF  EQUIPPED 


This  system  uses  the  Remote  Keyless  Entry 

(RKE)  transmitter  to  start  the  engine  conve- 
niently from  outside  the  vehicle  while  still 
maintaining  security.  The  system  has  a range  of 
approximately  300  ft  (91  m).  Obstructions  between  the 
vehicle  and  RKE  transmitter  may  reduce  this  range. 

NOTE: 


• The  vehicle  must  be  equipped  with  an  automatic 
transmission  to  be  equipped  with  Remote  Start. 

• Obstructions  between  the  vehicle  and  the  Key  Fob  may 
reduce  this  range. 


How  To  Use  Remote  Start 


All  of  the  following  conditions  must  be  met  before  the 
engine  will  remote  start: 

• Shift  lever  in  PARK 

• Doors  closed 

• Hood  closed 

• Hazard  switch  off 

• Brake  switch  inactive  (brake  pedal  not  pushed) 

• Ignition  key  removed  from  ignition  switch 

• Battery  at  an  acceptable  charge  level 

• RKE  PANIC  button  not  pushed 

• System  not  disabled  from  previous  remote  start  event 

• Vehicle  Security  Alarm  not  active 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  27 


WARNING! 

• Do  not  start  or  run  an  engine  in  a closed  garage  or 
confined  area.  Exhaust  gas  contains  Carbon  Mon- 
oxide (CO)  which  is  odorless  and  colorless.  Carbon 
Monoxide  is  poisonous  and  can  cause  serious  in- 
jury or  death  when  inhaled. 

• Keep  Remote  Keyless  Entry  (RKE)  transmitters 
away  from  children.  Operation  of  the  Remote  Start 
System,  windows,  door  locks  or  other  controls 
could  cause  serious  injury  or  death. 

Remote  Start  Abort  Message  On  Electronic 
Vehicle  Information  Center  (EVIC)  — If  Equipped 

The  following  messages  will  display  in  the  EVIC  if  the 
vehicle  fails  to  remote  start  or  exits  remote  start  prema- 
turely: 

• Remote  Start  Aborted  — Door  Ajar 


28  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

• Remote  Start  Aborted  — Hood  Ajar 

• Remote  Start  Aborted  — L/Gate  Ajar 

• Remote  Start  Aborted  — Fuel  Low 

• Remote  Start  Aborted  — System  Fault 

The  E VIC  message  stays  active  until  the  ignition  is  turned 
to  the  ON  /RUN  position. 

To  Enter  Remote  Start 


Push  and  release  the  REMOTE  START  button 
on  the  RKE  transmitter  twice  within  five  sec- 
onds. The  vehicle  doors  will  lock,  the  parking 
lights  will  flash,  and  the  horn  will  chirp  twice 
(if  programmed).  Then,  the  engine  will  start  and  the 
vehicle  will  remain  in  the  Remote  Start  mode  for  a 
15-minute  cycle. 


NOTE: 


• The  park  lamps  will  turn  on  and  remain  on  during 
Remote  Start  mode. 

• For  security,  power  window  and  power  sunroof  op- 
eration (if  equipped)  are  disabled  when  the  vehicle  is 
in  the  Remote  Start  mode. 

• If  your  power  door  locks  were  unlocked,  Remote  Start 
will  automatically  lock  the  doors. 

• The  engine  can  be  started  two  consecutive  times  (two 
15-minute  cycles)  with  the  RKE  transmitter.  However, 
the  ignition  switch  must  be  cycled  to  the  ON /RUN 
position  before  you  can  repeat  the  start  sequence  for  a 
third  cycle. 

Remote  Start  will  also  cancel  if  any  of  the  following 

occur: 

• The  engine  stalls  or  RPM  exceeds  2500. 


• Any  engine  warning  lamps  come  on. 


■ THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  29 

To  Exit  Remote  Start  Mode  And  Drive  The  Vehicle 


• Low  Fuel  Light  turns  on. 

• The  hood  is  opened. 

• The  hazard  switch  is  pushed. 

• The  transmission  is  moved  out  of  PARK. 

• The  brake  pedal  is  pushed. 

To  Exit  Remote  Start  Mode  Without  Driving  The 
Vehicle 

Push  and  release  the  REMOTE  START  button  one  time  or 
allow  the  engine  to  run  for  the  entire  15-minute  cycle. 

NOTE:  To  avoid  unintentional  shut  downs,  the  system 
will  disable  the  one  time  push  of  the  REMOTE  START 
button  for  two  seconds  after  receiving  a valid  Remote 
Start  request. 


Before  the  end  of  the  15-minute  cycle,  push  and  release 
the  UNLOCK  button  on  the  RKE  transmitter  to  unlock 
the  doors  and  disarm  the  Vehicle  Security  Alarm  (if 
equipped).  Then,  insert  the  key  into  the  ignition  switch 
and  turn  the  switch  to  the  ON/RUN  position. 


2 


NOTE:  The  ignition  switch  must  be  in  the  ON  /RUN 
position  in  order  to  drive  the  vehicle. 

General  Information 


The  following  regulatory  statement  applies  to  all  radio 
frequency  (RF)  devices  equipped  in  this  vehicle: 

This  device  complies  with  Part  15  of  the  FCC  Rules  and 
with  Industry  Canada  licence-exempt  RSS  standard(s). 
Operation  is  subject  to  the  following  two  conditions: 

1.  This  device  may  not  cause  harmful  interference,  and 


Information  Provided  by: 


30  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


2.  This  device  must  accept  any  interference  received, 
including  interference  that  may  cause  undesired  op- 
eration. 

NOTE:  Changes  or  modifications  not  expressly  approved 
by  the  party  responsible  for  compliance  could  void  the 
user's  authority  to  operate  the  equipment. 

DOOR  LOCKS 
Manual  Door  Locks 

Use  the  manual  door  lock  knob  to  lock  the  doors  from 
inside  the  vehicle.  If  the  lock  knob  is  down  when  the  door 
is  closed,  the  door  will  lock.  Make  sure  the  keys  are  not 
inside  the  vehicle  before  closing  the  door. 


/M 


Manual  Door  Lock  Knob 


WARNING! 

For  personal  security  and  safety  in  the  event  of  an 
collision,  lock  the  vehicle  doors  as  you  drive  as 
well  as  when  you  park  and  leave  the  vehicle. 


(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Never  leave  children  alone  in  a vehicle,  or  with 
access  to  an  unlocked  vehicle.  Allowing  children  to 
be  in  a vehicle  unattended  is  dangerous  for  a 
number  of  reasons.  A child  or  others  could  be 
seriously  or  fatally  injured.  Children  should  be 
warned  not  to  touch  the  parking  brake,  brake  pedal 
or  the  gear  selector. 

• Do  not  leave  the  Key  Fob  in  or  near  the  vehicle,  or 
in  a location  accessible  to  children,  a child  could 
operate  power  windows,  other  controls,  or  move 
the  vehicle. 


CAUTION! 

An  unlocked  vehicle  is  an  invitation  to  thieves. 
Always  remove  the  key  from  the  ignition  and  lock  all 
of  the  doors  when  leaving  the  vehicle  unattended. 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  31 


Power  Door  Locks 

A power  door  lock  switch  is  located  on  the  driver's  and 
front  passenger's  door  panel.  Push  this  switch  to  lock  or 
unlock  the  doors  and  liftgate. 


2 


NOTE:  To  prevent  from  locking  the  key  in  the  vehicle, 
the  power  door  lock  switch  will  not  operate  when  the  key 
is  in  the  ignition  and  either  front  door  is  open.  A chime 
will  sound  as  a reminder  to  remove  the  key. 


ion  Provided  by: 

= /M_  = i=3 


32  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Driver  Power  Door  Lock  Switch 


1 — Unlock 

2 — Lock 


Auto  Lock  Doors  — If  Equipped 

The  auto  door  lock  feature  default  condition  is  enabled. 

When  enabled,  the  door  locks  will  lock  automatically 

when  the  vehicle's  speed  exceeds  15  mph  (24  km/h). 

Auto  Lock  Doors  Programming 

The  Automatic  Door  Locks  feature  can  be  enabled  or 

disabled  as  follows: 

• For  vehicles  equipped  with  the  Electronic  Vehicle 
Information  Center  (EVIC),  refer  to  "Electronic  Vehicle 
Information  Center  (EVIC)  — If  Equipped /Personal 
Settings  (Customer  Programmable  Features)"  in  "Un- 
derstanding Your  Instrument  Panel"  for  further  infor- 
mation. 


• For  vehicles  not  equipped  with  the  EVIC,  perform  the 
following  procedure: 


1. 


Information  Provided  by: 


Close  all  doors  and  place  the  key  in  the  ignition 
switch. 


2.  Within  15  seconds,  cycle  the  ignition  switch  be- 
tween LOCK  and  ON/ RUN  and  then  back  to 
LOCK  four  times,  ending  up  in  the  LOCK  position 
(do  not  start  the  engine). 

3.  Within  30  seconds,  push  the  power  door  LOCK 
switch  to  lock  the  doors. 

4.  A single  chime  will  indicate  the  completion  of  the 
programming. 

5.  Repeat  these  steps  if  you  want  to  return  this  feature 
to  its  previous  setting. 

NOTE: 

• If  you  do  not  hear  the  chime,  it  means  that  the  system 
did  not  enter  the  programming  mode  and  you  will 
need  to  repeat  the  procedure. 

• Use  the  Automatic  Door  Lock  feature  in  accordance 
with  local  laws. 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  33 
Automatic  Unlock  Doors  On  Exit 

The  doors  will  unlock  automatically  if: 

• The  Automatic  Unlock  Doors  On  Exit  feature  is  en- 
abled. 

• The  transmission  was  in  gear,  and  the  vehicle  speed 
returned  to  0 mph  (0  km/h). 

• The  transmission  is  in  NEUTRAL  or  PARK. 

• The  driver's  door  is  opened. 

• The  doors  were  not  previously  unlocked. 

Automatic  Unlock  Doors  On  Exit  Programming 

The  Automatic  Unlock  Doors  On  Exit  feature  can  be 
enabled  or  disabled  as  follows: 

• For  vehicles  equipped  with  the  EVIC,  refer  to  "Electronic 
Vehicle  Information  Center  (EVIC)  — If  Equipped/ 


34  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Personal  Settings  (Customer-Programmable  Features)"  in 
"Understanding  Your  Instrument  Panel"  for  further  infor- 
mation. 

• For  vehicles  not  equipped  with  the  EVIC,  perform  the 
following  procedure: 

1.  Close  all  doors  and  place  the  key  in  the  ignition. 

2.  Within  15  seconds,  cycle  the  ignition  switch  be- 
tween LOCK  and  ON/ RUN  and  then  back  to 
LOCK  five  times,  ending  up  in  the  ON /RUN 
position  (do  not  start  the  engine). 

3.  Within  30  seconds,  push  the  power  door  UNLOCK 
switch  to  unlock  the  doors. 

4.  A single  chime  will  indicate  the  completion  of  the 
programming. 

5.  Repeat  these  steps  if  you  want  to  return  this  feature 
to  its  previous  setting. 


NOTE: 

• If  you  do  not  hear  the  chime,  it  means  that  the  system 
did  not  enter  the  programming  mode  and  you  will 
need  to  repeat  the  procedure. 

• Use  the  Automatic  Unlock  Doors  On  Exit  feature  in 
accordance  with  local  laws. 

Child-Protection  Door  Lock  System  — Rear 
Doors 

To  provide  a safer  environment  for  small  children  riding 

in  the  rear  seats,  the  rear  doors  are  equipped  with 

Child-Protection  Door  Lock  system. 

To  Engage  Or  Disengage  The  Child-Protection 

Door  Lock  System 

1.  Open  the  rear  door. 

2.  Insert  the  tip  of  the  ignition  key  into  the  lock  and 
rotate  to  the  LOCK  or  UNLOCK  position. 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  35 


Child-Protection  Door  Lock  Location 


WARNING! 

Avoid  trapping  anyone  in  a vehicle  in  a collision. 
Remember  that  the  rear  doors  can  only  be  opened 
from  the  outside  when  the  Child-Protection  locks  are 
engaged. 


36  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


NOTE:  For  emergency  exit  with  the  system  engaged, 
move  the  lock  knob  up  (unlocked  position),  roll  down  the 
window,  and  open  the  door  with  the  outside  door 
handle. 

POWER  WINDOWS  — IF  EQUIPPED 
Power  Window  Switches 

The  window  controls  on  the  driver's  door  trim  panel 
control  all  the  door  windows.  There  are  single  window 
controls  on  each  passenger  door  trim  panel,  which  oper- 
ate the  passenger  door  windows.  The  window  controls 
will  operate  when  the  ignition  switch  is  in  the  ON /RUN 
or  ACC  position. 


NOTE: 

• For  vehicles  not  equipped  with  the  Electronic  Vehicle 
Information  Center  (EVIC),  the  power  window 
switches  will  remain  active  for  45  seconds  after  the 
ignition  switch  is  turned  to  the  LOCK  position.  Open- 
ing either  front  door  will  cancel  this  feature. 

• For  vehicles  equipped  with  the  EVIC,  the  power 
window  switches  will  remain  active  for  up  to  10 
minutes  after  the  ignition  switch  is  turned  to  the 
LOCK  position.  Opening  either  front  door  will  cancel 
this  feature.  The  time  for  this  feature  is  programmable. 
Refer  to  "Electronic  Vehicle  Information  Center 
(EVIC)/Personal  Settings  (Customer-Programmable 
Features)"  in  "Understanding  Your  Instrument  Panel" 
for  further  information. 


Information  Provided  by: 


WARNING! 


Never  leave  children  unattended  in  a vehicle,  and  do 
not  let  children  play  with  power  windows.  Do  not 
leave  the  Key  Fob  in  or  near  the  vehicle,  or  in  a 
location  accessible  to  children.  Occupants,  particu- 
larly unattended  children,  can  become  entrapped  by 
the  windows  while  operating  the  power  window 
switches.  Such  entrapment  may  result  in  serious 
injury  or  death. 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  37 


Power  Window  Switch  Location 

Auto-Down 

The  driver's  door  window  switch  has  an  Auto-Down 
feature.  Push  the  window  switch  past  the  first  detent, 
release,  and  the  window  will  go  down  automatically.  To 
cancel  the  Auto-Down  movement,  operate  the  switch  in 
either  the  up  or  down  direction  and  release  the  switch. 


38  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

Window  Lockout  Switch 

The  window  lockout  switch  on  the  driver's  door  allows 
you  to  disable  the  window  controls  on  the  rear  passenger 
doors.  To  disable  the  window  controls  on  the  rear  pas- 
senger doors,  push  the  window  LOCKOUT  switch.  To 
enable  the  rear  window  controls,  push  the  window 
LOCKOUT  switch  a second  time. 


Window  Lockout  Switch 


Information  Provided  by: 


LIFTGATE 


NOTE:  The  key  that  is  used  to  start  the  vehicle  is  also 
used  to  lock  or  unlock  the  doors  and  open  the  liftgate. 

To  unlock  the  liftgate,  insert  the  key  into  the  lock  and 
turn  it  to  the  right  (manual  lock  models  only).  The  liftgate 
can  also  be  unlocked  using  the  Remote  Keyless  Entry 
(RKE)  transmitter  or  by  activating  the  power  door  lock 
switches  located  on  the  front  doors.  The  central  locking/ 
unlocking  feature  (if  equipped)  can  also  be  activated 
from  the  liftgate  key  cylinder. 

Once  unlocked,  the  liftgate  can  be  opened  or  closed 
without  using  the  key.  To  open  the  liftgate,  squeeze  the 
liftgate  release  and  pull  the  liftgate  open  with  one  fluid 
motion. 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  39 


022206146 


NOTE: 


Liftgate  Handle  Location 


• In  the  event  of  a power  malfunction,  or  the  RKE 
transmitter  is  inoperative,  insert  the  key  into  the 
liftgate  lock  cylinder  and  turn  to  the  right  (manual  lock 
models  only).  Using  the  liftgate  handle,  pull  the  lift- 
gate open  with  one  fluid  motion. 


40  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


• Although  the  liftgate  has  no  inside  release  mechanism, 
the  liftgate  trim  panel  includes  an  opening  with  a 
snap-in  cap  that  provides  access  to  release  the  latch  in 
the  event  of  an  electrical  system  malfunction. 


WARNING! 

• Driving  with  the  liftgate  open  can  allow  poisonous 
exhaust  gases  into  your  vehicle.  You  and  your 
passengers  could  be  injured  by  these  fumes.  Keep 
the  liftgate  closed  when  you  are  operating  the 
vehicle. 

• If  you  are  required  to  drive  with  the  liftgate  open, 
make  sure  that  all  windows  are  closed,  and  the 
climate  control  blower  switch  is  set  at  high  speed. 
Do  not  use  the  recirculation  mode. 


Gas  props  support  the  liftgate  in  the  open  position. 
However,  because  the  gas  pressure  drops  with  tempera- 
ture, it  may  be  necessary  to  assist  the  props  when 
opening  the  liftgate  in  cold  weather. 

OCCUPANT  RESTRAINT  SYSTEMS 

Some  of  the  most  important  safety  features  in  your 
vehicle  are  the  restraint  systems: 

• Seat  Belt  Systems 

• Supplemental  Restraint  Systems  (SRS)  Air  Bags 

• Supplemental  Active  Head  Restraints 

• Child  Restraints 


C: 


| CD  = /M 


Important  Safety  Precautions 

Please  pay  close  attention  to  the  information  in  this 
section.  It  tells  you  how  to  use  your  restraint  system 
properly,  to  keep  you  and  your  passengers  as  safe  as 
possible. 

Here  are  some  simple  steps  you  can  take  to  minimize  the 
risk  of  harm  from  a deploying  air  bag: 

1.  Children  12  years  old  and  under  should  always  ride 
buckled  up  in  a vehicle  with  a rear  seat. 

2.  If  a child  from  2 to  12  years  old  (not  in  a rear-facing 
child  restraint)  must  ride  in  the  front  passenger  seat, 
move  the  seat  as  far  back  as  possible  and  use  the 
proper  child  restraint.  (Refer  to  "Child  Restraints") 

3.  Children  that  are  not  big  enough  to  wear  the  vehicle 
seat  belt  properly  (Refer  to  "Child  Restraints")  should 
be  secured  in  a vehicle  with  a rear  seat  in  child 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  41 


restraints  or  belt-positioning  booster  seats.  Older  chil- 
dren who  do  not  use  child  restraints  or  belt- 
positioning booster  seats  should  ride  properly  buckled 
up  in  a vehicle  with  a rear  seat. 


2 


4.  Never  allow  children  to  slide  the  shoulder  belt  behind 
them  or  under  their  arm. 


5.  You  should  read  the  instructions  provided  with  your 
child  restraint  to  make  sure  that  you  are  using  it 
properly. 

6.  All  occupants  should  always  wear  their  lap  and 
shoulder  belts  properly. 

7.  The  driver  and  front  passenger  seats  should  be  moved 
back  as  far  as  practical  to  allow  the  Advanced  Front 
Air  Bags  room  to  inflate. 

8.  Do  not  lean  against  the  door  or  window.  If  your 
vehicle  has  side  air  bags,  and  deployment  occurs,  the 


i Provided  by: 


42  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

side  air  bags  will  inflate  forcefully  into  the  space 
between  occupants  and  the  door  and  occupants  could 
be  injured. 

9.  If  the  air  bag  system  in  this  vehicle  needs  to  be 
modified  to  accommodate  a disabled  person,  contact 
the  Customer  Center.  Phone  numbers  are  provided 
under  "If  You  Need  Assistance." 


WARNING! 

• Never  place  a rear-facing  child  restraint  in  front  of 
an  air  bag.  A deploying  passenger  Advanced  Front 
Air  Bag  can  cause  death  or  serious  injury  to  a child 
12  years  or  younger,  including  a child  in  a rear- 
facing child  restraint. 

• Only  use  a rear-facing  child  restraint  in  a vehicle 
with  a rear  seat. 


Seat  Belt  Systems 

Buckle  up  even  though  you  are  an  excellent  driver,  even 
on  short  trips.  Someone  on  the  road  may  be  a poor  driver 
and  could  cause  a collision  that  includes  you.  This  can 
happen  far  away  from  home  or  on  your  own  street. 

Research  has  shown  that  seat  belts  save  lives,  and  they 
can  reduce  the  seriousness  of  injuries  in  a collision.  Some 
of  the  worst  injuries  happen  when  people  are  thrown 
from  the  vehicle.  Seat  belts  reduce  the  possibility  of 
ejection  and  the  risk  of  injury  caused  by  striking  the 
inside  of  the  vehicle.  Everyone  in  a motor  vehicle  should 
be  belted  at  all  times. 


/XL 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  43 


Driver  And  Passenger  BeltAlert  (If  Equipped) 

& BeltAlert  is  a feature  intended  to  remind  the  driver 
and  outboard  front  seat  passenger  (if  equipped  with 
outboard  front  passenger  seat  BeltAlert)  to  buckle 
their  seat  belts.  The  Belt  Alert  feature  is  active  when- 
ever the  ignition  switch  is  in  the  START  or  ON /RUN 
position. 

Initial  Indication 

If  the  driver  is  unbuckled  when  the  ignition  switch  is  first 
turned  to  the  START  or  ON/ RUN  position,  an  intermittent 
chime  will  signal  for  a few  seconds.  If  the  driver  or 
outboard  front  seat  passenger  (if  equipped  with  outboard 
front  passenger  seat  BeltAlert)  is  unbuckled  when  the 
ignition  switch  is  first  turned  to  the  START  or  ON/ RUN 
position  the  Seat  Belt  Reminder  Light  will  turn  on  and 
remain  on  until  both  outboard  front  seat  belts  are  buckled. 
The  outboard  front  passenger  seat  BeltAlert  is  not  active 
when  an  outboard  front  passenger  seat  is  unoccupied. 


BeltAlert  Warning  Sequence 

The  BeltAlert  warning  sequence  is  activated  when  the 
vehicle  is  moving  above  a specified  vehicle  speed  range 
and  the  driver  or  outboard  front  seat  passenger  is  un- 
buckled (if  equipped  with  outboard  front  passenger  seat 
BeltAlert).  The  BeltAlert  warning  sequence  starts  by 
blinking  the  Seat  Belt  Reminder  Light  and  sounding  an 
intermittent  chime.  Once  the  BeltAlert  warning  sequence 
has  completed,  the  Seat  Belt  Reminder  Light  will  remain 
on  until  the  seat  belts  are  buckled.  The  BeltAlert  warning 
sequence  may  repeat  based  on  vehicle  speed  until  the 
driver  and  occupied  outboard  front  seat  passenger  seat 
belts  are  buckled.  The  driver  should  instruct  all  occu- 
pants to  buckle  their  seat  belts. 


Q' 


E/M 


2 


44  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Change  Of  Status 

If  the  driver  or  outboard  front  seat  passenger  (if 
equipped  with  outboard  front  passenger  seat  BeltAlert) 
unbuckles  their  seat  belt  while  the  vehicle  is  traveling, 
the  BeltAlert  warning  sequence  will  begin  until  the  seat 
belts  are  buckled  again. 

The  outboard  front  passenger  seat  BeltAlert  is  not  active 
when  the  outboard  front  passenger  seat  is  unoccupied. 
BeltAlert  may  be  triggered  when  an  animal  or  heavy 
object  is  on  the  outboard  front  passenger  seat  or  when  the 
seat  is  folded  flat  (if  equipped).  It  is  recommended  that 
pets  be  restrained  in  the  rear  seat  (if  equipped)  in  pet 
harnesses  or  pet  carriers  that  are  secured  by  seat  belts, 
and  cargo  is  properly  stowed. 

BeltAlert  can  be  activated  or  deactivated  by  your  autho- 
rized dealer.  FCA  US  LLC  does  not  recommend  deacti- 
vating BeltAlert. 


NOTE:  If  BeltAlert  has  been  deactivated  and  the  driver 
or  outboard  front  seat  passenger  (if  equipped  with  out- 
board front  passenger  seat  BeltAlert)  is  unbuckled  the 
Seat  Belt  Reminder  Light  will  turn  on  and  remain  on  until 
the  driver  and  outboard  front  seat  passenger  seat  belts 
are  buckled. 

Lap/Shoulder  Belts 

All  seating  positions  in  your  vehicle  are  equipped  with 
lap /shoulder  belts. 

The  seat  belt  webbing  retractor  will  lock  only  during  very 
sudden  stops  or  collisions.  This  feature  allows  the  shoul- 
der part  of  the  seat  belt  to  move  freely  with  you  under 
normal  conditions.  However,  in  a collision  the  seat  belt 
will  lock  and  reduce  your  risk  of  striking  the  inside  of  the 
vehicle  or  being  thrown  out  of  the  vehicle. 


Provided  by: 


WARNING! 


• Relying  on  the  air  bags  alone  could  lead  to  more 
severe  injuries  in  a collision.  The  air  bags  work 
with  your  seat  belt  to  restrain  you  properly.  In 
some  collisions,  the  air  bags  won't  deploy  at  all. 
Always  wear  your  seat  belt  even  though  you  have 
air  bags. 

• In  a collision,  you  and  your  passengers  can  suffer 
much  greater  injuries  if  you  are  not  properly  buck- 
led up.  You  can  strike  the  interior  of  your  vehicle  or 
other  passengers,  or  you  can  be  thrown  out  of  the 
vehicle.  Always  be  sure  you  and  others  in  your 
vehicle  are  buckled  up  properly. 

• It  is  dangerous  to  ride  in  a cargo  area,  inside  or 
outside  of  a vehicle.  In  a collision,  people  riding  in 
these  areas  are  more  likely  to  be  seriously  injured 
or  killed. 


(Continued) 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  45 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Do  not  allow  people  to  ride  in  any  area  of  your 
vehicle  that  is  not  equipped  with  seats  and  seat 
belts. 

• Be  sure  everyone  in  your  vehicle  is  in  a seat  and 
using  a seat  belt  properly. 

• Wearing  your  seat  belt  incorrectly  could  make  your 
injuries  in  a collision  much  worse.  You  might 
suffer  internal  injuries,  or  you  could  even  slide  out 
of  the  seat  belt.  Follow  these  instructions  to  wear 
your  seat  belt  safely  and  to  keep  your  passengers 
safe,  too. 

• Two  people  should  never  be  belted  into  a single 
seat  belt.  People  belted  together  can  crash  into  one 
another  in  a collision,  hurting  one  another  badly. 
Never  use  a lap/shoulder  belt  or  a lap  belt  for  more 
than  one  person,  no  matter  what  their  size. 


(Continued) 


46  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• A lap  belt  worn  too  high  can  increase  the  risk  of 
injury  in  a collision.  The  seat  belt  forces  won't  be  at 
the  strong  hip  and  pelvic  bones,  but  across  your 
abdomen.  Always  wear  the  lap  part  of  your  seat 
belt  as  low  as  possible  and  keep  it  snug. 

• A twisted  seat  belt  may  not  protect  you  properly.  In 
a collision,  it  could  even  cut  into  you.  Be  sure  the 
seat  belt  is  flat  against  your  body,  without  twists.  If 
you  can't  straighten  a seat  belt  in  your  vehicle,  take 
it  to  your  authorized  dealer  immediately  and  have 
it  fixed. 

• A seat  belt  that  is  buckled  into  the  wrong  buckle 
will  not  protect  you  properly.  The  lap  portion  could 
ride  too  high  on  your  body,  possibly  causing  inter- 
nal injuries.  Always  buckle  your  seat  belt  into  the 
buckle  nearest  you. 


(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• A seat  belt  that  is  too  loose  will  not  protect  you 
properly.  In  a sudden  stop,  you  could  move  too  far 
forward,  increasing  the  possibility  of  injury.  Wear 
your  seat  belt  snugly. 

• A seat  belt  that  is  worn  under  your  arm  is  dangerous. 
Your  body  could  strike  the  inside  surfaces  of  the 
vehicle  in  a collision,  increasing  head  and  neck 
injury.  A seat  belt  worn  under  the  arm  can  cause 
internal  injuries.  Ribs  aren't  as  strong  as  shoulder 
bones.  Wear  the  seat  belt  over  your  shoulder  so  that 
your  strongest  bones  will  take  the  force  in  a collision. 

• A shoulder  belt  placed  behind  you  will  not  protect 
you  from  injury  during  a collision.  You  are  more 
likely  to  hit  your  head  in  a collision  if  you  do  not 
wear  your  shoulder  belt.  The  lap  and  shoulder  belt 
are  meant  to  be  used  together. 


(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• A frayed  or  torn  seat  belt  could  rip  apart  in  a 
collision  and  leave  you  with  no  protection.  Inspect 
the  seat  belt  system  periodically,  checking  for  cuts, 
frays,  or  loose  parts.  Damaged  parts  must  be  re- 
placed immediately.  Do  not  disassemble  or  modify 
the  seat  belt  system.  Seat  belt  assemblies  must  be 
replaced  after  a collision. 

Lap/Shoulder  Belt  Operating  Instructions 

1.  Enter  the  vehicle  and  close  the  door.  Sit  back  and 
adjust  the  seat. 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  47 

2.  The  seat  belt  latch  plate  is  above  the  back  of  the  front 
seat,  and  next  to  your  arm  in  the  rear  seat  (for  vehicles 
equipped  with  a rear  seat).  Grasp  the  latch  plate  and 
pull  out  the  seat  belt.  Slide  the  latch  plate  up  the 
webbing  as  far  as  necessary  to  allow  the  seat  belt  to  go 
around  your  lap. 


Pulling  Out  The  Latch  Plate 


48  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

3.  When  the  seat  belt  is  long  enough  to  fit,  insert  the  latch 
plate  into  the  buckle  until  you  hear  a "click." 


Inserting  Latch  Plate  Into  Buckle 


4.  Position  the  lap  belt  so  that  it  is  snug  and  lies  low 
across  your  hips,  below  your  abdomen.  To  remove 
slack  in  the  lap  belt  portion,  pull  up  on  the  shoulder 
belt.  To  loosen  the  lap  belt  if  it  is  too  tight,  tilt  the  latch 
plate  and  pull  on  the  lap  belt.  A snug  seat  belt  reduces 
the  risk  of  sliding  under  the  seat  belt  in  a collision. 


/\i 


Positioning  The  Lap  Belt 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  49 


5.  Position  the  shoulder  belt  across  the  shoulder  and 
chest  with  minimal,  if  any  slack  so  that  it  is  comfort- 
able and  not  resting  on  your  neck.  The  retractor  will 
withdraw  any  slack  in  the  shoulder  belt. 

6.  To  release  the  seat  belt,  push  the  red  button  on  the 
buckle.  The  seat  belt  will  automatically  retract  to  its 
stowed  position.  If  necessary,  slide  the  latch  plate 
down  the  webbing  to  allow  the  seat  belt  to  retract 
fully. 


Lap/Shoulder  Belt  Untwisting  Procedure 


Use  the  following  procedure  to  untwist  a twisted  lap/ 
shoulder  belt. 


2 


1.  Position  the  latch  plate  as  close  as  possible  to  the 
anchor  point. 

2.  At  about  6 to  12  in  (15  to  30  cm)  above  the  latch  plate, 
grasp  and  twist  the  seat  belt  webbing  180  degrees  to 
create  a fold  that  begins  immediately  above  the  latch 
plate. 


3.  Slide  the  latch  plate  upward  over  the  folded  webbing. 
The  folded  webbing  must  enter  the  slot  at  the  top  of 
the  latch  plate. 

4.  Continue  to  slide  the  latch  plate  up  until  it  clears  the 
folded  webbing  and  the  seat  belt  is  no  longer  twisted. 


Information  Provided  by: 


50  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Adjustable  Upper  Shoulder  Belt  Anchorage 


In  the  driver  and  front  passenger  seats,  the  top  of  the 
shoulder  belt  can  be  adjusted  upward  or  downward  to 
position  the  seat  belt  away  from  your  neck.  Push  or 
squeeze  the  anchorage  button  to  release  the  anchorage,  and 
move  it  up  or  down  to  the  position  that  serves  you  best. 


Adjustable  Anchorage 


As  a guide,  if  you  are  shorter  than  average,  you  will 
prefer  the  shoulder  belt  anchorage  in  a lower  position, 
and  if  you  are  taller  than  average,  you  will  prefer  the 
shoulder  belt  anchorage  in  a higher  position.  After  you 
release  the  anchorage  button,  try  to  move  it  up  or  down 
to  make  sure  that  it  is  locked  in  position. 

NOTE:  The  adjustable  upper  shoulder  belt  anchorage  is 
equipped  with  an  Easy  Up  feature.  This  feature  allows 
the  shoulder  belt  anchorage  to  be  adjusted  in  the  upward 
position  without  pushing  or  squeezing  the  release  but- 
ton. To  verify  the  shoulder  belt  anchorage  is  latched,  pull 
downward  on  the  shoulder  belt  anchorage  until  it  is 
locked  into  position. 


/M_  = F 


Second  Row  Center  Seat  Belt  Operating 
Instructions 

The  second  row  center  seat  belt  features  a seat  belt  with 
a mini-latch  plate  and  buckle,  which  allows  the  seat  belt 
to  detach  from  the  lower  anchor  when  the  seat  is  folded. 
The  mini-latch  plate  and  regular  latch  plate  can  then  be 
stored  out  of  the  way  in  the  right  side  trim  panel  for 
added  convenience  to  open  up  utilization  of  the  storage 
areas  behind  the  front  seats  when  the  seat  is  not  occu- 
pied. 

1.  Remove  the  mini-latch  plate  and  regular  latch  plate 
from  its  stowed  position  in  the  right  rear  side  trim 
panel. 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  51 


Mini-Latch  Stowage 

2.  Grasp  the  mini-latch  plate  and  pull  the  seat  belt  over 
the  seat. 

3.  Route  the  shoulder  belt  to  the  inside  of  the  right  head 
restraint. 


CD  = /M_E=F=? 


52  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


4.  When  the  seat  belt  is  long  enough  to  fit,  insert  the 
mini-latch  plate  into  the  mini-buckle  until  you  hear  a 
"click." 

5.  Sit  back  in  seat.  Slide  the  regular  latch  plate  up  the 
webbing  as  far  as  necessary  to  allow  the  seat  belt  to  go 
around  your  lap. 

6.  When  the  seat  belt  is  long  enough  to  fit,  insert  the  latch 
plate  into  the  buckle  until  you  hear  a "click." 

7.  Position  the  lap  belt  so  that  it  is  snug  and  lies  low 
across  your  hips,  below  your  abdomen.  To  remove 
slack  in  the  lap  belt  portion,  pull  up  on  the  shoulder 
belt.  To  loosen  the  lap  belt  if  it  is  too  tight,  pull  on  the 
lap  belt.  A snug  seat  belt  reduces  the  risk  of  sliding 
under  the  seat  belt  in  a collision. 

8.  Position  the  shoulder  belt  on  your  chest  so  that  it  is 
comfortable  and  not  resting  on  your  neck.  The  retrac- 
tor will  withdraw  any  slack  in  the  seat  belt. 


Rear  Center  Seat  Belt  Buckled 

9.  To  release  the  seat  belt,  push  the  red  button  on  the 
buckle. 


10.  To  disengage  the  mini-latch  plate  from  the  mini- 
buckle for  storage,  insert  the  regular  latch  plate  into 
the  black  button  on  the  top  of  the  mini-buckle.  The 
seat  belt  will  automatically  retract  to  its  stowed 


position.  If  necessary,  slide  the  latch  plate  down  the 
webbing  to  allow  the  seat  belt  to  retract  fully.  Insert 
the  mini-latch  plate  and  regular  latch  plate  into  its 
stowed  position. 


Detaching  Mini-Latch  And  Buckle 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  53 


WARNING! 

• If  the  mini-latch  plate  and  mini-buckle  are  not 
properly  connected  when  the  seat  belt  is  used  by  an 
occupant,  the  seat  belt  will  not  be  able  to  provide 
proper  restraint  and  will  increase  the  risk  of  injury 
in  a collision. 

• When  reattaching  the  mini-latch  plate  and  mini- 
buckle, ensure  the  seat  belt  webbing  is  not  twisted. 
If  the  webbing  is  twisted,  follow  the  preceding 
procedure  to  detach  the  mini-latch  plate  and  mini- 
buckle, untwist  the  webbing,  and  reattach  the 
mini-latch  plate  and  mini-buckle. 

Seat  Belt  Extender 

If  a seat  belt  is  not  long  enough  to  fit  properly,  even  when 
the  webbing  is  fully  extended  and  the  adjustable  upper 
shoulder  belt  anchorage  (if  equipped)  is  in  its  lowest 
position,  your  authorized  dealer  can  provide  you  with  a 


54  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

Seat  Belt  Extender.  The  Seat  Belt  Extender  should  be  used 
only  if  the  existing  seat  belt  is  not  long  enough.  When  the 
Seat  Belt  Extender  is  not  required  for  a different  occu- 
pant, it  must  be  removed. 


WARNING! 

• ONLY  use  a Seat  Belt  Extender  if  it  is  physically 
required  in  order  to  properly  fit  the  original  seat 
belt  system.  DO  NOT  USE  the  Seat  Belt  Extender 
if,  when  worn,  the  distance  between  the  front  edge 
of  the  Seat  Belt  Extender  buckle  and  the  center  of 
the  occupant's  body  is  LESS  than  6 inches. 

• Using  a Seat  Belt  Extender  when  not  needed  can 
increase  the  risk  of  serious  injury  or  death  in  a 
collision.  Only  use  the  Seat  Belt  Extender  when  the 
lap  belt  is  not  long  enough  and  only  use  in  the 
recommended  seating  positions.  Remove  and  store 
the  Seat  Belt  Extender  when  not  needed. 


Seat  Belts  And  Pregnant  Women 


0226075266 

Pregnant  Women  And  Seat  Belts 

Seat  belts  must  be  worn  by  all  occupants  including 
pregnant  women:  the  risk  of  injury  in  the  event  of  an 
accident  is  reduced  for  the  mother  and  the  unborn  child 
if  they  are  wearing  a seat  belt. 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  55 


Position  the  lap  belt  snug  and  low  below  the  abdomen 
and  across  the  strong  bones  of  the  hips.  Place  the 
shoulder  belt  across  the  chest  and  away  from  the  neck. 
Never  place  the  shoulder  belt  behind  the  back  or  under 
the  arm  . 

Seat  Belt  Pretensioner 

The  front  seat  belt  system  is  equipped  with  pretensioning 
devices  that  are  designed  to  remove  slack  from  the  seat 
belt  in  the  event  of  a collision.  These  devices  may 
improve  the  performance  of  the  seat  belt  by  removing 
slack  from  the  seat  belt  early  in  a collision.  Pretensioners 
work  for  all  size  occupants,  including  those  in  child 
restraints. 

NOTE:  These  devices  are  not  a substitute  for  proper  seat 
belt  placement  by  the  occupant.  The  seat  belt  still  must  be 
worn  snugly  and  positioned  properly. 


The  pretensioners  are  triggered  by  the  Occupant  Re- 
straint Controller  (ORC).  Like  the  air  bags,  the  preten- 
sioners are  single  use  items.  A deployed  pretensioner  or 
a deployed  air  bag  must  be  replaced  immediately. 


2 


Energy  Management  Feature 

This  vehicle  has  a seat  belt  system  with  an  Energy 
Management  feature  in  the  front  seating  positions  that 
may  help  further  reduce  the  risk  of  injury  in  the  event  of 
a collision.  This  seat  belt  system  has  a retractor  assembly 
that  is  designed  to  release  webbing  in  a controlled 
manner. 


Switchable  Automatic  Locking  Retractor  (ALR) 

The  seat  belts  in  the  passenger  seating  positions  are 
equipped  with  a Switchable  Automatic  Locking  Retractor 
(ALR)  which  is  used  to  secure  a child  restraint  system. 


Information  Provided  by: 


56  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


For  additional  information,  refer  to  "Installing  Child 
Restraints  Using  The  Vehicle  Seat  Belt"  under  the  "Child 
Restraints"  section  of  this  manual.  The  table  below 
defines  the  type  of  feature  for  each  seating  position. 


• ALR  = Switchable  Automatic  Locking  Retractor 


If  the  passenger  seating  position  is  equipped  with  an 
ALR  and  is  being  used  for  normal  usage,  only  pull  the 
seat  belt  webbing  out  far  enough  to  comfortably  wrap 
around  the  occupant's  mid-section  so  as  to  not  activate 
the  ALR.  If  the  ALR  is  activated,  you  will  hear  a clicking 
sound  as  the  seat  belt  retracts.  Allow  the  webbing  to 
retract  completely  in  this  case  and  then  carefully  pull  out 
only  the  amount  of  webbing  necessary  to  comfortably 
wrap  around  the  occupant's  mid-section.  Slide  the  latch 
plate  into  the  buckle  until  you  hear  a "click." 

In  Automatic  Locking  Mode,  the  shoulder  belt  is  auto- 
matically pre-locked.  The  seat  belt  will  still  retract  to 
remove  any  slack  in  the  shoulder  belt.  Use  the  Automatic 
Locking  Mode  anytime  a child  restraint  is  installed  in  a 
seating  position  that  has  a seat  belt  with  this  feature. 
Children  12  years  old  and  under  should  always  be 
properly  restrained  in  a vehicle  with  a rear  seat. 


WARNING! 


• Never  place  a rear-facing  child  restraint  in  front  of 
an  air  bag.  A deploying  Passenger  Advanced  Front 
Air  Bag  can  cause  death  or  serious  injury  to  a child 
12  years  or  younger,  including  a child  in  a rear- 
facing child  restraint. 

• Only  use  a rear-facing  child  restraint  in  a vehicle 
with  a rear  seat. 


How  To  Engage  The  Automatic  Locking  Mode 

1.  Buckle  the  combination  lap  and  shoulder  belt. 

2.  Grasp  the  shoulder  portion  and  pull  downward  until 
the  entire  seat  belt  is  extracted. 

3.  Allow  the  seat  belt  to  retract.  As  the  seat  belt  retracts, 
you  will  hear  a clicking  sound.  This  indicates  the  seat 
belt  is  now  in  the  Automatic  Locking  Mode. 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  57 
How  To  Disengage  The  Automatic  Locking  Mode 

Unbuckle  the  combination  lap /shoulder  belt  and  allow  it 
to  retract  completely  to  disengage  the  Automatic  Locking 
Mode  and  activate  the  vehicle  sensitive  (emergency) 
locking  mode. 


WARNING! 

• The  seat  belt  assembly  must  be  replaced  if  the 
switchable  Automatic  Locking  Retractor  (ALR)  fea- 
ture or  any  other  seat  belt  function  is  not  working 
properly  when  checked  according  to  the  proce- 
dures in  the  Service  Manual. 

• Failure  to  replace  the  seat  belt  assembly  could 
increase  the  risk  of  injury  in  collisions. 


(Continued) 


58  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Do  not  use  the  Automatic  Locking  Mode  to  restrain 
occupants  who  are  wearing  the  seat  belt  or  children 
who  are  using  booster  seats.  The  locked  mode  is 
only  used  to  install  rear-facing  or  forward-facing 
child  restraints  that  have  a harness  for  restraining 
the  child. 


Supplemental  Active  Head  Restraints  (AHR) 

These  head  restraints  are  passive,  deployable  compo- 
nents, and  vehicles  with  this  equipment  cannot  be  readily 
identified  by  any  markings,  only  through  visual  inspec- 
tion of  the  head  restraint.  The  head  restraint  will  be  split 
in  two  halves,  with  the  front  half  being  soft  foam  and 
trim,  the  back  half  being  decorative  plastic. 


How  The  Active  Head  Restraints  (AHR)  Work 


The  Occupant  Restraint  Controller  (ORC)  determines 
whether  the  severity,  or  type  of  rear  impact  will  require 
the  Active  Head  Restraints  (AHR)  to  deploy.  If  a rear 
impact  requires  deployment,  both  the  driver  and  front 
passenger  seat  AHRs  will  be  deployed. 

When  AHRs  deploy  during  a rear  impact,  the  front  half 
of  the  head  restraint  extends  forward  to  minimize  the  gap 
between  the  back  of  the  occupant's  head  and  the  AHR. 
This  system  is  designed  to  help  prevent  or  reduce  the 
extent  of  injuries  to  the  driver  and  front  passenger  in 
certain  types  of  rear  impacts. 

NOTE:  The  Active  Head  Restraints  (AHR)  may  or  may 
not  deploy  in  the  event  of  a front  or  side  impact. 
However  if  during  a front  impact,  a secondary  rear 
impact  occurs,  the  AHR  may  deploy  based  on  the  sever- 
ity and  type  of  the  impact. 


/XL 


022607508 

Active  Head  Restraint  (AHR)  Components 


1 — Head  Restraint  Front  Half 
(Soft  Foam  and  Trim) 

2 — Seatback 


3 — Head  Restraint  Back  Half 
(Decorative  Plastic  Rear  Cover) 

4 — Head  Restraint  Guide 
Tubes 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  59 


WARNING! 

• All  occupants,  including  the  driver,  should  not 
operate  a vehicle  or  sit  in  a vehicle's  seat  until  the 
head  restraints  are  placed  in  their  proper  positions 
in  order  to  minimize  the  risk  of  neck  injury  in  the 
event  of  a collision. 

• Do  not  place  items  over  the  top  of  the  Active  Head 
Restraint,  such  as  coats,  seat  covers  or  portable 
DVD  players.  These  items  may  interfere  with  the 
operation  of  the  Active  Head  Restraint  in  the  event 
of  a collision  and  could  result  in  serious  injury  or 
death. 

• Active  Head  Restraints  may  be  deployed  if  they  are 
struck  by  an  object  such  as  a hand,  foot  or  loose 
cargo.  To  avoid  accidental  deployment  of  the  Ac- 
tive Head  Restraint  ensure  that  all  cargo  is  secured. 


(Continued) 


60  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

as  loose  cargo  could  contact  the  Active  Head  Re- 
straint during  sudden  stops.  Failure  to  follow  this 
warning  could  cause  personal  injury  if  the  Active 
Head  Restraint  is  deployed. 

NOTE:  For  more  information  on  properly  adjusting  and 
positioning  the  head  restraint,  refer  to  "Adjusting  Active 
Head  Restraints"  in  "Understanding  The  Features  Of 
Your  Vehicle." 

Resetting  Active  Head  Restraints  (AHR) 

If  the  Active  Head  Restraints  are  triggered  during  a 
collision,  the  front  half  of  the  head  restraint  will  be 
extended  forward  and  separated  from  the  rear  half  of  the 
head  restraint  (See  Image).  Do  not  drive  your  vehicle 
after  the  AHRs  have  deployed.  The  head  restraint  must 
be  reset  into  the  original  position  to  best  protect  the 
occupant  for  all  types  of  collisions.  An  authorized  FCA 


US  LLC  dealer  must  reset  the  AHRs  on  the  driver's  and 
front  passenger's  seat  before  driving.  Personally  attempt- 
ing to  reset  the  AHRs  may  result  in  damage  to  the  AHRs 
that  could  impair  their  function. 


022607494 


/M_  = F 


AHR  In  Reset  Position 


WARNING! 


Deployed  AHRs  are  not  able  to  best  protect  you  in  all 
types  of  collisions.  Have  deployed  AHRs  reset  by  an 
authorized  dealer  immediately. 

Supplemental  Restraint  System  (SRS) 

Air  Bag  System  Components 

Your  vehicle  may  be  equipped  with  the  following  air  bag 
system  components: 

• Occupant  Restraint  Controller  (ORC) 

• Air  Bag  Warning  Light# 

• Steering  Wheel  and  Column 

• Instrument  Panel 

• Knee  Impact  Bolsters 

• Advanced  Front  Air  Bags 

O 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  61 


• Supplemental  Side  Air  Bags 

• Front  and  Side  Impact  Sensors 


2 


• Seat  Belt  Pretensioners 

• Seat  Belt  Buckle  Switch 

• Seat  Track  Position  Sensors 

Advanced  Front  Air  Bags 

This  vehicle  has  Advanced  Front  Air  Bags  for  both  the 
driver  and  front  passenger  as  a supplement  to  the  seat 
belt  restraint  systems.  The  driver's  Advanced  Front  Air 
Bag  is  mounted  in  the  center  of  the  steering  wheel.  The 
passenger's  Advanced  Front  Air  Bag  is  mounted  in  the 
instrument  panel,  above  the  glove  compartment.  The 
words  "SRS  AIRBAG"  or  "AIRBAG"  are  embossed  on 
the  air  bag  covers. 


/M 


62  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Advanced  Front  Air  Bag  And  Knee  Impact  Bolster 
Locations 


1 — Driver  And  Passenger  Advanced  Front  Air  Bags 

2 — Passenger  Knee  Impact  Bolster 
3 — Driver  Knee  Impact  Bolster 


WARNING! 


• Being  too  close  to  the  steering  wheel  or  instrument 
panel  during  Advanced  Front  Air  Bag  deployment 
could  cause  serious  injury,  including  death.  Air 
bags  need  room  to  inflate.  Sit  back,  comfortably 
extending  your  arms  to  reach  the  steering  wheel  or 
instrument  panel. 

• Never  place  a rear-facing  child  restraint  in  front  of 
an  air  bag.  A deploying  Passenger  Advanced  Front 
Air  Bag  can  cause  death  or  serious  injury  to  a child 
12  years  or  younger,  including  a child  in  a rear- 
facing child  restraint. 

• Only  use  a rear-facing  child  restraint  in  a vehicle 
with  a rear  seat. 


Advanced  Front  Air  Bag  Features 

The  Advanced  Front  Air  Bag  system  has  multistage 
driver  and  front  passenger  air  bags.  This  system  provides 
output  appropriate  to  the  severity  and  type  of  collision  as 
determined  by  the  Occupant  Restraint  Controller  (ORC), 
which  may  receive  information  from  the  front  impact 
sensors  or  other  system  components. 

The  first  stage  inflator  is  triggered  immediately  during  an 
impact  that  requires  air  bag  deployment.  A low  energy 
output  is  used  in  less  severe  collisions.  A higher  energy 
output  is  used  for  more  severe  collisions. 

This  vehicle  may  be  equipped  with  driver  and/or  front 
passenger  seat  track  position  sensors  that  may  adjust  the 
inflation  rate  of  the  Advanced  Front  Air  Bags  based  upon 
seat  position. 

This  vehicle  may  be  equipped  with  a driver  and/or  front 
passenger  seat  belt  buckle  switch  that  detects  whether 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  63 


the  driver  or  front  passenger  seat  belt  is  buckled.  The  seat 
belt  buckle  switch  may  adjust  the  inflation  rate  of  the 
Advanced  Front  Air  Bags. 


WARNING! 

• No  objects  should  be  placed  over  or  near  the  air 
bag  on  the  instrument  panel  or  steering  wheel, 
because  any  such  objects  could  cause  harm  if  the 
vehicle  is  in  a collision  severe  enough  to  cause  the 
air  bags  to  inflate. 

• Do  not  put  anything  on  or  around  the  air  bag 
covers  or  attempt  to  open  them  manually.  You  may 
damage  the  air  bags  and  you  could  be  injured 
because  the  air  bags  may  no  longer  be  functional. 
The  protective  covers  for  the  air  bag  cushions  are 
designed  to  open  only  when  the  air  bags  are 
inflating. 


2 


(Continued) 


64  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Relying  on  the  air  bags  alone  could  lead  to  more 
severe  injuries  in  a collision.  The  air  bags  work 
with  your  seat  belt  to  restrain  you  properly.  In 
some  collisions,  air  bags  won't  deploy  at  all.  Al- 
ways wear  your  seat  belts  even  though  you  have  air 
bags. 

Advanced  Front  Air  Bag  Operation 

Advanced  Front  Air  Bags  are  designed  to  provide  addi- 
tional protection  by  supplementing  the  seat  belts.  Ad- 
vanced Front  Air  Bags  are  not  expected  to  reduce  the  risk 
of  injury  in  rear,  side,  or  rollover  collisions.  The  Ad- 
vanced Front  Air  Bags  will  not  deploy  in  all  frontal 
collisions,  including  some  that  may  produce  substantial 
vehicle  damage  — for  example,  some  pole  collisions, 
truck  underrides,  and  angle  offset  collisions. 


On  the  other  hand,  depending  on  the  type  and  location  of 
impact,  Advanced  Front  Air  Bags  may  deploy  in  crashes 
with  little  vehicle  front-end  damage  but  that  produce  a 
severe  initial  deceleration. 

Because  air  bag  sensors  measure  vehicle  deceleration 
over  time,  vehicle  speed  and  damage  by  themselves  are 
not  good  indicators  of  whether  or  not  an  air  bag  should 
have  deployed. 

Seat  belts  are  necessary  for  your  protection  in  all  colli- 
sions, and  also  are  needed  to  help  keep  you  in  position, 
away  from  an  inflating  air  bag. 

When  the  ORC  detects  a collision  requiring  the  Ad- 
vanced Front  Air  Bags,  it  signals  the  inflator  units.  A large 
quantity  of  non-toxic  gas  is  generated  to  inflate  the 
Advanced  Front  Air  Bags. 


Cl 


| CD  = /M 


The  steering  wheel  hub  trim  cover  and  the  upper  right 
side  of  the  instrument  panel  separate  and  fold  out  of  the 
way  as  the  air  bags  inflate  to  their  full  size.  The  Advanced 
Front  Air  Bags  fully  inflate  in  less  time  than  it  takes  to 
blink  your  eyes.  The  air  bags  then  quickly  deflate  while 
helping  to  restrain  the  driver  and  front  passenger. 

Knee  Impact  Bolsters 

The  Knee  Impact  Bolsters  help  protect  the  knees  of  the 
driver  and  front  passenger,  and  position  the  front  occupants 
for  improved  interaction  with  the  Advanced  Front  Air  Bags. 


WARNING! 

• Do  not  drill,  cut,  or  tamper  with  the  knee  impact 
bolsters  in  any  way. 

• Do  not  mount  any  accessories  to  the  knee  impact 
bolsters  such  as  alarm  lights,  stereos,  citizen  band 
radios,  etc. 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  65 


Supplemental  Side  Air  Bags 


Your  vehicle  is  equipped  with  two  types  of  side  air  bags: 

1.  Supplemental  Seat-Mounted  Side  Air  Bags  (SABs): 
Located  in  the  outboard  side  of  the  front  seats.  The 
SABs  are  marked  with  a "SRS  AIRBAG"  or  "AIR- 
BAG" label  sewn  into  the  outboard  side  of  the  seats. 


2 


66  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

The  SABs  may  help  to  reduce  the  risk  of  occupant  injury 
during  certain  side  impacts  and/or  vehicle  rollover 
events,  in  addition  to  the  injury  reduction  potential 
provided  by  the  seat  belts  and  body  structure. 

When  the  SAB  deploys,  it  opens  the  seam  on  the  outboard 
side  of  the  seatback's  trim  cover.  The  inflating  SAB  deploys 
through  the  seat  seam  into  the  space  between  the  occupant 
and  the  door.  The  SAB  moves  at  a very  high  speed  and 
with  such  a high  force  that  it  could  injure  occupants  if  they 
are  not  seated  properly,  or  if  items  are  positioned  in  the 
area  where  the  SAB  inflates.  Children  are  at  an  even  greater 
risk  of  injury  from  a deploying  air  bag. 


WARNING! 

Do  not  use  accessory  seat  covers  or  place  objects 
between  you  and  the  Side  Air  Bags;  the  performance 
could  be  adversely  affected  and/or  objects  could  be 
pushed  into  you,  causing  serious  injury. 


2.  Supplemental  Side  Air  Bag  Inflatable  Curtains 
(SABICs):  Located  above  the  side  windows.  The  trim 
covering  the  SABICs  is  labeled  "SRS  AIRBAG"  or 
"AIRBAG." 


Supplemental  Side  Air  Bag  Inflatable  Curtain  (SABIC) 
Label  Location 

i Provided  by: 


SABICs  may  help  reduce  the  risk  of  head  or  other  injuries 
to  front  and  rear  seat  outboard  occupants  in  certain  side 
impacts  and/ or  vehicle  rollover  events,  in  addition  to  the 
injury  reduction  potential  provided  by  the  seat  belts  and 
body  structure. 

The  SABICs  deploy  downward,  covering  the  side  win- 
dows. An  inflating  SABIC  pushes  the  outside  edge  of  the 
trim  out  of  the  way  and  covers  the  window.  The  SABICs 
inflate  with  enough  force  to  injure  occupants  if  they  are 
not  belted  and  seated  properly,  or  if  items  are  positioned 
in  the  area  where  the  SABICs  inflate.  Children  are  at  an 
even  greater  risk  of  injury  from  a deploying  air  bag. 

The  SABICs  may  help  reduce  the  risk  of  partial  or 
complete  ejection  of  vehicle  occupants  through  side 
windows  in  certain  rollover  or  side  impact  events. 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  67 


WARNING! 

• Your  vehicle  is  equipped  with  left  and  right 
Supplemental  Side  Air  Bag  Inflatable  Curtains 
(SABICs).  Do  not  stack  luggage  or  other  cargo  up 
high  enough  to  block  the  deployment  of  the 
SABICs.  The  trim  covering  above  the  side  win- 
dows where  the  SABIC  and  its  deployment  path 
are  located  should  remain  free  from  any  obstruc- 
tions. 

• Your  vehicle  is  equipped  with  SABICs.  In  order  for 
the  SABICs  to  work  as  intended,  do  not  install  any 
accessory  items  in  your  vehicle  which  could  alter 
the  roof.  Do  not  add  an  aftermarket  sunroof  to  your 
vehicle.  Do  not  add  roof  racks  that  require  perma- 
nent attachments  (bolts  or  screws)  for  installation 
on  the  vehicle  roof.  Do  not  drill  into  the  roof  of  the 
vehicle  for  any  reason. 


2 


Jed  by 


68  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

The  SABICs  and  SABs  ("Side  Air  Bags")  are  designed  to 
activate  in  certain  side  impacts  and  certain  rollover 
events.  The  Occupant  Restraint  Controller  ("ORC")  de- 
termines whether  the  deployment  of  the  Side  Air  Bags  in 
a particular  side  impact  or  rollover  event  is  appropriate, 
based  on  the  severity  and  type  of  collision.  Vehicle 
damage  by  itself  is  not  a good  indicator  of  whether  or  not 
Side  Air  Bags  should  have  deployed. 

Side  Air  Bags  are  a supplement  to  the  seat  belt  restraint 
system.  Side  Air  Bags  deploy  in  less  time  than  it  takes  to 
blink  your  eyes.  Occupants,  including  children,  who  are 
up  against  or  very  close  to  Side  Air  Bags  can  be  seriously 
injured  or  killed.  Occupants,  including  children,  should 
never  lean  on  or  sleep  against  the  door,  side  windows,  or 
area  where  the  Side  Air  Bags  inflate,  even  if  they  are  in  an 
infant  or  child  restraint. 


Seat  belts  (and  child  restraints  where  appropriate)  are 
necessary  for  your  protection  in  all  collisions.  They  also 
help  keep  you  in  position,  away  from  inflating  Side  Air 
Bags.  To  get  the  best  protection  from  the  Side  Air  Bags, 
occupants  must  wear  their  seat  belts  properly  and  sit 
upright  with  their  backs  against  the  seats.  Children  must 
be  properly  restrained  in  a child  restraint  or  booster  seat 
that  is  appropriate  for  the  size  of  the  child. 


WARNING! 

• Side  Air  Bags  need  room  to  inflate.  Do  not  lean 
against  the  door  or  window.  Sit  upright  in  the 
center  of  the  seat. 

• Being  too  close  to  the  Side  Air  Bags  during  deploy- 
ment could  cause  you  to  be  severely  injured  or 
killed. 


(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Relying  on  the  Side  Air  Bags  alone  could  lead  to 
more  severe  injuries  in  a collision.  The  Side  Air 
Bags  work  with  your  seat  belt  to  restrain  you 
properly.  In  some  collisions.  Side  Air  Bags  won't 
deploy  at  all.  Always  wear  your  seat  belt  even 
though  you  have  Side  Air  Bags. 

NOTE:  Air  bag  covers  may  not  be  obvious  in  the  interior 
trim,  but  they  will  open  during  air  bag  deployment. 

Side  Impacts 

In  side  impacts,  the  side  impact  sensors  aid  the  ORC  in 
determining  the  appropriate  response  to  impact  events. 
The  system  is  calibrated  to  deploy  the  Side  Air  Bags  on 
the  impact  side  of  the  vehicle  during  impacts  that  require 
Side  Air  Bag  occupant  protection.  In  side  impacts,  the 
Side  Air  Bags  deploy  independently;  a left  side  impact 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  69 


deploys  the  left  Side  Air  Bags  only  and  a right  side 
impact  deploys  the  right  Side  Air  Bags  only. 

The  Side  Air  Bags  will  not  deploy  in  all  side  collisions, 
including  some  collisions  at  certain  angles,  or  some  side 
collisions  that  do  not  impact  the  area  of  the  passenger 
compartment.  The  Side  Air  Bags  may  deploy  during 
angled  or  offset  frontal  collisions  where  the  Advanced 
Front  Air  Bags  deploy. 


2 


Rollover  Events 


Side  Air  Bags  are  designed  to  activate  in  certain  rollover 
events.  The  ORC  determines  whether  the  deployment  of 
the  Side  Air  Bags  in  a particular  rollover  event  is  appro- 
priate, based  on  the  severity  and  type  of  collision.  Vehicle 
damage  by  itself  is  not  a good  indicator  of  whether  or  not 
Side  Air  Bags  should  have  deployed. 


i Provided  by: 


70  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

The  Side  Air  Bags  will  not  deploy  in  all  rollover  events. 
The  rollover  sensing-system  determines  if  a rollover 
event  may  be  in  progress  and  whether  deployment  is 
appropriate.  A slower-developing  event  may  deploy  the 
seat  belt  pretensioners  on  both  sides  of  the  vehicle.  A 
faster-developing  event  may  deploy  the  seat  belt  preten- 
sioners as  well  as  the  Side  Air  Bags  on  both  sides  of  the 
vehicle.  The  rollover  sensing-system  may  also  deploy  the 
seat  belt  pretensioners,  with  or  without  the  Side  Air  Bags, 
on  both  sides  of  the  vehicle  if  the  vehicle  experiences  a 
near  rollover  event. 

If  A Deployment  Occurs 

The  Advanced  Front  Air  Bags  are  designed  to  deflate 
immediately  after  deployment. 

NOTE:  Front  and/or  side  air  bags  will  not  deploy  in  all 
collisions.  This  does  not  mean  something  is  wrong  with 
the  air  bag  system. 


If  you  do  have  a collision  which  deploys  the  air  bags,  any 
or  all  of  the  following  may  occur: 

• The  air  bag  material  may  sometimes  cause  abrasions 
and/or  skin  reddening  to  the  occupants  as  the  air  bags 
deploy  and  unfold.  The  abrasions  are  similar  to  fric- 
tion rope  bums  or  those  you  might  get  sliding  along  a 
carpet  or  gymnasium  floor.  They  are  not  caused  by 
contact  with  chemicals.  They  are  not  permanent  and 
normally  heal  quickly.  However,  if  you  haven't  healed 
significantly  within  a few  days,  or  if  you  have  any 
blistering,  see  your  doctor  immediately. 

• As  the  air  bags  deflate,  you  may  see  some  smoke-like 
particles.  The  particles  are  a normal  by-product  of  the 
process  that  generates  the  non-toxic  gas  used  for  air 
bag  inflation.  These  airborne  particles  may  irritate  the 
skin,  eyes,  nose,  or  throat.  If  you  have  skin  or  eye 
irritation,  rinse  the  area  with  cool  water.  For  nose  or 
throat  irritation,  move  to  fresh  air.  If  the  irritation 


ivlded  by 


continues,  see  your  doctor.  If  these  particles  settle  on 
your  clothing,  follow  the  garment  manufacturer's  in- 
structions for  cleaning. 

Do  not  drive  your  vehicle  after  the  air  bags  have  de- 
ployed. If  you  are  involved  in  another  collision,  the  air 
bags  will  not  be  in  place  to  protect  you. 


WARNING! 

Deployed  air  bags  and  seat  belt  pretensioners  cannot 
protect  you  in  another  collision.  Have  the  air  bags, 
seat  belt  pretensioners,  and  the  seat  belt  retractor 
assemblies  replaced  by  an  authorized  dealer  imme- 
diately. Also,  have  the  Occupant  Restraint  Controller 
System  serviced  as  well. 

NOTE: 

• Air  bag  covers  may  not  be  obvious  in  the  interior  trim, 
but  they  will  open  during  air  bag  deployment. 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  71 

• After  any  collision,  the  vehicle  should  be  taken  to  an 
authorized  dealer  immediately. 

Enhanced  Accident  Response  System 

In  the  event  of  an  impact,  if  the  communication  network 
remains  intact,  and  the  power  remains  intact,  depending 
on  the  nature  of  the  event,  the  ORC  will  determine 
whether  to  have  the  Enhanced  Accident  Response  Sys- 
tem perform  the  following  functions: 

• Cut  off  fuel  to  the  engine. 

• Flash  hazard  lights  as  long  as  the  battery  has  power  or 
until  the  hazard  light  button  is  pressed.  The  hazard 
lights  can  be  deactivated  by  pressing  the  hazard  light 
button. 

• Turn  on  the  interior  lights,  which  remain  on  as  long  as 
the  battery  has  power. 

• Unlock  the  power  door  locks. 


72  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Enhanced  Accident  Response  System  Reset 
Procedure 


the  OFF  position  or  in  the  ACC  position,  the  air  bag 
system  is  not  on  and  the  air  bags  will  not  inflate. 


In  order  to  reset  the  Enhanced  Accident  Response  System 
functions  after  an  event,  the  ignition  switch  must  be 
changed  from  ignition  START  or  ON  /RUN  to  ignition 
OFF.  Carefully  check  the  vehicle  for  fuel  leaks  in  the 
engine  compartment  and  on  the  ground  near  the  engine 
compartment  and  fuel  tank  before  resetting  the  system 
and  starting  the  engine. 


Air  Bag  Warning  Light 

The  air  bags  must  be  ready  to  inflate  for  your 


AV 


protection  in  a collision.  The  Occupant  Re- 
straint Controller  (ORC)  monitors  the  internal 
circuits  and  interconnecting  wiring  associated 
with  air  bag  system  electrical  components. 


The  ORC  monitors  the  readiness  of  the  electronic  parts  of 
the  air  bag  system  whenever  the  ignition  switch  is  in  the 
START  or  ON /RUN  position.  If  the  ignition  switch  is  in 


The  ORC  contains  a backup  power  supply  system  that 
may  deploy  the  air  bags  even  if  the  battery  loses  power  or 
it  becomes  disconnected  prior  to  deployment. 

The  ORC  turns  on  the  Air  Bag  Warning  Light  in  the 
instrument  panel  for  approximately  four  to  eight  seconds 
for  a self -check  when  the  ignition  switch  is  first  turned  to 
the  ON/ RUN  position.  After  the  self-check,  the  Air  Bag 
Warning  Light  will  turn  off.  If  the  ORC  detects  a mal- 
function in  any  part  of  the  system,  it  turns  on  the  Air  Bag 
Warning  Light,  either  momentarily  or  continuously.  A 
single  chime  will  sound  to  alert  you  if  the  light  comes  on 
again  after  initial  startup. 

The  ORC  also  includes  diagnostics  that  will  illuminate 
the  instrument  panel  Air  Bag  Warning  Light  if  a malfunc- 
tion is  detected  that  could  affect  the  air  bag  system.  The 
diagnostics  also  record  the  nature  of  the  malfunction. 

/M 


While  the  air  bag  system  is  designed  to  be  maintenance 
free,  if  any  of  the  following  occurs,  have  an  authorized 
dealer  service  the  air  bag  system  immediately. 

• The  Air  Bag  Warning  Light  does  not  come  on  during 
the  four  to  eight  seconds  when  the  ignition  switch  is 
first  turned  to  the  ON /RUN  position. 

• The  Air  Bag  Warning  Light  remains  on  after  the  four  to 
eight-second  interval. 

• The  Air  Bag  Warning  Light  comes  on  intermittently  or 
remains  on  while  driving. 

NOTE:  If  the  speedometer,  tachometer,  or  any  engine 
related  gauges  are  not  working,  the  Occupant  Restraint 
Controller  (ORC)  may  also  be  disabled.  In  this  condition 
the  air  bags  may  not  be  ready  to  inflate  for  your  protec- 
tion. Have  an  authorized  dealer  service  the  air  bag 
system  immediately. 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  73 


WARNING! 

Ignoring  the  Air  Bag  Warning  Light  in  your  instru- 
ment panel  could  mean  you  won't  have  the  air  bags 
to  protect  you  in  a collision.  If  the  light  does  not  come 
on  as  a bulb  check  when  the  ignition  is  first  placed  in 
the  on  position,  and  stays  on  after  you  start  the 
vehicle,  or  if  it  comes  on  as  you  drive,  have  an 
authorized  dealer  service  the  air  bag  system  immedi- 
ately. 

Maintaining  Your  Air  Bag  System 


WARNING! 

• Modifications  to  any  part  of  the  air  bag  system 
could  cause  it  to  fail  when  you  need  it.  You  could 
be  injured  if  the  air  bag  system  is  not  there  to 


(Continued) 


74  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

protect  you.  Do  not  modify  the  components  or 
wiring,  including  adding  any  kind  of  badges  or 
stickers  to  the  steering  wheel  hub  trim  cover  or  the 
upper  right  side  of  the  instrument  panel.  Do  not 
modify  the  front  bumper,  vehicle  body  structure,  or 
add  aftermarket  side  steps  or  running  boards. 

• It  is  dangerous  to  try  to  repair  any  part  of  the  air 
bag  system  yourself.  Be  sure  to  tell  anyone  who 
works  on  your  vehicle  that  it  has  an  air  bag  system. 

• Do  not  attempt  to  modify  any  part  of  your  air  bag 
system.  The  air  bag  may  inflate  accidentally  or  may 
not  function  properly  if  modifications  are  made. 
Take  your  vehicle  to  an  authorized  dealer  for  any 
air  bag  system  service.  If  your  seat,  including  your 
trim  cover  and  cushion,  needs  to  be  serviced  in  any 
way  (including  removal  or  loosening/tightening  of 


(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

seat  attachment  bolts),  take  the  vehicle  to  your 
authorized  dealer.  Only  manufacturer  approved 
seat  accessories  may  be  used.  If  it  is  necessary  to 
modify  the  air  bag  system  for  persons  with  dis- 
abilities, contact  your  authorized  dealer. 

Event  Data  Recorder  (EDR) 

This  vehicle  is  equipped  with  an  event  data  recorder 
(EDR).  The  main  purpose  of  an  EDR  is  to  record,  in 
certain  crash  or  near  crash-like  situations,  such  as  an  air 
bag  deployment  or  hitting  a road  obstacle,  data  that  will 
assist  in  understanding  how  a vehicle's  systems  per- 
formed. The  EDR  is  designed  to  record  data  related  to 
vehicle  dynamics  and  safety  systems  for  a short  period  of 
time,  typically  30  seconds  or  less.  The  EDR  in  this  vehicle 
is  designed  to  record  such  data  as: 

• How  various  systems  in  your  vehicle  were  operating; 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  75 


• Whether  or  not  the  driver  and  passenger  safety  belts 
were  buckled/fastened; 

• How  far  (if  at  all)  the  driver  was  depressing  the 
accelerator  and/or  brake  pedal;  and, 

• How  fast  the  vehicle  was  traveling. 

These  data  can  help  provide  a better  understanding  of 
the  circumstances  in  which  crashes  and  injuries  occur. 

NOTE:  EDR  data  are  recorded  by  your  vehicle  only  if  a 
non-trivial  crash  situation  occurs;  no  data  are  recorded  by 
the  EDR  under  normal  driving  conditions  and  no  per- 
sonal data  (e.g.,  name,  gender,  age,  and  crash  location) 
are  recorded.  However,  other  parties,  such  as  law  en- 
forcement, could  combine  the  EDR  data  with  the  type  of 
personally  identifying  data  routinely  acquired  during  a 
crash  investigation. 


In  addition  to  the  vehicle  manufacturer,  other  parties, 
such  as  law  enforcement,  that  have  the  special  equip- 
ment, can  read  the  information  if  they  have  access  to  the 
vehicle  or  the  EDR. 


2 


Child  Restraints 

Everyone  in  your  vehicle  needs  to  be  buckled  up  at  all 
times,  including  babies  and  children. 

Every  state  in  the  United  States,  and  every  Canadian 
province,  requires  that  small  children  ride  in  proper 
restraint  systems.  This  is  the  law,  and  you  can  be  pros- 
ecuted for  ignoring  it. 

Children  12  years  or  younger  should  ride  properly 
buckled  up  in  a rear  seat,  if  available.  According  to  crash 
statistics,  children  are  safer  when  properly  restrained  in 
the  rear  seats  rather  than  in  the  front. 


To  read  data  recorded  by  an  EDR,  special  equipment  is 
required,  and  access  to  the  vehicle  or  the  EDR  is  needed. 

I C3  = /M. 


76  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


WARNING! 

In  a collision,  an  unrestrained  child  can  become  a 
projectile  inside  the  vehicle.  The  force  required  to 
hold  even  an  infant  on  your  lap  could  become  so 
great  that  you  could  not  hold  the  child,  no  matter 
how  strong  you  are.  The  child  and  others  could  be 
badly  injured.  Any  child  riding  in  your  vehicle 
should  be  in  a proper  restraint  for  the  child's  size. 

There  are  different  sizes  and  types  of  restraints  for 
children  from  newborn  size  to  the  child  almost  large 
enough  for  an  adult  safety  belt.  Always  check  the  child 
seat  Owner's  Manual  to  make  sure  you  have  the  correct 
seat  for  your  child.  Carefully  read  and  follow  all  the 
instructions  and  warnings  in  the  child  restraint  Owner's 
Manual  and  on  all  the  labels  attached  to  the  child 
restraint. 


Before  buying  any  restraint  system,  make  sure  that  it  has 
a label  certifying  that  it  meets  all  applicable  Safety 
Standards.  You  should  also  make  sure  that  you  can  install 
it  in  the  vehicle  where  you  will  use  it. 

NOTE: 

• For  additional  information,  refer  to  www.seatcheck.org  or 
call  1-866-732-8243. 

• Canadian  residents  should  refer  to  Transport  Cana- 
da's website  for  additional  information:  www.tc.gc.ca/ 
eng/ motorvehiclesafety/ safedrivers-childsafety- 
index-53.htm 


C: 


| CD  = /M 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  77 


Summary  Of  Recommendations  For  Restraining  Children  In  Vehicles 


Child  Size,  Height,  Weight  Or  Age 

Recommended  Type  Of  Child  Restraint 

Infants  and  Toddlers 

Children  who  are  two  years  old  or 
younger  and  who  have  not  reached  the 
height  or  weight  limits  of  their  child 
restraint 

Either  an  Infant  Carrier  or  a Convertible 
Child  Restraint,  facing  rearward  in  the 
rear  seat  of  the  vehicle 

Small  Children 

Children  who  are  at  least  two  years  old 
or  who  have  out-grown  the  height  or 
weight  limit  of  their  rear-facing  child 
restraint 

Forward-Facing  Child  Restraint  with  a 
five-point  Harness,  facing  forward  in  the 
rear  seat  of  the  vehicle 

Larger  Children 

Children  who  have  out-grown  their 
forward-facing  child  restraint,  but  are 
too  small  to  properly  fit  the  vehicle's 
seat  belt 

Belt  Positioning  Booster  Seat  and  the 
vehicle  seat  belt,  seated  in  the  rear  seat 
of  the  vehicle 

Children  Too  Large  for 
Child  Restraints 

Children  12  years  old  or  younger,  who 
have  out-grown  the  height  or  weight 
limit  of  their  booster  seat 

Vehicle  Seat  Belt,  seated  in  the  rear  seat 
of  the  vehicle 

78  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 
Infants  And  Child  Restraints 


Safety  experts  recommend  that  children  ride  rear-facing 
in  the  vehicle  until  they  are  two  years  old  or  until  they 
reach  either  the  height  or  weight  limit  of  their  rear-facing 
child  restraint.  Two  types  of  child  restraints  can  be  used 
rear-facing:  infant  carriers  and  convertible  child  seats. 

The  infant  carrier  is  only  used  rear-facing  in  the  vehicle. 
It  is  recommended  for  children  from  birth  until  they 
reach  the  weight  or  height  limit  of  the  infant  carrier. 
Convertible  child  seats  can  be  used  either  rear-facing  or 
forward-facing  in  the  vehicle.  Convertible  child  seats 
often  have  a higher  weight  limit  in  the  rear-facing 
direction  than  infant  carriers  do,  so  they  can  be  used 
rear-facing  by  children  who  have  outgrown  their  infant 
carrier  but  are  still  less  than  at  least  two  years  old. 
Children  should  remain  rear-facing  until  they  reach  the 
highest  weight  or  height  allowed  by  their  convertible 
child  seat. 


WARNING! 


• Never  place  a rear-facing  child  restraint  in  front  of 
an  air  bag.  A deploying  passenger  Advanced  Front 
Air  Bag  can  cause  death  or  serious  injury  to  a child 
12  years  or  younger,  including  a child  in  a rear- 
facing child  restraint. 

• Only  use  a rear-facing  child  restraint  in  a vehicle 
with  a rear  seat. 


Older  Children  And  Child  Restraints 

Children  who  are  two  years  old  or  who  have  outgrown 
their  rear-facing  convertible  child  seat  can  ride  forward- 
facing in  the  vehicle.  Forward-facing  child  seats  and 
convertible  child  seats  used  in  the  forward-facing  direc- 
tion are  for  children  who  are  over  two  years  old  or  who 
have  outgrown  the  rear-facing  weight  or  height  limit  of 
their  rear-facing  convertible  child  seat.  Children  should 


/XL 


remain  in  a forward-facing  child  seat  with  a harness  for 
as  long  as  possible,  up  to  the  highest  weight  or  height 
allowed  by  the  child  seat. 

All  children  whose  weight  or  height  is  above  the 
forward-facing  limit  for  the  child  seat  should  use  a 
belt-positioning  booster  seat  until  the  vehicle's  seat  belts 
fit  properly.  If  the  child  cannot  sit  with  knees  bent  over 
the  vehicle's  seat  cushion  while  the  child's  back  is  against 
the  seatback,  they  should  use  a belt-positioning  booster 
seat.  The  child  and  belt-positioning  booster  seat  are  held 
in  the  vehicle  by  the  seat  belt. 


WARNING! 

• Improper  installation  can  lead  to  failure  of  an 
infant  or  child  restraint.  It  could  come  loose  in  a 
collision.  The  child  could  be  badly  injured  or 
killed.  Follow  the  child  restraint  manufacturer's 


(Continued) 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  79 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

directions  exactly  when  installing  an  infant  or 
child  restraint. 

• After  a child  restraint  is  installed  in  the  vehicle,  do 
not  move  the  vehicle  seat  forward  or  rearward 
because  it  can  loosen  the  child  restraint  attach- 
ments. Remove  the  child  restraint  before  adjusting 
the  vehicle  seat  position.  When  the  vehicle  seat  has 
been  adjusted,  reinstall  the  child  restraint. 

• When  your  child  restraint  is  not  in  use,  secure  it  in 
the  vehicle  with  the  seat  belt  or  LATCH  anchor- 
ages, or  remove  it  from  the  vehicle.  Do  not  leave  it 
loose  in  the  vehicle.  In  a sudden  stop  or  accident,  it 
could  strike  the  occupants  or  seatbacks  and  cause 
serious  personal  injury. 


80  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 
Children  Too  Large  For  Booster  Seats 

Children  who  are  large  enough  to  wear  the  shoulder  belt 
comfortably,  and  whose  legs  are  long  enough  to  bend 
over  the  front  of  the  seat  when  their  back  is  against  the 
seatback,  should  use  the  seat  belt  in  a rear  seat.  Use  this 
simple  5-step  test  to  decide  whether  the  child  can  use  the 
vehicle's  seat  belt  alone: 

1.  Can  the  child  sit  all  the  way  back  against  the  back  of 
the  vehicle  seat? 

2.  Do  the  child's  knees  bend  comfortably  over  the  front 
of  the  vehicle  seat  - while  they  are  still  sitting  all  the 
way  back? 

3.  Does  the  shoulder  belt  cross  the  child's  shoulder 
between  their  neck  and  arm? 

4.  Is  the  lap  part  of  the  belt  as  low  as  possible,  touching 
the  child's  thighs  and  not  their  stomach? 


5.  Can  the  child  stay  seated  like  this  for  the  whole  trip? 

If  the  answer  to  any  of  these  questions  was  "no,"  then  the 
child  still  needs  to  use  a booster  seat  in  this  vehicle.  If  the 
child  is  using  the  lap /shoulder  belt,  check  seat  belt  fit 
periodically  and  make  sure  the  seat  belt  buckle  is  latched. 
A child's  squirming  or  slouching  can  move  the  belt  out  of 
position.  If  the  shoulder  belt  contacts  the  face  or  neck, 
move  the  child  closer  to  the  center  of  the  vehicle,  or  use 
a booster  seat  to  position  the  seat  belt  on  the  child 
correctly. 


WARNING! 

Never  allow  a child  to  put  the  shoulder  belt  under  an 
arm  or  behind  their  back.  In  a crash,  the  shoulder  belt 
will  not  protect  a child  properly,  which  may  result  in 
serious  injury  or  death.  A child  must  always  wear 
both  the  lap  and  shoulder  portions  of  the  seat  belt 
correctly. 


/M_  = i=3 


Recommendations  For  Attaching  Child  Restraints 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  81 


Restraint  Type 

Combined 
Weight  of  the 
Child  + Child 
Restraint 

Use  any  attachment  method  shown  with  an  "X"  Below 

LATCH  - 
Lower  Anchors 
Only 

Seat  Belt  Only 

LATCH  - 
Lower  Anchors 
+ Top  Tether 
Anchor 

Seat  Belt  + Top 
Tether  Anchor 

Rear-Facing 
Child  Restraint 

Up  to  65  lbs 
(29.5  kg) 

X 

X 

Rear-Facing 
Child  Restraint 

More  than 
65  lbs  (29.5  kg) 

X 

Forward-Facing 
Child  Restraint 

Up  to  65  lbs 
(29.5  kg) 

X 

X 

Forward-Facing 
Child  Restraint 

More  than 
65  lbs  (29.5  kg) 

X 

Information  Provided  by: 


82  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 

Lower  Anchors  And  Tethers  For  CHildren 
(LATCH)  Restraint  System 


Anchor.  Tether. 

LATCH 

The  next  generation 
of  child  safety. 


022668173 


Your  vehicle  is  equipped  with  the  child  restraint  anchor- 
age system  called  LATCH,  which  stands  for  Lower 
Anchors  and  Tethers  for  CHildren.  The  LATCH  system 
has  three  vehicle  anchor  points  for  installing  LATCH- 
equipped  child  seats.  There  are  two  lower  anchorages 
located  at  the  back  of  the  seat  cushion  where  it  meets  the 
seatback  and  one  top  tether  anchorage  located  behind  the 
seating  position.  These  anchorages  are  used  to  install 
LATCH-equipped  child  seats  without  using  the  vehicle's 
seat  belts.  Some  seating  positions  may  have  a top  tether 
anchorage  but  no  lower  anchorages.  In  these  seating 
positions,  the  seat  belt  must  be  used  with  the  top  tether 
anchorage  to  install  the  child  restraint.  Please  see  the 
following  table  for  more  information. 


= /M 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  83 

LATCH  Positions  For  Installing  Child  Restraints  In 
This  Vehicle 


2 


022668566 

• ^ Lower  Anchorage  Symbol  2 anchorages  per 
seating  position 

• ^ Top  Tether  Anchorage  Symbol 


fsjk  C3  = /\(_  = 


84  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Frequently  Asked  Questions  About  Installing  Child  Seats  With  LATCH 

What  is  the  weight  limit 
(child's  weight  + weight  of  the 
child  restraint)  for  using  the 
LATCH  anchorage  system  to 
attach  the  child  restraint? 

65  lbs  (29.5  kg) 

Use  the  LATCH  anchorage  system  until  the 
combined  weight  of  the  child  and  the  child 
restraint  is  65  lbs  (29.5  kg).  Use  the  seat 
belt  and  tether  anchor  instead  of  the 
LATCH  system  once  the  combined  weight 
is  more  than  65  lbs  (29.5  kg). 

Can  the  LATCH  anchorages 
and  the  seat  belt  be  used  to- 
gether to  attach  a rear-facing  or 
forward-facing  child  restraint? 

No 

Do  not  use  the  seat  belt  when  you  use  the 
LATCH  anchorage  system  to  attach  a rear- 
facing or  forward-facing  child  restraint. 

Can  a child  seat  be  installed  in 
the  center  position  using  the 
inner  LATCH  lower  anchor- 
ages? 

Yes 

You  can  install  child  restraints  with  flexible 
lower  anchors  in  the  center  position.  The 
inner  anchorages  are  15.5  inches  (390  mm) 
apart.  Do  not  install  child  restraints  with 
rigid  lower  anchors  in  the  center  position. 

Information  Provided  by: 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  85 


Frequently  Asked  Questions  About  Installing  Child  Seats  With  LATCH 

Can  two  child  restraints  be  at- 
tached using  a common  lower 
LATCH  anchorage? 

No 

Never  "share"  a LATCH  anchorage  with 
two  or  more  child  restraints.  If  the  center 
position  does  not  have  dedicated  LATCH 
lower  anchorages,  use  the  seat  belt  to  in- 
stall a child  seat  in  the  center  position  next 
to  a child  seat  using  the  LATCH  anchor- 
ages in  an  outboard  position. 

Can  the  rear-facing  child  re- 
straint touch  the  back  of  the 
front  passenger  seat? 

Yes 

The  child  seat  may  touch  the  back  of  the 
front  passenger  seat  if  the  child  restraint 
manufacturer  also  allows  contact.  See  your 
child  restraint  owner's  manual  for  more 
information. 

Can  the  head  restraints  be  re- 
moved? 

No 

Information  Provided  by: 


86  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Locating  LATCH  Anchorages 


<•  The  lower  anchorages  are  round  bars  that  are 
found  at  the  rear  of  the  seat  cushion  where  it 
meets  the  seatback.  They  are  just  visible  when 
you  lean  into  the  rear  seat  to  install  the  child 
restraint.  You  will  easily  feel  them  if  you  run  your  finger 
along  the  gap  between  the  seatback  and  seat  cushion. 


0226071860 


Locating  Tether  Anchorages 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  87 


There  are  tether  strap  anchorages  behind  each 
rear  seating  position  located  on  the  back  of  the 
seat. 


LATCH-compatible  child  restraint  systems  will  be 
equipped  with  a rigid  bar  or  a flexible  strap  on  each  side. 
Each  will  have  a hook  or  connector  to  attach  to  the  lower 
anchorage  and  a way  to  tighten  the  connection  to  the 
anchorage.  Forward-facing  child  restraints  and  some 
rear-facing  child  restraints  will  also  be  equipped  with  a 
tether  strap.  The  tether  strap  will  have  a hook  at  the  end 
to  attach  to  the  top  tether  anchorage  and  a way  to  tighten 
the  strap  after  it  is  attached  to  the  anchorage. 


Rear  Seat  Tether  Anchors 


2 


Center  Seat  LATCH 

Do  not  install  child  restraints  with  rigid  lower  attach- 
ments in  the  center  seating  position.  Only  install  this  type 
of  child  restraint  in  the  outboard  seating  positions.  Child 


CZ>  = /M 


7^ 


88  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


restraints  with  flexible,  webbing  mounted  lower  attach- 
ments can  be  installed  in  any  rear  seating  position. 


WARNING! 

Never  use  the  same  lower  anchorage  to  attach  more 
than  one  child  restraint.  If  you  are  installing  LATCH- 
compatible  child  restraints  next  to  each  other,  you 
must  use  the  seat  belt  for  the  center  position.  You  can 
then  use  either  the  LATCH  anchors  or  the  vehicle's 
seat  belt  for  installing  child  seats  in  the  outboard 
positions.  Please  refer  to  "Installing  The  LATCH- 
Compatible  Child  Restraint  System"  for  typical  in- 
stallation instructions. 


Always  follow  the  directions  of  the  child  restraint 
manufacturer  when  installing  your  child  restraint.  Not 
all  child  restraint  systems  will  be  installed  as  described 
here. 


To  Install  A LATCH-Compatible  Child  Restraint 

If  the  selected  seating  position  has  a Switchable  Auto- 
matic Locking  Retractor  (ALR)  seat  belt,  stow  the  seat 
belt,  following  the  instructions  below.  See  the  section 
"Installing  Child  Restraints  Using  the  Vehicle  Seat  Belt" 
to  check  what  type  of  seat  belt  each  seating  position  has. 

1.  Loosen  the  adjusters  on  the  lower  straps  and  on  the 
tether  strap  of  the  child  seat  so  that  you  can  more 
easily  attach  the  hooks  or  connectors  to  the  vehicle 
anchorages. 

2.  Place  the  child  seat  between  the  lower  anchorages  for 
that  seating  position.  For  some  second  row  seats,  you 
may  need  to  recline  the  seat  and  / or  raise  the  head 
restraint  to  get  a better  fit.  If  the  rear  seat  can  be  moved 
forward  and  rearward  in  the  vehicle,  you  may  wish  to 
move  it  to  its  rear-most  position  to  make  room  for  the 
child  seat.  You  may  also  move  the  front  seat  forward 
to  allow  more  room  for  the  child  seat. 

i Provided  by: 

AL_c=rR 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  89 


3.  Attach  the  lower  hooks  or  connectors  of  the  child 
restraint  to  the  lower  anchorages  in  the  selected  seat- 
ing position. 

4.  If  the  child  restraint  has  a tether  strap,  connect  it  to  the 
top  tether  anchorage.  See  the  section  "Installing  Child 
Restraints  Using  the  Top  Tether  Anchorage"  for  direc- 
tions to  attach  a tether  anchor. 

5.  Tighten  all  of  the  straps  as  you  push  the  child  restraint 
rearward  and  downward  into  the  seat.  Remove  slack 
in  the  straps  according  to  the  child  restraint  manufac- 
turer's instructions. 

6.  Test  that  the  child  restraint  is  installed  tightly  by 
pulling  back  and  forth  on  the  child  seat  at  the  belt 
path.  It  should  not  move  more  than  1 inch  (25.4  mm) 
in  any  direction. 


How  To  Stow  An  Unused  ALR  Seat  Belt: 


When  using  the  LATCH  attaching  system  to  install  a 
child  restraint,  stow  all  ALR  seat  belts  that  are  not  being 
used  by  other  occupants  or  being  used  to  secure  child 
restraints.  An  unused  belt  could  injure  a child  if  they  play 
with  it  and  accidentally  lock  the  seat  belt  retractor.  Before 
installing  a child  restraint  using  the  LATCH  system, 
buckle  the  seat  belt  behind  the  child  restraint  and  out  of 
the  child's  reach.  If  the  buckled  seat  belt  interferes  with 
the  child  restraint  installation,  instead  of  buckling  it 
behind  the  child  restraint,  route  the  seat  belt  through  the 
child  restraint  belt  path  and  then  buckle  it.  Do  not  lock 
the  seat  belt.  Remind  all  children  in  the  vehicle  that  the 
seat  belts  are  not  toys  and  that  they  should  not  play  with 
them. 


2 


Information  Provided  by: 


90  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


WARNING! 

• Improper  installation  of  a child  restraint  to  the 
LATCH  anchorages  can  lead  to  failure  of  the  re- 
straint. The  child  could  be  badly  injured  or  killed. 
Follow  the  child  restraint  manufacturer's  directions 
exactly  when  installing  an  infant  or  child  restraint. 

• Child  restraint  anchorages  are  designed  to  with- 
stand only  those  loads  imposed  by  correctly-fitted 
child  restraints.  Under  no  circumstances  are  they  to 
be  used  for  adult  seat  belts,  harnesses,  or  for 
attaching  other  items  or  equipment  to  the  vehicle. 


Installing  Child  Restraints  Using  The  Vehicle  Seat 
Belt 

The  seat  belts  in  the  passenger  seating  positions  are 
equipped  with  a Switchable  Automatic  Locking  Retractor 
(ALR)  that  is  designed  to  keep  the  lap  portion  of  the  seat 
belt  tight  around  the  child  restraint  so  that  it  is  not 
necessary  to  use  a locking  clip.  The  ALR  retractor  can  be 
"switched"  into  a locked  mode  by  pulling  all  of  the 
webbing  out  of  the  retractor  and  then  letting  the  webbing 
retract  back  into  the  retractor.  If  it  is  locked,  the  ALR  will 
make  a clicking  noise  while  the  webbing  is  pulled  back 
into  the  retractor.  Refer  to  the  "Automatic  Locking 
Mode"  description  under  "Occupant  Restraints"  for  ad- 
ditional information  on  ALR. 


C: 


| CD  = /M 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  91 

Lap/Shoulder  Belt  Systems  For  Installing  Child 
Restraints  In  This  Vehicle 


2 


022668725 

• ALR  = Switchable  Automatic  Locking  Retractor 

• & Top  Tether  Anchorage  Symbol 


Information  Provided  by: 

CD  = /M_  = F^ 


92  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Frequently  Asked  Questions  About  Installing  Child  Restraints  With  Seat  Belts 

What  is  the  weight  limit  (child's 
weight  + weight  of  the  child  re- 
straint) for  using  the  Tether  Anchor 
with  the  seat  belt  to  attach  a for- 
ward facing  child  restraint? 

Weight  limit  of  the 
Child  Restraint 

Always  use  the  tether  anchor  when  using  the  seat 
belt  to  install  a forward  facing  child  restraint,  up  to 
the  recommended  weight  limit  of  the  child  re- 
straint. 

Can  the  rear-facing  child  restraint 
touch  the  back  of  the  front  passen- 
ger seat? 

Yes 

Contact  between  the  front  passenger  seat  and  the 
child  restraint  is  allowed,  if  the  child  restraint 
manufacturer  also  allows  contact. 

Can  the  head  restraints  be  re- 
moved? 

No 

Can  the  buckle  stalk  be  twisted  to 
tighten  the  seat  belt  against  the  belt 
path  of  the  child  restraint? 

No 

Do  not  twist  the  buckle  stalk  in  a seating  position 
with  an  ALR  retractor. 

Information  Provided  by: 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  93 


Installing  A Child  Restraint  With  A Switchable 

Automatic  Locking  Retractor  (ALR) 

1.  Place  the  child  seat  in  the  center  of  the  seating 
position.  For  some  second  row  seats,  you  may  need  to 
recline  the  seat  and/or  raise  the  head  restraint  to  get  a 
better  fit.  If  the  rear  seat  can  be  moved  forward  and 
rearward  in  the  vehicle,  you  may  wish  to  move  it  to  its 
rear-most  position  to  make  room  for  the  child  seat. 
You  may  also  move  the  front  seat  forward  to  allow 
more  room  for  the  child  seat. 

2.  Pull  enough  of  the  seat  belt  webbing  from  the  retractor 
to  pass  it  through  the  belt  path  of  the  child  restraint. 
Do  not  twist  the  belt  webbing  in  the  belt  path. 

3.  Slide  the  latch  plate  into  the  buckle  until  you  hear  a 
"click." 


4.  Pull  on  the  webbing  to  make  the  lap  portion  tight 
against  the  child  seat. 

5.  To  lock  the  seat  belt,  pull  down  on  the  shoulder  part  of 
the  belt  until  you  have  pulled  all  the  seat  belt  webbing 
out  of  the  retractor.  Then,  allow  the  webbing  to  retract 
back  into  the  retractor.  As  the  webbing  retracts,  you 
will  hear  a clicking  sound.  This  means  the  seat  belt  is 
now  in  the  Automatic  Locking  mode. 


2 


6.  Try  to  pull  the  webbing  out  of  the  retractor.  If  it  is 
locked,  you  should  not  be  able  to  pull  out  any  web- 
bing. If  the  retractor  is  not  locked,  repeat  step  5. 


7.  Finally,  pull  up  on  any  excess  webbing  to  tighten  the 
lap  portion  around  the  child  restraint  while  you  push 
the  child  restraint  rearward  and  downward  into  the 
vehicle  seat. 


Information  Provided  by: 


94  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


8.  If  the  child  restraint  has  a top  tether  strap  and  the 
seating  position  has  a top  tether  anchorage,  connect 
the  tether  strap  to  the  anchorage  and  tighten  the  tether 
strap.  See  the  section  "Installing  Child  Restraints 
Using  the  Top  Tether  Anchorage"  for  directions  to 
attach  a tether  anchor. 

9.  Test  that  the  child  restraint  is  installed  tightly  by 
pulling  back  and  forth  on  the  child  seat  at  the  belt 
path.  It  should  not  move  more  than  1 inch  (25.4  mm) 
in  any  direction. 

Any  seat  belt  system  will  loosen  with  time,  so  check  the 
belt  occasionally,  and  pull  it  tight  if  necessary. 


Installing  Child  Restraints  Using  The  Top  Tether 
Anchorage: 


WARNING! 

Do  not  attach  a tether  strap  for  a rear-facing  car  seat 
to  any  location  in  front  of  the  car  seat,  including  the 
seat  frame  or  a tether  anchorage.  Only  attach  the 
tether  strap  of  a rear-facing  car  seat  to  the  tether 
anchorage  that  is  approved  for  that  seating  position, 
located  behind  the  top  of  the  vehicle  seat.  See  the 
section  "Lower  Anchors  and  Tethers  for  CHildren 
(LATCH)  Restraint  System"  for  the  location  of  ap- 
proved tether  anchorages  in  your  vehicle. 


/\\ c= 


0226047162 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  95 


1.  Look  behind  the  seating  position  where  you  plan  to 
install  the  child  restraint  to  find  the  tether  anchorage. 
You  may  need  to  move  the  seat  forward  to  provide 
better  access  to  the  tether  anchorage.  If  there  is  no  top 
tether  anchorage  for  that  seating  position,  move  the 
child  restraint  to  another  position  in  the  vehicle  if  one 
is  available. 

2.  Route  the  tether  strap  to  provide  the  most  direct  path 
for  the  strap  between  the  anchor  and  the  child  seat, 
routing  it  over  the  center  of  the  head  restraint. 

3.  Attach  the  tether  strap  hook  of  the  child  restraint  to 
the  top  tether  anchorage  as  shown  in  the  diagram. 


Tether  Anchorage  Locations 

4.  Remove  slack  in  the  tether  strap  according  to  the  child 
restraint  manufacturer's  instructions. 


2 


CD  = /M_E=?=R 


96  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


WARNING! 

• An  incorrectly  anchored  tether  strap  could  lead  to 
increased  head  motion  and  possible  injury  to  the 
child.  Use  only  the  anchorage  position  directly 
behind  the  child  seat  to  secure  a child  restraint  top 
tether  strap. 

• If  your  vehicle  is  equipped  with  a split  rear  seat, 
make  sure  the  tether  strap  does  not  slip  into  the 
opening  between  the  seatbacks  as  you  remove 
slack  in  the  strap. 

Transporting  Pets 

Air  Bags  deploying  in  the  front  seat  could  harm  your  pet. 
An  unrestrained  pet  will  be  thrown  about  and  possibly 
injured,  or  injure  a passenger  during  panic  braking  or  in 
a collision. 

Pets  should  be  restrained  in  the  rear  seat  in  pet  harnesses 
or  pet  carriers  that  are  secured  by  seat  belts. 


ENGINE  BREAK-IN  RECOMMENDATIONS 


A long  break-in  period  is  not  required  for  the  engine  and 
drivetrain  (transmission  and  axle)  in  your  vehicle. 

Drive  moderately  during  the  first  300  miles  (500  km). 
After  the  initial  60  miles  (100  km),  speeds  up  to  50  or 
55  mph  (80  or  90  km/h)  are  desirable. 

While  cruising,  brief  full-throttle  acceleration  within  the 
limits  of  local  traffic  laws  contributes  to  a good  break-in. 
Wide-open  throttle  acceleration  in  low  gear  can  be  detri- 
mental and  should  be  avoided. 

The  engine  oil  installed  in  the  engine  at  the  factory  is  a 
high-quality  energy  conserving  type  lubricant.  Oil 
changes  should  be  consistent  with  anticipated  climate 
conditions  under  which  vehicle  operations  will  occur.  For 
the  recommended  viscosity  and  quality  grades,  refer  to 
"Maintenance  Procedures"  in  "Maintaining  Your  Ve- 
hicle." 


/XL 


CAUTION! 


Never  use  Non-Detergent  Oil  or  Straight  Mineral  Oil 
in  the  engine  or  damage  may  result. 

NOTE:  A new  engine  may  consume  some  oil  during  its 
first  few  thousand  miles  (kilometers)  of  operation.  This 
should  be  considered  a normal  part  of  the  break-in  and 
not  interpreted  as  a problem. 

SAFETY  TIPS 
Transporting  Passengers 

NEVER  TRANSPORT  PASSENGERS  IN  THE  CARGO 
AREA. 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  97 


WARNING! 

• Do  not  leave  children  or  animals  inside  parked 
vehicles  in  hot  weather.  Interior  heat  build-up  may 
cause  serious  injury  or  death. 

• It  is  extremely  dangerous  to  ride  in  a cargo  area, 
inside  or  outside  of  a vehicle.  In  a collision,  people 
riding  in  these  areas  are  more  likely  to  be  seriously 
injured  or  killed. 

• Do  not  allow  people  to  ride  in  any  area  of  your 
vehicle  that  is  not  equipped  with  seats  and  seat 
belts. 

• Be  sure  everyone  in  your  vehicle  is  in  a seat  and 
using  a seat  belt  properly. 


98  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 

Exhaust  Gas 


WARNING! 

Exhaust  gases  can  injure  or  kill.  They  contain  carbon 
monoxide  (CO),  which  is  colorless  and  odorless. 
Breathing  it  can  make  you  unconscious  and  can 
eventually  poison  you.  To  avoid  breathing  (CO), 
follow  these  safety  tips: 

• Do  not  run  the  engine  in  a closed  garage  or  in 
confined  areas  any  longer  than  needed  to  move 
your  vehicle  in  or  out  of  the  area. 

• If  you  are  required  to  drive  with  the  trunk/liftgate/ 
rear  doors  open,  make  sure  that  all  windows  are 
closed  and  the  climate  control  BLOWER  switch  is 
set  at  high  speed.  DO  NOT  use  the  recirculation 
mode. 


(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• If  it  is  necessary  to  sit  in  a parked  vehicle  with  the 
engine  running,  adjust  your  heating  or  cooling 
controls  to  force  outside  air  into  the  vehicle.  Set  the 
blower  at  high  speed. 

The  best  protection  against  carbon  monoxide  entry  into 
the  vehicle  body  is  a properly  maintained  engine  exhaust 
system. 

Whenever  a change  is  noticed  in  the  sound  of  the  exhaust 
system,  when  exhaust  fumes  can  be  detected  inside  the 
vehicle,  or  when  the  underside  or  rear  of  the  vehicle  is 
damaged,  have  a competent  mechanic  inspect  the  com- 
plete exhaust  system  and  adjacent  body  areas  for  broken, 
damaged,  deteriorated,  or  mispositioned  parts.  Open 
seams  or  loose  connections  could  permit  exhaust  fumes 
to  seep  into  the  passenger  compartment.  In  addition, 
inspect  the  exhaust  system  each  time  the  vehicle  is  raised 
for  lubrication  or  oil  change.  Replace  as  required. 


Safety  Checks  You  Should  Make  Inside  The 
Vehicle 

Seat  Belts 


Inspect  the  seat  belt  system  periodically,  checking  for 
cuts,  frays,  and  loose  parts.  Damaged  parts  must  be 
replaced  immediately.  Do  not  disassemble  or  modify  the 
system. 

Front  seat  belt  assemblies  must  be  replaced  after  a 
collision.  Rear  seat  belt  assemblies  must  be  replaced  after 
a collision  if  they  have  been  damaged  (i.e.,  bent  retractor, 
torn  webbing,  etc.).  If  there  is  any  question  regarding  seat 
belt  or  retractor  condition,  replace  the  seat  belt. 

Air  Bag  Warning  Light 

The  Air  Bag  warning  light  % will  turn  on  for  four  to 
eight  seconds  as  a bulb  check  when  the  ignition  switch 
is  first  turned  to  ON  /RUN.  If  the  light  is  either  not  on 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  99 


during  starting,  stays  on,  or  turns  on  while  driving, 
have  the  system  inspected  at  an  authorized  dealer  as 
soon  as  possible.  This  light  will  illuminate  with  a 
single  chime  when  a fault  with  the  Air  Bag  Warning 
Light  has  been  detected,  it  will  stay  on  until  the  fault 
is  cleared.  If  the  light  comes  on  intermittently  or 
remains  on  while  driving,  have  an  authorized  dealer 
service  the  vehicle  immediately.  Refer  to  "Occupant 
Restraints"  in  "Things  To  Know  Before  Starting  Your 
Vehicle"  for  further  information. 


2 


Defroster 

Check  operation  by  selecting  the  defrost  mode  and  place 
the  blower  control  on  high  speed.  You  should  be  able  to 
feel  the  air  directed  against  the  windshield.  See  your 
authorized  dealer  for  service  if  your  defroster  is  inoper- 
able. 


/m_e=;=^ 


100  THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Floor  Mat  Safety  Information 

Always  use  floor  mats  designed  to  fit  the  footwell  of  your 
vehicle.  Use  only  floor  mats  that  leave  the  pedal  area 
unobstructed  and  that  are  firmly  secured  so  that  they 
cannot  slip  out  of  position  and  interfere  with  the  pedals 
or  impair  safe  operation  of  your  vehicle  in  other  ways. 


WARNING! 

Pedals  that  cannot  move  freely  can  cause  loss  of 
vehicle  control  and  increase  the  risk  of  serious  per- 
sonal injury. 

• Always  make  sure  that  floor  mats  are  properly 
attached  to  the  floor  mat  fasteners. 

• Never  place  or  install  floor  mats  or  other  floor  cover- 
ings in  the  vehicle  that  cannot  be  properly  secured  to 
prevent  them  from  moving  and  interfering  with  the 
pedals  or  the  ability  to  control  the  vehicle. 

(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Never  put  floor  mats  or  other  floor  coverings  on  top 
of  already  installed  floor  mats.  Additional  floor 
mats  and  other  coverings  will  reduce  the  size  of  the 
pedal  area  and  interfere  with  the  pedals. 

• Check  mounting  of  mats  on  a regular  basis.  Always 
properly  reinstall  and  secure  floor  mats  that  have 
been  removed  for  cleaning. 

• Always  make  sure  that  objects  cannot  fall  into  the 
driver  footwell  while  the  vehicle  is  moving.  Objects 
can  become  trapped  under  the  brake  pedal  and 
accelerator  pedal  causing  a loss  of  vehicle  control. 

• If  required,  mounting  posts  must  be  properly  in- 
stalled, if  not  equipped  from  the  factory. 

Failure  to  properly  follow  floor  mat  installation  or 
mounting  can  cause  interference  with  the  brake 
pedal  and  accelerator  pedal  operation  causing  loss  of 
control  of  the  vehicle. 


/ided  by: 


THINGS  TO  KNOW  BEFORE  STARTING  YOUR  VEHICLE  101 


Periodic  Safety  Checks  You  Should  Make  Outside 
The  Vehicle 

Tires 

Examine  tires  for  excessive  tread  wear  and  uneven  wear 
patterns.  Check  for  stones,  nails,  glass,  or  other  objects 
lodged  in  the  tread  or  sidewall.  Inspect  the  tread  for  cuts 
and  cracks.  Inspect  sidewalls  for  cuts,  cracks,  and  bulges. 
Check  the  wheel  nuts  for  tightness.  Check  the  tires 
(including  spare)  for  proper  cold  inflation  pressure. 


Door  Latches 


Check  for  proper  closing,  latching,  and  locking. 

Fluid  Leaks 


2 


Check  area  under  vehicle  after  overnight  parking  for  fuel, 
engine  coolant,  oil,  or  other  fluid  leaks.  Also,  if  gasoline 
fumes  are  detected  or  if  fuel,  power  steering  fluid  (if 
equipped),  or  brake  fluid  leaks  are  suspected.  The  cause 
should  be  located  and  corrected  immediately. 


Lights 

Have  someone  observe  the  operation  of  brake  lights  and 
exterior  lights  while  you  work  the  controls.  Check  turn 
signal  and  high  beam  indicator  lights  on  the  instrument 
panel. 


Information  Provided  by: 


Information  Provided  by: 

CZ)  = /M_  = ?^ 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


CONTENTS 


■ MIRRORS 108 

□ Inside  Day/Night  Mirror 108 

□ Automatic  Dimming  Mirror  — If  Equipped  . . .108 

□ Outside  Mirror  — Driver  Side 109 

□ Outside  Mirror  — Passenger  Side 109 

□ Folding  Outside  Mirrors  110 

□ Power  Mirrors  110 

□ Heated  Mirrors  — If  Equipped Ill 

□ Vanity  Mirrors  — If  Equipped  Ill 


3 


□ Sun  Visor  "Slide-On-Rod"  Feature  — 

If  Equipped  Ill 

■ Uconnect  PHONE  — IF  EQUIPPED  112 

□ Operation  114 

n Phone  Call  Features  121 

□ Uconnect  Phone  Features 125 

□ Advanced  Phone  Connectivity 130 

□ Things  You  Should  Know  About  Your  Uconnect 

Phone 132 

□ General  Information 143 


Information  Provided  by: 


104  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

■ VOICE  COMMAND  — IF  EQUIPPED 143 

□ Voice  Command  System  Operation 143 

□ Commands  145 

□ Voice  Training  149 

■ SEATS  149 

□ Power  Seats  — If  Equipped 150 

□ Heated  Seats  — If  Equipped  152 

□ Manual  Front  Seat  Adjustment 153 

□ Manual  Seat  Height  Adjustment  — 

If  Equipped 154 

□ Manual  Lumbar  — If  Equipped 155 

□ Driver's  Seatback  Recline 155 

□ Head  Restraints  156 


□ Folding  Rear  Seat 160 

□ Reclining  Rear  Seat  — If  Equipped 161 

TO  OPEN  AND  CLOSE  THE  HOOD 162 

LIGHTS  164 

□ Multifunction  Lever  164 

□ Headlights  And  Parking  Lights  164 

□ Automatic  Headlights  — If  Equipped 165 

□ Daytime  Running  Lights  — If  Equipped 165 

□ Lights-On  Reminder 165 

□ Fog  Lights  — If  Equipped 166 

□ Turn  Signals 166 

□ High/Low  Beam  Switch 167 

□ Flash-To-Pass 167 


□ Headlights  On  With  Wipers  (Available  With 

Automatic  Headlights  Only)  168 

□ Instrument  Panel  Dimming 168 

□ Map/Reading  Lights 169 

■ WINDSHIELD  WIPERS  AND  WASHERS 170 

□ Windshield  Wiper  Operation 171 

□ Intermittent  Wiper  System 172 

□ Windshield  Washers 172 

□ Headlights  On  With  Wipers  (Available  With 

Automatic  Headlights  Only)  173 

□ Mist  Feature 173 

■ TILT  STEERING  COLUMN  174 

■ ELECTRONIC  SPEED  CONTROL  — 

IF  EQUIPPED 


175 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  105 

□ To  Activate 176 

□ To  Set  A Desired  Speed 176 

□ To  Deactivate 177 

□ To  Resume  Speed 177 

□ To  Vary  The  Speed  Setting 177 

□ To  Accelerate  For  Passing  178 

I PARKVIEW  REAR  BACK  UP  CAMERA  — IF 
EQUIPPED 179 

I GARAGE  DOOR  OPENER  — IF  EQUIPPED  . . .181 

□ Before  You  Begin  Programming  HomeLink  . . .183 

□ Programming  A Rolling  Code 183 

□ Programming  A Non-Rolling  Code 185 

□ Canadian/Gate  Operator  Programming 187 


106  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 

□ Using  HomeLink  188 

□ Security 188 

□ Troubleshooting  Tips 189  I 

□ General  Information 190  I 

■ POWER  SUNROOF  — IF  EQUIPPED  191  I 

□ Opening  Sunroof  — Express 192  I 

□ Opening  Sunroof  — Manual  Mode 192 

□ Closing  Sunroof  — Express 192 

□ Closing  Sunroof  — Manual  Mode 192  I 

□ Pinch  Protect  Feature 192  I 

□ Venting  Sunroof  — Express 193 

□ Sunshade  Operation 193 

□ Wind  Buffeting 193 

Q — 


□ Sunroof  Maintenance 193 

□ Ignition  Off  Operation 193 

I ELECTRICAL  POWER  OUTLETS 194 

I POWER  INVERTER  — IF  EQUIPPED 197 

I CUPHOLDERS 199 

I STORAGE 200 

□ Glove  Compartment  And  Storage  Bin 200 

□ Door  Storage 201 

I CONSOLE  FEATURES 201 

I CARGO  AREA  FEATURES 203 

□ Cargo  Light 203 

□ Cargo  Cover  203 

□ Removable  Load  Floor  205 

ed  by: 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  107 


□ Cargo  Tie-Down  Loops 205  □ Rear  Window  Defroster 

□ Fold  Down  Speakers  — If  Equipped 207  ■ ROOF  LUGGAGE  RACK  — IF  EQUIPPED  . 

■ REAR  WINDOW  FEATURES 207 

□ Rear  Window  Wiper/Washer 207 


Information  Provided  by: 

cd=/m 


. . .208 
. . .209 


3 


108  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 

MIRRORS 


Inside  Day/Night  Mirror 

A two-point  pivot  system  allows  for  horizontal  and 
vertical  mirror  adjustment.  Adjust  the  mirror  to  center  on 
the  view  through  the  rear  window. 

Headlight  glare  can  be  reduced  by  moving  the  small 
control  under  the  mirror  to  the  night  position  (toward  the 
rear  of  vehicle).  The  mirror  should  be  adjusted  while  set 
in  the  day  position  (toward  the  windshield). 


030407085 


Inside  Day/Night  Mirror 

Automatic  Dimming  Mirror  — If  Equipped 

This  mirror  automatically  adjusts  for  headlight  glare 
from  vehicles  behind  you.  You  can  turn  the  feature  on  or 
off  by  pushing  the  button  at  the  base  of  the  mirror.  The 
On/ Off  symbol  on  the  button  will  illuminate  when  the 
auto-dimming  feature  is  enabled. 


NOTE:  This  feature  is  disabled  when  the  vehicle  is 
moving  in  reverse. 


t 


Automatic  Dimming  Mirror 


030406002 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  109 


CAUTION! 

To  avoid  damage  to  the  mirror  during  cleaning,  never 
spray  any  cleaning  solution  directly  onto  the  mirror. 
Apply  the  solution  onto  a clean  cloth  and  wipe  the 
mirror  clean. 


3 


Outside  Mirror  — Driver  Side 


Adjust  the  flat  outside  mirror  so  you  can  just  see  the  side 
of  your  vehicle  in  the  part  of  the  mirror  closest  to  the 
vehicle  with  your  head  close  to  the  door  glass. 

Outside  Mirror  — Passenger  Side 

Adjust  the  convex  outside  mirror  so  you  can  just  see  the 
side  of  your  vehicle  in  the  part  of  the  mirror  closest  to  the 
vehicle  with  your  head  close  to  the  center  of  the  vehicle. 


/\L 


110  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


WARNING! 

Vehicles  and  other  objects  seen  in  the  passenger  side 
convex  mirror  will  look  smaller  and  farther  away 
than  they  really  are.  Relying  too  much  on  your 
passenger  side  convex  mirror  could  cause  you  to 
collide  with  another  vehicle  or  other  object.  Use  your 
inside  mirror  when  judging  the  size  or  distance  of  a 
vehicle  seen  in  the  passenger  side  convex  mirror. 
Some  vehicles  will  not  have  a convex  passenger  side 
mirror. 

Folding  Outside  Mirrors 

The  outside  mirrors  are  hinged  and  may  be  moved, 
manually,  either  forward  or  rearward  to  resist  damage. 
The  hinges  have  three  detent  positions;  full  forward,  full 
rearward  and  normal. 


Power  Mirrors 

The  power  mirror  control  is  located  on  the  driver's  door 
trim  panel. 


Power  Mirror  Control 

To  adjust  a mirror,  turn  the  control  wand  toward  the  left 
or  right  mirror  positions  indicated.  Tilt  the  control  wand 
in  the  direction  you  want  the  mirror  to  move. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  111 


When  you  are  finished  adjusting  the  mirror,  turn  the 
control  to  the  center  position  to  prevent  accidentally 
moving  a mirror. 

Heated  Mirrors  — If  Equipped 


PSP  These  mirrors  are  heated  to  melt  frost  or  ice.  This 
feature  is  activated  whenever  you  turn  on  the  rear 
window  defroster.  Refer  to  "Rear  Window  Features"  in 
"Understanding  The  Features  Of  Your  Vehicle"  for  fur- 
ther information. 


Vanity  Mirrors  — If  Equipped 

To  use  the  vanity  mirror,  rotate  the  sun  visor  down  and 
swing  the  mirror  cover  upward. 


Vanity  Mirror 

Sun  Visor  “Slide-On-Rod”  Feature  — If  Equipped 

The  sun  visors  may  be  extended  out  to  provide  more 
coverage  of  the  side  glass. 


112  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

Uconnect  PHONE  — IF  EQUIPPED 

Uconnect  Phone  is  a voice-activated,  hands-free,  in- 
vehicle  communications  system.  Uconnect  Phone  allows 
you  to  dial  a phone  number  with  your  mobile  phone 
using  simple  voice  commands  (e.g.,  "Call"  ...  "Mike"  ... 
"Work"  or  "Dial"  ...  "248-555-1212").  Your  mobile  phone's 
audio  is  transmitted  through  your  vehicle's  audio  sys- 
tem; the  system  will  automatically  mute  your  radio  when 
using  the  Uconnect  Phone. 

NOTE:  The  Uconnect  Phone  requires  a mobile  phone 
equipped  with  the  Bluetooth  "Hands-Free  Profile,"  Ver- 
sion 0.96  or  higher.  See  the  Uconnect  website  for  sup- 
ported phones. 

For  Uconnect  customer  support: 

• U.S.  residents  - visit  UconnectPhone.com  or  call 
1-877-855-8400. 

• Canadian  Residents  - visit  UconnectPhone.com  or  call, 
1-800-465-2001  (English)  or  1-800-387-9983  (French). 


Uconnect  Phone  allows  you  to  transfer  calls  between  the 
system  and  your  mobile  phone  as  you  enter  or  exit  your 
vehicle  and  enables  you  to  mute  the  system's  microphone 
for  private  conversation. 

The  Uconnect  Phone  is  driven  through  your  Bluetooth 
"Hands-Free  Profile"  mobile  phone.  Uconnect  features 
Bluetooth  technology  - the  global  standard  that  enables 
different  electronic  devices  to  connect  to  each  other 
without  wires  or  a docking  station.  Uconnect  Phone 
operates  no  matter  where  you  stow  your  mobile  phone 
(be  it  your  purse,  pocket,  or  briefcase),  as  long  as  your 
phone  is  turned  on  and  has  been  paired  to  the  vehicle's 
Uconnect  Phone.  The  Uconnect  Phone  allows  up  to  seven 
mobile  phones  to  be  linked  to  the  system.  Only  one 
linked  (or  paired)  mobile  phone  can  be  used  with  the 
system  at  a time.  The  system  is  available  in  English, 
Spanish,  or  French  languages. 


WARNING! 


Any  voice  commanded  system  should  be  used  only 
in  safe  driving  conditions  following  all  applicable 
laws,  including  laws  regarding  phone  use.  Your  at- 
tention should  be  focused  on  safely  operating  the 
vehicle.  Failure  to  do  so  may  result  in  a collision 
causing  serious  injury  or  death. 

Uconnect  Phone  Button 


The  radio  or  steering  wheel  controls  (if 
equipped)  will  contain  the  two  control  buttons 
(Uconnect  Phone  button  and  Voice  Com- 
mand oft™  button)  that  will  enable  you  to 
access  the  system.  When  you  push  the  button  you  will 
hear  the  word  Uconnect  followed  by  a BEEP.  The  beep 
is  your  signal  to  give  a command. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  113 


Voice  Command  Button 

/•  Actual  button  location  may  vary  with  the  ra- 
((i  2 dio.  The  individual  buttons  are  described  in  the 
"Operation"  section. 

The  Uconnect  Phone  can  be  used  with  any  Hands-Free 
Profile  certified  Bluetooth  mobile  phone.  See  the 
Uconnect  website  for  supported  phones.  Refer  to  your 
mobile  service  provider  or  the  phone  manufacturer  for 
details. 

The  Uconnect  Phone  is  fully  integrated  with  the  vehicle's 
audio  system.  The  volume  of  the  Uconnect  Phone  can  be 
adjusted  either  from  the  radio  volume  control  knob  or 
from  the  steering  wheel  radio  control  (right  switch),  if 
equipped. 

The  radio  display  will  be  used  for  visual  prompts  from 
the  Uconnect  Phone  such  as  "CELL"  or  caller  ID  on 
certain  radios. 


114  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Operation 

Voice  commands  can  be  used  to  operate  the  Uconnect 
Phone  and  to  navigate  through  the  Uconnect  Phone 
menu  structure.  Voice  commands  are  required  after  most 
Uconnect  Phone  prompts.  You  will  be  prompted  for  a 
specific  command  and  then  guided  through  the  available 
options. 

• Prior  to  giving  a voice  command,  one  must  wait  for  the 
beep,  which  follows  the  "Ready"  prompt  or  another 
prompt. 

• For  certain  operations,  compound  commands  can  be 
used.  For  example,  instead  of  saying  "Setup"  and  then 
"Pair  a Device,"  the  following  compound  command 
can  be  said:  "Pair  a Bluetooth  Device." 

• For  each  feature  explanation  in  this  section,  only  the 
compound  form  of  the  voice  command  is  given.  You 
can  also  break  the  commands  into  parts  and  say  each 


part  of  the  command  when  you  are  asked  for  it.  For 
example,  you  can  use  the  compound  form  voice  com- 
mand "Phonebook  New  Entry,"  or  you  can  break  the 
compound  form  command  into  two  voice  commands: 
"Phonebook"  and  "New  Entry."  Please  remember,  the 
Uconnect  Phone  works  best  when  you  talk  in  a normal 
conversational  tone,  as  if  speaking  to  someone  sitting  a 
few  feet/meters  away  from  you. 

Voice  Command  Tree 

Refer  to  "Voice  Tree"  in  this  section. 

Help  Command 

If  you  need  assistance  at  any  prompt,  or  if  you  want  to 
know  your  options  at  any  prompt,  say  "Help"  following 
the  beep.  The  Uconnect  Phone  will  play  some  of  the 
options  at  any  prompt  if  you  ask  for  help. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  115 


To  activate  the  Uconnect  Phone,  simply  push  the  Phone 
^•button  and  follow  the  audible  prompts  for  direc- 
tions. Uconnect  Phone  sessions  begin  with  a push  of 
the  Phone  V*  button  on  the  radio  control  head. 

Cancel  Command 

At  any  prompt,  after  the  beep,  you  can  say  "Cancel"  and 
you  will  be  returned  to  the  main  menu.  However,  in  a 
few  instances  the  system  will  take  you  back  to  the 
previous  menu. 


The  following  are  general  phone  to  Uconnect  Phone 
pairing  instructions: 


1. 

2. 

3. 


Activate  the  Bluetooth  on  your  mobile  phone. 

Push  the  Phone  V*  button  to  begin. 

After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
"Device  Pairing." 


3 


4.  When  prompted,  after  the  beep,  say  "Pair  a Device" 
and  follow  the  audible  prompts. 


Pair  (Link)  Uconnect  Phone  To  A Mobile  Phone 

To  begin  using  your  Uconnect  Phone,  you  must  pair  your 
compatible  Bluetooth  enabled  mobile  phone. 

To  complete  the  pairing  process,  you  will  need  to  refer- 
ence your  mobile  phone  Owner's  Manual.  The  Uconnect 
website  may  also  provide  detailed  instructions  for  pair- 
ing. 


You  will  be  asked  to  say  a four-digit  Personal  Identifica- 
tion Number  (PIN),  which  you  will  later  need  to  enter 
into  your  mobile  phone.  You  can  enter  any  four-digit 
PIN.  You  will  not  need  to  remember  this  PIN  after  the 
initial  pairing  process. 


Information  Provided  by: 


116  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


For  identification  purposes,  you  will  be  prompted  to  give 
the  Uconnect  Phone  a name  for  your  mobile  phone.  Each 
mobile  phone  that  is  paired  should  be  given  a unique 
phone  name. 

You  will  then  be  asked  to  give  your  mobile  phone  a 
priority  level  between  one  and  seven,  with  one  being  the 
highest  priority.  You  can  pair  up  to  seven  mobile  phones 
to  your  Uconnect  Phone.  However,  at  any  given  time, 
only  one  mobile  phone  can  be  in  use,  connected  to  your 
Uconnect  System.  The  priority  allows  the  Uconnect 
Phone  to  know  which  mobile  phone  to  use  if  multiple 
mobile  phones  are  in  the  vehicle  at  the  same  time.  For 
example,  if  priority  three  and  priority  five  phones  are 
present  in  the  vehicle,  the  Uconnect  Phone  will  use  the 
priority  three  mobile  phone  when  you  make  a call.  You 
can  select  to  use  a lower  priority  mobile  phone  at  any 
time  (refer  to  "Advanced  Phone  Connectivity"  in  this 
section). 


Dial  By  Saying  A Number 

• Push  the  Phone  V*  button  to  begin. 

• After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
"Dial." 

• The  system  will  prompt  you  to  say  the  number  you 
want  to  call. 

• For  example,  you  can  say  "234-567-8901." 

• The  Uconnect  Phone  will  confirm  the  phone  number 
and  then  dial.  The  number  will  appear  in  the  display 
of  certain  radios. 

Call  By  Saying  A Name 

• Push  the  Phone  button  to  begin. 

• After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
"Call." 


Information  Provided  by: 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  117 


• The  system  will  prompt  you  to  say  the  name  of  the 
person  you  want  to  call. 

• After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
the  name  of  the  person  you  want  to  call.  For  example, 
you  can  say  "John  Doe,"  where  John  Doe  is  a previ- 
ously stored  name  entry  in  the  Uconnect  phonebook  or 
downloaded  phonebook.  To  learn  how  to  store  a name 
in  the  phonebook,  refer  to  "Add  Names  to  Your 
Uconnect  Phonebook." 

• The  Uconnect  system  will  confirm  the  name  and  then 
dial  the  corresponding  phone  number,  which  may 
appear  in  the  display  of  certain  radios. 

Add  Names  To  Your  Uconnect  Phonebook 

NOTE:  Adding  names  to  the  Uconnect  Phonebook  is 

recommended  when  the  vehicle  is  not  in  motion. 


To  add  names  to  the  Uconnect  phonebook  using  Voice 
Commands: 


1. 

2. 


Push  the  Phone  button  to  begin. 


After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
"Phonebook  New  Entry." 


3 


3.  When  prompted,  say  the  name  of  the  new  entry.  Use 
of  long  names  helps  the  Voice  Command  and  it  is 
recommended.  For  example,  say  "Robert  Smith"  or 
"Robert"  instead  of  "Bob." 


4.  When  prompted,  enter  the  number  designation  (e.g., 
"Home,"  "Work,"  "Mobile,"  or  "Other").  This  will 
allow  you  to  store  multiple  numbers  for  each  phone- 
book entry,  if  desired. 

5.  When  prompted,  recite  the  phone  number  for  the 
phonebook  entry  that  you  are  adding. 


_ . Information  Provided  by: 

0 = = 


118  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 

After  you  are  finished  adding  an  entry  into  the  phonebook,  • 
you  will  be  given  the  opportunity  to  add  more  phone 
numbers  to  the  current  entry  or  to  return  to  the  main  menu. 

The  Uconnect  Phone  will  allow  you  to  enter  up  to  32  • 

names  in  the  phonebook  with  each  name  having  up  to 
four  associated  phone  numbers  and  designations.  Each 
language  has  a separate  32  name  phonebook  accessible 
only  in  that  language.  In  addition,  if  equipped  and 
supported  by  your  phone,  Uconnect  Phone  automatically 
downloads  your  mobile  phone's  phonebook. 

Phonebook  Download  — Automatic  Phonebook 
Transfer  From  Mobile  Phone 

If  equipped  and  specifically  supported  by  your  phone, 
Uconnect  Phone  automatically  downloads  names  (text 
names)  and  number  entries  from  your  mobile  phone's 
phonebook.  Specific  Bluetooth  Phones  with  Phone  Book 
Access  Profile  may  support  this  feature.  See  Uconnect 
website  for  supported  phones. 


To  call  a name  from  the  Uconnect  Phonebook  or 
downloaded  Phonebook,  follow  the  procedure  in  "Call 
by  Saying  a Name"  section. 

Automatic  download  and  update,  if  supported,  begins 
as  soon  as  the  Bluetooth  wireless  phone  connection  is 
made  to  the  Uconnect  Phone,  for  example,  after  you 
start  the  vehicle. 

A maximum  of  2,000  entries  per  phone  will  be  down- 
loaded and  updated  every  time  a phone  is  connected 
to  the  Uconnect  Phone. 

Depending  on  the  maximum  number  of  entries  down- 
loaded, there  may  be  a short  delay  before  the  latest 
downloaded  names  can  be  used.  Until  then,  if  avail- 
able, the  previously  downloaded  phonebook  is  avail- 
able for  use. 

Only  the  phonebook  of  the  currently  connected  mobile 
phone  is  accessible. 


• Either  the  mobile  phone's  phonebook  or  the  mobile 
phone's  SIM  card  phonebook  is  downloaded. 

• This  downloaded  phonebook  cannot  be  edited  or 
deleted  on  the  Uconnect  Phone.  These  can  only  be 
edited  on  the  mobile  phone.  The  changes  are  trans- 
ferred and  updated  to  Uconnect  Phone  on  the  next 
phone  connection. 

Edit  Uconnect  Phonebook  Entries 

NOTE:  Editing  phonebook  entries  is  recommended 

when  the  vehicle  is  not  in  motion.  Automatic  down- 
loaded phonebook  entries  cannot  be  deleted  or  edited. 

• Push  the  Phone  V*  button  to  begin. 

• After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
"Phonebook  Edit." 

• You  will  then  be  asked  for  the  name  of  the  phonebook 
entry  that  you  wish  to  edit. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  119 

• Next,  choose  the  number  designation  (home,  work, 
mobile,  or  other)  that  you  wish  to  edit. 

• When  prompted,  recite  the  new  phone  number  for  the 
phonebook  entry  that  you  are  editing. 

After  you  are  finished  editing  an  entry  in  the  phonebook, 
you  will  be  given  the  opportunity  to  edit  another  entry  in 
the  phonebook,  call  the  number  you  just  edited,  or  return 
to  the  main  menu. 

"Phonebook  Edit"  can  be  used  to  add  another  phone 
number  to  a name  entry  that  already  exists  in  the 
phonebook.  For  example,  the  entry  John  Doe  may  have  a 
mobile  and  a home  number,  but  you  can  add  "John 
Doe's"  work  number  later  using  the  "Phonebook  Edit" 
feature. 

Delete  Uconnect  Phonebook  Entry 

NOTE:  Editing  phonebook  entries  is  recommended 
when  the  vehicle  is  not  in  motion. 


120  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


To  delete  a Uconnect  phonebook  entry  using  Voice  Com- 
mands: 

1.  Push  the  Phone  button  to  begin. 

2.  After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
"Phonebook  Delete." 

3.  After  you  enter  the  Phonebook  Delete  menu,  you  will 
then  be  asked  for  the  name  of  the  entry  that  you  wish 
to  delete.  You  can  either  say  the  name  of  a phonebook 
entry  that  you  wish  to  delete  or  you  can  say  "List 
Names"  to  hear  a list  of  the  entries  in  the  phonebook 
from  which  you  choose.  To  select  one  of  the  entries 
from  the  list,  push  the  Voice  Command  “ft™  button 
while  the  Uconnect  Phone  is  playing  the  desired 
entry  and  say  "Delete." 


4.  After  you  enter  the  name,  the  Uconnect  Phone  will  ask 
you  which  designation  you  wish  to  delete:  home, 
work,  mobile,  other,  or  all.  Say  the  designation  you 
wish  to  delete. 

• Note  that  only  the  phonebook  entry  in  the  current 
language  is  deleted. 

NOTE:  Automatic  downloaded  phonebook  entries  can- 
not be  deleted  or  edited. 

Delete/Erase  "All"  Uconnect  Phonebook  Entries 

To  delete,  or  erase  ALL  Uconnect  phonebook  entries 
using  Voice  Command: 

1.  Push  the  Phone  button  to  begin. 

2.  After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
"Phonebook  Erase  All." 

• The  Uconnect  Phone  will  ask  you  to  verify  that  you 
wish  to  delete  all  the  entries  from  the  phonebook. 

ovided  by: 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  121 


3.  After  confirmation,  the  phonebook  entries  will  be 
deleted. 

NOTE: 

• Only  the  phonebook  in  the  current  language  is  deleted. 

• Automatic  downloaded  phonebook  entries  cannot  be 
deleted  or  edited. 

List  All  Names  In  The  Uconnect  Phonebook 


3.  To  call  one  of  the  names  in  the  list,  push  the  Voice 
Command  <‘£™  button  during  the  playing  of  the 
desired  name,  and  say  "Call." 


NOTE:  The  user  can  also  exercise  "Edit"  or  "Delete" 
operations  at  this  point. 


3 


4.  The  Uconnect  Phone  will  then  prompt  you  as  to  the 
number  designation  you  wish  to  call. 

• The  selected  number  will  be  dialed. 


To  hear  a list  of  ALL  names  in  the  Uconnect  phonebook 
using  Voice  Commands: 

1.  Push  the  Phone  ^button  to  begin. 

2.  After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
"Phonebook  List  Names." 

• The  Uconnect  Phone  will  play  the  names  of  all  the 
phonebook  entries,  including  the  downloaded 
phonebook  entries,  if  available. 


Phone  Call  Features 

The  following  features  can  be  accessed  through  the 
Uconnect  Phone  if  the  feature(s)  are  available  on  your 
mobile  service  plan.  For  example,  if  your  mobile  service 
plan  provides  three-way  calling,  this  feature  can  be 
accessed  through  the  Uconnect  Phone.  Check  with  your 
mobile  service  provider  for  the  features  that  you  have. 


Information  Provided  by: 


122  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Answer  Or  Reject  An  Incoming  Call  — No  Call 
Currently  In  Progress 

When  you  receive  a call  on  your  mobile  phone,  the 
Uconnect  Phone  will  interrupt  the  vehicle  audio  system, 
if  on,  and  will  ask  if  you  would  like  to  answer  the  call. 

• Push  the  Phone  V*  button  to  accept  the  call. 

• To  reject  the  call,  push  and  hold  the  Phone  V*  button 
until  you  hear  a single  beep,  indicating  that  the 
incoming  call  was  rejected. 

Answer  Or  Reject  An  Incoming  Call  — Call 
Currently  In  Progress 

If  a call  is  currently  in  progress  and  you  have  another 
incoming  call,  you  will  hear  the  same  network  tones  for 
call  waiting  that  you  normally  hear  when  using  your 
mobile  phone. 

• Push  the  Phone  V*  button  to  place  the  current  call  on 
hold  and  answer  the  incoming  call. 

03=/ 


NOTE:  The  Uconnect  Phone  compatible  phones  in  the 
market  today  do  not  support  rejecting  an  incoming  call 
when  another  call  is  in  progress.  Therefore,  the  user  can 
only  answer  an  incoming  call  or  ignore  it. 

Making  A Second  Call  While  Current  Call  Is  In 
Progress 

To  make  a second  call  while  you  are  currently  on  a call, 
push  the  Voice  Command  button  and  say  "Dial"  or 
"Call"  followed  by  the  phone  number  or  phonebook 
entry  you  wish  to  call.  The  first  call  will  be  on  hold 
while  the  second  call  is  in  progress.  To  go  back  to  the 
first  call,  refer  to  "Toggling  Between  Calls"  in  this 
section.  To  combine  two  calls,  refer  to  "Conference 
Call"  in  this  section. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  123 


Place/Retrieve  A Call  From  Flold 


Conference  Call 


To  put  a call  on  hold: 

1.  Push  the  Phone  V*  button  until  you  hear  a single 
beep. 

• This  indicates  that  the  call  is  on  hold. 

• To  bring  the  call  back  from  hold,  push  and  hold  the 
Phone  V* button  until  you  hear  a single  beep. 

Toggling  Between  Calls 

If  two  calls  are  in  progress  (one  active  and  one  on  hold), 
push  the  Phone  V*  button  until  you  hear  a single  beep, 
indicating  that  the  active  and  hold  status  of  the  two 
calls  have  switched.  Only  one  call  can  be  placed  on 
hold  at  a time. 


When  two  calls  are  in  progress  (one  active  and  one  on 
hold): 


1.  Push  and  hold  the  Phone  V*  button  until  you  hear  a 
double  beep,  indicating  that  the  two  calls  have  been 
joined  into  one  conference  call. 


3 


Three-Way  Calling 

To  initiate  three-way  calling,  push  the  Voice  Command 
“ft™  button  while  a call  is  in  progress,  and  make  a 
second  phone  call,  as  described  under  "Making  a 
Second  Call  While  Current  Call  is  in  Progress."  After 
the  second  call  has  established,  push  and  hold  the 
Phone  V*  button  until  you  hear  a double  beep,  indi- 
cating that  the  two  calls  have  been  joined  into  one 
conference  call. 


Information  Provided  by: 


124  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

Call  Termination 

To  end  a call  in  progress: 

1.  Momentarily  push  the  Phone  button. 

• Only  the  active  call(s)  will  be  terminated  and  if  there 
is  a call  on  hold,  it  will  become  the  new  active  call.  If 
the  active  call  is  terminated  by  the  phone  far  end,  a 
call  on  hold  may  not  become  active  automatically. 
This  is  cell  phone-dependent. 

2.  To  bring  the  call  back  from  hold,  push  and  hold  the 
Phone  button  until  you  hear  a single  beep. 

Redial 

To  redial  the  last  number  called  from  your  mobile  phone 

using  Voice  Command: 

1.  Push  the  Phone  V*  button  to  begin. 

2.  After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
"Redial." 


• The  Uconnect  Phone  will  call  the  last  number  that 
was  dialed  from  your  mobile  phone. 

NOTE:  This  may  not  be  the  last  number  dialed  from  the 
Uconnect  Phone. 

Call  Continuation 

Call  continuation  is  the  progression  of  a phone  call  on  the 
Uconnect  Phone  after  the  vehicle  ignition  has  been 
switched  to  OFF.  Call  continuation  functionality  avail- 
able on  the  vehicle  can  be  any  one  of  three  types: 

1.  After  the  ignition  is  switched  to  OFF,  a call  can 
continue  on  the  Uconnect  Phone  either  until  the  call 
ends,  or  until  the  vehicle  battery  condition  dictates 
cessation  of  the  call  on  the  Uconnect  Phone  and 
transfer  of  the  call  to  the  mobile  phone. 


/M_  = F=? 


2.  After  the  ignition  is  cycled  to  OFF,  a call  can  continue 
on  the  Uconnect  Phone  for  a certain  duration,  after 
which  the  call  is  automatically  transferred  from  the 
Uconnect  Phone  to  the  mobile  phone. 

3.  An  active  call  is  automatically  transferred  to  the 
mobile  phone  after  the  ignition  is  cycled  to  OFF. 

Uconnect  Phone  Features 

Language  Selection 

To  change  the  language  that  the  Uconnect  Phone  is  using: 

1.  Push  the  Phone  button  to  begin. 

2.  After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
the  name  of  the  language  you  wish  to  switch  to 
English,  Espanol,  or  Francais. 

3.  Continue  to  follow  the  system  prompts  to  complete 
the  language  selection. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  125 

After  selecting  one  of  the  languages,  all  prompts  and 
voice  commands  will  be  in  that  language. 

NOTE:  After  every  Uconnect  Phone  language  change 
operation,  only  the  language-specific  32  name  phone- 
book  is  usable.  The  paired  phone  name  is  not  language- 
specific  and  is  usable  across  all  languages. 

Emergency  Assistance 

If  you  are  in  an  emergency  and  the  mobile  phone  is 
reachable: 

• Pick  up  the  phone  and  manually  dial  the  emergency 
number  for  your  area. 

If  the  phone  is  not  reachable  and  the  Uconnect  Phone  is 
operational,  you  may  reach  the  emergency  number  as 
follows: 

• Push  the  Phone  V*  button  to  begin. 


126  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


• After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
"Emergency"  and  the  Uconnect  Phone  will  instruct  the 
paired  mobile  phone  to  call  the  emergency  number. 
This  feature  is  supported  in  the  U.S.,  Canada,  and 
Mexico. 

NOTE: 

• The  emergency  number  dialed  is  based  on  the  country 
where  the  vehicle  is  purchased  (911  for  the  U.S.  and 
Canada  and  060  for  Mexico).  The  number  dialed  may 
not  be  applicable  with  the  available  mobile  service  and 
area. 

• If  supported,  this  number  may  be  programmable  on 
some  systems.  To  do  this,  push  the  Phone  button 
and  say  "Setup,"  followed  by  "Emergency." 

• The  Uconnect  Phone  does  slightly  lower  your  chances 
of  successfully  making  a phone  call  as  to  that  for  the 
mobile  phone  directly. 


WARNING! 


To  use  your  Uconnect  Phone  System  in  an  emergency, 
your  mobile  phone  must  be: 

• Turned  on. 

• Paired  to  the  Uconnect  System. 

• Have  network  coverage. 

Roadside  Assistance/Towing  Assistance 

If  you  need  roadside  assistance: 

• Push  the  Phone  V*  button  to  begin. 

• After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
"Towing  Assistance." 


/XL 


NOTE:  You  should  program  the  desired  Towing  Assis- 
tance phone  number  using  the  Voice  Command  system. 
To  do  this,  push  the  Phone  V*  button  and  say  "Setup," 
followed  by  "Towing  Assistance."  When  prompted 
say  1-800-521-2779  for  U.S. /Canada,  say  55-14-3454 
for  Mexico  City  and  1-800-712-3040  for  outside  Mexico 
City  in  Mexico. 

Paging 

To  learn  how  to  page,  refer  to  "Working  with  Automated 
Systems."  Paging  works  properly  except  for  pagers  of 
certain  companies,  which  time  out  a little  too  soon  to 
work  properly  with  the  Uconnect  Phone. 

Voice  Mail  Calling 

To  learn  how  to  access  your  voice  mail,  refer  to  "Working 
with  Automated  Systems." 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  127 
Working  With  Automated  Systems 

This  method  is  used  in  instances  where  one  generally  has 
to  push  numbers  on  the  mobile  phone  keypad  while 
navigating  through  an  automated  telephone  system. 

You  can  use  your  Uconnect  Phone  to  access  a voice  mail 
system  or  an  automated  service,  such  as  a paging  service 
or  automated  customer  service  line.  Some  services  re- 
quire immediate  response  selection.  In  some  instances, 
that  may  be  too  quick  for  use  of  the  Uconnect  Phone. 

When  calling  a number  with  your  Uconnect  Phone  that 
normally  requires  you  to  enter  in  a touch-tone  sequence 
on  your  mobile  phone  keypad,  you  can  push  the  Voice 
Command  button  and  say  the  sequence  you  wish  to 
enter,  followed  by  the  word  "Send."  For  example,  if 
required  to  enter  your  PIN  followed  with  a pound,  (3 
7 4 6#),  you  can  push  the  Voice  Command  ^button 
and  say,  "3  7 4 6 # Send."  Saying  a number,  or 
sequence  of  numbers,  followed  by  "Send,"  is  also  to  be 


128  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

used  for  navigating  through  an  automated  customer 
service  center  menu  structure,  and  to  leave  a number 
on  a pager. 

You  can  also  send  stored  Uconnect  phonebook  entries  as 
tones  for  fast  and  easy  access  to  voice  mail  and  pager 
entries.  To  use  this  feature,  dial  the  number  you  wish  to 
call  and  then  push  the  Voice  Command  button  and 
say  "Send."  The  system  will  prompt  you  to  enter  the 
name  or  number  and  say  the  name  of  the  phonebook 
entry  you  wish  to  send.  The  Uconnect  Phone  will  then 
send  the  corresponding  phone  number  associated 
with  the  phonebook  entry,  as  tones  over  the  phone. 

NOTE: 

• You  may  not  hear  all  of  the  tones  due  to  mobile  phone 
network  configurations.  This  is  normal. 


• Some  paging  and  voice  mail  systems  have  system  time 
out  settings  that  are  too  short  and  may  not  allow  the 
use  of  this  feature. 

Barge  In  — Overriding  Prompts 

The  "Voice  Command"  button  can  be  used  when  you 
wish  to  skip  part  of  a prompt  and  issue  your  voice 
command  immediately.  For  example,  if  a prompt  is 
asking  "Would  you  like  to  pair  a phone,  clear  a...,"  you 
could  push  the  Voice  Command  ('^button  and  say, 
"Pair  a Phone"  to  select  that  option  without  having  to 
listen  to  the  rest  of  the  voice  prompt. 

Turning  Confirmation  Prompts  ON/OFF 

Turning  confirmation  prompts  off  will  stop  the  system 
from  confirming  your  choices  (e.g.,  the  Uconnect  Phone 
will  not  repeat  a phone  number  before  you  dial  it). 

1.  Push  the  Phone  V*  button  to  begin. 


i Provided  by: 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  129 


2.  After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
one  of  the  following: 

• "Setup  Confirmation  Prompts  On" 

• "Setup  Confirmation  Prompts  Off" 

Phone  And  Network  Status  Indicators 

If  available  on  the  radio  and/or  on  a premium  display 
such  as  the  instrument  panel  cluster,  and  supported  by 
your  mobile  phone,  the  Uconnect  Phone  will  provide 
notification  to  inform  you  of  your  phone  and  network 
status  when  you  are  attempting  to  make  a phone  call 
using  Uconnect  Phone.  The  status  is  given  for  network 
signal  strength,  phone  battery  strength,  etc. 

Dialing  Using  The  Mobile  Phone  Keypad 

You  can  dial  a phone  number  with  your  mobile  phone 
keypad  and  still  use  the  Uconnect  Phone  (while  dialing 
via  the  mobile  phone  keypad,  the  user  must  exercise 
caution  and  take  precautionary  safety  measures).  By 


dialing  a number  with  your  paired  Bluetooth  mobile 
phone,  the  audio  will  be  played  through  your  vehicle's 
audio  system.  The  Uconnect  Phone  will  work  the  same  as 
if  you  dial  the  number  using  Voice  Command. 

NOTE:  Certain  brands  of  mobile  phones  do  not  send  the 
dial  ring  to  the  Uconnect  Phone  to  play  it  on  the  vehicle 
audio  system,  so  you  will  not  hear  it.  Under  this  situa- 
tion, after  successfully  dialing  a number  the  user  may  feel 
that  the  call  did  not  go  through  even  though  the  call  is  in 
progress.  Once  your  call  is  answered,  you  will  hear  the 
audio. 

Mute/Un-Mute  (Mute  ON/OFF) 

When  you  mute  the  Uconnect  Phone,  you  will  still  be 
able  to  hear  the  conversation  coming  from  the  other 
party,  but  the  other  party  will  not  be  able  to  hear  you.  To 
mute  the  Uconnect  Phone: 

• Push  the  Voice  Command  button. 


130  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

• Following  the  beep,  say  "Mute." 

To  un-mute  the  Uconnect  Phone: 

• Push  the  Voice  Command  button. 

• Following  the  beep,  say  "Mute  off." 

Advanced  Phone  Connectivity 

Transfer  Call  To  And  From  Mobile  Phone 

The  Uconnect  Phone  allows  ongoing  calls  to  be  trans- 
ferred from  your  mobile  phone  to  the  Uconnect  Phone 
without  terminating  the  call. 

To  transfer  an  ongoing  call  from  your  Uconnect  Phone 
paired  mobile  phone  to  the  Uconnect  Phone  or  vice  versa 
using  Voice  Command: 

1.  Push  the  Voice  Command  <‘£™  button  and  say  "Trans- 
fer Call." 


Connect  Or  Disconnect  Link  Between  The 
Uconnect  Phone  And  Mobile  Phone 

Your  mobile  phone  can  be  paired  with  many  different 
electronic  devices,  but  can  only  be  actively  "connected" 
with  one  electronic  device  at  a time. 

If  you  would  like  to  connect  or  disconnect  the  Bluetooth 
connection  between  your  mobile  phone  and  the 
Uconnect  Phone  System,  follow  the  instructions  de- 
scribed in  your  mobile  phone  User's  Manual. 

List  Paired  Mobile  Phone  Names 

• Push  the  Phone  V*  button  to  begin. 

• After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
"Setup  Phone  Pairing." 

• When  prompted,  say  "List  Phones." 


Information  Provided  by: 


• The  Uconnect  Phone  will  play  the  phone  names  of  all 
paired  mobile  phones  in  order  from  the  highest  to  the 
lowest  priority.  To  "Select"  or  "Delete"  a paired  phone 
being  announced,  push  the  Voice  Command  <‘£™  but- 
ton and  say  "Select"  or  "Delete."  Also,  see  the  next 
two  sections  for  an  alternate  way  to  "Select"  or 
"Delete"  a paired  phone. 

Select  Another  Mobile  Phone 

This  feature  allows  you  to  select  and  start  using  another 

phone  paired  with  the  Uconnect  Phone. 

• Push  the  Phone  V*  button  to  begin. 

• After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
"Setup  Select  Phone"  and  follow  the  prompts. 

• You  can  also  push  the  Phone  V*  button  at  any  time 
while  the  list  is  being  played,  and  then  choose  the 
phone  that  you  wish  to  select. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  131 


• The  selected  phone  will  be  used  for  the  next  phone 
call.  If  the  selected  phone  is  not  available,  the  Uconnect 
Phone  will  return  to  using  the  highest  priority  phone 
present  in  or  near  (approximately  within  30  ft.  [9  m]) 
the  vehicle. 


3 


Delete  Uconnect  Phone  Paired  Mobile  Phones 


To  delete  mobile  phones  paired  with  the  Uconnect  phone 
using  Voice  Commands: 

1.  Push  the  Phone  button  to  begin. 

2.  After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
"Setup  Phone  Pairing." 

3.  At  the  next  prompt,  say  "Delete"  and  follow  the 
prompts. 

• You  can  also  push  the  Phone  V*  button  at  any  time 
while  the  list  is  being  played,  and  choose  the 
phone  you  wish  to  delete. 


i Provided  by: 

/M_  = F=R 


132  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Things  You  Should  Know  About  Your  Uconnect 
Phone 

Uconnect  Phone  Tutorial 

To  hear  a brief  tutorial  of  the  system  features,  push  the 
Phone  V*  button  and  say  "Uconnect  Tutorial." 

Voice  Training 

For  users  experiencing  difficulty  with  the  system  recogniz- 
ing their  voice  commands  or  numbers,  the  Uconnect  Phone 
Voice  Training  feature  may  be  used.  To  enter  this  training 
mode,  follow  one  of  the  two  following  procedures: 

• From  outside  the  Uconnect  Phone  mode  (e.g.,  from 
radio  mode),  push  and  hold  the  Voice  Command 

button  for  five  seconds  until  the  session  begins, 
or, 

• Push  the  Voice  Command  <‘£™  button  and  say  the 
"Voice  Training,"  "System  Training,"  or  "Start  Voice 
Training"  command. 


You  can  either  push  the  Uconnect  Phone  button  to  restore 
the  factory  setting  or  repeat  the  words  and  phrases  when 
prompted  by  the  Uconnect  Phone.  For  best  results,  the 
Voice  Training  session  should  be  completed  when  the 
vehicle  is  parked  with  the  engine  running,  all  windows 
closed,  and  the  blower  fan  switched  off. 

This  procedure  may  be  repeated  with  a new  user.  The 
system  will  adapt  to  the  last  trained  voice  only. 

Reset 

To  Reset  all  settings  using  Voice  Command: 

1.  Push  the  Phone  button. 

2.  After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
"Setup,"  then  "Reset." 

• This  will  delete  all  phone  pairing,  phone  book  en- 
tries, and  other  settings  in  all  language  modes.  The 
System  will  prompt  you  before  resetting  to  factory 
settings. 


Voice  Command 

For  best  performance: 

• Adjust  the  rearview  mirror  to  provide  at  least  Vi  inch 
(1  cm)  gap  between  the  overhead  console  (if  equipped) 
and  the  mirror. 

• Always  wait  for  the  beep  before  speaking. 

• Speak  normally  without  pausing,  just  as  you  would 
speak  to  a person  sitting  a few  feet /meters  away  from 
you. 

• Make  sure  that  no  one  other  than  you  is  speaking 
during  a Voice  Command  period. 

Performance  is  maximized  under: 

• Low-to-medium  blower  setting 

• Low-to-medium  vehicle  speed 


■ UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  133 

• Smooth  road  surface 

• Fully  closed  windows 

• Dry  weather  condition 

NOTE: 

• Even  though  the  system  is  designed  for  users  speaking 
in  North  American  English,  French,  and  Spanish  ac- 
cents, the  system  may  not  always  work  for  some. 

• When  navigating  through  an  automated  system  such 
as  voice  mail,  or  when  sending  a page,  at  the  end  of 
speaking  the  digit  string,  make  sure  to  say  "Send." 

• Storing  names  in  the  phonebook  when  the  vehicle  is 
not  in  motion  is  recommended. 

• It  is  not  recommended  to  store  similar  sounding  names 
in  the  Uconnect  Phonebook. 


• Low  road  noise 


iformation  Provided  by: 


134  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

• Phonebook  (Downloaded  and  Uconnect  Phone  Local) 
name  recognition  rate  is  optimized  when  the  entries 
are  not  similar. 

• Numbers  must  be  spoken  in  single  digits.  "800"  must 
be  spoken  "eight-zero-zero"  not  "eight  hundred." 

• You  can  say  "O"  (letter  "O")  for  "0"  (zero). 

• Even  though  international  dialing  for  most  number 
combinations  is  supported,  some  shortcut  dialing 
number  combinations  may  not  be  supported. 

Far  End  Audio  Performance 

Audio  quality  is  maximized  under: 

• Low-To-Medium  Blower  Setting 

• Low-To-Medium  Vehicle  Speed 

• Low  Road  Noise 

• Smooth  Road  Surface 


• Fully  Closed  Windows 

• Dry  Weather  Conditions 

• Operation  From  The  Driver's  Seat 

• Performance,  such  as  audio  clarity,  echo,  and  loudness 
to  a large  degree  rely  on  the  phone  and  network,  and 
not  the  Uconnect  Phone 

• Echo  at  the  phone  far  end  can  sometimes  be  reduced 
by  lowering  the  in-vehicle  audio  volume 

Recent  Calls 

If  your  phone  supports  "Automatic  Phonebook  Down- 
load," Uconnect  Phone  can  list  your  Outgoing,  Incoming 

and  Missed  Calls. 

Voice  Text  Reply 

Uconnect  Phone  can  read  or  send  new  messages  on  your 

phone. 


Read  Messages: 

If  you  receive  a new  text  message  while  your  phone  is 
connected  to  Uconnect  Phone,  an  announcement  will  be 
made  to  notify  you  that  you  have  a new  text  message.  If 
you  wish  to  hear  the  new  message: 

1.  Push  the  Phone  ^button. 

2.  After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
"SMS  Read"  or  "Read  Messages." 

3.  Uconnect  Phone  will  play  the  new  text  message  for  you. 

After  reading  a message,  you  can  "Reply"  or  "Forward" 
the  message  using  Uconnect  Phone. 

Send  Messages: 

You  can  send  messages  using  Uconnect  Phone.  To  send  a 
new  message: 

1.  Push  the  Phone  V*  button. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  135 

2.  After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
"SMS  Send"  or  "Send  Message." 

3.  You  can  either  say  the  message  you  wish  to  send  or 
say  "List  Messages."  There  are  20  preset  messages. 

To  send  a message,  push  the  Voice  Command  button 
while  the  system  is  listing  the  message  and  say 
"Send."  Uconnect  Phone  will  prompt  you  to  say  the 
name  or  number  of  the  person  you  wish  to  send  the 
message  to. 

List  of  Preset  Messages: 

1.  Yes. 

2.  No. 

3.  Where  are  you? 

4.  I need  more  direction. 


136  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


6.  Why? 

7.  I love  you. 

8.  Call  me. 

9.  Call  me  later. 

10.  Thanks. 

11.  See  you  in  15  minutes. 

12.  I am  on  my  way. 

13.  I'll  be  late. 

14.  Are  you  there  yet? 

15.  Where  are  we  meeting? 

16.  Can  this  wait? 

17.  Bye  for  now. 

18.  When  can  we  meet? 


In  forma  tii 

CDS 


19.  Send  number  to  call. 

20.  Start  without  me. 

Turn  Voice  Text  Reply  Incoming  Announcement  ON/ 
OFF 

Turning  the  Voice  Text  Reply  Incoming  Announcement 
OFF  will  stop  the  system  from  announcing  the  new 
incoming  messages. 

To  turn  Voice  Text  Reply  incoming  announcement  on  or 
off  using  Voice  Command: 

1.  Push  the  Phone  V*  button. 

2.  After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  the  following  beep,  say 
"Setup  Incoming  Message  Announcement,"  you  will 
then  be  given  a choice  to  change  it. 


Provided  by: 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  137 


Bluetooth  Communication  Link 


Power-Up 


Mobile  phones  have  been  found  to  lose  connection  to  the 
Uconnect  Phone.  When  this  happens,  the  connection  can 
generally  be  reestablished  by  switching  the  phone  off/ 
on.  Your  mobile  phone  is  recommended  to  remain  in 
Bluetooth  ON  mode. 


After  switching  the  ignition  key  from  OFF  to  either  the 
ON  or  ACC  position,  or  after  a language  change,  you 
must  wait  at  least  15  seconds  prior  to  using  the  system. 


3 


Information  Provided  by: 

zd=/m 


138  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Voice  Tree  Main  Menu 


Note:  Available  Voice  commands  are  shown  in  bold  face  and  are  underlined. 


030772523 


Information  Provided  by: 

= = 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  139 


Note:  Available  Voice  commands  are  shown  in  bold  face  and  are  underlined.  8ic6bfso 


3 


_ Information  Provided  by: 

;=>  = /\ 


140  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Voice  Tree  - Setup 


Note:  Available  Voice  commands  are  shown  in  bold  face  and  are  underlined.  030605540 


Information  Provided  by: 


Voice  Commands 


Primary 

Alternate  (s) 

zero 

one 

two 

three 

four 

five 

six 

seven 

eight 

nine 

star  (*) 

plus  (+) 

pound  (#) 

add  location 

UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  141 


Primary 

Alternate  (s) 

all 

call 

cancel 

confirmation  prompts 

continue 

delete 

dial 

download 

edit 

emergency 

English 

erase  all 

Espanol 

Francais 

help 

142  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Primary 

Alternate  (s) 

home 

language 

list  names 

list  phones 

mobile 

mute 

mute  off 

new  entry 

no 

other 

pair  a phone 

phone  pairing 

pairing 

phonebook 

phone  book 

previous 

record  again 

Primary 

Alternate  (s) 

redial 

return  to  main  menu 

return  or  main  menu 

select  phone 

select 

send 

set  up 

phone  settings  or  phone 
set  up 

towing  assistance 

transfer  call 

Uconnect  Tutorial 

voice  training 

work 

yes 

i Provided  by: 


General  Information 


This  device  complies  with  Part  15  of  the  FCC  rules  and 
RSS  210  of  Industry  Canada.  Operation  is  subject  to  the 
following  conditions: 

• Changes  or  modifications  not  expressly  approved  by 
the  party  responsible  for  compliance  could  void  the 
user's  authority  to  operate  the  equipment. 

• This  device  may  not  cause  harmful  interference. 

• This  device  must  accept  any  interference  received, 
including  interference  that  may  cause  undesired  op- 
eration. 


■ UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  143 

VOICE  COMMAND  — IF  EQUIPPED 
Voice  Command  System  Operation 

/,  The  Uconnect  Voice  Command  system  allows 
(«^  VR  you  to  control  your  AM,  FM  radio,  disk  player, 
USB  mass  storage  class  device,  iPod  family  of 
devices,  Bluetooth  Streaming  Audio  Device, 
satellite  radio,  and  a memo  recorder. 

NOTE:  Take  care  to  speak  into  the  Voice  Interface  System 
as  calmly  and  normally  as  possible.  The  ability  of  the 
Voice  Interface  System  to  recognize  user  voice  commands 
may  be  negatively  affected  by  rapid  speaking  or  a raised 
voice  level. 


144  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


WARNING! 

Any  voice  commanded  system  should  be  used  only 
in  safe  driving  conditions  following  all  applicable 
laws,  including  laws  regarding  phone  use.  Your  at- 
tention should  be  focused  on  safely  operating  the 
vehicle.  Failure  to  do  so  may  result  in  a collision 
causing  serious  injury  or  death. 

When  you  push  the  Voice  Command  (,£™  button,  you  will 
hear  a beep.  The  beep  is  your  signal  to  give  a com- 
mand. 

NOTE:  If  you  do  not  say  a command  within  a few 
seconds,  the  system  will  present  you  with  a list  of 
options. 

If  you  would  like  to  interrupt  the  system  while  it  lists 
options,  push  the  Voice  Command  ^“"button,  listen  for 
the  beep,  and  say  your  command. 


Pushing  the  Voice  Command  button  while  the  sys- 
tem is  speaking  is  known  as  "barging  in."  The  system 
will  be  interrupted,  and  after  the  beep,  you  can  add  or 
change  commands.  This  will  become  helpful  once  you 
start  to  learn  the  options. 

NOTE:  At  any  time,  you  can  say  the  words  "Cancel," 
"Help"  or  "Main  Menu." 

These  commands  are  universal  and  can  be  used  from  any 
menu.  All  other  commands  can  be  used  depending  upon 
the  active  application. 

When  using  this  system,  you  should  speak  clearly  and  at 
a normal  speaking  volume. 

The  system  will  best  recognize  your  speech  if  the  win- 
dows are  closed,  and  the  heater/ air  conditioning  blower 
is  set  to  low. 

At  any  point,  if  the  system  does  not  recognize  one  of  your 
commands,  you  will  be  prompted  to  repeat  it. 


To  hear  the  first  available  Menu,  push  the  Voice  Com- 
mand button  and  say  "Help"  or  "Main  Menu." 

Commands 

The  Voice  Command  system  understands  two  types  of 
commands,  Universal  commands  and  Local  commands. 
Universal  commands  are  available  at  all  times.  Local 
commands  are  available  if  the  supported  radio  mode  is 
active. 

Changing  The  Volume 

1.  Start  a dialogue  by  pushing  the  Voice  Command 
t*'?™  button. 

2.  Say  a command  (e.g.,  "Help"). 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  145 

3.  Use  the  ON/OFF  VOLUME  rotary  knob  to  adjust  the 
volume  to  a comfortable  level  while  the  Voice  Com- 
mand system  is  speaking.  Please  note  the  volume 
setting  for  Voice  Command  is  different  than  the  audio 
system. 

Main  Menu 

Start  a dialogue  by  pushing  the  Voice  Command  but- 
ton. You  may  say  "Main  Menu"  to  switch  to  the  main 

menu. 

In  this  mode,  you  can  say  the  following  commands: 

• "Radio  AM"  (to  switch  to  the  radio  AM  mode) 

• "Radio  FM"  (to  switch  to  radio  FM  mode) 

• "Sat"  (to  switch  to  Satellite  radio  mode) 

• "Disc"  (to  switch  to  the  disc  mode) 

• "USB"  (to  switch  to  USB  mode) 


146  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

• "Bluetooth  Streaming"  (to  switch  to  Bluetooth  Stream- 
ing mode) 

• "Memo"  (to  switch  to  the  memo  recorder) 

• "System  Setup"  (to  switch  to  system  setup) 

Radio  AM 

To  switch  to  the  AM  band,  say  "AM"  or  "Radio  AM."  In 
this  mode,  you  may  say  the  following  commands: 

• "Frequency  #"  (to  change  the  frequency) 

• "Next  Station"  (to  select  the  next  station) 

• "Previous  Station"  (to  select  the  previous  station) 

• "Radio  Menu"  (to  switch  to  the  radio  menu) 

• "Main  Menu"  (to  switch  to  the  main  menu) 

Q 


Radio  FM 

To  switch  to  the  FM  band,  say  "FM"  or  "Radio  FM."  In 
this  mode,  you  may  say  the  following  commands: 

• "Frequency  #"  (to  change  the  frequency) 

• "Next  Station"  (to  select  the  next  station) 

• "Previous  Station"  (to  select  the  previous  station) 

• "Menu  Radio"  (to  switch  to  the  radio  menu) 

• "Main  Menu"  (to  switch  to  the  main  menu) 

Satellite  Radio 

To  switch  to  satellite  radio  mode,  say  "Sat"  or  "Satellite 
Radio."  In  this  mode,  you  may  say  the  following  com- 
mands: 

• "Channel  Number"  (to  change  the  channel  by  its 
spoken  number) 

• "Next  Channel"  (to  select  the  next  channel) 


• "Previous  Channel"  (to  select  the  previous  channel) 

• "List  Channel"  (to  hear  a list  of  available  channels) 

• "Select  Name"  (to  say  the  name  of  a channel) 

• "Menu  Radio"  (to  switch  to  the  radio  menu) 

• "Main  Menu"  (to  switch  to  the  main  menu) 

Disc  Mode 

To  switch  to  the  disc  mode,  say  "Disc."  In  this  mode,  you 
may  say  the  following  commands: 

• "Track"  (#)  (to  change  the  track) 

• "Next  Track"  (to  play  the  next  track) 

• "Previous  Track"  (to  play  the  previous  track) 

• "Main  Menu"  (to  switch  to  the  main  menu) 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  147 
USB  Mode 

To  switch  to  USB  mode,  say  "USB."  In  this  mode,  you 
may  say  the  following  commands: 

• "Next  Track"  (to  play  the  next  track) 

• "Previous  Track"  (to  play  the  previous  track) 

• "Play"  (to  play  an  Artist  Name,  Playlist  Name,  Album 
Name,  Track  Name,  etc.) 

Bluetooth  Streaming  (BT)  Mode 

To  switch  to  Bluetooth  Streaming  (BT)  mode,  say 
"Bluetooth  Streaming."  In  this  mode,  you  may  say  the 
following  commands: 

• "Play"  (to  play  the  current  track) 

• "Pause"  (to  pause  the  current  track) 

• "Next  Track"  (to  play  the  next  track) 

• "Previous  Track"  (to  play  the  previous  track) 


148  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 
Memo  Mode 

To  switch  to  the  voice  recorder  mode,  say  "Memo."  In 
this  mode,  you  may  say  the  following  commands: 

• "New  Memo"  (to  record  a new  memo)  — During  the 
recording,  you  may  push  the  Voice  Command  but- 
ton to  stop  recording.  You  proceed  by  saying  one  of 
the  following  commands: 

- "Save"  (to  save  the  memo) 

- "Continue"  (to  continue  recording) 

- "Delete"  (to  delete  the  recording) 

• "Play  Memos"  (to  play  previously  recorded  memos)  — 
During  the  playback  you  may  push  the  Voice  Com- 
mand (,£v" button  to  stop  playing  memos.  You  pro- 
ceed by  saying  one  of  the  following  commands: 

- "Repeat"  (to  repeat  a memo) 

- "Next"  (to  play  the  next  memo) 


- "Previous"  (to  play  the  previous  memo) 

- "Delete"  (to  delete  a memo) 

- "Delete  All"  (to  delete  all  memos) 

Setup 

To  switch  to  system  setup,  you  may  say  one  of  the 
following: 

• "Change  to  setup" 

• "Switch  to  system  setup" 

• "Main  menu  setup" 

• "Switch  to  setup" 

In  this  mode,  you  may  say  the  following  commands: 

• "Language  English" 

• "Language  French" 

• "Language  Spanish" 

svided  by: 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  149 


• "Tutorial" 

• "Voice  Training" 

NOTE:  Keep  in  mind  that  you  have  to  push  the  Voice 
Command  button  first  and  wait  for  the  beep  before 
speaking  the  "Barge  In"  commands. 

Voice  Training 

For  users  experiencing  difficulty  with  the  system  recog- 
nizing their  voice  commands  or  numbers  the  Uconnect 
Voice  "Voice  Training"  feature  may  be  used. 

1.  Push  the  Voice  Command  button,  say  "System 
Setup"  and  once  you  are  in  that  menu  then  say 
"Voice  Training."  This  will  train  your  own  voice  to 
the  system  and  will  improve  recognition. 


2.  Repeat  the  words  and  phrases  when  prompted  by 
Uconnect  Voice.  For  best  results,  the  "Voice  Training" 
session  should  be  completed  when  the  vehicle  is 
parked,  engine  running,  all  windows  closed,  and  the 
blower  fan  switched  off.  This  procedure  may  be  re- 
peated with  a new  user.  The  system  will  adapt  to  the 
last  trained  voice  only. 


3 


SEATS 

Seats  are  a part  of  the  Occupant  Restraint  System  of  the 
vehicle. 


WARNING! 

• It  is  dangerous  to  ride  in  a cargo  area,  inside  or 
outside  of  a vehicle.  In  a collision,  people  riding  in 
these  areas  are  more  likely  to  be  seriously  injured 
or  killed. 


Information 


nformation  Provided  by: 


(Continued) 


150  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Do  not  allow  people  to  ride  in  any  area  of  your 
vehicle  that  is  not  equipped  with  seats  and  seat 
belts.  In  a collision,  people  riding  in  these  areas  are 
more  likely  to  be  seriously  injured  or  killed. 

• Be  sure  everyone  in  your  vehicle  is  in  a seat  and 
using  a seat  belt  properly. 

Power  Seats  — If  Equipped 

Some  models  may  be  equipped  with  a power  driver's 
seat.  The  power  seat  switch  is  located  on  the  outboard 
side  of  the  seat  near  the  floor.  Use  the  switch  to  move  the 
seat  up,  down,  forward,  rearward,  or  to  tilt  the  seat. 


Power  Seat  Switch 


WARNING! 


• Adjusting  a seat  while  driving  may  be  dangerous. 
Moving  a seat  while  driving  could  result  in  loss  of 
control  which  could  cause  a collision  and  serious 
injury  or  death. 

• Seats  should  be  adjusted  before  fastening  the  seat 
belts  and  while  the  vehicle  is  parked.  Serious 
injury  or  death  could  result  from  a poorly  adjusted 
seat  belt. 


CAUTION! 

Do  not  place  any  article  under  a power  seat  or 
impede  its  ability  to  move  as  it  may  cause  damage  to 
the  seat  controls.  Seat  travel  may  become  limited  if 
movement  is  stopped  by  an  obstruction  in  the  seat's 
path. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  151 


Adjusting  The  Seat  Forward  Or  Rearward 


The  seat  can  be  adjusted  both  forward  and  rearward. 
Push  the  seat  switch  forward  or  rearward.  The  seat  will 
move  in  the  direction  of  the  switch.  Release  the  switch 
when  the  desired  position  has  been  reached. 


3 


Adjusting  The  Seat  Up  Or  Down 

The  height  of  the  seats  can  be  adjusted  up  or  down.  Pull 
upward  or  push  downward  on  the  seat  switch.  The  seat 
will  move  in  the  direction  of  the  switch.  Release  the 
switch  when  the  desired  position  is  reached. 


Tilting  The  Seat  Up  Or  Down 

The  angle  of  the  seat  cushion  can  be  adjusted  in  four 
directions.  Pull  upward  or  push  downward  on  the  front 
or  rear  of  the  seat  switch,  the  front  or  rear  of  the  seat 
cushion  will  move  in  the  direction  of  the  switch.  Release 
the  switch  when  the  desired  position  is  reached. 


i Provided  by: 

/M_  = F=? 


152  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

Heated  Seats  — If  Equipped 

On  some  models,  the  front  driver  and  passenger  seats 
may  be  equipped  with  heaters  in  both  the  seat  cushions 
and  seatbacks.  The  controls  for  the  front  heated  seats  are 
located  on  the  center  instrument  panel  area. 

You  can  choose  from  HI,  LO  or  OFF  heat  settings.  Amber 
indicator  lights  in  each  switch  indicate  the  level  of  heat  in 
use.  Two  indicator  lights  will  illuminate  for  HI,  one  for 
LO  and  none  for  OFF. 


Push  the  switch  once  to  select  Hl-level  heating. 
Push  the  switch  a second  time  to  select  LO- 
level  heating.  Push  the  switch  a third  time  to 
shut  the  heating  elements  OFF. 


When  the  Hl-level  setting  is  selected,  the  heater  will 
provide  a boosted  heat  level  during  the  initial  stages  of 
operation.  Then,  the  heat  output  will  drop  to  the  normal 
Hl-level.  If  the  Hl-level  setting  is  selected,  the  system  will 
automatically  switch  to  LO-level  after  approximately  30 


minutes  of  continuous  operation.  At  that  time,  the  dis- 
play will  change  from  HI  to  LO,  indicating  the  change. 
When  the  LO-level  heating  is  selected,  the  system  auto- 
matically turns  the  heater  and  the  indicator  light  OFF 
after  approximately  30  minutes  of  continuous  operation. 

NOTE:  Once  a heat  setting  is  selected,  heat  will  be  felt 
within  two  to  five  minutes. 


WARNING! 

• Persons  who  are  unable  to  feel  pain  to  the  skin 
because  of  advanced  age,  chronic  illness,  diabetes, 
spinal  cord  injury,  medication,  alcohol  use,  exhaus- 
tion or  other  physical  condition  must  exercise  care 
when  using  the  seat  heater.  It  may  cause  burns 
even  at  low  temperatures,  especially  if  used  for 
long  periods  of  time. 


(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Do  not  place  anything  on  the  seat  or  seatback  that 
insulates  against  heat,  such  as  a blanket  or  cushion. 
This  may  cause  the  seat  heater  to  overheat.  Sitting 
in  a seat  that  has  been  overheated  could  cause 
serious  burns  due  to  the  increased  surface  tempera- 
ture of  the  seat. 

Manual  Front  Seat  Adjustment 


On  models  equipped  with  manual  seats,  the  adjusting 
bar  is  located  at  the  front  of  the  seats,  near  the  floor. 
While  sitting  in  the  seat,  lift  up  on  the  bar  and  move  the 
seat  forward  or  rearward.  Release  the  bar  once  you  have 
reached  the  desired  position.  Then,  using  body  pressure, 
move  forward  and  rearward  on  the  seat  to  be  sure  that 
the  seat  adjusters  have  latched. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  153 


0309065495 


Manual  Seat  Adjusting  Bar 


154  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


WARNING! 

• Adjusting  a seat  while  driving  may  be  dangerous. 
Moving  a seat  while  driving  could  result  in  loss  of 
control  which  could  cause  a collision  and  serious 
injury  or  death. 

• Seats  should  be  adjusted  before  fastening  the  seat 
belts  and  while  the  vehicle  is  parked.  Serious 
injury  or  death  could  result  from  a poorly  adjusted 
seat  belt. 


Manual  Seat  Height  Adjustment  — If  Equipped 

The  driver's  seat  height  can  be  raised  or  lowered  by  using 
a lever,  located  on  the  outboard  side  of  the  seat.  Pull 
upward  on  the  lever  to  raise  the  seat  height  or  push 
downward  on  the  lever  to  lower  the  seat  height. 


i Provided  by: 


Seat  Height  Adjustment  Lever 


030907660 


Manual  Lumbar  — If  Equipped 

The  lumbar  adjustment  handle  is  located  on  the  inboard 
or  outboard  side  of  the  seatback.  Rotate  the  lever  down- 
ward to  increase  the  lumbar  support  or  rotate  the  lever 
upward  to  decrease  the  lumbar  support. 


Outboard  Lumbar  Adjustment  Lever 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  155 


Driver’s  Seatback  Recline 


To  adjust  the  seatback,  lift  the  lever  located  on  the 
outboard  side  of  the  seat,  lean  back  to  the  desired  angle 
and  release  the  lever.  To  return  the  seatback,  lift  the  lever, 
lean  forward  and  release  the  lever. 


3 


/M_E=F^ 


Recline  Lever 


156  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


WARNING! 

Do  not  ride  with  the  seatback  reclined  so  that  the 
shoulder  belt  is  no  longer  resting  against  your  chest. 
In  a collision  you  could  slide  under  the  seat  belt, 
which  could  result  in  serious  injury  or  death. 

Head  Restraints 

Head  restraints  are  designed  to  reduce  the  risk  of  injury 
by  restricting  head  movement  in  the  event  of  a rear 
impact.  Head  restraints  should  be  adjusted  so  that  the  top 
of  the  head  restraint  is  located  above  the  top  of  your  ear. 


WARNING! 


The  head  restraints  for  all  occupants  must  be  prop- 
erly installed  and  adjusted  prior  to  operating  the 
vehicle  or  occupying  a seat.  Head  restraints  should 
never  be  adjusted  while  the  vehicle  is  in  motion. 
Driving  a vehicle  with  the  head  restraints  improperly 
adjusted  or  removed  could  cause  serious  injury  or 
death  in  the  event  of  a collision. 


Supplemental  Active  Head  Restraints  — Front 
Seats 

Active  Head  Restraints  (AHRs)  are  passive,  deployable 
components,  and  vehicles  with  this  equipment  cannot  be 
readily  identified  by  any  markings,  only  through  visual 
inspection  of  the  head  restraint.  The  head  restraint  will  be 
split  in  two  halves,  with  the  front  half  being  soft  foam 
and  trim,  the  back  half  being  decorative  plastic. 


When  AHRs  deploy  during  a rear  impact,  the  front  half 
of  the  head  restraint  extends  forward  to  minimize  the  gap 
between  the  back  of  the  occupant's  head  and  the  AHR. 
This  system  is  designed  to  help  prevent  or  reduce  the 
extent  of  injuries  to  the  driver  and  front  passenger  in 
certain  types  of  rear  impacts.  Refer  to  "Occupant  Re- 
straints" in  "Things  To  Know  Before  Starting  Your  Ve- 
hicle" for  further  information. 

To  raise  the  head  restraint,  pull  upward  on  the  head 
restraint.  To  lower  the  head  restraint,  push  the  adjust- 
ment button  located  at  the  base  of  the  head  restraint  and 
push  downward  on  the  head  restraint. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  157 


Adjustment  Button 


030907490 


158  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

For  comfort  the  Active  Head  Restraints  can  be  tilted 
forward  and  backward.  To  tilt  the  head  restraint  closer  to 
the  back  of  your  head,  pull  forward  on  the  bottom  of  the 
head  restraint.  Push  rearward  on  the  bottom  of  the  head 
restraint  to  move  the  head  restraint  away  from  your 
head. 


Active  Head  Restraint  (Tilted  Position) 

NOTE: 

• The  head  restraints  should  only  be  removed  by  quali- 
fied technicians,  for  service  purposes  only.  If  either  of 
the  head  restraints  require  removal,  see  your  autho- 
rized dealer. 


S mfoimatlon  Provided  by. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  159 


• In  the  event  of  deployment  of  an  Active  Head  Re- 
straint, refer  to  "Occupant  Restraints /Resetting  Active 
Head  Restraints  (AHR)"  in  "Things  To  Know  Before 
Starting  Your  Vehicle"  for  further  information. 


WARNING! 

• All  occupants,  including  the  driver,  should  not 
operate  a vehicle  or  sit  in  a vehicle's  seat  until  the 
head  restraints  are  placed  in  their  proper  positions 
in  order  to  minimize  the  risk  of  neck  injury  in  the 
event  of  a collision. 

• Do  not  place  items  over  the  top  of  the  Active  Head 
Restraint,  such  as  coats,  seat  covers  or  portable 
DVD  players.  These  items  may  interfere  with  the 
operation  of  the  Active  Head  Restraint  in  the  event 
of  a collision  and  could  result  in  serious  injury  or 
death. 


(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Active  Head  Restraints  may  be  deployed  if  they  are 
struck  by  an  object  such  as  a hand,  foot  or  loose 
cargo.  To  avoid  accidental  deployment  of  the  Ac- 
tive Head  Restraint  ensure  that  all  cargo  is  secured, 
as  loose  cargo  could  contact  the  Active  Head  Re- 
straint during  sudden  stops.  Failure  to  follow  this 
warning  could  cause  personal  injury  if  the  Active 
Head  Restraint  is  deployed. 

Rear  Head  Restraints 

The  head  restraints  in  the  rear  are  non  adjustable.  Refer  to 
"Occupant  Restraints"  in  "Things  To  Know  Before  Start- 
ing Your  Vehicle"  for  information  on  Tether  routing. 


160  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Folding  Rear  Seat 

To  provide  additional  storage  area,  each  rear  seatback  can 
be  folded  forward.  Pull  the  strap  forward  to  fold  the  rear 
seatback  flat. 


To  raise  the  seatback,  pull  the  strap  forward  and  lift  the 
seatback  into  its  upright  position. 


Rear  Seat  Release  Straps 


WARNING! 


Be  certain  that  the  seatback  is  securely  locked  into 
position.  If  the  seatback  is  not  securely  locked  into 
position  the  seat  will  not  provide  the  proper  stability 
for  child  seats  and/or  passengers.  An  improperly 
latched  seat  could  cause  serious  injury. 

Reclining  Rear  Seat  — If  Equipped 

For  additional  comfort,  pull  the  strap  forward  just 
enough  to  release  the  seatback  latch.  Then  push  the 
seatback  to  a reclined  position,  approximately  35  degrees 
maximum,  and  release  the  strap. 


inrom 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  161 


WARNING! 

Do  not  ride  with  the  seatback  reclined  so  that  the 
shoulder  belt  is  no  longer  resting  against  your  chest. 
In  a collision  you  could  slide  under  the  seat  belt  and 
be  seriously  or  even  fatally  injured.  Use  the  recliner 
only  when  the  vehicle  is  parked. 


3 


162  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 

TO  OPEN  AND  CLOSE  THE  HOOD 

To  open  the  hood,  two  latches  must  be  released. 

1.  Pull  the  hood  release  lever  located  on  the  left  kick 
panel. 


2.  Move  the  safety  latch,  located  outside  the  vehicle 
under  the  front  edge  of  the  hood,  toward  the  center 
and  raise  the  hood. 


031340027 


Hood  Safety  Latch  Location 


= 


Hood  Release  Lever 


Lift  the  hood  prop  rod,  clipped  to  the  right  side  (left  side 
facing  hood)  of  the  engine  compartment  to  secure  the 
hood  in  the  open  position.  Place  the  hood  prop  at  the 
location  stamped  into  the  inner  hood  surface. 


Prop  Rod  Location 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  163 


CAUTION! 

To  prevent  possible  damage: 

• Before  closing  hood,  make  sure  the  hood  prop  rod 
is  fully  seated  into  its  storage  retaining  clips. 

• Do  not  slam  the  hood  to  close  it.  Use  a firm 
downward  push  at  the  center  front  edge  of  the 
hood  to  ensure  that  both  latches  engage.  Never 
drive  your  vehicle  unless  the  hood  is  fully  closed, 
with  both  latches  engaged. 


WARNING! 

Be  sure  the  hood  is  fully  latched  before  driving  your 
vehicle.  If  the  hood  is  not  fully  latched,  it  could  open 
when  the  vehicle  is  in  motion  and  block  your  vision. 
Failure  to  follow  this  warning  could  result  in  serious 
injury  or  death. 


164  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 

LIGHTS 


Multifunction  Lever 

The  multifunction  lever  controls  the  operation  of  the 
headlights,  parking  lights,  turn  signals,  headlight  beam 
selection,  instrument  panel  light  dimming,  interior  lights, 
the  passing  lights,  and  the  fog  lights.  The  multifunction 
lever  is  located  on  the  left  side  of  the  steering  column. 


Headlights  And  Parking  Lights 

Turn  the  end  of  the  multifunction  lever  to  the  first  detent 
to  turn  on  the  parking  lights.  Turn  the  end  of  the  lever  to 
the  second  detent  to  turn  on  the  headlights. 


031407548 

Headlight  Control 


Multifunction  Lever 


031407547 


Automatic  Headlights  — If  Equipped 

Turning  the  end  of  the  multifunction  lever  to  the  third 
detent  (AUTO),  will  activate  the  automatic  headlight 
system. 


Headlight  Switch 


031407553 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  165 


With  the  engine  running  and  the  multifunction  lever  in 
the  AUTO  position,  the  headlights  will  turn  on  and  turn 
off  based  on  the  surrounding  light  levels. 


Daytime  Running  Lights  — If  Equipped 

The  high  beam  lights  will  come  on  as  Daytime  Running 
Lights  (lower  intensity),  whenever  the  ignition  is  ON,  the 
engine  is  running,  the  headlight  switch  is  off,  the  parking 
brake  is  off,  the  turn  signal  is  off,  and  the  shift  lever  is  in 
any  position  except  PARK. 


3 


Lights-On  Reminder 


If  the  headlights  or  parking  lights  are  left  on  after  the 
ignition  is  turned  OFF,  a chime  will  sound  to  alert  the 
driver  when  the  driver's  door  is  opened. 


166  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 

Fog  Lights  — If  Equipped 


The  front  fog  light  switch  is  on  the  multifunc- 
J tion  lever.  To  activate  the  front  fog  lights,  turn 
on  the  parking  lights  or  the  low  beam  head- 
lights and  pull  out  the  end  of  the  multifunction  lever. 


Front  Fog  Light  Operation 


031407550 


NOTE:  The  fog  lights  will  only  operate  with  the  head- 
lights on  low  beam.  Selecting  high  beam  headlights  will 
turn  off  the  fog  lights. 

Turn  Signals 

Move  the  multifunction  lever  up  or  down  and  the  arrows 
on  each  side  of  the  instrument  cluster  flash  to  show 
proper  operation  of  the  front  and  rear  turn  signal  lights. 


/\i 


031407551 

Turn  Signal  Operation 

NOTE:  If  either  light  remains  on  and  does  not  flash,  or 
there  is  a very  fast  flash  rate,  check  for  a defective  outside 
light  bulb.  If  an  indicator  fails  to  light  when  the  lever  is 
moved,  it  would  suggest  that  the  indicator  bulb  is 
defective. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  167 

Lane  Change  Assist 

Tap  the  lever  up  or  down  once,  without  moving  beyond 
the  detent,  and  the  turn  signal  (right  or  left)  will  flash 
three  times  then  automatically  turn  off. 

High/Low  Beam  Switch 

Push  the  multifunction  lever  away  from  you  to  switch 
the  headlights  to  high  beam.  Pull  the  multifunction  lever 
toward  you  to  switch  the  headlights  back  to  low  beam. 

Flash-To-Pass 

You  can  signal  another  vehicle  with  your  headlights  by 
lightly  pulling  the  multifunction  lever  toward  you.  This 
will  turn  on  the  high  beam  headlights  until  the  lever  is 
released. 

NOTE:  If  the  multifunction  lever  is  held  in  the  flash- to- 
pass  position  for  more  than  20  seconds,  the  high  beams 
will  shut  off.  If  this  occurs,  wait  30  seconds  for  the  next 
flash-to-pass  operation. 


168  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Headlights  On  With  Wipers  (Available  With 
Automatic  Headlights  Only) 

When  this  feature  is  active,  the  headlights  will  turn  on 
approximately  10  seconds  after  the  wipers  are  turned  on 
if  the  headlight  switch  is  placed  in  the  AUTO  position.  In 
addition,  the  headlights  will  turn  off  when  the  wipers  are 
turned  off  if  they  were  turned  on  by  this  feature. 

NOTE:  The  Headlights  On  with  Wipers  feature  can  be 
turned  on  or  off  using  the  Electronic  Vehicle  Information 
Center  (EVIC).  Refer  to  "Electronic  Vehicle  Information 
Center  (EVIC)"  in  "Understanding  Your  Instrument 
Panel"  for  further  information. 


Instrument  Panel  Dimming 

Rotate  the  center  portion  of  the  lever  to  the  extreme 
bottom  position  to  fully  dim  the  instrument  panel  lights 
and  prevent  the  interior  lights  from  illuminating  when  a 
door  is  opened. 

Rotate  the  center  portion  of  the  lever  up  to  increase  the 
brightness  of  the  instrument  panel  lights  when  the  park- 
ing lights  or  headlights  are  on. 

Rotate  the  center  portion  of  the  lever  upward  to  the  next 
detent  position  to  brighten  the  odometer  and  radio  when 
the  parking  lights  or  headlights  are  on. 

Rotate  the  center  portion  of  the  lever  upward  to  the  last 
detent  to  turn  on  the  interior  lighting. 


Information  Provided  by: 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  169 


light  off.  The  lights  also  come  on  when  a door  is  opened 
or  the  dimmer  control  is  turned  fully  upward,  past  the 
second  detent. 


031407549 


Dimmer  Control 

Map/Reading  Lights 


These  lights  are  mounted  between  the  sun  visors  above 
the  rear  view  mirror.  Each  light  is  turned  on  by  pushing 
the  button.  Push  the  button  a second  time  to  turn  the 


Map/Reading  Lights 


3 


CD  = /M_E=F=R 


170  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

NOTE:  The  lights  will  remain  on  until  the  switch  is 
pushed  a second  time,  so  be  sure  they  have  been  turned 
off  before  leaving  the  vehicle.  They  will  not  turn  off 
automatically. 

WINDSHIELD  WIPERS  AND  WASHERS 


The  windshield  wiper /washer  control  lever  is 
located  on  the  right  side  of  the  steering  column. 
The  front  wipers  are  operated  by  rotating  a 
switch,  located  on  the  end  of  the  lever.  For  information 
on  the  rear  wiper/washer,  refer  to  "Rear  Window  Fea- 
tures" in  "Understanding  The  Features  Of  Your  Vehicle". 


Wiper/Washer  Control  Lever 


036407502 


CAUTION! 


• Turn  the  windshield  wipers  off  when  driving 
through  an  automatic  car  wash.  Damage  to  the 
windshield  wipers  may  result  if  the  wiper  control 
is  left  in  any  position  other  than  off. 

• In  cold  weather,  always  turn  off  the  wiper  switch 
and  allow  the  wipers  to  return  to  the  "Park"  posi- 
tion before  turning  off  the  engine.  If  the  wiper 
switch  is  left  on  and  the  wipers  freeze  to  the 
windshield,  damage  to  the  wiper  motor  may  occur 
when  the  vehicle  is  restarted. 

• Always  remove  any  buildup  of  snow  that  prevents 
the  windshield  wiper  blades  from  returning  to  the 
off  position.  If  the  windshield  wiper  control  is 
turned  off  and  the  blades  cannot  return  to  the  off 
position,  damage  to  the  wiper  motor  may  occur. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  171 

Windshield  Wiper  Operation 


Rotate  the  end  of  the  lever  upward  to  the  second  detent 
past  the  intermittent  settings  for  low-speed  wiper  opera- 
tion. Rotate  the  end  of  the  lever  upward  to  the  third 
detent  past  the  intermittent  settings  for  high-speed  wiper 
operation. 


3 


i Provided  by: 


Windshield  Wiper  Operation 


031507503 


172  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

Intermittent  Wiper  System 

Use  the  intermittent  wiper  when  weather  conditions 
make  a single  wiping  cycle,  with  a variable  pause  be- 
tween cycles,  desirable.  Select  the  delay  interval  by 
turning  the  end  of  the  lever.  Rotate  the  end  of  the  lever 
upward  (clockwise)  to  decrease  the  delay  time  and 
downward  (counterclockwise)  to  increase  the  delay  time. 
The  delay  can  be  regulated  from  a maximum  of  approxi- 
mately 18  seconds  between  cycles,  to  a cycle  every 
second. 

NOTE:  The  wiper  delay  times  depend  on  vehicle  speed. 
If  the  vehicle  is  moving  less  than  10  mph  (16  km/h), 
delay  times  will  be  doubled. 


Windshield  Washers 

To  use  the  washer,  pull  the  control  lever  toward  you  and 
hold  while  spray  is  desired.  If  the  lever  is  pulled  while  in 
the  delay  range,  the  wiper  will  operate  in  low-speed 
while  the  lever  is  pulled  and  for  two  wipe  cycles  after  the 
lever  is  released,  and  then  resume  the  intermittent  inter- 
val previously  selected. 

If  the  lever  is  pulled  while  in  the  off  position,  the  wipers 
will  operate  for  two  wipe  cycles,  then  turn  off. 


WARNING! 

Sudden  loss  of  visibility  through  the  windshield 
could  lead  to  a collision.  You  might  not  see  other 
vehicles  or  other  obstacles.  To  avoid  sudden  icing  of 
the  windshield  during  freezing  weather,  warm  the 
windshield  with  the  defroster  before  and  during 
windshield  washer  use. 


/M_  = i=3 


Headlights  On  With  Wipers  (Available  With 
Automatic  Headlights  Only) 

When  this  feature  is  active,  the  headlights  will  turn  on 
approximately  10  seconds  after  the  wipers  are  turned  on 
if  the  headlight  switch  is  placed  in  the  AUTO  position.  In 
addition,  the  headlights  will  turn  off  when  the  wipers  are 
turned  off  if  they  were  turned  on  by  this  feature. 

NOTE:  The  Headlights  On  with  Wipers  feature  can  be 
turned  on  or  off  using  the  Electronic  Vehicle  Information 
Center  (EVIC).  Refer  to  "Electronic  Vehicle  Information 
Center  (EVIC)"  in  "Understanding  Your  Instrument 
Panel"  for  further  information. 

Mist  Feature 

Push  down  on  the  control  lever  to  activate  a single  wipe 
to  clear  the  windshield  of  road  mist  or  spray  from  a 
passing  vehicle.  As  long  as  the  lever  is  held  down,  the 
wipers  will  continue  to  operate. 


■ UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  173 

NOTE:  The  mist  feature  does  not  activate  the  washer 
pump;  therefore,  no  washer  fluid  will  be  sprayed  on  the 
windshield.  The  wash  function  must  be  used  in  order  to 
spray  the  windshield  with  washer  fluid. 


031507504 

Mist  Operation 


174  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 

TILT  STEERING  COLUMN 

This  feature  allows  you  to  tilt  the  steering  column 
upward  or  downward.  The  tilt  steering  column  lever  is 
located  on  the  left  side  of  the  steering  column,  below  the 
turn  signal  lever. 

Push  down  on  the  lever  to  unlock  the  steering  column. 
With  one  hand  firmly  on  the  steering  wheel,  move  the 
steering  column  up  or  down,  as  desired.  Push  the  lever 
up  to  lock  the  steering  column  firmly  in  place. 


Tilt  Steering  Column  Lever 


;=D=/M_E=;=e 


WARNING! 


Do  not  adjust  the  steering  column  while  driving. 
Adjusting  the  steering  column  while  driving  or  driv- 
ing with  the  steering  column  unlocked,  could  cause 
the  driver  to  lose  control  of  the  vehicle.  Failure  to 
follow  this  warning  may  result  in  serious  injury  or 
death. 


ELECTRONIC  SPEED  CONTROL  — IF  EQUIPPED 

When  engaged,  the  Electronic  Speed  Control  takes  over 
accelerator  operations  at  speeds  greater  than  25  mph 
(40  km/h). 

The  Electronic  Speed  Control  buttons  are  located  on  the 
right  side  of  the  steering  wheel. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  175 


Electronic  Speed  Control  Buttons 

1 — ON/OFF 

2 — RES  + 


3 — SET  - 

4 — CANCEL 


176  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


NOTE:  In  order  to  ensure  proper  operation,  the  Elec- 
tronic Speed  Control  System  has  been  designed  to  shut 
down  if  multiple  Speed  Control  functions  are  operated  at 
the  same  time.  If  this  occurs,  the  Electronic  Speed  Control 
System  can  be  reactivated  by  pushing  the  Electronic 
Speed  Control  ON /OFF  button  and  resetting  the  desired 
vehicle  set  speed. 

To  Activate 

Push  the  ON /OFF  button.  The  Cruise  Indicator  Light  in 
the  instrument  cluster  will  illuminate.  To  turn  the  system 
off,  push  the  ON/OFF  button  a second  time.  The  Cruise 
Indicator  Light  will  turn  off.  The  system  should  be 
turned  off  when  not  in  use. 


WARNING! 

Leaving  the  Electronic  Speed  Control  system  on 
when  not  in  use  is  dangerous.  You  could  accidentally 
set  the  system  or  cause  it  to  go  faster  than  you  want. 
You  could  lose  control  and  have  an  accident.  Always 
leave  the  system  OFF  when  you  are  not  using  it. 

To  Set  A Desired  Speed 

Turn  the  Electronic  Speed  Control  ON.  When  the  vehicle 
has  reached  the  desired  speed,  push  the  SET  (-)  button 
and  release.  Release  the  accelerator  and  the  vehicle  will 
operate  at  the  selected  speed. 

NOTE:  The  vehicle  should  be  traveling  at  a steady  speed 
and  on  level  ground  before  pushing  the  SET  (-)  button. 


To  Deactivate 

A soft  tap  on  the  brake  pedal,  pushing  the  CANCEL 
button,  or  normal  brake  pressure  while  slowing  the 
vehicle  will  deactivate  the  Electronic  Speed  Control  with- 
out erasing  the  set  speed  from  memory. 

Pushing  the  ON/OFF  button  or  turning  the  ignition 
switch  OFF  erases  the  set  speed  from  memory. 

To  Resume  Speed 

To  resume  a previously  set  speed,  push  the  RES  (+) 
button  and  release.  Resume  can  be  used  at  any  speed 
above  20  mph  (32  km/h). 

To  Vary  The  Speed  Setting 

To  Increase  Speed 

When  the  Electronic  Speed  Control  is  set,  you  can  in- 
crease speed  by  pushing  the  RES  (+)  button. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  177 

The  drivers  preferred  units  can  be  selected  through  the 

instrument  panel  settings  if  equipped.  Refer  to  "Under- 
standing Your  Instrument  Panel"  for  more  information. 

The  speed  increment  shown  is  dependant  on  the  chosen 

speed  unit  of  U.S.  (mph)  or  Metric  (km/h): 

U.S.  Speed  (mph) 

• Pushing  the  RES  (+)  button  once  will  result  in  a 1 mph 
increase  in  set  speed.  Each  subsequent  tap  of  the 
button  results  in  an  increase  of  1 mph. 

• If  the  button  is  continually  pushed,  the  set  speed  will 
continue  to  increase  until  the  button  is  released,  then 
the  new  set  speed  will  be  established. 

Metric  Speed  (km/h) 

• Pushing  the  RES  (+)  button  once  will  result  in  a 
1 km/h  increase  in  set  speed.  Each  subsequent  tap  of 
the  button  results  in  an  increase  of  1 km/h. 


178  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

• If  the  button  is  continually  pushed,  the  set  speed  will 
continue  to  increase  until  the  button  is  released,  then 
the  new  set  speed  will  be  established. 

To  Decrease  Speed 

When  the  Electronic  Speed  Control  is  set,  you  can  de- 
crease speed  by  pushing  the  SET  (-)  button. 

The  drivers  preferred  units  can  be  selected  through  the 
instrument  panel  settings  if  equipped.  Refer  to  "Under- 
standing Your  Instrument  Panel"  for  more  information. 
The  speed  decrement  shown  is  dependant  on  the  chosen 
speed  unit  of  U.S.  (mph)  or  Metric  (km/h): 

U.S.  Speed  (mph) 

• Pushing  the  SET  (-)  button  once  will  result  in  a 1 mph 
decrease  in  set  speed.  Each  subsequent  tap  of  the 
button  results  in  a decrease  of  1 mph. 


• If  the  button  is  continually  pushed,  the  set  speed  will 
continue  to  decrease  until  the  button  is  released,  then 
the  new  set  speed  will  be  established. 

Metric  Speed  (km/h) 

• Pushing  the  SET  (-)  button  once  will  result  in  a 1 km/h 
decrease  in  set  speed.  Each  subsequent  tap  of  the 
button  results  in  a decrease  of  1 km/h. 

• If  the  button  is  continually  pushed,  the  set  speed  will 
continue  to  decrease  until  the  button  is  released,  then 
the  new  set  speed  will  be  established. 

To  Accelerate  For  Passing 

Press  the  accelerator  as  you  would  normally.  When  the 

pedal  is  released,  the  vehicle  will  return  to  the  set  speed. 

Using  Electronic  Speed  Control  On  Hills 

The  transmission  may  downshift  on  hills  to  maintain  the 

vehicle  set  speed. 


NOTE:  The  Electronic  Speed  Control  system  maintains 
speed  up  and  down  hills.  A slight  speed  change  on 
moderate  hills  is  normal. 

On  steep  hills,  a greater  speed  loss  or  gain  may  occur  so 
it  may  be  preferable  to  drive  without  Electronic  Speed 
Control. 


WARNING! 

Electronic  Speed  Control  can  be  dangerous  where  the 
system  cannot  maintain  a constant  speed.  Your  ve- 
hicle could  go  too  fast  for  the  conditions,  and  you 
could  lose  control  and  have  an  accident.  Do  not  use 
Electronic  Speed  Control  in  heavy  traffic  or  on  roads 
that  are  winding,  icy,  snow-covered  or  slippery. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  179 

PARKVIEW  REAR  BACK  UP  CAMERA  — IF 
EQUIPPED 

Your  vehicle  may  be  equipped  with  the  ParkView  Rear 
Back  Up  Camera  that  allows  you  to  see  an  on-screen 
image  of  the  rear  surroundings  of  your  vehicle  whenever 
the  shift  lever  is  put  into  REVERSE.  The  image  will  be 
displayed  on  the  touchscreen  along  with  a caution  note  to 
"check  entire  surroundings"  across  the  top  of  the  screen. 
After  five  seconds  this  note  will  disappear.  The  ParkView 
camera  is  located  on  the  rear  of  the  vehicle  above  the  rear 
license  plate. 

When  the  vehicle  is  shifted  out  of  REVERSE,  the  rear 
camera  mode  is  exited  and  the  last  selected  touchscreen 
appears  again. 

If  your  vehicle  is  equipped  with  the  Camera  Delay 
feature  and  it  is  turned  On,  the  rear  camera  image  will  be 
displayed  for  up  to  10  seconds  when  the  vehicle  is  shifted 


180  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


out  of  REVERSE  unless  the  forward  vehicle  speed  ex- 
ceeds 8 mph  (13  km/h),  the  transmission  is  shifted  into 
"PARK"  or  the  vehicles  ignition  is  cycled  to  the  OFF 
position. 


help  indicate  the  distance  to  the  rear  of  the  vehicle. 
Different  colored  zones  indicate  the  distance  to  the  rear  of 
the  vehicle.  The  following  table  shows  the  approximate 
distances  for  each  zone: 


Static  grid  lines  will  illustrate  the  width  of  the  vehicle. 
The  static  grid  lines  will  show  separate  zones  that  will 


Zone 

Distance  to  the  rear  of  the  vehicle 

Red 

0 - 1 ft  (0  - 30  cm) 

Yellow 

1 ft  - 3 ft  (30  cm  - 1 m) 

Green 

3 ft  or  greater  (1  m or  greater) 

WARNING! 

Drivers  must  be  careful  when  backing  up  even  when 
using  the  ParkView  Rear  Back  Up  Camera.  Always 
check  carefully  behind  your  vehicle,  and  be  sure  to 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

check  for  pedestrians,  animals,  other  vehicles,  ob- 
structions, or  blind  spots  before  backing  up.  You  are 
responsible  for  the  safety  of  your  surroundings  and 
must  continue  to  pay  attention  while  backing  up. 
Failure  to  do  so  can  result  in  serious  injury  or  death. 


(Continued) 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  181 


CAUTION! 

• To  avoid  vehicle  damage,  ParkView  should  only  be 
used  as  a parking  aid.  The  ParkView  camera  is 
unable  to  view  every  obstacle  or  object  in  your 
drive  path. 

• To  avoid  vehicle  damage,  the  vehicle  must  be 
driven  slowly  when  using  ParkView  to  be  able  to 
stop  in  time  when  an  obstacle  is  seen.  It  is  recom- 
mended that  the  driver  look  frequently  over  his/her 
shoulder  when  using  ParkView. 

NOTE:  If  snow,  ice,  mud,  or  any  foreign  substance 
builds  up  on  the  camera  lens,  clean  the  lens,  rinse  with 
water,  and  dry  with  a soft  cloth.  Do  not  cover  the  lens. 


GARAGE  DOOR  OPENER  — IF  EQUIPPED 


HomeLink  replaces  up  to  three  remote  controls  (hand- 
held transmitters)  that  operate  devices  such  as  garage 
door  openers,  motorized  gates,  lighting  or  home  security 
systems.  The  HomeLink  unit  operates  off  your  vehicle's 
battery. 


3 


Information  Provided  by: 

zd=/m 


182  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


The  HomeLink  buttons,  located  on  either  the  overhead 
console,  headliner  or  sunvisor,  designate  the  three  differ- 
ent HomeLink  channels.  The  HomeLink  indicator  is 
located  above  the  center  button. 


034000355 

HomeLink  Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner 
NOTE:  HomeLink  is  disabled  when  the  Vehicle  Security 
Alarm  is  active. 


034033576 


CD  = /M_E=F=R 


HomeLink  Buttons/Overhead  Consoles 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  183 


Before  You  Begin  Programming  HomeLink  NOTE: 


Be  sure  that  your  vehicle  is  parked  outside  of  the  garage 
before  you  begin  programming. 

For  more  efficient  programming  and  accurate  transmis- 
sion of  the  radio-frequency  signal  it  is  recommended  that 
a new  battery  be  placed  in  the  hand-held  transmitter  of 
the  device  that  is  being  programmed  to  the  HomeLink 
system. 

To  erase  the  channels  place  the  ignition  in  the  ON /RUN 
position  and  push  and  hold  the  two  outside  HomeLink 
buttons  (I  and  III)  for  up  20  seconds  or  until  the  red 
indicator  flashes. 


• Erasing  all  channels  should  only  be  performed  when 
programming  HomeLink  for  the  first  time.  Do  not 
erase  channels  when  programming  additional  buttons. 

• If  you  have  any  problems,  or  require  assistance,  please 
call  toll-free  1-800-355-3515  or,  on  the  Internet  at 
HomeLink.com  for  information  or  assistance. 


3 


Programming  A Rolling  Code 

For  programming  garage  door  openers  that  were  manu- 
factured after  1995.  These  garage  door  openers  can  be 
identified  by  the  "LEARN"  or  "TRAIN"  button  located 
where  the  hanging  antenna  is  attached  to  the  garage  door 
opener.  It  is  NOT  the  button  that  is  normally  used  to 
open  and  close  the  door.  The  name  and  color  of  the 
button  may  vary  by  manufacturer. 


Information  Provided  by: 


184  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Training  The  Garage  Door  Opener 

1 — Door  Opener 

2 — Training  Button 


1.  Place  the  ignition  in  the  ON /RUN  position. 


2.  Place  the  hand-held  transmitter  1 to  3 inches  (3  to 
8 cm)  away  from  the  HomeLink  button  you  wish  to 
program  while  keeping  the  HomeLink  indicator  light 
in  view. 

3.  Push  and  hold  the  HomeLink  button  you  want  to 
program  while  you  push  and  hold  the  hand-held 
transmitter  button. 

4.  Continue  to  hold  both  buttons  and  observe  the  indi- 
cator light.  The  HomeLink  indicator  will  flash  slowly 
and  then  rapidly  after  HomeLink  has  received  the 
frequency  signal  from  the  hand-held  transmitter.  Re- 
lease both  buttons  after  the  indicator  light  changes 
from  slow  to  rapid. 

5.  At  the  garage  door  opener  motor  (in  the  garage), 
locate  the  "LEARN"  or  "TRAINING"  button.  This  can 
usually  be  found  where  the  hanging  antenna  wire  is 
attached  to  the  garage  door  opener/device  motor. 


i Provided  by: 

/M 


Firmly  push  and  release  the  "LEARN"  or  "TRAIN- 
ING" button.  On  some  garage  door  openers /devices 
there  may  be  a light  that  blinks  when  the  garage  door 
opener/device  is  in  the  LEARN/TRAIN  mode. 

NOTE:  You  have  30  seconds  in  which  to  initiate  the  next 
step  after  the  LEARN  button  has  been  pushed. 

6.  Return  to  the  vehicle  and  push  the  programmed 
HomeLink  button  twice  (holding  the  button  for  two 
seconds  each  time).  If  the  garage  door  opener/device 
activates,  programming  is  complete. 

NOTE:  If  the  garage  door  opener /device  does  not  acti- 
vate, push  the  button  a third  time  (for  two  seconds)  to 
complete  the  training. 

To  program  the  remaining  two  HomeLink  buttons,  repeat 
each  step  for  each  remaining  button.  DO  NOT  erase  the 
channels. 


■ UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  185 

Reprogramming  A Single  HomeLink  Button 
(Rolling  Code) 

To  reprogram  a channel  that  has  been  previously  trained, 
follow  these  steps: 

1.  Cycle  the  ignition  to  the  ON /RUN  position. 

2.  Push  and  hold  the  desired  HomeLink  button  until  the 
indicator  light  begins  to  flash  after  20  seconds.  Do  not 

release  the  button. 

3.  Without  releasing  the  button  proceed  with  "Program- 
ming A Rolling  Code"  step  2 and  follow  all  remaining 
steps. 

Programming  A Non-Rolling  Code 

For  programming  Garage  Door  Openers  manufactured 
before  1995. 

1.  Place  the  ignition  in  the  ON/ RUN  position. 


186  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


2.  Place  the  hand-held  transmitter  1 to  3 inches  (3  to 
8 cm)  away  from  the  HomeLink  button  you  wish  to 
program  while  keeping  the  HomeLink  indicator  light 
in  view. 

3.  Push  and  hold  the  Homelink  button  you  want  to 
program  while  you  push  and  hold  the  hand-held 
transmitter  button. 

4.  Continue  to  hold  both  buttons  and  observe  the  indi- 
cator light.  The  Homelink  indicator  will  flash  slowly 
and  then  rapidly  after  HomeLink  has  received  the 
frequency  signal  from  the  hand-held  transmitter.  Re- 
lease both  buttons  after  the  indicator  light  changes 
from  slow  to  rapid. 

5.  Push  and  hold  the  programmed  HomeLink  button 
and  observe  the  indicator  light. 

• If  the  indicator  light  stays  on  constantly  program- 
ming is  complete  and  the  garage  door/ device  should 
activate  when  the  HomeLink  button  is  pushed. 


• To  program  the  two  remaining  HomeLink  buttons, 
repeat  each  step  for  each  remaining  button.  DO  NOT 
erase  the  channels. 

Reprogramming  A Single  HomeLink  Button 
(Non-Rolling  Code) 

To  reprogram  a channel  that  has  been  previously  trained, 
follow  these  steps: 

1.  Cycle  the  ignition  to  the  ON /RUN  position. 

2.  Push  and  hold  the  desired  HomeLink  button  until  the 
indicator  light  begins  to  flash  after  20  seconds.  Do  not 

release  the  button. 

3.  Without  releasing  the  button  proceed  with  "Program- 
ming A Non-Rolling  Code"  step  2 and  follow  all 
remaining  steps. 


■ided  by: 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  187 


Canadian/Gate  Operator  Programming 

For  programming  transmitters  in  Canada /United  States 
that  require  the  transmitter  signals  to  "time-out"  after 
several  seconds  of  transmission. 

Canadian  radio  frequency  laws  require  transmitter  sig- 
nals to  time-out  (or  quit)  after  several  seconds  of  trans- 
mission - which  may  not  be  long  enough  for  HomeLink 
to  pick  up  the  signal  during  programming.  Similar  to  this 
Canadian  law,  some  U.S.  gate  operators  are  designed  to 
time-out  in  the  same  manner. 

It  may  be  helpful  to  unplug  the  device  during  the  cycling 
process  to  prevent  possible  overheating  of  the  garage 
door  or  gate  motor. 

1.  Cycle  the  ignition  to  the  ON/ RUN  position. 


2.  Place  the  hand-held  transmitter  1 to  3 inches  (3  to 
8 cm)  away  from  the  HomeLink  button  you  wish  to 
program  while  keeping  the  HomeLink  indicator  light 
in  view. 

3.  Continue  to  push  and  hold  the  HomeLink  button, 
while  you  push  and  release  ("cycle")  your  hand-held 
transmitter  every  two  seconds  until  HomeLink  has 
successfully  accepted  the  frequency  signal.  The  indi- 
cator light  will  flash  slowly  and  then  rapidly  when 
fully  trained. 


3 


4.  Watch  for  the  HomeLink  indicator  to  change  flash 
rates.  When  it  changes,  it  is  programmed.  It  may  take 
up  to  30  seconds  or  longer  in  rare  cases.  The  garage 
door  may  open  and  close  while  you  are  programming. 

5.  Push  and  hold  the  programmed  HomeLink  button 
and  observe  the  indicator  light. 


Information  Provided  by: 


188  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

NOTE: 

• If  the  indicator  light  stays  on  constantly,  program- 
ming is  complete  and  the  garage  door/ device  should 
activate  when  the  HomeLink  button  is  pushed. 

• To  program  the  two  remaining  HomeLink  buttons, 
repeat  each  step  for  each  remaining  button.  DO  NOT 
erase  the  channels. 

If  you  unplugged  the  garage  door  opener/device  for 
programming,  plug  it  back  in  at  this  time. 

Reprogramming  A Single  HomeLink  Button 
(Canadian/Gate  Operator) 

To  reprogram  a channel  that  has  been  previously  trained, 
follow  these  steps: 

1.  Cycle  the  ignition  to  the  ON/ RUN  position. 


2.  Push  and  hold  the  desired  HomeLink  button  until  the 
indicator  light  begins  to  flash  after  20  seconds.  Do  not 

release  the  button. 

3.  Without  releasing  the  button  proceed  with 
"Canadian/Gate  Operator  Programming"  step  2 and 
follow  all  remaining  steps. 

Using  HomeLink 

To  operate,  push  and  release  the  programmed  HomeLink 
button.  Activation  will  now  occur  for  the  programmed 
device  (i.e.  garage  door  opener,  gate  operator,  security 
system,  entry  door  lock,  home /office  lighting,  etc.)  The 
hand-held  transmitter  of  the  device  may  also  be  used  at 
any  time. 

Security 

It  is  advised  to  erase  all  channels  before  you  sell  or  turn 
in  your  vehicle. 


/\i 


To  do  this,  push  and  hold  the  two  outside  buttons  for  20 
seconds  until  the  red  indicator  flashes.  Note  that  all 
channels  will  be  erased.  Individual  channels  cannot  be 
erased. 

The  HomeLink  Universal  Transceiver  is  disabled  when 
the  Vehicle  Security  Alarm  is  active. 

Troubleshooting  Tips 

If  you  are  having  trouble  programming  HomeLink,  here 
are  some  of  the  most  common  solutions: 

• Replace  the  battery  in  the  Garage  Door  Opener  hand- 
held transmitter. 

• Push  the  LEARN  button  on  the  Garage  Door  Opener 
to  complete  the  training  for  a Rolling  Code. 

• Did  you  unplug  the  device  for  programming  and 
remember  to  plug  it  back  in? 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  189 

If  you  have  any  problems,  or  require  assistance,  please 
call  toll-free  1-800-355-3515  or,  on  the  Internet  at 
HomeLink.com  for  information  or  assistance. 


WARNING! 

• Vehicle  exhaust  contains  carbon  monoxide,  a dan- 
gerous gas.  Do  not  run  your  vehicle  in  the  garage 
while  programming  the  transceiver.  Exhaust  gas 
can  cause  serious  injury  or  death. 

• Your  motorized  door  or  gate  will  open  and  close 
while  you  are  programming  the  universal  trans- 
ceiver. Do  not  program  the  transceiver  if  people, 
pets  or  other  objects  are  in  the  path  of  the  door  or 
gate.  Only  use  this  transceiver  with  a garage  door 
opener  that  has  a "stop  and  reverse"  feature  as 
required  by  Federal  safety  standards.  This  includes 
most  garage  door  opener  models  manufactured 


(Continued) 


190  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

after  1982.  Do  not  use  a garage  door  opener  without 
these  safety  features.  Call  toll-free  1-800-355-3515 
or,  on  the  Internet  at  HomeLink.com  for  safety 
information  or  assistance. 

General  Information 

This  device  complies  with  FCC  rules  Part  15  and  Industry 
Canada  RSS-210.  Operation  is  subject  to  the  following 
two  conditions: 

1.  This  device  may  not  cause  harmful  interference. 

2.  This  device  must  accept  any  interference  that  may  be 
received  including  interference  that  may  cause  unde- 
sired operation. 


NOTE: 

• The  transmitter  has  been  tested  and  it  complies  with 
FCC  and  IC  rules.  Changes  or  modifications  not  ex- 
pressly approved  by  the  party  responsible  for  compli- 
ance could  void  the  user's  authority  to  operate  the 
device. 

• The  term  IC  before  the  certification/registration  num- 
ber only  signifies  that  Industry  Canada  technical  speci- 
fications were  met. 


POWER  SUNROOF  — IF  EQUIPPED 

The  power  sunroof  switch  is  located  on  the  overhead 
console. 


034206938 


Power  Sunroof  Switch 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  191 


WARNING! 

• Never  leave  children  alone  in  a vehicle,  or  with 
access  to  an  unlocked  vehicle.  Never  leave  the  Key 
Fob  in  or  near  the  vehicle,  or  in  a location  acces- 
sible to  children.  Occupants,  particularly  unat- 
tended children,  can  become  entrapped  by  the 
power  sunroof  while  operating  the  power  sunroof 
switch.  Such  entrapment  may  result  in  serious 
injury  or  death. 

• In  a collision,  there  is  a greater  risk  of  being  thrown 
from  a vehicle  with  an  open  sunroof.  You  could 
also  be  seriously  injured  or  killed.  Always  fasten 
your  seat  belt  properly  and  make  sure  all  passen- 
gers are  properly  secured. 

• Do  not  allow  small  children  to  operate  the  sunroof. 
Never  allow  your  fingers,  other  body  parts,  or  any 
object  to  project  through  the  sunroof  opening. 
Injury  may  result. 


3 


192  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

Opening  Sunroof  — Express 

Push  the  switch  rearward  and  release  it  within  one-half 
second.  The  sunroof  and  sunshade  will  open  automati- 
cally from  any  position.  The  sunroof  and  sunshade  will 
open  fully  and  stop  automatically.  This  is  called  "Express 
Open."  During  Express  Open  operation,  any  other  actua- 
tion of  the  sunroof  switch  will  stop  the  sunroof. 

Opening  Sunroof  — Manual  Mode 

To  open  the  sunroof,  push  and  hold  the  switch  rearward 
to  full  open.  Any  release  of  the  switch  will  stop  the 
movement.  The  sunroof  and  sunshade  will  remain  in  a 
partially  opened  condition  until  the  sunroof  switch  is 
pushed  again. 

Closing  Sunroof  — Express 

Push  the  switch  forward  and  release  it  within  one-half 
second  and  the  sunroof  will  close  automatically  from  any 


position.  The  sunroof  will  close  fully  and  stop  automati- 
cally. This  is  called  "Express  Close."  During  Express 
Close  operation,  any  other  actuation  of  the  switch  will 
stop  the  sunroof. 

Closing  Sunroof  — Manual  Mode 

To  close  the  sunroof,  push  and  hold  the  switch  in  the 
forward  position.  Any  release  of  the  switch  will  stop  the 
movement  and  the  sunroof  will  remain  in  a partially 
closed  condition  until  the  sunroof  switch  is  pushed  again. 

Pinch  Protect  Feature 

This  feature  will  detect  an  obstruction  in  the  opening  of 
the  sunroof  during  Express  Close  operation.  If  an  ob- 
struction in  the  path  of  the  sunroof  is  detected,  the 
sunroof  will  automatically  retract.  Remove  the  obstruc- 
tion if  this  occurs.  Next,  push  the  switch  forward  and 
release  to  Express  Close. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  193 


Venting  Sunroof  — Express 

Push  and  release  the  Vent  button  within  one  half  second 
and  the  sunroof  will  open  to  the  vent  position.  This  is 
called  "Express  Vent",  and  it  will  occur  regardless  of 
sunroof  position.  During  Express  Vent  operation,  any 
other  actuation  of  the  switch  will  stop  the  sunroof. 

Sunshade  Operation 

The  sunshade  can  be  opened  manually.  However,  the 
sunshade  will  open  automatically  as  the  sunroof  opens. 

NOTE:  The  sunshade  cannot  be  closed  if  the  sunroof  is 
open. 

Wind  Buffeting 

Wind  buffeting  can  be  described  as  the  perception  of 
pressure  on  the  ears  or  a helicopter-type  sound  in  the 
ears.  Your  vehicle  may  exhibit  wind  buffeting  with  the 
windows  down,  or  the  sunroof  (if  equipped)  in  certain 


open  or  partially  open  positions.  This  is  a normal  occur- 
rence and  can  be  minimized.  If  the  buffeting  occurs  with 
the  rear  windows  open,  open  the  front  and  rear  windows 
together  to  minimize  the  buffeting.  If  the  buffeting  occurs 
with  the  sunroof  open,  adjust  the  sunroof  opening  to 
minimize  the  buffeting  or  open  any  window. 


3 


Sunroof  Maintenance 


Use  only  a non-abrasive  cleaner  and  a soft  cloth  to  clean 
the  glass  panel. 

Ignition  Off  Operation 

For  Vehicles  Not  Equipped  With  The  Electronic  Vehicle 
Information  Center  (EVIC) 

The  power  sunroof  switch  will  remain  active  for  45 
seconds  after  the  ignition  switch  is  turned  to  the  LOCK 
position.  Opening  either  front  door  will  cancel  this 
feature. 


i Provided  by: 


194  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


For  Vehicles  Equipped  With  The  EVIC 

The  power  sunroof  switch  will  remain  active  for  up  to 
approximately  ten  minutes  after  the  ignition  switch  is 
turned  to  the  LOCK  position.  Opening  either  front  door 
will  cancel  this  feature. 

ELECTRICAL  POWER  OUTLETS 

There  is  a standard  12  Volt  (13  Amp)  power  outlet  located 
in  the  Integrated  Center  Stack  (ICS)  for  added  conve- 
nience. This  power  outlet  can  power  mobile  phones, 
electronics  and  other  low  power  devices. 

12  Volt  Power  Outlet 

Power  is  available  when  the  ignition  switch  is  in  the  ON 
or  ACC  position.  Insert  the  cigar  lighter  or  accessory  plug 
into  the  outlet  for  use.  To  preserve  the  heating  element, 
do  not  hold  the  lighter  in  the  heating  position. 


Information  Provided  by: 


NOTE:  To  ensure  proper  operation  a MOPAR  knob  and 
element  must  be  used. 


CAUTION! 

• Do  not  exceed  the  maximum  power  of  160  Watts 
(13  Amps)  at  12  Volts.  If  the  160  Watt  (13  Amp) 
power  rating  is  exceeded  the  fuse  protecting  the 
system  will  need  to  be  replaced. 

• Power  outlets  are  designed  for  accessory  plugs 
only.  Do  not  insert  any  other  object  in  the  power 
outlets  as  this  will  damage  the  outlet  and  blow  the 
fuse.  Improper  use  of  the  power  outlet  can  cause 
damage  not  covered  by  your  New  Vehicle  Limited 
Warranty. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  195 


034636797 


Power  Outlet  Fuse  Location 


196  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


WARNING! 

To  avoid  serious  injury  or  death: 

• Only  devices  designed  for  use  in  this  type  of  outlet 
should  be  inserted  into  any  12  Volt  outlet. 

• Do  not  touch  with  wet  hands. 

• Close  the  lid  when  not  in  use  and  while  driving  the 
vehicle. 

• If  this  outlet  is  mishandled,  it  may  cause  an  electric 
shock  and  failure. 


CAUTION! 


• Many  accessories  that  can  be  plugged  in  draw 
power  from  the  vehicle's  battery,  even  when  not  in 
use  (i.e.,  cellular  phones,  etc.).  Eventually,  if 
plugged  in  long  enough,  the  vehicle's  battery  will 
discharge  sufficiently  to  degrade  battery  life  and/or 
prevent  the  engine  from  starting. 

• Accessories  that  draw  higher  power  (i.e.,  coolers, 
vacuum  cleaners,  lights,  etc.)  will  degrade  the  bat- 
tery even  more  quickly.  Only  use  these  intermit- 
tently and  with  great  caution. 

• After  the  use  of  high  power  draw  accessories,  or 
long  periods  of  the  vehicle  not  being  started  (with 
accessories  still  plugged  in),  the  vehicle  must  be 
driven  a sufficient  length  of  time  to  allow  the 
generator  to  recharge  the  vehicle's  battery. 


Al 


POWER  INVERTER  — IF  EQUIPPED 


A 115  Volt  (150  Watt)  AC  power  inverter  is  located  on  the 
front  of  the  center  console  for  added  convenience.  This 
outlet  can  power  mobile  phones,  electronics  and  other 
low  power  devices  requiring  power  up  to  150  Watts. 
Certain  high-end  video  games  consoles  will  exceed  this 
power  limit,  as  will  most  power  tools. 

The  power  inverter  is  designed  with  built-in  overload 
protection.  If  the  power  rating  of  150  Watts  is  exceeded, 
the  power  inverter  will  automatically  shut  down.  Once 
the  electrical  device  has  been  removed  from  the  outlet  the 
inverter  should  automatically  reset.  If  the  power  rating 
exceeds  approximately  170  Watts,  the  power  inverter 
may  have  to  be  reset  manually.  To  reset  the  inverter 
manually,  unplug  the  device  and  plug  it  in  again.  To 
avoid  overloading  the  circuit,  check  the  power  ratings  on 
electrical  devices  prior  to  using  the  inverter. 


Information  Provi 

ZD  = /M 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  197 


035006145 


115  Volt  Power  Outlet 


198  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


WARNING! 

To  avoid  serious  injury  or  death: 

• Do  not  use  a three-prong  adaptor. 

• Do  not  insert  any  objects  into  the  receptacles. 

• Do  not  touch  with  wet  hands. 

• Close  the  lid  when  not  in  use. 

• If  this  outlet  is  mishandled,  it  may  cause  an  electric 
shock  and  failure. 


CAUTION! 


• Many  accessories  that  can  be  plugged  in  draw 
power  from  the  vehicle's  battery,  even  when  not  in 
use  (i.e.,  cellular  phones,  etc.).  Eventually,  if 
plugged  in  long  enough,  the  vehicle's  battery  will 
discharge  sufficiently  to  degrade  battery  life  and/or 
prevent  engine  starting. 

• Accessories  that  draw  higher  power  (i.e.,  coolers, 
vacuum  cleaners,  lights,  etc.)  will  degrade  the  bat- 
tery even  more  quickly.  Only  use  these  intermit- 
tently and  with  great  caution. 

• After  the  use  of  high  power  draw  accessories,  or 
long  periods  of  the  vehicle  not  being  started  (with 
accessories  still  plugged  in),  the  vehicle  must  be 
driven  a sufficient  length  of  time  to  allow  the 
generator  to  recharge  the  vehicle's  battery. 


Al 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  199 


CUPHOLDERS 

Your  vehicle  is  equipped  with  four  cupholders.  There  are 
two  illuminated  cupholders  located  in  the  front. 


There  are  two  cupholders  located  in  the  back  for  the  rear 
passengers. 


Front  Cupholders 


Rear  Cupholders 


200  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


STORAGE 


Glove  Compartment  And  Storage  Bin 

Located  on  the  passenger  side  of  the  instrument  panel  are 
an  upper  storage  bin  and  a lower  glove  compartment. 


Storage  Bins 

1 — Upper  Storage  Bin 

2 — Lower  Glove  Compartment 


To  open  the  lower  glove  compartment,  pull  outward  on 
the  release  handle. 


Glove  Compartment 


CD  = /M_E=?=R 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  201 


Door  Storage 

The  interior  door  panels  are  equipped  with  lower  storage 
areas. 


Front  Door  Storage 


Rear  Door  Storage 

CONSOLE  FEATURES 


The  floor  console  contains  both  an  upper  and  lower 
storage  compartment. 


202  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  ■ 

To  open  the  upper  storage  compartment,  push  inward  on 
the  upper  handle  to  unlatch  the  upper  lid  and  lift  the  lid 
open. 


Lower  Storage  Compartment 


Upper  Storage  Compartment 

To  open  the  lower  storage  compartment,  lift  upward  on 
the  lower  handle  to  unlatch  the  lower  storage  compart- 
ment and  lift  the  lid  open. 


WARNING! 

Do  not  operate  this  vehicle  with  a console  compart- 
ment lid  in  the  open  position.  Driving  with  the 
console  compartment  lid  open  may  result  in  injury  in 
a collision. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  203 


CARGO  AREA  FEATURES 


Cargo  Light 


The  light  is  mounted  in  the  headliner  above  the  cargo 
area  to  illuminate  the  cargo  area. 

Cargo  Cover 


The  cargo  area  trim  panels  include  two  notches  for 
mounting  the  available  tonneau  cover  that  accommo- 
dates the  reclining  rear  seat. 

To  install  the  Cargo  Cover,  insert  either  end  of  the  cover 
into  one  of  the  two  notches  located  in  the  rear  trim 
panels.  With  one  of  the  cover  ends  installed,  push  inward 
on  the  opposite  end  and  install  it  into  the  same  notch 
location  of  the  rear  trim  panel. 


Rear  Trim  Notches 


204  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Using  the  handle,  pull  the  cover  toward  you  and  guide 
the  rear  cover  posts  into  the  guides  located  on  both  sides 
of  the  rear  trim  panel. 


WARNING! 

In  a collision  a cargo  cover  loose  in  the  vehicle  could 
cause  injury.  It  could  fly  around  in  a sudden  stop  and 
strike  someone  in  the  vehicle.  Do  not  store  the  cargo 
cover  on  the  cargo  floor  or  in  the  passenger  compart- 
ment. Remove  the  cover  from  the  vehicle  when  taken 
from  its  mounting.  Do  not  store  in  the  vehicle. 


AI_=R 


Cargo  Cover  Guides 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  205 


Removable  Load  Floor 


Cargo  Tie-Down  Loops 


The  cargo  area  load  floor  is  removable  and  can  be 
washed  with  mild  soap  and  water. 


There  are  four  tie-downs  (D-rings)  installed  in  the  cargo 
area  for  securing  cargo. 


Removable  Load  Floor 


Cargo  Area  Tie-Downs 


206  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


WARNING! 

• Cargo  tie-down  loops  are  not  safe  anchors  for  a 
child  seat  tether  strap.  In  a sudden  stop  or  collision 
a loop  could  pull  loose  and  allow  the  child  seat  to 
come  loose.  A child  could  be  badly  injured.  Use 
only  the  anchors  provided  for  child  seat  tethers. 

• The  weight  and  position  of  cargo  and  passengers 
can  change  the  vehicle  center  of  gravity  and  vehicle 
handling.  To  avoid  loss  of  control  resulting  in 
personal  injury,  follow  these  guidelines  for  loading 
your  vehicle: 

• Always  place  cargo  evenly  on  the  cargo  floor.  Put 
heavier  objects  as  low  and  as  far  forward  as  pos- 
sible. 


(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Place  as  much  cargo  as  possible  in  front  of  the  rear 
axle.  Too  much  weight  or  improperly  placed  weight 
over  or  behind  the  rear  axle  can  cause  the  rear  of 
the  vehicle  to  sway. 

• Do  not  pile  luggage  or  cargo  higher  than  the  top  of 
the  seatback.  This  could  impair  visibility  or  be- 
come a dangerous  projectile  in  a sudden  stop  or 
collision. 

• To  help  protect  against  personal  injury,  passengers 
should  not  be  seated  in  the  rear  cargo  area.  The  rear 
cargo  space  is  intended  for  load  carrying  purposes 
only,  not  for  passengers,  who  should  sit  in  seats 
and  use  seat  belts. 


& 


| CD  = /M 


Fold  Down  Speakers  — If  Equipped 

When  the  liftgate  is  open,  the  speakers  can  swing  down 
off  the  trim  panel  to  face  rearward,  for  tailgating  and 
other  activities. 


Fold  Down  Speakers 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  207 
REAR  WINDOW  FEATURES 
Rear  Window  Wiper/Washer 

The  rear  wiper /washer  is  controlled  by  a rotary  switch 
located  on  the  center  portion  of  the  control  lever.  The  control 
lever  is  located  on  the  right  side  of  the  steering  column. 


031507505 

Rear  Wiper/Washer  Control  Lever 


208  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Rotate  the  center  portion  of  the  lever  upward  to 
the  first  detent  position  for  rear  wiper  operation. 


NOTE:  The  rear  wiper  operates  in  an  intermittent  mode 
only. 


Rotate  the  center  portion  of  the  lever  past  the 
first  detent  to  activate  the  rear  washer.  The 
washer  pump  and  the  wiper  will  continue  to 
operate  as  long  as  the  switch  is  held  (for  a 
maximum  of  10  seconds).  Upon  release,  the  wiper  will 
continue  to  cycle  two  times  before  returning  to  the  set 
position. 


If  the  rear  wiper  is  operating  when  the  ignition  is  turned 
OFF,  the  wiper  will  automatically  return  to  the  "park" 
position  if  power  accessory  delay  is  active.  Power  acces- 
sory delay  can  be  cancelled  by  opening  the  door,  if  this 
happens  the  rear  wiper  will  stop  at  its  current  position 
and  will  not  go  to  "park". 


Rear  Window  Defroster 


The  rear  window  defroster  button  is  located  on 
the  climate  controls  mode  control  knob.  Push  the 
button  to  turn  on  the  rear  window  defroster  and  the 
heated  outside  mirrors  (if  equipped).  An  indicator  in  the 
button  will  illuminate  when  the  rear  window  defroster  is 
on.  The  rear  window  defroster  automatically  turns  off 
after  approximately  10  minutes.  For  an  additional  five 
minutes  of  operation,  push  the  button  a second  time. 

NOTE:  To  prevent  excessive  battery  drain,  use  the  rear 
window  defroster  only  when  the  engine  is  operating. 


/\[ i=r 


CAUTION! 


Failure  to  follow  these  cautions  can  cause  damage  to 

the  heating  elements: 

• Use  care  when  washing  the  inside  of  the  rear 
window.  Do  not  use  abrasive  window  cleaners  on 
the  interior  surface  of  the  window.  Use  a soft  cloth 
and  a mild  washing  solution,  wiping  parallel  to  the 
heating  elements.  Labels  can  be  peeled  off  after 
soaking  with  warm  water. 

• Do  not  use  scrapers,  sharp  instruments,  or  abrasive 
window  cleaners  on  the  interior  surface  of  the 
window. 

• Keep  all  objects  a safe  distance  from  the  window. 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  209 


ROOF  LUGGAGE  RACK  — IF  EQUIPPED 

The  crossbars  and  siderails  are  designed  to  carry  the 
cargo  on  vehicles  equipped  with  a luggage  rack.  The  load 
must  not  exceed  150  lbs  (68  kg),  and  should  be  uniformly 
distributed  over  the  luggage  rack  crossbars. 

NOTE:  If  not  equipped  with  crossbars,  your  authorized 
dealer  can  order  and  install  MOPAR  crossbars  built 
specifically  for  this  roof  rack  system. 

Distribute  cargo  weight  evenly  on  the  luggage  rack 
crossbars.  The  luggage  rack  does  not  increase  the  total 
load  carrying  capacity  of  the  vehicle.  Be  sure  the  total 
load  of  cargo  inside  the  vehicle  plus  that  on  the  external 
rack  does  not  exceed  the  maximum  vehicle  load  capacity. 

The  crossbars  must  also  be  secured  in  one  of  the  seven 
detent  positions  marked  with  an  arrow  on  the  siderails  to 
prevent  movement.  To  move  the  crossbars,  loosen  the 
thumb  screws  located  at  the  upper  edge  of  each  crossbar 


210  UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE 


approximately  eight  turns,  then  move  the  crossbar  to  the 
desired  position,  keeping  the  crossbars  perpendicular  to 
the  luggage  rack  side  rails.  Once  the  crossbar  is  in  one  of 
the  seven  detent  positions,  retighten  the  thumb  screws  to 
lock  the  crossbar  into  position. 

NOTE: 

• To  help  control  wind  noise  when  the  crossbars  are  not 
in  use,  place  the  front  crossbar  in  the  first  detent  from 
the  front  of  the  vehicle  and  the  rear  crossbar  in  the 
second  detent  from  the  rear  of  the  vehicle. 

• If  the  rear  crossbar  (or  any  metallic  object)  is  placed 
over  the  satellite  radio  antenna  (if  equipped),  you  may 
experience  interruption  of  satellite  radio  reception.  For 
improved  satellite  radio  reception,  place  the  rear  cross- 
bar in  the  second  detent  from  the  rear  of  the  vehicle 
when  not  in  use. 


CAUTION! 


• To  prevent  damage  to  the  roof  of  your  vehicle,  DO 
NOT  carry  any  loads  on  the  luggage  rack  without 
crossbars  installed.  The  load  should  be  secured  and 
placed  on  top  of  the  crossbars,  not  directly  on  the 
roof.  If  it  is  necessary  to  place  the  load  on  the  roof, 
place  a blanket  or  some  other  protection  between 
the  load  and  the  roof  surface. 

• To  avoid  damage  to  the  luggage  rack  and  vehicle, 
do  not  exceed  the  maximum  luggage  rack  load 
capacity  of  150  lb  (68  kg).  Always  distribute  heavy 
loads  as  evenly  as  possible  and  secure  the  load 
appropriately. 

• Long  loads  which  extend  over  the  windshield,  such 
as  wood  panels  or  surfboards,  or  loads  with  large 
frontal  area  should  be  secured  to  both  the  front  and 
rear  of  the  vehicle. 


(Continued) 


UNDERSTANDING  THE  FEATURES  OF  YOUR  VEHICLE  211 


CAUTION!  (Continued) 

WARNING! 

• Travel  at  reduced  speeds  and  turn  corners  carefully 
when  carrying  large  or  heavy  loads  on  the  roof 
rack.  Wind  forces,  due  to  natural  causes  or  nearby 
truck  traffic,  can  add  sudden  upward  lift  to  a load. 
This  is  especially  true  on  large  flat  loads  and  may 
result  in  damage  to  the  cargo  or  your  vehicle. 

Cargo  must  be  securely  tied  before  driving  your 
vehicle.  Improperly  secured  loads  can  fly  off  the 
vehicle,  particularly  at  high  speeds,  resulting  in  per- 
sonal injury  or  property  damage.  Follow  the  roof  rack 
cautions  when  carrying  cargo  on  your  roof  rack. 

Information  Provided  b 

| i=D  = /M_i 


Information  Provided  by: 

CZ)  = /M_  = ?^ 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


CONTENTS 

■ INSTRUMENT  PANEL  FEATURES 217 

■ INSTRUMENT  CLUSTER 218 

■ WARNING  AND  INDICATOR  LIGHTS 223 

□ Red  Telltale  Indicator  Lights 224 

□ Yellow  Telltale  Indicator  Lights 233 

□ Green  Telltale  Indicator  Lights 244 

□ Blue  Telltale  Indicator  Light 246 

□ White  Telltale  Indicator  Light 246 

■ MINI-TRIP  COMPUTER  — IF  EQUIPPED 247 

□ Control  Buttons 248 


■ ELECTRONIC  VEHICLE  INFORMATION  CENTER 


(EVIC)  — IF  EQUIPPED 249 

□ Engine  Oil  Change  Indicator  System  — If 

Equipped 252 

□ EVIC  Functions 253 

□ Compass/Temperature/Audio 253 

□ Average  Fuel  Economy 254 

□ Distance  To  Empty  (DTE) 254 

□ Tire  Pressure  Monitor  (TPM) 254 

□ Elapsed  Time 254 


214  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 

□ Display  Units  Of  Measure  In 255 

I Personal  Settings  (Customer-Programmable 

Features) 255 

□ Language 255 

□ Auto  Lock  Doors 256 

□ Auto  Unlock  On  Exit 256 

□ RKE  Unlock 256 

□ Flash  Lamps  With  Lock 256 

□ Sound  Horn  With  Lock 257 

□ Headlamp  Off  Delay 257 

□ Headlamps  with  Wipers  (Available  with  Auto 

Headlights  Only) 257 

□ Key  Off  Power  Delay 257 

□ Illuminated  Approach 258 


□ Hill  Start  Assist  (HSA)  — If  Equipped 258 

□ Display  Units  In 258 

□ Automatic  Compass  Calibration 258 

□ Manual  Compass  Calibration 259 

□ Compass  Variance  259 

UCONNECT  230  - AM/FM  STEREO  RADIO  AND 
6-DISC  CD/DVD  CHANGER  (MP3/WMA  AUX 
JACK)  261 

□ Operating  Instructions  — Radio  Mode 261 

□ Operation  Instructions  — DISC  Mode  For  CD  And 

MP3/WMA  Audio  Play,  DVD  - Video 270 

□ LIST  Button  — DISC  Mode  For  MP3/WMA 

Play 275 

□ INFO  Button  — DISC  Mode  For  MP3/WMA 

Play 275 


□ Uconnect  (Satellite  Radio)  — If  Equipped  . . . .277 

■ UCONNECT  430/430N  CD/DVD/HDD/NAV  — IF 

EQUIPPED 282 

□ Operating  Instructions  (Voice  Command  System) 

— If  Equipped 282 

□ Operating  Instructions  (Uconnect  Phone)  — If 

Equipped 282 

■ UCONNECT  130  282 

□ Operating  Instructions  — Radio  Mode  282 

□ Operation  Instructions  — CD  MODE  For  CD  And 

MP3  Audio  Play 286 

□ Notes  On  Playing  MP3  Files  288 

□ Operation  Instructions  — Auxiliary  Mode  . . . .291 

■ UCONNECT  130  WITH  SATELLITE  RADIO  . . .292 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  215 

□ Operating  Instructions  — Radio  Mode 292 

□ Operation  Instructions  — CD  MODE  For  CD  And 

MP3  Audio  Play 298 

□ Notes  On  Playing  MP3  Files  300 

□ LIST  Button  — CD  Mode  For  MP3  Play 303 

□ INFO  Button  — CD  Mode  For  MP3  Play 303 

□ Uconnect  (Satellite  Radio)  — If  Equipped  . . . .304 
iPod/USB/MP3  CONTROL  — IF  EQUIPPED  . . .309 

□ Connecting  The  iPod  Or  External  USB 

Device 309 

□ Using  This  Feature 310 

□ Controlling  The  iPod  Or  External  USB  Device 

Using  Radio  Buttons 310 

□ Play  Mode 311 


216  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


□ List  Or  Browse  Mode 312 

□ Bluetooth  Streaming  Audio  (BTSA) 314 

■ STEERING  WHEEL  AUDIO  CONTROLS 315 

□ Radio  Operation 316 

□ CD  Player 317 

■ CD/DVD  DISC  MAINTENANCE 317 


■ RADIO  OPERATION  AND  MOBILE  DEVICES  . .318 


■ CLIMATE  CONTROLS 318 

□ Manual  Heating  And  Air  Conditioning 318 

□ Automatic  Temperature  Control  (ATC)  — If 

Equipped 323 

□ Operating  Tips 329 


Information  Provided  by: 


INSTRUMENT  PANEL  FEATURES 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  217 


W0107732 


1 — Air  Outlet 

2 — Demisters 

3 — Instrument  Cluster 

4 — Radio 


5 — Storage  Bin 

6 — Glove  Compartment 

7 — Climate  Controls 

8 — Power  Outlet 


Information  Provided  by: 


9 — Heated  Seat  Switch  - If  Equipped 

10  — Hazard  Warning  Flasher 

11  — ESC  OFF  Switch  - If  Equipped 

12  — Heated  Seat  Switch  - If  Equipped 


218  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 

INSTRUMENT  CLUSTER 


_ Information  Provided  by: 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  219 


1.  Speedometer 

• The  Speedometer  shows  the  vehicle  speed  in  miles 
per  hour  (MPH)  and  kilometers  per  hour  (km/h). 

Odometer  Display  / Trip  Odometer  Display  This 
display  indicates  the  total  distance  the  vehicle  has 
been  driven. 

NOTE:  U.S.  Federal  regulations  require  that  upon  transfer 
of  vehicle  ownership,  the  seller  certify  to  the  purchaser  the 
correct  mileage  that  the  vehicle  has  been  driven.  If  your 
odometer  needs  to  be  repaired  or  serviced,  the  repair  tech- 
nician should  leave  the  odometer  reading  the  same  as  it  was 
before  the  repair  or  service.  If  s/he  cannot  do  so,  then  the 
odometer  must  be  set  at  zero,  and  a sticker  must  be  placed  in 
the  door  jamb  stating  what  the  mileage  was  before  the  repair 
or  service.  It  is  a good  idea  for  you  to  make  a record  of  the 
odometer  reading  before  the  repair /service,  so  that  you  can 
be  sure  that  it  is  properly  reset,  or  that  the  door  jamb  sticker 
is  accurate  if  the  odometer  must  be  reset  at  zero. 


Information 


2.  Tachometer 

• This  gauge  measures  engine  revolutions  per  minute 
(RPM  x 1000).  Before  the  pointer  reaches  the  red  area, 
ease  up  on  the  accelerator  to  prevent  engine  damage. 

3.  Temperature  Gauge 

• The  temperature  gauge  shows  engine  coolant  tem- 
perature. Any  reading  within  the  normal  range  indi- 
cates that  the  engine  cooling  system  is  operating 
satisfactorily. 

• The  gauge  pointer  will  likely  indicate  a higher  tem- 
perature when  driving  in  hot  weather  or  up  moun- 
tain grades.  It  should  not  be  allowed  to  exceed  the 
upper  limits  of  the  normal  operating  range. 


i Provided  by: 


220  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


CAUTION! 

Driving  with  a hot  engine  cooling  system  could 
damage  your  vehicle.  If  the  temperature  gauge  reads 
"H"  pull  over  and  stop  the  vehicle.  Idle  the  vehicle 
with  the  air  conditioner  turned  off  until  the  pointer 
drops  back  into  the  normal  range.  If  the  pointer 
remains  on  the  "H",  turn  the  engine  off  immediately 
and  call  an  authorized  dealer  for  service. 


WARNING! 

A hot  engine  cooling  system  is  dangerous.  You  or 
others  could  be  badly  burned  by  steam  or  boiling 
coolant.  You  may  want  to  call  an  authorized  dealer 
for  service  if  your  vehicle  overheats.  If  you  decide  to 
look  under  the  hood  yourself,  see  "Maintaining  Your 
Vehicle".  Follow  the  warnings  under  the  Cooling 
System  Pressure  Cap  paragraph. 


4.  Electronic  Vehicle  Information  Center  (EVIC)  — If 
Equipped  / Odometer  Display  / Trip  Odometer  Dis- 
play 

Electronic  Vehicle  Information  Center  (EVIC)  — If 
Equipped 

The  Electronic  Vehicle  Information  Center  (EVIC)  fea- 
tures a driver-interactive  display  that  is  located  in  the 
instrument  cluster.  Refer  to  "Electronic  Vehicle  Informa- 
tion Center  (EVIC)"  in  this  section  for  further  informa- 
tion. 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  221 


Message  Display  Area 

When  the  appropriate  conditions  exist,  the  following 
odometer  messages  will  display: 


door Door  Ajar 

gATE  Liftgate  Ajar 

LoW  tirE Low  Tire  Pressure 

g AS  CAP  Fuel  Cap  Fault 

noFUSE Fuse  Fault 

CHAngE  OIL  Oil  Change  Required 

LoCOOL  Low  Coolant 


NOTE:  Some  of  the  above  warnings  will  be  displayed  in 
the  Electronic  Vehicle  Information  Center  Display  Area 
located  in  the  instrument  cluster. 

Refer  to  "Electronic  Vehicle  Information  Center  (EVIC)  — 
If  Equipped"  in  this  section  for  further  information. 


LoW  tirE 

When  the  appropriate  condition  exists,  the  odometer 
display  will  toggle  between  LoW  and  tirE  for  three 
cycles. 

gASCAP 

If  the  vehicle  diagnostic  system  determines  that  the  fuel 
filler  cap  is  loose,  improperly  installed,  or  damaged,  a 
"gASCAP"  message  will  display  in  the  odometer  display 
area.  Tighten  the  fuel  filler  cap  properly  and  push  the 
STEP  button  on  the  steering  wheel  to  turn  off  the 
message.  If  the  problem  continues,  the  message  will 
appear  the  next  time  the  vehicle  is  started. 


Information  Provided  by: 


222  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 

noFUSE 

If  the  vehicle  diagnostic  system  determines  that  the 
Ignition  Off  Draw  (IOD)  fuse  is  improperly  installed,  or 
damaged,  a "noFUSE"  message  will  display  in  the  odom- 
eter display  area.  Refer  to  "Fuses"  in  "Maintaining  Your 
Vehicle"  for  further  information  on  fuses  and  fuse  loca- 
tions. 

CHAngE  OIL 

Your  vehicle  is  equipped  with  an  engine  oil  change 
indicator  system.  The  odometer  display  will  toggle  be- 
tween CHAngE  and  Oil  for  approximately  12  seconds, 
after  a single  chime  has  sounded,  to  indicate  the  next 
scheduled  oil  change  interval.  The  engine  oil  change 
indicator  system  is  duty  cycle-based,  which  means  the 
engine  oil  change  interval  may  fluctuate  dependent  upon 
your  personal  driving  style. 

Unless  reset,  this  message  will  continue  to  display  each 
time  you  turn  the  ignition  switch  to  the  ON /RUN 


position.  To  reset  the  oil  change  indicator  system  (after 
performing  the  scheduled  maintenance),  perform  the 
following  steps. 

1.  Turn  the  ignition  switch  to  the  ON /RUN  position  (do 
not  start  the  engine). 

2.  Fully  push  the  accelerator  pedal,  slowly,  three  times 
within  10  seconds. 

3.  Turn  the  ignition  switch  to  the  OFF  position. 

NOTE:  If  the  indicator  message  illuminates  when  you 
start  the  engine,  the  oil  change  indicator  system  did  not 
reset.  If  necessary,  repeat  these  steps. 

5.  Fuel  Gauge 

• The  pointer  shows  the  level  of  fuel  in  the  fuel  tank 
when  the  ignition  switch  is  in  the  ON/RUN  position 

The  fuel  pump  symbol  points  to  the  side  of  the 
vehicle  where  the  fuel  door  is  located. 


/\i 


WARNING  AND  INDICATOR  LIGHTS 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  223 


IMPORTANT:  The  warning  / indicator  light  switches  on 
in  the  instrument  panel  together  with  a dedicated  mes- 
sage and/or  acoustic  signal  when  applicable.  These 
indications  are  indicative  and  precautionary  and  as  such 
must  not  be  considered  as  exhaustive  and/or  alternative 
to  the  information  contained  in  the  Owner  Manual, 
which  you  are  advised  to  read  carefully  in  all  cases. 
Always  refer  to  the  information  in  this  chapter  in  the 
event  of  a failure  indication. 

All  active  telltales  will  display  first  if  applicable.  The 
system  check  menu  may  appear  different  based  upon 
equipment  options  and  current  vehicle  status.  Some 
telltales  are  optional  and  may  not  appear. 


Information  Provided  by: 

= = 


224  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


Red  Telltale  Indicator  Lights 

Seat  Belt  Reminder  Warning  Light 


Red  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

* 

Seat  Belt  Reminder  Warning  Light 

When  the  ignition  switch  is  first  turned  to  ON /RUN,  this  light  will  turn  on  for  four  to  eight 
seconds  as  a bulb  check.  During  the  bulb  check,  if  the  driver's  seat  belt  is  unbuckled,  a 
chime  will  sound.  After  the  bulb  check  or  when  driving,  if  the  driver  seat  belt  remains  un- 
buckled, the  Seat  Belt  Reminder  Light  will  flash  or  remain  on  continuously  and  a chime  will 
sound.  Refer  to  "Occupant  Restraints"  in  "Things  To  Know  Before  Starting  Your  Vehicle"  for 
further  information. 

I ) CZ1  /\  l C=  I — < 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  225 

Air  Bag  Warning  Light 


Red  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

•; 

rx 

Air  Bag  Warning  Light 

This  light  will  turn  on  for  four  to  eight  seconds  as  a bulb  check  when  the  ignition  switch  is 
first  turned  to  ON/RUN.  If  the  light  is  either  not  on  during  starting,  stays  on,  or  turns  on 
while  driving,  have  the  system  inspected  at  an  authorized  dealer  as  soon  as  possible.  This 
light  will  illuminate  with  a single  chime  when  a fault  with  the  Air  Bag  Warning  Light  has 
been  detected,  it  will  stay  on  until  the  fault  is  cleared.  If  the  light  comes  on  intermittently  or 
remains  on  while  driving,  have  an  authorized  dealer  service  the  vehicle  immediately.  Refer 
to  "Occupant  Restraints"  in  "Things  To  Know  Before  Starting  Your  Vehicle"  for  further  infor- 
mation. 

lZ)c=  Al c=r-< 


226  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


Brake  Warning  Light 


Red  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

BRAKE 

Brake  Warning  Light 

This  light  monitors  various  brake  functions,  including  brake  fluid  level  and  parking  brake 
application.  If  the  brake  light  turns  on  it  may  indicate  that  the  parking  brake  is  applied,  that 
the  brake  fluid  level  is  low,  or  that  there  is  a problem  with  the  anti-lock  brake  system  reser- 
voir. 

United  States 

(©) 

Canada 

If  the  light  remains  on  when  the  parking  brake  has  been  disengaged,  and  the  fluid  level  is  at 
the  full  mark  on  the  master  cylinder  reservoir,  it  indicates  a possible  brake  hydraulic  system 
malfunction  or  that  a problem  with  the  Brake  Booster  has  been  detected  by  the  Anti-Lock 
Brake  System  (ABS)  / Electronic  Stability  Control  (ESC)  system.  In  this  case,  the  light  will 
remain  on  until  the  condition  has  been  corrected.  If  the  problem  is  related  to  the  brake 
booster,  the  ABS  pump  will  run  when  applying  the  brake,  and  a brake  pedal  pulsation  may 
be  felt  during  each  stop. 

The  dual  brake  system  provides  a reserve  braking  capac-  indicated  by  the  Brake  Warning  Light,  which  will  turn  on 
ity  in  the  event  of  a failure  to  a portion  of  the  hydraulic  when  the  brake  fluid  level  in  the  master  cylinder  has 
system.  A leak  in  either  half  of  the  dual  brake  system  is  dropped  below  a specified  level. 


The  light  will  remain  on  until  the  cause  is  corrected. 

NOTE:  The  light  may  flash  momentarily  during  sharp 
cornering  maneuvers,  which  change  fluid  level  condi- 
tions. The  vehicle  should  have  service  performed,  and 
the  brake  fluid  level  checked. 

If  brake  failure  is  indicated,  immediate  repair  is  neces- 
sary. 


WARNING! 

Driving  a vehicle  with  the  red  brake  light  on  is 
dangerous.  Part  of  the  brake  system  may  have  failed. 
It  will  take  longer  to  stop  the  vehicle.  You  could  have 
a collision.  Have  the  vehicle  checked  immediately. 

Vehicles  equipped  with  the  Anti-Lock  Brake  System 
(ABS)  are  also  equipped  with  Electronic  Brake  Force 
Distribution  (EBD).  In  the  event  of  an  EBD  failure,  the 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  227 


Brake  Warning  Light  will  turn  on  along  with  the  ABS 
Light.  Immediate  repair  to  the  ABS  system  is  required. 

Operation  of  the  Brake  Warning  Light  can  be  checked  by 
turning  the  ignition  switch  from  the  OFF  position  to  the 
ON /RUN  position.  The  light  should  illuminate  for  ap- 
proximately two  seconds.  The  light  should  then  turn  off  W 
unless  the  parking  brake  is  applied  or  a brake  fault  is 
detected.  If  the  light  does  not  illuminate,  have  the  light 
inspected  by  an  authorized  dealer. 

The  light  also  will  turn  on  when  the  parking  brake  is 
applied  with  the  ignition  switch  in  the  ON /RUN  posi- 
tion. 

NOTE:  This  light  shows  only  that  the  parking  brake  is 
applied.  It  does  not  show  the  degree  of  brake  application. 


i Provided  by: 


228  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  M 
Vehicle  Security  Warning  Light  — If  Equipped 


Red  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

• 

Vehicle  Security  Warning  Light 

This  light  will  flash  at  a fast  rate  for  approximately  15  seconds  when  the  vehicle  security 
alarm  is  arming,  and  then  will  flash  slowly  until  the  vehicle  is  disarmed. 

Oil  Pressure  Warning  Light 


Red  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

tCr ft 

Oil  Pressure  Warning  Light 

This  light  indicates  low  engine  oil  pressure.  If  the  light  turns  on  while  driving,  stop  the  ve- 
hicle and  shut  off  the  engine  as  soon  as  possible.  A chime  will  sound  when  this  light  turns 
on. 

Do  not  operate  the  vehicle  until  the  cause  is  corrected.  This  light  does  not  indicate  how 
much  oil  is  in  the  engine.  The  engine  oil  level  must  be  checked  under  the  hood. 

QdsaC!sr 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  229 

Engine  Temperature  Warning  Light 


Red  Warning 
Light 

What  It  Means 

Jr 

Engine  Temperature  Warning  Light 

This  light  warns  of  an  overheated  engine  condition.  As  engine  coolant  temperatures  rise  and 
the  gauge  approaches  H,  this  indicator  will  illuminate  and  a single  chime  will  sound  after 
reaching  a set  threshold. 

If  the  light  turns  on  while  driving,  safely  pull  over  and  stop  the  vehicle.  If  the  A/ C system 
is  on,  turn  it  off.  Also,  shift  the  transmission  into  NEUTRAL  and  idle  the  vehicle.  If  the  tem- 
perature reading  does  not  return  to  normal,  turn  the  engine  off  immediately  and  call  for  ser- 
vice. Refer  to  "If  Your  Engine  Overheats"  in  "What  To  Do  In  Emergencies"  for  further  infor- 
mation. 

DczALczR 


230  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


Oil  Temperature  Warning  Light 


Red  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

Oil  Temperature  Warning  Light 

This  telltale  indicates  engine  oil  temperature  is  high.  If  the  light  turns  on  while  driving,  stop  the 
vehicle  and  shut  off  the  engine  as  soon  as  possible. 

E/M 


Charging  System  Warning  Light 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  231 


Red  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

E3 

Charging  System  Warning  Light 

This  light  shows  the  status  of  the  electrical  charging  system.  If  the  light  stays  on  or  comes 
on  while  driving,  turn  off  some  of  the  vehicle's  nonessential  electrical  devices  or  increase 
engine  speed  (if  at  idle).  If  the  charging  system  light  remains  on,  it  means  that  the  vehicle  is 
experiencing  a problem  with  the  charging  system.  Obtain  SERVICE  IMMEDIATELY.  See  an 
authorized  dealer. 

If  jump  starting  is  required,  refer  to  "Jump  Starting  Procedures"  in  "What  To  Do  In  Emer- 
gencies." 

Information  Provided  by: 

zd=/m 


232  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 
Electronic  Throttle  Control  (ETC)  Warning  Light 


Red  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

M 

Electronic  Throttle  Control  (ETC)  Warning  Light 

This  light  informs  you  of  a problem  with  the  Electronic  Throttle  Control  (ETC)  system.  If  a 
problem  is  detected  while  the  engine  is  running,  the  light  will  either  stay  on  or  flash  de- 
pending on  the  nature  of  the  problem.  Cycle  the  ignition  key  when  the  vehicle  is  safely  and 
completely  stopped  and  the  shift  lever  is  placed  in  the  PARK  position.  The  light  should  turn 
off.  If  the  light  remains  on  with  the  engine  running,  your  vehicle  will  usually  be  drivable; 
however,  see  an  authorized  dealer  for  service  as  soon  as  possible. 

If  the  light  continues  to  flash  when  the  engine  is  running,  immediate  service  is  required  and 
you  may  experience  reduced  performance,  an  elevated  /rough  idle,  or  engine  stall  and  your 
vehicle  may  require  towing.  The  light  will  come  on  when  the  ignition  is  first  turned  to  ON/ 
RUN  and  remain  on  briefly  as  a bulb  check.  If  the  light  does  not  come  on  during  starting, 
have  the  system  checked  by  an  authorized  dealer. 

DczALczR 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  233 

Yellow  Telltale  Indicator  Lights 

Engine  Check/Malfunction  Indicator  Light  (MIL) 


Yellow  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

o 

Engine  Check/Malfunction  Indicator  Light  (MIL) 

The  Engine  Check /Malfunction  Indicator  Light  (MIL)  is  a part  of  an  Onboard  Diagnostic 
System  called  OBD  II  that  monitors  engine  and  automatic  transmission  control  systems.  The 
light  will  illuminate  when  the  ignition  is  in  the  ON  position  before  engine  start.  If  the  bulb 
does  not  come  on  when  turning  the  key  from  OFF  to  ON /RUN,  have  the  condition  checked 
promptly. 

Certain  conditions,  such  as  a loose  or  missing  gas  cap,  poor  quality  fuel,  etc.,  may  illuminate 
the  light  after  engine  start.  The  vehicle  should  be  serviced  if  the  light  stays  on  through  sev- 
eral typical  driving  styles.  In  most  situations,  the  vehicle  will  drive  normally  and  will  not 
require  towing. 

When  the  engine  is  running,  the  MIL  may  flash  to  alert  serious  conditions  that  could  lead  to 
immediate  loss  of  power  or  severe  catalytic  converter  damage.  The  vehicle  should  be  ser- 
viced as  soon  as  possible  if  this  occurs. 

234  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


CAUTION! 

Prolonged  driving  with  the  Malfunction  Indicator 
Light  (MIL)  on  could  cause  damage  to  the  engine 
control  system.  It  also  could  affect  fuel  economy  and 
driveability.  If  the  MIL  is  flashing,  severe  catalytic 
converter  damage  and  power  loss  will  soon  occur. 
Immediate  service  is  required. 


WARNING! 

A malfunctioning  catalytic  converter,  as  referenced 
above,  can  reach  higher  temperatures  than  in  normal 
operating  conditions.  This  can  cause  a fire  if  you 
drive  slowly  or  park  over  flammable  substances  such 
as  dry  plants,  wood,  cardboard,  etc.  This  could  result 
in  death  or  serious  injury  to  the  driver,  occupants  or 
others. 


£ 


Information  Provided  b 


Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Indicator  Light 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  235 


Yellow  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

CD 

Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Indicator  Light 

The  warning  light  switches  on  and  a message  is  displayed  to  indicate  that  the  tire  pressure 
is  lower  than  the  recommended  value  and/or  that  slow  pressure  loss  is  occurring.  In  these 
cases,  optimal  tire  duration  and  fuel  consumption  may  not  be  guaranteed. 

Should  one  or  more  tires  be  in  the  condition  mentioned  above,  the  display  will  show  the 
indications  corresponding  to  each  tire  in  sequence. 

In  any  situation  in  which  the  message  on  the  display  is  "See  manual",  it  is  ESSENTIAL  to 
refer  to  the  contents  of  the  "Wheels"  paragraph  in  the  "Technical  data"  chapter,  strictly  com- 
plying with  the  indications  that  you  find  there. 

IMPORTANT:  Do  not  continue  driving  with  one  or  more 
flat  tires  as  handling  may  be  compromised.  Stop  the 
vehicle,  avoiding  sharp  braking  and  steering.  Repair 
immediately  using  the  dedicated  tire  repair  kit  and 
contact  your  authorized  dealership  as  soon  as  possible. 


Each  tire,  including  the  spare  (if  provided),  should  be 
checked  monthly  when  cold  and  inflated  to  the  inflation 
pressure  recommended  by  the  vehicle  manufacturer  on  the 
vehicle  placard  or  tire  inflation  pressure  label.  If  your 
vehicle  has  tires  of  a different  size  than  the  size  indicated 


236  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 

on  the  vehicle  placard  or  tire  inflation  pressure  label,  you 
should  determine  the  proper  tire  inflation  pressure  for 
those  tires. 

As  an  added  safety  feature,  your  vehicle  has  been 
equipped  with  a Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  System 
(TPMS)  that  illuminates  a low  tire  pressure  telltale  when 
one  or  more  of  your  tires  is  significantly  under-inflated. 
Accordingly,  when  the  low  tire  pressure  telltale  illumi- 
nates, you  should  stop  and  check  your  tires  as  soon  as 
possible  and  inflate  them  to  the  proper  pressure.  Driving 
on  a significantly  under-inflated  tire  causes  the  tire  to 
overheat  and  can  lead  to  tire  failure.  Under-inflation  also 
reduces  fuel  efficiency  and  tire  tread  life,  and  may  affect 
the  vehicle's  handling  and  stopping  ability. 

Please  note  that  the  TPMS  is  not  a substitute  for  proper 
tire  maintenance,  and  it  is  the  driver's  responsibility  to 
maintain  correct  tire  pressure,  even  if  under-inflation  has 
not  reached  the  level  to  trigger  illumination  of  the  TPMS 
low  tire  pressure  telltale. 


Your  vehicle  has  also  been  equipped  with  a TPMS 
malfunction  indicator  to  indicate  when  the  system  is  not 
operating  properly.  The  TPMS  malfunction  indicator  is 
combined  with  the  low  tire  pressure  telltale.  When  the 
system  detects  a malfunction,  the  telltale  will  flash  for 
approximately  one  minute  and  then  remain  continuously 
illuminated.  This  sequence  will  continue  upon  subse- 
quent vehicle  start-ups  as  long  as  the  malfunction  exists. 
When  the  malfunction  indicator  is  illuminated,  the  sys- 
tem may  not  be  able  to  detect  or  signal  low  tire  pressure 
as  intended.  TPMS  malfunctions  may  occur  for  a variety 
of  reasons,  including  the  installation  of  replacement  or 
alternate  tires  or  wheels  on  the  vehicle  that  prevent  the 
TPMS  from  functioning  properly.  Always  check  the 
TPMS  malfunction  telltale  after  replacing  one  or  more 
tires  or  wheels  on  your  vehicle,  to  ensure  that  the 
replacement  or  alternate  tires  and  wheels  allow  the  TPMS 
to  continue  to  function  properly. 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  237 


CAUTION! 

The  TPMS  has  been  optimized  for  the  original 
equipment  tires  and  wheels.  TPMS  pressures  and 
warning  have  been  established  for  the  tire  size 
equipped  on  your  vehicle.  Undesirable  system  opera- 
tion or  sensor  damage  may  result  when  using  re- 
placement equipment  that  is  not  of  the  same  size, 
type,  and/or  style.  Aftermarket  wheels  can  cause 
sensor  damage.  Using  aftermarket  tire  sealants  may 
cause  the  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  System  (TPMS) 
sensor  to  become  inoperable.  After  using  an  after- 
market  tire  sealant  it  is  recommended  that  you  take 
your  vehicle  to  an  authorized  dealership  to  have  your 
sensor  function  checked. 


Information  Provided  by: 


238  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 

Electronic  Stability  Control  (ESC)  OFF  Indicator  Light  — If  Equipped 


Yellow  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

R 

** 

OFF 

Electronic  Stability  Control  (ESC)  OFF  Indicator  Light 

This  light  indicates  the  Electronic  Stability  Control  (ESC)  is  off. 

Information  Provided  by: 

Dc=AL.Sr< 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  239 


Electronic  Stability  Control  (ESC)  Indicator  Light  — If  Equipped 


Yellow  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

<><> 

Electronic  Stability  Control  (ESC)  Indicator  Light 

The  "ESC  Indicator  Light"  in  the  instrument  cluster  will  come  on  when  the  ignition  switch 
is  turned  to  the  ON/RUN  position.  It  should  go  out  with  the  engine  running.  If  the  "ESC 
Indicator  Light"  comes  on  continuously  with  the  engine  running,  a malfunction  has  been 
detected  in  the  ESC  system.  If  this  light  remains  on  after  several  ignition  cycles,  and  the  ve- 
hicle has  been  driven  several  miles  (kilometers)  at  speeds  greater  than  30  mph  (48  km/h), 
see  your  authorized  dealer  as  soon  as  possible  to  have  the  problem  diagnosed  and  corrected. 

• The  "ESC  Off  Indicator  Light"  and  the  "ESC  Indicator  Light"  come  on  momentarily  each 
time  the  ignition  switch  is  turned  to  ON/ RUN. 

• Each  time  the  ignition  is  turned  to  ON  /RUN,  the  ESC  system  will  be  ON,  even  if  it  was 
turned  off  previously. 

• The  ESC  system  will  make  buzzing  or  clicking  sounds  when  it  is  active.  This  is  normal; 
the  sounds  will  stop  when  ESC  becomes  inactive  following  the  maneuver  that  caused 
the  ESC  activation. 

= / M_E=i=R 


240  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 
Anti-Lock  Brake  (ABS)  Indicator  Light 


Yellow  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

(©) 

Anti-Lock  Brake  (ABS)  Indicator  Light 

This  light  monitors  the  Anti-Lock  Brake  System  (ABS).  The  light  will  turn  on  when  the  igni- 
tion switch  is  placed  in  the  ON/ RUN  position  and  may  stay  on  for  as  long  as  four  seconds. 
If  the  ABS  light  remains  on  or  turns  on  while  driving,  then  the  Anti-Lock  portion  of  the 
brake  system  is  not  functioning  and  service  is  required.  However,  the  conventional  brake 
system  will  continue  to  operate  normally  if  the  brake  warning  light  is  not  on. 

If  the  ABS  light  is  on,  the  brake  system  should  be  serviced  as  soon  as  possible  to  restore  the 
benefits  of  Anti-Lock  Brakes.  If  the  ABS  light  does  not  turn  on  when  the  ignition  switch  is 
placed  in  the  ON /RUN  position,  have  the  light  inspected  by  an  authorized  dealer. 

lZ)c=  Al c=r-< 


Low  Fuel  Warning  Indicator  Light 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  241 


Yellow  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

» 

Low  Fuel  Warning  Indicator  Light 

When  the  fuel  level  reaches  approximately  2.8  gal  (10.6  L),  this  light  will  turn  on  and  a 
single  chime  will  sound. 

4WD!  Warning  Light  — If  Equipped 


Yellow  Tell- 
tale Light 

What  It  Means 

4WD! 

4WD!  Warning  Light  — If  Equipped 

This  light  monitors  the  4-Wheel  Drive  (4WD)  system.  The  light  will  come  on,  for  a bulb  check, 
when  the  ignition  key  is  turned  to  the  ON/ RUN  position  and  may  stay  on  for  as  long  as  three 
seconds. 

When  lit  solid:  There  is  a 4WD  system  fault.  4WD  performance  will  be  at  a reduced  level.  Ser- 
vice the  4WD  system  soon. 

When  blinking:  The  4WD  system  is  temporarily  disabled  due  to  overload  condition. 

242  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


Loose  Fuel  Filler  Cap  Indicator  Light  — If  Equipped 


Yellow  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

Loose  Fuel  Filler  Cap  Indicator  Light 

This  light  will  illuminate  when  fuel  filler  cap  is  loose.  Properly  close  the  filler  cap  to  disen- 
gage the  light.  If  the  light  does  not  turn  off,  please  see  your  authorized  dealer. 

Low  Washer  Fluid  Indicator  Light  — If  Equipped 


Yellow  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

m 

Low  Washer  Fluid  Indicator  Light 

This  indicator  will  illuminate  when  the  windshield  washer  fluid  is  low. 

OczAL_c=F? 


Transmission  Temperature  Indicator  Light 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  243 


Red  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

<D 

Transmission  Temperature  Indicator  Light 

This  light  indicates  that  the  transmission  fluid  temperature  is  running  hot.  This  may  occur  with 
severe  usage,  such  as  trailer  towing.  If  this  light  turns  on,  safely  pull  over  and  stop  them  ve- 
hicle. Then,  shift  the  transmission  into  NEUTRAL  and  run  the  engine  at  idle  or  faster  until  the 
light  turns  off. 

CAUTION! 

Continuous  driving  with  the  Transmission  Tempera- 
ture Warning  Light  illuminated  will  eventually  cause 
severe  transmission  damage  or  transmission  failure. 


WARNING! 

If  you  continue  operating  the  vehicle  when  the 
Transmission  Temperature  Warning  Light  is  illumi- 
nated you  could  cause  the  fluid  to  boil  over,  come  in 
contact  with  hot  engine  or  exhaust  components  and 
cause  a fire. 


Information  Provided  by: 

fijDSAl_SS 


244  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


Green  Telltale  Indicator  Lights 

Turn  Signal  Indicator  Lights 


Green  Tell- 
tale Light 

What  It  Means 

<«* 

Turn  Signal  Indicator  Lights 

The  instrument  cluster  arrow  will  flash  independently  for  the  LEFT  or  RIGHT  turn  signal  as  se- 
lected, as  well  as  the  exterior  turn  signal  lamp(s)  (front  and  rear)  as  selected  when  the  multi- 
function lever  is  moved  down  (LEFT)  or  up  (RIGHT). 

NOTE: 

• A continuous  chime  will  sound  if  the  vehicle  is  driven  more  than  1 mile  (1.6  km)  with  either 
turn  signal  on. 

• Check  for  an  inoperative  outside  light  bulb  if  either  indicator  flashes  at  a rapid  rate. 

Park/Headlight  ON  Indicator  Light 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  245 


Green  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

^0  0c 

Park/Headlight  ON  Indicator  Light 

This  indicator  will  illuminate  when  the  park  lights  or  headlights  are  turned  on. 

Front  Fog  Indicator  Light  — If  Equipped 


Green  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

id 

Front  Fog  Indicator  Light 

This  indicator  will  illuminate  when  the  front  fog  lights  are  on. 

246  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


Blue  Telltale  Indicator  Light 

High  Beam  Indicator  Light 


Blue  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

ID 

High  Beam  Indicator  Light 

This  indicator  shows  that  the  high  beam  headlights  are  on.  Push  the  multifunction  control 
lever  away  from  you  to  switch  the  headlights  to  high  beam.  Pull  the  lever  toward  you  to 
switch  the  headlights  back  to  low  beam. 

White  Telltale  Indicator  Light 

Cruise  Control  On  Indicator  Light 


White  Telltale 
Light 

What  It  Means 

CRUISE 

Cruise  Control  On  Indicator  Light 

This  indicator  shows  when  the  electronic  speed  control  system  is  turned  on. 

5AL 


Hill  Descent  Indicator  Light  — If  Equipped 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  247 


White  Tell- 
tale Light 

What  It  Means 

Hill  Descent  Indicator  Light 

This  indicator  shows  when  the  Hill  Descent  Control  (HDC)  feature  is  turned  on.  The  lamp  will 
be  on  solid  when  HDC  is  armed.  HDC  can  only  be  armed  when  the  transfer  case  is  in  the  "4WD 
LOW''  position  and  the  vehicle  speed  is  less  then  30  mph  (48  km/h).  If  these  conditions  are  not 
met  while  attempting  to  use  the  HDC  feature,  the  HDC  indicator  light  will  flash  on/off. 

MINI-TRIP  COMPUTER  — IF  EQUIPPED 

The  Mini-Trip  Computer  is  located  in  the  instrument 
cluster  and  features  a driver-interactive  trip  information 
and  temperature  display. 


NOTE:  The  system  will  display  the  last  known  outside 
temperature  when  starting  the  vehicle  and  may  need  to 
be  driven  several  minutes  before  the  updated  tempera- 
ture is  displayed.  Engine  temperature  can  also  affect  the 
displayed  temperature;  therefore,  temperature  readings 
are  not  updated  when  the  vehicle  is  not  moving. 


248  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 

Control  Buttons 


040541179 


Mini-Trip  Control  Buttons 

STEP  Button 


RESET  Button 

To  reset  the  display  shown,  turn  the  ignition  switch  to  the 
ON  position,  then  push  and  hold  the  RESET  button 
located  on  the  steering  wheel. 

The  following  displays  can  be  reset  or  changed: 

• Trip  A 

• Trip  B 

Trip  Odometer  (ODO) 

This  display  shows  the  distance  traveled  since  the  last 
reset.  Push  and  release  the  STEP  button  on  the  instru- 
ment cluster  to  switch  from  odometer,  to  Trip  A or  Trip  B. 

Trip  A 

Shows  the  total  distance  traveled  for  Trip  A since  the  last 
reset. 


Push  the  STEP  button  located  on  the  steering  wheel  to 
scroll  through  sub  menus  (i.e.,  Temperature,  Trip  Func- 
tions: Odometer,  Trip  A,  Trip  B). 


Trip  B 

Shows  the  total  distance  traveled  for  Trip  B since  the  last 
reset. 

/\\ 


ELECTRONIC  VEHICLE  INFORMATION  CENTER 
(EVIC)  — IF  EQUIPPED 

The  Electronic  Vehicle  Information  Center  (EVIC)  fea- 
tures a driver-interactive  display  that  is  located  in  the 
instrument  cluster. 


041035271 


Electronic  Vehicle  Information  Center  (EVIC) 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  249 

The  EVIC  consists  of  the  following: 

• System  Status 

• Units 

• Vehicle  Information  Warning  Message  Displays 

• Personal  Settings  (Customer-Programmable  Features) 

• Compass  Heading 

• Outside  Temperature  Display 

• Trip  Computer  Functions 

• Uconnect  Phone  Displays  (if  equipped) 

• Audio  Mode  Display 

• Tire  Pressure  Monitor  (TPM) 


250  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


The  system  allows  the  driver  to  select  information  by 
pushing  the  following  buttons  mounted  on  the  steering 
wheel: 


041036449 


MENU  Button 

Push  and  release  the  MENU  button  to  scroll 
MENU  through  the  main  menus  (Fuel  Economy,  Warn- 
ings, Timer,  Units,  System,  Personal  Settings) 
or  to  exit  submenus. 

COMPASS  Button 


Push  and  release  the  COMPASS  button  to 
display  one  of  eight  compass  readings  and  the 
outside  temperature  or  to  exit  sub-menus. 


RIGETT  Button 


> 


/M_  = 


EVIC  Steering  Wheel  Buttons 


Push  and  release  the  RIGHT  button  for  access 
to  main  menus,  submenus,  or  to  select  a per- 
sonal setting  in  the  setup  menu. 


DOWN  Button 


V 


Push  and  release  the  DOWN  button  to  scroll 
downward  through  the  submenus. 


When  the  appropriate  conditions  exist,  the  EVIC  displays 
the  following  messages: 

• Turn  Signal  On  (with  a continuous  warning  chime 
after  1 mile  (1.6  km)  of  distance  travelled) 

• Left  Front  Turn  Signal  Lamp  Out  (with  a single  chime) 

• Left  Rear  Turn  Signal  Lamp  Out  (with  a single  chime) 

• Right  Front  Turn  Signal  Lamp  Out  (with  a single  • 
chime) 

• Right  Rear  Turn  Signal  Lamp  Out  (with  a single  chime) 

• RKE  Battery  Low  (with  a single  chime) 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  251 

Personal  Settings  Not  Avail.  — Vehicle  is  not  in  PARK 
(automatic  transmission),  or  vehicle  is  in  motion 
(manual  transmission). 

Door  Ajar  (with  vehicle  graphic  showing  which  door  is 
open.  A single  chime  sounds  if  the  vehicle  is  in 
motion). 

Doors  Ajar  (with  vehicle  graphic  showing  which  doors 
are  open.  A single  chime  sounds  if  the  vehicle  is  in 
motion). 

Gate  (with  vehicle  graphic  showing  the  Liftgate  open 
and  a single  chime) 

Headlamps  or  Park  Lamps  On 

Remote  Start  Aborted  — Door  Ajar 

Remote  Start  Aborted  — Hood  Ajar 

Remote  Start  Aborted  — L/Gate  Ajar 


252  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 

• Remote  Start  Aborted  — Fuel  Low 

• Remote  Start  Aborted  — System  Fault 

• Key  In  Ignition 

• Low  Tire 

• Low  Tire  Pressure  Display  for  Premium  TPM  System 

• Service  TPM  System 

Engine  Oil  Change  Indicator  System  — If 
Equipped 

Oil  Change  Required 

Your  vehicle  is  equipped  with  an  engine  oil  change 
indicator  system.  The  "Oil  Change  Required"  message 
will  display  in  the  EVIC  display  for  approximately  five 
seconds  after  a single  chime  has  sounded  to  indicate  the 
next  scheduled  oil  change  interval.  The  engine  oil  change 


indicator  system  is  duty-cycle  based,  which  means  the 
engine  oil  change  interval  may  fluctuate  dependent  upon 
your  personal  driving  style. 

Unless  reset,  this  message  will  continue  to  display  each 
time  you  turn  the  ignition  switch  to  the  ON /RUN 
position.  To  turn  off  the  message  temporarily,  push  and 
release  the  Trip  Odometer  button  on  the  instrument 
cluster.  To  reset  the  oil  change  indicator  system  (after 
performing  the  scheduled  maintenance),  refer  to  the 
following  procedure. 

1.  Turn  the  ignition  switch  to  the  ON  position.  Do  not 

start  the  engine. 

2.  Fully  push  the  accelerator  pedal,  slowly,  three  times 
within  10  seconds. 

3.  Turn  the  ignition  switch  to  the  OFF /LOCK  position. 


i Provided  by: 

AL.SR 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  253 


NOTE:  If  the  indicator  message  illuminates  when  you 
start  the  vehicle,  the  oil  change  indicator  system  did  not 
reset.  If  necessary,  repeat  this  procedure. 

EVIC  Functions 

• Compass  / Temperature  / Audio 

• Average  Fuel  Economy 

• Distance  To  Empty  (DTE) 

• Units  In 

• Elapsed  Time 

• Tire  Pressure  Monitor  (TPM) 

• Personal  Settings 


To  Reset  The  Display 

Pushing  and  holding  the  RIGHT  arrow  button  once  will 
clear  the  function  currently  being  displayed.  Reset  will 
only  occur  if  a resettable  function  is  currently  being 
displayed.  To  reset  all  resettable  functions,  push  and 
release  the  RIGHT  arrow  button  a second  time  within 
three  seconds  of  resetting  the  currently  displayed  func- 
tion. Reset  ALL  will  be  displayed  during  this  three- 
second  window. 

Compass/Tem  peratu  re/Aud  io 

Push  and  release  the  COMPASS  button  to  display  one  of 
eight  compass  headings  to  indicate  the  direction  the 
vehicle  is  facing,  the  outside  temperature,  and  the  current 
radio  station. 

Refer  to  "Personal  Settings  (Customer-Programmable 
Features)"  in  this  section  for  additional  information  re- 
garding the  compass. 


254  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 

Average  Fuel  Economy 

Shows  the  average  fuel  economy  since  the  last  reset 
(pushing  and  holding  the  RIGHT  arrow  button  as 
prompted  in  the  EVIC  display  to  reset).  When  the  fuel 
economy  is  reset,  the  display  will  read  "RESET"  or  show 
dashes  for  two  seconds.  Then,  the  history  information 
will  be  erased,  and  the  averaging  will  continue  from  the 
last  fuel  reading  before  the  reset. 

Distance  To  Empty  (DTE) 

Shows  the  estimated  distance  that  can  be  traveled  with 
the  fuel  remaining  in  the  tank.  This  estimated  distance  is 
determined  by  a weighted  average  of  the  instantaneous 
and  average  fuel  economy,  according  to  the  current  fuel 
tank  level.  This  is  not  resettable. 

NOTE:  Significant  changes  in  driving  style  or  vehicle 
loading  will  greatly  affect  the  actual  drivable  distance  of 
the  vehicle,  regardless  of  the  DTE  displayed  value. 


When  the  DTE  value  is  less  than  30  miles  (48  km) 
estimated  driving  distance,  the  DTE  display  will  change 
to  a text  display  of  "LOW  FUEL."  This  display  will 
continue  until  the  vehicle  runs  out  of  fuel.  Adding  a 
significant  amount  of  fuel  to  the  vehicle  will  turn  off  the 
"LOW  FUEL"  text  and  a new  DTE  value  will  be  dis- 
played, based  on  the  current  values  in  the  DTE  calcula- 
tion and  the  current  fuel  tank  level. 

Tire  Pressure  Monitor  (TPM) 

Refer  to  "Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  System  (TPMS)"  in 
"Starting  And  Operating"  for  system  operation. 

Elapsed  Time 

Shows  the  total  elapsed  time  of  travel  since  the  last  reset. 
Elapsed  time  will  increment  when  the  ignition  switch  is 
in  the  RUN /START  position. 


Elapsed  time  is  displayed  as  follows: 
hours:  minutes:  seconds 

Elapsed  time  can  be  reset  by  pushing  and  holding  the 
RIGHT  arrow  button  (as  prompted  in  the  EVIC  display). 
Upon  reset,  all  digits  will  change  to  zeros,  and  time  will 
start  incrementing  again  if  the  ignition  switch  is  in  RUN 
or  START. 

Display  Units  Of  Measure  In 

To  make  your  selection,  push  and  release  the  RIGHT 
arrow  button  until  "US"  or  "METRIC"  appears. 

Personal  Settings  (Customer-Programmable 
Features) 

This  allows  the  driver  to  set  and  recall  features  when  the 
transmission  is  in  PARK  (automatic  transmission)  or  the 
vehicle  is  stopped  (manual  transmission). 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  255 

Push  and  release  the  MENU  or  DOWN  buttons  until 
"Personal  Settings"  is  displayed  in  the  EVIC  then  push 
and  release  the  RIGHT  button. 

Use  the  RIGHT  button  to  display  one  of  the  following 
choices: 

Language 

When  in  this  display,  you  may  select  different  languages 
for  all  display  nomenclature,  including  the  trip  functions. 
Pushing  the  RIGHT  button  while  in  this  display  selects 
English,  Espanol,  Deutsch,  Italiano,  Francais,  or  NL  de- 
pending on  availability.  As  you  continue,  the  displayed 
information  will  be  shown  in  the  selected  language. 

NOTE:  Uconnect  language  will  not  change  using  the 
EVIC.  Please  refer  to  "Uconnect  Phone  Features"  in 
"Understanding  The  Features  Of  Your  Vehicle"  for  fur- 
ther information. 


Information  Provided  by: 


256  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 

Auto  Lock  Doors 

When  ON  is  selected,  all  doors  lock  automatically  when 
the  speed  of  the  vehicle  reaches  15  mph  (24  km/h).  Push 
and  hold  the  RIGHT  arrow  button  when  in  this  display 
until  "ON"  or  "OFF"  appears  to  make  your  selection. 

Auto  Unlock  On  Exit 

When  ON  is  selected,  all  the  vehicle's  doors  will  unlock 
when  the  driver's  door  is  opened,  if  the  vehicle  is 
stopped  (manual  transmission)  or  the  vehicle  is  stopped 
and  the  transmission  is  in  the  PARK  or  NEUTRAL 
position  (automatic  transmission).  Push  and  hold  the 
RIGHT  button  when  in  this  display  until  "ON"  or  "OFF" 
appears  to  make  your  selection. 


RKE  Unlock 


When  Driver's  Door  1st  is  selected,  only  the  driver's  door 
will  unlock  on  the  first  push  of  the  Remote  Keyless  Entry 
(RKE)  transmitter  UNLOCK  button  and  require  a second 
push  to  unlock  the  remaining  locked  doors.  When  Re- 
mote Unlock  All  Doors  is  selected,  all  of  the  doors  will 
unlock  at  the  first  push  of  the  RKE  transmitter  UNLOCK 
button.  Push  and  hold  the  RIGHT  arrow  button  when  in 
this  display  until  "Driver's  Door  1st"  or  "All  Doors" 
appears  to  make  your  selection. 

Flash  Lamps  With  Lock 

When  ON  is  selected,  the  front  and  rear  turn  signals  will 
flash  when  the  doors  are  locked  or  unlocked  using  the 
RKE  transmitter.  This  feature  may  be  selected  with  or 
without  the  sound  horn  with  lock  feature  selected.  Push 
and  hold  the  RIGHT  button  when  in  this  display  until 
"ON"  or  "OFF"  appears  to  make  your  selection. 


/M 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  257 


Sound  Horn  With  Lock 

When  ON  is  selected,  a short  horn  sound  will  occur  when 
the  RKE  transmitter  LOCK  button  is  pushed.  This  feature 
may  be  selected  with  or  without  the  Flash  Lights  with 
Lock  feature.  Push  and  hold  the  RIGHT  button  when  in 
this  display  until  "ON"  or  "OFF"  appears  to  make  your 
selection. 

Headlamp  Off  Delay 

When  this  feature  is  selected  the  driver  can  choose  to 
have  the  headlights  remain  on  for  0,  30,  60,  or  90  seconds 
when  exiting  the  vehicle.  Push  and  hold  the  RIGHT 
button  when  in  this  display  until  0,  30,  60,  or  90  appears 
to  make  your  selection. 


Q 


Headlamps  with  Wipers  (Available  with  Auto 
Headlights  Only) 

When  on  is  selected,  and  the  headlight  switch  is  in  the 
AUTO  position,  the  headlights  will  turn  on  approxi- 
mately 10  seconds  after  the  wipers  are  turned  on.  If  the 
headlights  were  turned  on  by  this  feature,  they  will  also 
turn  off  when  the  wipers  are  turned  off.  To  make  your 
selection,  push  and  release  the  RIGHT  button  until  "ON" 
or  "OFF"  appears. 

NOTE:  Turning  the  headlights  on  during  the  daytime 
causes  the  instrument  panel  lights  to  dim.  To  increase  the 
brightness,  refer  to  "Lights"  in  "Understanding  The 
Features  Of  Your  Vehicle." 

Key  Off  Power  Delay 

When  this  feature  is  selected  the  power  window 
switches,  radio,  Uconnect  phone,  power  sunroof,  and 
power  outlets  will  remain  active  for  up  to  10  minutes 
after  the  ignition  switch  has  been  turned  OFF.  Opening 


258  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 

either  front  vehicle  door  will  cancel  this  feature.  Push  and 
hold  the  RIGHT  button  when  in  this  display  until  "OFF," 
"45  sec.",  "5  min.",  or  "10  min."  appears  to  make  your 
selection. 

Illuminated  Approach 

When  this  feature  is  selected,  the  headlights  will  activate 
and  remain  on  for  up  to  90  seconds  when  the  doors  are 
unlocked  using  the  RKE  transmitter.  Push  and  hold  the 
RIGHT  arrow  button  when  in  this  display  until  "OFF," 
"30  sec,"  "60  sec,"  or  "90  sec."  appears  to  make  your 
selection. 

Hill  Start  Assist  (HSA)  — If  Equipped 

When  "On"is  selected,  the  HSA  system  is  active.  Refer  to 
"Electronic  Brake  Control  System"  in  "Starting  And 
Operating"  for  system  function  and  operating  informa- 
tion. To  make  your  selection,  push  and  release  the  RIGHT 
arrow  button  until  "On"  or  "Off"  appears. 


Display  Units  In 

The  EVIC,  odometer,  and  Uconnect  GPS  system  units  can 
be  changed  between  U.S  and  Metric. 

Push  and  hold  the  RIGHT  arrow  button  when  in  this 
display  until  "U.S"  or  "METRIC"  appears  to  make  your 
selection. 

Automatic  Compass  Calibration 

This  compass  is  self-calibrating,  which  eliminates  the 
need  to  set  the  compass  manually.  When  the  vehicle  is 
new,  the  compass  may  appear  erratic,  and  the  EVIC  will 
display  "CAL"  until  the  compass  is  calibrated.  You  may 
also  calibrate  the  compass  by  completing  one  or  more 
360-degree  turns  (in  an  area  free  from  large  metal  or 
metallic  objects)  until  the  "CAL"  message  displayed  in 
the  EVIC  turns  off.  The  compass  will  now  function 
normally. 


NOTE:  A good  calibration  requires  a level  surface  and 
an  environment  free  from  large  metallic  objects  such  as 
buildings,  bridges,  underground  cables,  railroad  tracks, 
etc. 

Manual  Compass  Calibration 

If  the  compass  appears  erratic  and  the  "CAL"  indicator 
does  not  appear  in  the  EVIC  display,  you  must  put  the 
compass  into  the  Calibration  Mode  manually  as  follows: 

1.  Start  the  engine.  Leave  the  shift  lever  in  PARK  in  order 
to  enter  the  EVIC  Programming  Menus. 

2.  Push  and  release  the  MENU  button  until  the  Personal 
Settings  (Customer-Programmable  Features)  menu 
displays  in  the  EVIC. 

3.  Push  and  release  the  DOWN  button  until  "Calibrate 
Compass"  displays  in  the  EVIC. 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  259 

4.  Push  and  release  the  RIGHT  arrow  button  to  start  the 
calibration.  The  "CAL"  indicator  will  display  in  the 
EVIC. 

5.  Complete  one  or  more  360-degree  turns  (in  an  area 
free  from  large  metal  or  metallic  objects)  until  the 
"CAL"  indicator  turns  off.  The  compass  will  now 
function  normally. 

Compass  Variance 

Compass  Variance  is  the  difference  between  Magnetic 
North  and  Geographic  North.  To  compensate  for  the 
differences,  the  variance  should  be  set  for  the  zone  where 
the  vehicle  is  driven,  per  the  zone  map.  Once  properly 
set,  the  compass  will  automatically  compensate  for  the 
differences  and  provide  the  most  accurate  compass  head- 
ing. 


Information  Provided  by: 


260  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 

NOTE:  Magnetic  materials  should  be  kept  away  from 
the  top  of  the  right  rear  quarter  window.  This  is  where 
the  compass  sensor  is  located. 


1.  Turn  the  ignition  switch  ON. 


2.  Push  and  hold  the  COMPASS  button  for  approxi- 
mately two  seconds. 

3.  Push  and  release  the  DOWN  button  until  "Compass 
Variance"  message  and  the  last  variance  zone  number 
displays  in  the  EVIC. 

4.  Push  and  release  the  RIGHT  button  until  the  proper 
variance  zone  is  selected  according  to  the  map. 

5.  Push  and  release  the  COMPASS  button  to  exit. 


Dc=AL_c=r? 


UCONNECT  230  - AM/FM  STEREO  RADIO  AND 
6-DISC  CD/DVD  CHANGER  (MP3/WMA  AUX 
JACK) 


wSEEK 

EEKPM  (j  SCA 

N 

V. 

TIME 

NFO  |J)  ««R 

W FF  >» 

( ^ 1 III  III  1 10*0  ) 

6 DISC  • MP3  WMA 

PUSH  ON 

c 

VOLUME 

AMJTM 

= 

DISC 

SIRIUSt 

LIST 

MUSIC 

TYPE 

S SETUP 

>USH  MJDIO/SELECT 

o 

TUNE/SCROLL 

SET 

1 2 

3 

4 

6 AU 

■®L 

042040029 


Uconnect  230 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  261 

Operating  Instructions  — Radio  Mode 

NOTE:  The  ignition  switch  must  be  in  the  ON  or  ACC 
position  to  operate  the  radio. 

Power  Switch/Volume  Control  (Rotary) 

Push  the  ON/ VOLUME  control  knob  to  turn  on  the 
radio.  Push  the  ON/ VOLUME  control  knob  a second 
time  to  turn  off  the  radio. 

Electronic  Volume  Control 

The  electronic  volume  control  turns  continuously 
(360  degrees)  in  either  direction  without  stopping.  Turn- 
ing the  ON/ VOLUME  control  knob  to  the  right  increases 
the  volume  and  to  the  left  decreases  it. 

When  the  audio  system  is  turned  ON,  the  sound  will  be 
set  at  the  same  volume  level  as  last  played. 


262  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 
SEEK  Buttons 

Push  and  release  the  SEEK  buttons  to  search  for  the  next 
listenable  station  in  AM/FM  mode.  Push  the  right  switch 
to  seek  up  and  the  left  switch  to  seek  down.  The  radio 
will  remain  tuned  to  the  new  station  until  you  make 
another  selection.  Holding  either  button  will  bypass 
stations  without  stopping,  until  you  release  it. 

SCAN  Button 

Pushing  the  SCAN  button  causes  the  tuner  to  search  for 
the  next  listenable  station  in  AM,  FM  or  Satellite  (if 
equipped)  frequencies,  pausing  for  five  seconds  at  each 
listenable  station  before  continuing  to  the  next.  To  stop 
the  search,  push  the  SCAN  button  a second  time. 


Voice  Command  Button  Uconnect  Phone  — If 
Equipped 

Push  this  button  to  operate  the  Uconnect  Phone  feature 
(if  equipped).  Refer  to  "Voice  Command"  for  further 
details. 

If  your  vehicle  is  not  equipped  with  or  this  feature  is  not 
available  on  your  vehicle,  a "Not  Equipped  With 
Uconnect  Phone"  message  will  display  on  the  radio 
screen. 

Phone  Button  Uconnect  Phone  — If  Equipped 

Push  this  button  to  operate  the  Uconnect  Phone  feature 
(if  equipped).  Refer  to  "Uconnect  Phone"  for  further 
details. 

If  your  vehicle  is  not  equipped  with  or  this  feature  is  not 
available  on  your  vehicle,  a "Not  Equipped  With 
Uconnect  Phone"  message  will  display  on  the  radio 
screen. 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  263 


TIME  Button 

Push  the  TIME  button  to  alternate  locations  of  the  time 

and  frequency  display. 

Clock  Setting  Procedure 

1.  Push  and  hold  the  TIME  button  until  the  hours  blink. 

2.  Adjust  the  hours  by  turning  the  right  side  TUNE/ 
SCROLL  control  knob. 

3.  After  adjusting  the  hours,  push  the  right  side  TUNE/ 
SCROLL  control  knob  to  set  the  minutes.  The  minutes 
will  begin  to  blink. 

4.  Adjust  the  minutes  using  the  right  side  TUNE/ 
SCROLL  control  knob.  Push  the  TUNE  /SCROLL  con- 
trol knob  to  save  the  time  change. 

5.  To  exit,  push  any  button/knob  or  wait  five  seconds. 


The  clock  can  also  be  set  by  pushing  the  SETUP  button  and 
selecting  the  "SET  HOME  CLOCK"  entry.  Once  in  this 
display  follow  the  above  procedure,  starting  at  step  2. 

INFO  Button 

Push  the  INFO  button  for  an  RDS  station  (one  with  call 
letters  displayed).  The  radio  will  return  a Radio  Text 
message  broadcast  from  an  FM  station  (FM  mode  only). 

RW/FF 

Pushing  the  RW  (Rewind)  or  FF  (Fast  Forward)  buttons 
causes  the  tuner  to  search  for  the  next  frequency  in  the 
direction  of  the  arrows.  This  feature  operates  in  AM,  FM 
or  Satellite  (if  equipped)  frequencies. 

TUNE  Control 

Turn  the  rotary  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  clockwise 
to  increase  or  counterclockwise  to  decrease  the  frequency. 

Provided  by: 


264  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 
Setting  The  Tone,  Balance  And  Fade 

Push  the  rotary  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  and  BASS 
will  display.  Turn  the  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  to 
the  right  or  left  to  increase  or  decrease  the  bass  tones. 

Push  the  rotary  TUNE  /SCROLL  control  knob  a second 
time  and  MID  will  display.  Turn  the  TUNE /SCROLL 
control  knob  to  the  right  or  left  to  increase  or  decrease  the 
mid-range  tones. 

Push  the  rotary  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  a third 
time  and  TREBLE  will  display.  Turn  the  TUNE /SCROLL 
control  knob  to  the  right  or  left  to  increase  or  decrease  the 
treble  tones. 

Push  the  rotary  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  a fourth 
time  and  BALANCE  will  display.  Turn  the  TUNE/ 
SCROLL  control  knob  to  the  right  or  left  to  adjust  the 
sound  level  from  the  right  or  left  side  speakers. 


Push  the  rotary  TUNE  /SCROLL  control  knob  a fifth  time 
and  FADE  will  display.  Turn  the  TUNE /SCROLL  control 
knob  to  the  left  or  right  to  adjust  the  sound  level  between 
the  front  and  rear  speakers. 

Push  the  rotary  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  again  to 
exit  setting  tone,  balance,  and  fade. 

MUSIC  TYPE  Button 

Pushing  this  button  once  will  turn  on  the  Music  Type 
mode  for  five  seconds.  Pushing  the  MUSIC  TYPE  button 
or  turning  the  TUNE  /SCROLL  control  knob  within  five 
seconds  will  allow  the  program  format  type  to  be  se- 
lected. Many  radio  stations  do  not  currently  broadcast 
Music  Type  information. 


Provided  by: 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  265 


Toggle  the  MUSIC  TYPE  button  to  select  the  following 
format  types: 


Program  Type 

16-Digit  Character 
Display 

No  program  type  or  un- 
defined 

None 

Adult  Hits 

Adit  Hit 

Classical 

Classicl 

Classic  Rock 

Cls  Rock 

College 

College 

Country 

Country 

Foreign  Language 

Language 

Information 

Inform 

Jazz 

Jazz 

News 

News 

Nostalgia 

Nostalga 

Program  Type 

16-Digit  Character 
Display 

Oldies 

Oldies 

Personality 

Persnlty 

Public 

Public 

Rhythm  and  Blues 

R&B 

Religious  Music 

Rel  Muse 

Religious  Talk 

Rel  Talk 

Rock 

Rock 

Soft 

Soft 

Soft  Rock 

Soft  Rck 

Soft  Rhythm  and  Blues 

Soft  R&B 

Sports 

Sports 

Talk 

Talk 

Top  40 

Top  40 

Weather 

Weather 

o=/m_e=;=^ 


266  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 

By  pushing  the  SEEK  button  when  the  Music  Type  icon  is 
displayed,  the  radio  will  be  tuned  to  the  next  frequency 
station  with  the  same  selected  Music  Type  name.  The 
Music  Type  function  only  operates  when  in  the  FM 
mode. 

If  a preset  button  is  activated  while  in  the  Music  Type 
(Program  Type)  mode,  the  Music  Type  mode  will  be 
exited  and  the  radio  will  tune  to  the  preset  station. 

SETUP  Button 

Pushing  the  SETUP  button  allows  you  to  select  between 
the  following  items: 

NOTE:  Turn  the  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  to  scroll 
through  the  entries.  Push  the  AUDIO/SELECT  button  to 
select  an  entry  and  make  changes. 


• DVD  Enter  — When  the  disc  is  in  DVD  Menu  mode, 
selecting  DVD  Enter  will  allow  you  to  play  the  current 
highlighted  selection.  Use  the  remote  control  to  scroll 
up  and  down  the  menu  (if  equipped). 

• DISC  Play/Pause  — 

I You  can  toggle  between  playing  the  DVD  and 

F/  1 1 pausing  the  DVD  by  pushing  the  SELECT 
button  (if  equipped). 

• DVD  Play  Options  — Selecting  the  DVD  Play  Options 
will  display  the  following: 

• Subtitle  — Repeatedly  pressing  SELECT  will  switch 
subtitles  to  different  subtitle  languages  that  are  avail- 
able on  the  disc  (if  equipped). 

• Audio  Stream  — Repeatedly  pressing  SELECT  will 
switch  to  different  audio  languages  (if  supported  on 
the  disc)  (if  equipped). 


ivlded  by: 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  267 


• Angle  — Repeatedly  pressing  SELECT  will  change  the 
viewing  angle  if  supported  by  the  DVD  disc  (if 
equipped). 

NOTE: 

• The  available  selections  for  each  of  the  above  entries 
varies  depending  upon  the  disc. 

• These  selections  can  only  be  made  while  playing  a 
DVD. 

• VES  Power  — Allows  you  to  turn  VES  ON  and  OFF  (if 
equipped). 

• VES  Lock  — Locks  out  rear  VES  remote  controls  (if 
equipped). 

• VES  CH1/CH2  — Allows  the  user  to  change  the  mode 
of  either  the  IR1  or  IR2  wireless  headphones  by 
pressing  the  AUDIO/SELECT  button  (if  equipped). 


• Set  Home  Clock  — Pressing  the  SELECT  button 
allows  you  to  set  the  clock.  Turn  the  TUNE /SCROLL 
control  knob  to  adjust  the  hours  and  then  press  and 
turn  the  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  to  adjust  the 
minutes.  Press  the  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  again 
to  save  changes. 

• Player  Defaults  — Selecting  this  item  will  allow  the 
user  to  scroll  through  the  following  items  and  set 
defaults  according  to  customer  preference. 

Menu  Language  — If  Equipped 

Selecting  this  item  will  allow  the  user  to  choose  the 
default  startup  DVD  menu  language  (effective  only  if 
language  supported  by  disc).  If  you  want  to  select  a 
language  not  listed,  then  scroll  down  and  select  "other." 
Enter  the  four-digit  country  code  using  the  TUNE/ 
SCROLL  control  knob  to  scroll  up  and  down  to  select  the 
number  and  then  push  to  select. 


268  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


Audio  Language  — If  Equipped 

Selecting  this  item  allows  you  to  choose  a default  audio 
language  (effective  only  if  the  language  is  supported  by 
the  disc).  You  can  select  a language  not  listed  by  scrolling 
down  and  selecting  "other."  Enter  the  country  code  using 
the  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  to  scroll  up  and  down 
to  select  the  number  and  then  push  to  select. 

Subtitle  Language  — If  Equipped 

Selecting  this  item  allows  you  to  choose  a default  subtitle 
language  (effective  only  if  the  language  is  supported  by 
the  disc).  You  can  select  a language  not  listed  by  scrolling 
down  and  selecting  "other."  Enter  the  country  code  using 
the  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  to  scroll  up  and  down 
to  select  the  number  and  then  push  to  select. 

Subtitles  — If  Equipped 

Selecting  this  item  allows  you  to  choose  between  subtitle 
Off  or  On. 


Audio  DRC  — If  Equipped 

Selecting  this  item  allows  you  to  limit  maximum  audio 
dynamic  range.  The  default  is  set  to  "High,"  and  under 
this  setting,  dialogues  will  play  at  11  db  higher  than  if  the 
setting  is  "Normal." 

Aspect  Ratio  — If  Equipped 

Selecting  this  item  allows  you  to  choose  between  wide 
screen,  pan  scan,  and  letter  box. 

AutoPlay  — If  Equipped 

When  this  is  set  to  On  and  a DVD  video  is  inserted,  it  will 
bypass  the  DVD  menu  screen  and  automatically  play  the 
movie.  In  some  rare  cases,  the  DVD  player  may  not 
auto-play  the  main  title.  In  such  cases,  use  the  MENU 
button  on  the  remote  control  to  select  desired  title  to  play. 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  269 


NOTE:  The  user  will  have  to  set  these  defaults  before 
loading  a disc.  If  changes  are  made  to  these  settings  after 
a disc  is  loaded,  changes  will  not  be  effective.  Also,  the 
defaults  are  effective  only  if  the  disc  supports  the 
customer-preferred  settings. 

AM  and  FM  Buttons 

Push  the  buttons  to  select  AM  or  FM  mode. 

SET  Button  — To  Set  The  Pushbutton  Memory 

When  you  are  receiving  a station  that  you  wish  to 
commit  to  pushbutton  memory,  push  the  SET  button.  The 
symbol  SET  1 will  now  show  in  the  display  window. 
Select  the  button  (1-6)  you  wish  to  lock  onto  this  station 
and  push  and  release  that  button.  If  a button  is  not 
selected  within  five  seconds  after  pushing  the  SET  but- 
ton, the  station  will  continue  to  play  but  will  not  be 
stored  into  pushbutton  memory. 


You  may  add  a second  station  to  each  pushbutton  by 
repeating  the  above  procedure  with  this  exception:  Push 
the  SET  button  twice  and  SET  2 will  show  in  the  display 
window.  Each  button  can  be  set  for  SET  1 and  SET  2 in 
both  AM  and  FM.  This  allows  a total  of  12  AM,  12  FM, 
and  12  Satellite  (if  equipped)  stations  to  be  stored  into 
pushbutton  memory.  The  stations  stored  in  SET  2 
memory  can  be  selected  by  pushing  the  pushbutton 
twice. 

Every  time  a preset  button  is  used,  a corresponding 
button  number  will  display. 

Buttons  1-6 

These  buttons  tune  the  radio  to  the  stations  that  you 
commit  to  pushbutton  memory  {12  AM,  12  FM,  and  12 
Satellite  (if  equipped)  stations). 


_ Information  Provided  by: 

= = 


270  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 
DISC  Button 

Pushing  the  DISC  button  will  allow  you  to  switch  from 
AM/FM  modes  to  Disc  modes. 

Operation  Instructions  — DISC  Mode  For  CD  And 
MP3/WMA  Audio  Play,  DVD  - Video 

The  radio  DVD  player  and  many  DVD  discs  are  coded  by 
geographic  region.  These  region  codes  must  match  for 
the  disc  to  play.  If  the  region  code  for  the  DVD  disc  does 
not  match  the  region  code  for  the  radio  DVD  player,  it 
will  not  play  the  disc.  Customers  may  take  their  vehicle 
to  an  authorized  dealer  to  change  the  region  code  of  the 
player  a maximum  of  five  times. 


CAUTION! 


The  radio  may  shut  down  during  extremely  hot 
conditions.  When  this  occurs,  the  radio  will  indicate 
"Disc  Hot"  and  shut  off  until  a safe  temperature  is 
reached.  This  shutdown  is  necessary  to  protect  the 
optics  of  the  DVD  player  and  other  radio  internal 
components. 

NOTE:  The  ignition  switch  must  be  in  the  ON  or  ACC 
position  to  operate  the  radio. 

LOAD  Button  — Loading  Compact  Disc(s) 

Push  the  LOAD  button  and  the  pushbutton  with  the 
corresponding  number  (1-6)  where  the  CD  is  being 
loaded.  The  radio  will  display  PLEASE  WAIT  and 
prompt  when  to  INSERT  DISC.  After  the  radio  displays 
"INSERT  DISC,"  insert  the  CD  into  the  player. 


Radio  display  will  show  "LOADING  DISC"  when  the  disc 
is  loading  and  "READING  DISC"  when  the  radio  is 
reading  the  disc. 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  271 


Push  and  hold  the  EJECT  button  for  five  seconds  and  all 
CDs  will  be  ejected  from  the  radio. 


CAUTION! 

This  CD  player  will  accept  4-3/4  inch  (12  cm)  discs 
only.  The  use  of  other  sized  discs  may  damage  the 
CD  player  mechanism. 

Eject  Button  — Ejecting  Compact  Disc(s) 


Push  the  EJECT  button  and  the  pushbutton 
with  the  corresponding  number  (1-6)  where  the 
CD  was  loaded  and  the  disc  will  unload  and 
move  to  the  entrance  for  easy  removal.  Radio 
display  will  show  "EJECTING  DISC"  when  the  disc  is 
being  ejected  and  prompt  the  user  to  remove  the  disc. 


The  disc  can  be  ejected  with  the  radio  and  ignition  OFF. 

SEEK  Button  (CD  MODE) 

Push  the  right  SEEK  button  for  the  next  selection  on  the 
CD.  Push  the  left  SEEK  button  to  return  to  the  beginning 
of  the  current  selection,  or  return  to  the  beginning  of  the 
previous  selection  if  the  CD  is  within  the  first  second  of 
the  current  selection.  Pushing  and  holding  the  SEEK 
button  will  allow  you  to  scroll  through  the  tracks  faster  in 
CD  and  MP3/MWA  modes. 

SCAN  Button  (CD  MODE) 

Push  the  SCAN  button  to  scan  through  each  track  on  the 
CD  currently  playing. 


Information  Provided  by: 


272  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 
TIME  Button  (CD  MODE) 

Push  this  button  to  change  the  display  from  a large  CD 
playing  time  display  to  a small  CD  playing  time  display. 

RW/FF  (CD  MODE) 

Push  and  hold  FF  (Fast  Forward)  and  the  CD  player  will 
begin  to  fast  forward  until  FF  is  released,  or  RW  or 
another  CD  button  is  pushed.  The  RW  (Rewind)  button 
works  in  a similar  manner. 

AM  Or  FM  Button  (CD  MODE) 

Switches  the  radio  into  the  AM  or  FM  radio  mode. 

Notes  On  Playing  MP3IWMA  Files 

The  radio  can  play  MP3/ WMA  files;  however,  acceptable 
MP3/ WMA  file  recording  media  and  formats  are  limited. 
When  writing  MP3 /WMA  files,  pay  attention  to  the 
following  restrictions. 


Supported  Media  (Disc  Types) 

The  MP3 /WMA  file  recording  media  supported  by  the 
radio  are  CDDA,  CD-R,  CD-RW,  MP3, WMA,  DVD  Video, 
DVD-R,  DVD-RW,  DVD+R,  DVD+RW,  and  CDDA+MP3. 

Supported  Medium  Formats  (File  Systems) 

The  medium  formats  supported  by  the  radio  are  ISO  9660 
Level  1 and  Level  2 and  includes  the  Joliet  extension. 
When  reading  discs  recorded  using  formats  other  than 
ISO  9660  Level  1 and  Level  2,  the  radio  may  fail  to  read 
files  properly  and  may  be  unable  to  play  the  file  nor- 
mally. UDF  and  Apple  HFS  formats  are  not  supported. 

The  radio  uses  the  following  limits  for  file  systems: 

• Maximum  number  of  directory  levels:  8 

• Maximum  number  of  files:  255 

• Maximum  number  of  folders:  100 


/XL 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  273 


• Maximum  number  of  characters  in  file /folder  names: 

• Level  1:  12  (including  a separator  and  a three- 
character  extension) 

• Level  2:  31  (including  a separator  and  a three- 
character  extension) 

Multisession  disc  formats  are  supported  by  the  radio. 
Multisession  discs  may  contain  combinations  of  normal 
CD  audio  tracks  and  computer  files  (including  MP3/ 
WMA  files).  Discs  created  with  an  option  such  as  "keep 
disc  open  after  writing"  are  most  likely  multisession 
discs.  The  use  of  multisession  for  CD  audio  or  MP3/ 
WMA  playback  may  result  in  longer  disc  loading  times. 

If  a disc  contains  multi-formats,  such  as  CD  audio  and 
MP3 /WMA  tracks,  the  radio  will  only  play  the  MP3/ 
WMA  tracks  on  that  disc. 


Supported  MP3/WMA  File  Formats 

The  radio  will  recognize  only  files  with  the  *.  MP3  /WMA 
extension  as  MP3/WMA  files.  Non-MP3/WMA  files 
named  with  the  *.  MP3 /WMA  extension  may  cause  play- 
back problems.  The  radio  is  designed  to  recognize  the  file 
as  an  invalid  MP3/WMA  and  will  not  play  the  file. 

When  using  the  MP3 /WMA  encoder  to  compress  audio 
data  to  an  MP3 /WMA  file,  the  bit  rate  and  sampling 
frequencies  in  the  following  table  are  supported.  In 
addition,  variable  bit  rates  (VBR)  are  also  supported.  The 
majority  of  MP3/ WMA  files  use  a 44.1  kHz  sampling  rate 
and  a 192,  160,  128,  96  or  VBR  bit  rates. 


Information  Provided  by: 


274  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


MPEG 

Specification 

Sampling 

Frequency 

(kHz) 

Bit  Rate  (kbps) 

MPEG-1  Audio 
Layer  3 

48,  44.1,  32 

320,  256,  224, 
192,  160,  128, 
112,  96,  80,  64, 
56,  48 

MPEG-2  Audio 
Layer  3 

24,  22.05,  16 

160,  128,  144, 
112,  96,  80,  64, 
56,  48 

WMA  Specifi- 
cation 

Sampling  Fre- 
quency (kHz) 

Bit  Rate  (kbps) 

WMA 

44.1  and  48 

48,  64,  96,  128, 
160,  192  VBR 

ID3  Tag  information  for  artist,  song  title,  and  album  title 
are  supported  for  ID3  version  1 tags.  ID3  version  2 is  not 
supported  by  the  radios. 


Playlist  files  are  not  supported.  MP3  Pro  files  are  not 
supported. 

Playback  Of  MP3/WMA  Files 

When  a medium  containing  MP3/WMA  data  is  loaded, 
the  radio  checks  all  files  on  the  medium.  If  the  medium 
contains  a lot  of  folders  or  files,  the  radio  will  take  more 
time  to  start  playing  the  MP3/WMA  files. 

Loading  times  for  playback  of  MP3/WMA  files  may  be 
affected  by  the  following: 

• Media  - CD-RW  media  may  take  longer  to  load  than 
CD-R  media 

• Medium  formats  - Multisession  discs  may  take  longer 
to  load  than  non-multisession  discs 

• Number  of  files  and  folders  - Loading  times  will 
increase  with  more  files  and  folders 


i Provided  by: 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  275 


To  increase  the  speed  of  disc  loading,  it  is  recommended 
to  use  CD-R  media  and  single-session  discs.  To  create  a 
single-session  disc,  enable  the  "Disc  at  Once"  option 
before  writing  to  the  disc. 

LIST  Button  — DISC  Mode  For  MP3/WMA  Play 

Pushing  the  LIST  button  will  bring  up  a list  of  all  folders 
on  the  disc.  Scrolling  up  or  down  the  list  is  done  by 
turning  the  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob.  Selecting  a 
folder  by  pushing  the  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  will 
begin  playing  the  files  contained  in  that  folder  (or  the 
next  folder  in  sequence  if  the  selection  does  not  contain 
playable  files). 

The  folder  list  will  time  out  after  five  seconds. 

INFO  Button  — DISC  Mode  For  MP3/WMA  Play 

Pushing  the  INFO  button  repeatedly  will  scroll  through 
the  following  TAG  information:  Song  Title,  Artist,  File 
Name,  and  Folder  Name  (if  available). 


Push  the  INFO  button  once  more  to  return  to  "elapsed 
time"  priority  mode. 

Push  and  hold  the  INFO  button  for  three  seconds  or  more 
and  radio  will  display  song  titles  for  each  file. 

Push  and  hold  the  INFO  button  again  for  three  seconds 
to  return  to  "elapsed  time"  display. 

Operation  Instructions  — Auxiliary  Mode 

The  auxiliary  (AUX)  jack  is  an  audio  input  jack  which 
allows  the  user  to  plug  in  a portable  device  such  as  an 
MP3/WMA  player,  an  ipod,  or  a microphone  and  utilize 
the  vehicles  audio  system  to  amplify  the  source  and  play 
through  the  vehicle  speakers. 

Pushing  the  AUX  button  will  change  the  mode  to  auxil- 
iary device  if  the  AUX  jack  is  connected. 


276  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


NOTE:  The  AUX  device  must  be  turned  on  and  the 
device's  volume  set  to  the  proper  level.  If  the  AUX  audio 
is  not  loud  enough,  turn  the  device's  volume  up.  If  the 
AUX  audio  sounds  distorted,  turn  the  device's  volume 
down. 

SEEK  Button  (Auxiliary  Mode) 

No  function. 

SCAN  Button  (Auxiliary  Mode) 

No  function. 

EJECT  Button  (Auxiliary  Mode) 


TIME  Button  (Auxiliary  Mode) 

Push  the  TIME  button  to  change  the  display  from  elapsed 
playing  time  to  time  of  day.  The  time  of  day  will  display 
for  five  seconds. 

RW/FF  (Auxiliary  Mode) 

No  function. 

SET  Button  (Auxiliary  Mode) 

No  function. 

Operating  Instructions  (Voice  Command  System) 

— If  Equipped 


No  function. 


Refer  to  "Voice  Command''  for  further  details. 

Operating  Instructions  (Uconnect  Phone)  — If 
Equipped 


Refer  to  "Uconnect  Phone"  for  further  details. 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  277 


Operating  Instructions  — Video  Entertainment 
System  (VES)  (If  Equipped) 

Refer  to  "Video  Entertainment  System  (VES)"  for  further 
details. 

Dolby 

Manufactured  under  license  from  Dolby  Laboratories. 
Dolby  and  the  double-D  symbol  are  trademarks  of  Dolby 
Laboratories. 

Macrovision 

This  product  incorporates  copyright  protection  technol- 
ogy that  is  protected  by  U.S.  patents  and  other  intellec- 
tual property  rights.  Use  of  this  copyright  protection 
technology  must  be  authorized  by  Macrovision,  and  is 
intended  for  home  and  other  limited  viewing  uses  only, 
unless  otherwise  authorized  by  Macrovision.  Reverse 
engineering  or  disassembly  is  prohibited. 


DTS 

"DTS  and  "DTS  2.0"  are  trademarks  of  Digital  Theater 
Systems,  Inc. 

Uconnect  (Satellite  Radio)  — If  Equipped 

Satellite  radio  uses  direct  satellite-to-receiver  broadcast- 
ing technology  to  provide  clear  digital  sound,  coast  to 
coast.  The  subscription  service  provider  is  Sirius  Satellite 
Radio.  This  service  offers  over  130  channels  of  music, 
sports,  news,  entertainment,  and  programming  for  chil- 
dren, directly  from  its  satellites  and  broadcasting  studios. 

NOTE:  Sirius  service  is  not  available  in  Hawaii  and  has 
limited  coverage  in  Alaska. 


Information  Provided  by: 


278  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


System  Activation 

Sirius  Satellite  Radio  service  is  p re-activated,  and  you 
may  begin  listening  immediately  to  the  one  year  of  audio 
service  that  is  included  with  the  factory-installed  satellite 
radio  system  in  your  vehicle.  Sirius  will  supply  a wel- 
come kit  that  contains  general  information,  including 
how  to  setup  your  on-line  listening  account.  For  further 
information,  call  the  toll-free  number  888-539-7474,  or 
visit  the  Sirius  web  site  at  www.siriusxm.com,  or  at 
www.siriusxm.ca  for  Canadian  residents. 

Electronic  Serial  Number/Sirius  Identification 
Number  (ESN/SID) 

Please  have  the  following  information  available  when 
calling: 

1.  The  Electronic  Serial  Number/Sirius  Identification 
Number  (ESN/SID). 

2.  Your  Vehicle  Identification  Number. 


To  access  the  ESN/ SID,  refer  to  the  following  steps: 

ESN/SID  Access 

With  the  ignition  switch  in  the  ON /RUN  or  ACC  posi- 
tion and  the  radio  on,  push  the  SETUP  button  and  scroll 
using  the  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  until  Sirius  ID  is 
selected.  Push  the  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  and  the 
Sirius  ID  number  will  display.  The  Sirius  ID  number 
display  will  time  out  in  two  minutes.  Push  any  button  on 
the  radio  to  exit  this  screen. 

Selecting  Uconnect  (Satellite)  Mode 

Push  the  SAT  button  until  "SAT"  appears  in  the  display.  A 
CD  may  remain  in  the  radio  while  in  the  Satellite  radio 
mode. 

Satellite  Antenna 

To  ensure  optimum  reception,  do  not  place  items  on  the 
roof  around  the  rooftop  antenna  location.  Metal  objects 
placed  within  the  line  of  sight  of  the  antenna  will  cause 


decreased  performance.  Larger  luggage  items  such  as 
bikes  should  be  placed  as  far  rearward  as  possible,  within 
the  loading  design  of  the  rack.  Do  not  place  items  directly 
on  or  above  the  antenna. 

Reception  Quality 

Satellite  reception  may  be  interrupted  due  to  one  of  the 
following  reasons: 

• The  vehicle  is  parked  in  an  underground  parking 
structure  or  under  a physical  obstacle. 

• Dense  tree  coverage  may  interrupt  reception  in  the 
form  of  short  audio  mutes. 

• Driving  under  wide  bridges  or  along  tall  buildings  can 
cause  intermittent  reception. 

• Placing  objects  over  or  too  close  to  the  antenna  can 
cause  signal  blockage. 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  279 

Operating  Instructions  — Uconnect  (Satellite) 

Mode 

NOTE:  The  ignition  switch  must  be  in  the  ON /RUN  or 
ACC  position  to  operate  the  radio. 

SEEK  Buttons 

Push  and  release  the  SEEK  buttons  to  search  for  the  next 
listenable  station  in  AM/FM  mode.  Push  the  right  switch 
to  seek  up  and  the  left  switch  to  seek  down.  The  radio 
will  remain  tuned  to  the  new  station  until  you  make 
another  selection.  Holding  either  button  will  bypass 
stations  without  stopping,  until  you  release  it. 

SCAN  Button 

Pushing  the  SCAN  button  causes  the  tuner  to  search  for 
the  next  channel,  pausing  for  eight  seconds  before  con- 
tinuing to  the  next.  To  stop  the  search,  push  the  SCAN 
button  a second  time. 


/XL 


280  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 
INFO  Button 

Pushing  the  INFO  button  will  cycle  the  display  informa- 
tion between  Artist,  Song  Title,  and  Composer  (if  avail- 
able). Also,  pushing  and  holding  the  INFO  button  for  an 
additional  three  seconds  will  make  the  radio  display  the 
Song  Title  all  of  the  time  (push  and  hold  again  to  return 
to  normal  display). 

RW/FF 

Pushing  the  RW  (Rewind)  or  FF  (Fast  Forward)  buttons 
causes  the  tuner  to  search  for  the  next  channel  in  the 
direction  of  the  arrows. 

TUNE  Control  (Rotary) 

Turn  the  rotary  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  clockwise 
to  increase  or  counterclockwise  to  decrease  the  channel. 


MUSIC  TYPE  Button 

Pushing  this  button  once  will  turn  on  the  Music  Type 
mode  for  five  seconds.  Pushing  the  MUSIC  TYPE  button 
or  turning  the  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  within  five 
seconds  will  allow  the  program  format  type  to  be  se- 
lected. 

Toggle  the  MUSIC  TYPE  button  again  to  select  the  music 
type. 

By  pushing  the  SEEK  button  when  the  Music  Type 
function  is  active,  the  radio  will  be  tuned  to  the  next 
channel  with  the  same  selected  Music  Type  name. 

If  a preset  button  is  activated  while  in  the  Music  Type 
(Program  Type)  mode,  the  Music  Type  mode  will  be 
exited  and  the  radio  will  tune  to  the  preset  channel. 


Information  Provided  by: 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  281 


SETUP  Button 

Pushing  the  SETUP  button  allows  you  to  select  the 
following  items: 

• Display  Sirius  ID  number  — Push  the  AUDIO/ 
SELECT  button  to  display  the  Sirius  ID  number.  This 
number  is  used  to  activate,  deactivate,  or  change  the 
Sirius  subscription. 

SET/RND  Button  — To  Set  The  Pushbutton 
Memory 

When  you  are  receiving  a station  that  you  wish  to 
commit  to  pushbutton  memory,  push  the  SET/RND 
button.  The  symbol  SET  1 will  now  show  in  the  display 
window.  Select  the  button  (1-6)  you  wish  to  lock  onto  this 
station  and  push  and  release  that  button.  If  a button  is  not 
selected  within  five  seconds  after  pushing  the  SET/RND 
button,  the  station  will  continue  to  play  but  will  not  be 
stored  into  pushbutton  memory. 


You  may  add  a second  station  to  each  pushbutton  by 
repeating  the  above  procedure  with  this  exception:  Push 
the  SET/RND  button  twice  and  SET  2 will  show  in  the 
display  window.  Each  button  can  be  set  for  SET  1 and 
SET  2 in  both  AM  and  FM.  This  allows  a total  of  12  AM 
and  12  FM  stations  to  be  stored  into  pushbutton  memory. 
The  stations  stored  in  SET  2 memory  can  be  selected  by 
pushing  the  pushbutton  twice. 

Every  time  a preset  button  is  used,  a corresponding 
button  number  will  display. 

Buttons  1-6 

These  buttons  tune  the  radio  to  the  channels  that  you 
commit  to  pushbutton  memory  (12  Satellite  stations). 


Information  Provided  by: 


282  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  H 

UCONNECT  430/430 N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV  — IF 
EQUIPPED 


UCONNECT 130 


Refer  to  your  Uconnect  Supplement  Manual  for  detailed 
operating  instructions. 

Operating  Instructions  (Voice  Command  System) 
— If  Equipped 

Refer  to  "Voice  Command"  for  further  details. 

Operating  Instructions  (Uconnect  Phone)  — If 
Equipped 

Refer  to  "Uconnect  Phone"  for  further  details. 


Uconnect  130 

Operating  Instructions  — Radio  Mode 

NOTE:  The  ignition  switch  must  be  in  the  ON  or  ACC 
position  to  operate  the  radio. 


v Information  Provided  by: 


Power  Switch/Volume  Control  (Rotary) 

Push  the  ON/ VOLUME  control  knob  to  turn  on  the 
radio.  Push  the  ON/ VOLUME  control  knob  a second 
time  to  turn  off  the  radio. 

Electronic  Volume  Control 

The  electronic  volume  control  turns  continuously 
(360  degrees)  in  either  direction,  without  stopping.  Turn- 
ing the  ON/ VOLUME  control  knob  to  the  right  increases 
the  volume,  and  to  the  left  decreases  it. 

When  the  audio  system  is  turned  on,  the  sound  will  be 
set  at  the  same  volume  level  as  last  played. 

SEEK  Buttons 

Push  and  release  the  SEEK  buttons  to  search  for  the  next 
listenable  station  in  AM/FM  mode.  Push  the  right  switch 
to  seek  up  and  the  left  switch  to  seek  down.  The  radio 
will  remain  tuned  to  the  new  station  until  you  make 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  283 

another  selection.  Holding  either  button  will  bypass 

stations  without  stopping,  until  you  release  it. 

TIME  Button 

Push  the  TIME  button  to  alternate  display  of  the  time  and 

radio  frequency. 

Clock  Setting  Procedure 

1.  Push  and  hold  the  TIME  button  until  the  hours  blink. 

2.  Adjust  the  hours  by  turning  the  right  side  TUNE/ 
SCROLL  control  knob. 

3.  After  adjusting  the  hours,  push  the  right  side  TUNE/ 
SCROLL  control  knob  to  set  the  minutes.  The  minutes 
will  begin  to  blink. 

4.  Adjust  the  minutes  using  the  right  side  TUNE/ 
SCROLL  control  knob.  Push  the  TUNE /SCROLL  con- 
trol knob  to  save  time  change. 


/XL 


284  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


5.  To  exit,  push  any  button/knob,  or  wait  five  seconds. 

RW/FF 

Pushing  the  RW  (Rewind)  or  FF  (Fast  Forward)  buttons 
causes  the  tuner  to  search  for  the  next  frequency  in  the 
direction  of  the  arrows.  This  feature  operates  in  either 
AM  or  FM  frequencies. 

TUNE  Control 

Turn  the  rotary  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  clockwise 
to  increase  or  counterclockwise  to  decrease  the  frequency. 

Setting  The  Tone,  Balance  And  Fade 

Push  the  rotary  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  and  BASS 
will  display.  Turn  the  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  to 
the  right  or  left  to  increase  or  decrease  the  bass  tones. 


Push  the  rotary  TUNE  /SCROLL  control  knob  a second 
time  and  MID  will  display.  Turn  the  TUNE /SCROLL 
control  knob  to  the  right  or  left  to  increase  or  decrease  the 
mid-range  tones. 

Push  the  rotary  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  a third 
time  and  TREBLE  will  display.  Turn  the  TUNE /SCROLL 
control  knob  to  the  right  or  left  to  increase  or  decrease  the 
treble  tones. 

Push  the  rotary  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  a fourth 
time  and  BALANCE  will  display.  Turn  the  TUNE/ 
SCROLL  control  knob  to  the  right  or  left  to  adjust  the 
sound  level  from  the  right  or  left  side  speakers. 

Push  the  rotary  TUNE  /SCROLL  control  knob  a fifth  time 
and  FADE  will  display.  Turn  the  TUNE /SCROLL  control 
knob  to  the  left  or  right  to  adjust  the  sound  level  between 
the  front  and  rear  speakers. 

Provided  by: 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  285 


Push  the  rotary  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  again  to 
exit  setting  tone,  balance,  and  fade. 

AM/FM  Button 

Push  the  buttons  to  select  either  AM  or  FM  mode. 

SET/RND  Button  — To  Set  The  Pushbutton 
Memory 

When  you  are  receiving  a station  that  you  wish  to 
commit  to  pushbutton  memory,  push  the  SET/RND 
button.  The  symbol  SET  1 will  now  show  in  the  display 
window.  Select  the  button  (1  to  6)  you  wish  to  lock  onto 
this  station  and  push  and  release  that  button.  If  a button 
is  not  selected  within  five  seconds  after  pushing  the 
SET/RND  button,  the  station  will  continue  to  play  but 
will  not  be  stored  into  pushbutton  memory. 

You  may  add  a second  station  to  each  pushbutton  by 
repeating  the  above  procedure  with  this  exception:  Push 
the  SET/RND  button  twice  and  SET  2 will  show  in  the 


display  window.  Each  button  can  be  set  for  SET  1 and 
SET  2 in  both  AM  and  FM.  This  allows  a total  of  12  AM 
and  12  FM  stations  to  be  stored  into  pushbutton  memory. 
The  stations  stored  in  SET  2 memory  can  be  selected  by 
pushing  the  pushbutton  twice. 

Every  time  a preset  button  is  used,  a corresponding 
button  number  will  display. 

Buttons  1-6 

These  buttons  tune  the  radio  to  the  stations  that  you 
commit  to  pushbutton  memory  (12  AM  and  12  FM 
stations). 

DISC  Button 

Pushing  the  DISC  button  will  allow  you  to  switch  from 
AM/FM  modes  to  Disc  modes. 


286  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 

Operation  Instructions  — CD  MODE  For  CD  And 
MP3  Audio  Play 

NOTE: 

• The  ignition  switch  must  be  in  the  ON  or  ACC  position 
to  operate  the  radio. 

• This  radio  is  capable  of  playing  compact  discs  (CD), 
recordable  compact  discs  (CD-R),  rewritable  compact 
discs  (CD-RW),  compact  discs  with  MP3  tracks  and 
multisession  compact  discs  with  CD  and  MP3  tracks. 

Inserting  Compact  Disc(s) 

Gently  insert  one  CD  into  the  CD  player  with  the  CD 
label  facing  up.  The  CD  will  automatically  be  pulled  into 
the  CD  player  and  the  CD  icon  will  illuminate  on  the 
radio  display.  If  a CD  does  not  go  into  the  slot  more  than 
1 inch  (2.5  cm),  a disc  may  already  be  loaded  and  must  be 
ejected  before  a new  disc  can  be  loaded. 


If  you  insert  a disc  with  the  ignition  ON  and  the  radio 
ON,  the  unit  will  switch  from  radio  to  CD  mode  and 
begin  to  play  when  you  insert  the  disc.  The  display  will 
show  the  track  number,  and  index  time  in  minutes  and 
seconds.  Play  will  begin  at  the  start  of  track  1. 


CAUTION! 

• This  CD  player  will  accept  4-3/4  inch  (12  cm)  discs 
only.  The  use  of  other  sized  discs  may  damage  the 
CD  player  mechanism. 

• Do  not  use  adhesive  labels.  These  labels  can  peel 
away  and  jam  the  player  mechanism. 

• The  Uconnect  130  is  a single  CD  player.  Do  not  attempt 
to  insert  a second  CD  if  one  is  already  loaded. 

• Dual-media  disc  types  (one  side  is  a DVD,  the 
other  side  is  a CD)  should  not  be  used,  and  they  can 
cause  damage  to  the  player. 


_ . Information  Provided  by: 

= = 


EJECT  Button  — Ejecting  A CD 


Push  the  EJECT  button  to  eject  the  CD. 


If  you  have  ejected  a disc  and  have  not  removed  it  within 
10  seconds,  it  will  be  reloaded.  If  the  CD  is  not  removed, 
the  radio  will  reinsert  the  CD  but  will  not  play  it. 

A disc  can  be  ejected  with  the  radio  and  ignition  OFF. 

NOTE:  Ejecting  with  the  ignition  OFF  is  not  allowed  on 
convertible  or  soft-top  models  (if  equipped.) 

SEEK  Button 

Push  the  right  SEEK  button  for  the  next  selection  on  the 
CD.  Push  the  left  SEEK  button  to  return  to  the  beginning 
of  the  current  selection,  or  return  to  the  beginning  of  the 
previous  selection  if  the  CD  is  within  the  first  second  of 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  287 

the  current  selection.  Pushing  and  holding  the  SEEK 
button  will  allow  faster  scrolling  through  the  tracks  in 
CD  and  MP3  modes. 

TIME  Button 

Push  this  button  to  change  the  display  from  a large  CD  _ 
playing  time  display  to  a small  CD  playing  time  display.  E 

RW/FF 

Push  and  hold  the  FF  (Fast  Forward)  button  and  the  CD 
player  will  begin  to  fast  forward  until  FF  is  released,  or 
RW  or  another  CD  button  is  pushed.  The  RW  (Reverse) 
button  operates  in  a similar  manner. 

AM/FM  Button 

Push  the  button  to  select  either  AM  or  FM  mode. 


AL 


288  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 
SET/RND  Button  (Random  Play  Button) 

Push  this  button  while  the  CD  is  playing  to  activate 
Random  Play.  This  feature  plays  the  selections  on  the 
compact  disc  in  random  order  to  provide  an  interesting 
change  of  pace. 

Push  the  right  SEEK  button  to  move  to  the  next  randomly 
selected  track. 

Push  the  RND  button  a second  time  to  stop  Random  Play. 

Notes  On  Playing  MP3  Files 

The  radio  can  play  MP3  files;  however,  acceptable  MP3 
file  recording  media  and  formats  are  limited.  When 
writing  MP3  files,  pay  attention  to  the  following  restric- 
tions. 

Supported  Media  (Disc  Types) 

The  MP3  file  recording  media  supported  by  the  radio  are 
CDDA,  CD-R,  CD-RW,  MP3,  and  CDDA+MP3. 


Supported  Medium  Formats  (File  Systems) 

The  medium  formats  supported  by  the  radio  are  ISO  9660 
Level  1 and  Level  2 and  includes  the  Joliet  extension. 
When  reading  discs  recorded  using  formats  other  than 
ISO  9660  Level  1 and  Level  2,  the  radio  may  fail  to  read 
files  properly  and  may  be  unable  to  play  the  file  nor- 
mally. UDF  and  Apple  HFS  formats  are  not  supported. 

The  radio  uses  the  following  limits  for  file  systems: 

• Maximum  number  of  folder  levels:  8 

• Maximum  number  of  files:  255 

• Maximum  number  of  folders.  (The  radio  display  of  file 
names  and  folder  names  is  limited.  For  large  numbers  of 
files  and/ or  folders,  the  radio  may  be  unable  to  display 
the  file  name  and  folder  name,  and  will  assign  a number 
instead.  With  a maximum  number  of  files,  exceeding  20 
folders  will  result  in  this  display.  With  200  files,  exceeding 
50  folders  will  result  in  this  display.) 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  289 


Maximum  number  of  characters  in  file /folder  names: 

• Level  1:  12  (including  a separator  and  a three- 
character  extension) 

• Level  2:  31  (including  a separator  and  a three- 
character  extension) 

Multi-session  disc  formats  are  supported  by  the  radio. 
Multi-session  discs  may  contain  combinations  of  normal 
CD  audio  tracks  and  computer  files  (including  MP3  files). 
Discs  created  with  an  option  such  as  "keep  disc  open  after 
writing"  are  most  likely  multi-session  discs.  The  use  of 
multi-session  for  CD  audio  or  MP3  playback  may  result 
in  longer  disc  loading  times. 


Supported  MP3  File  Formats 

The  radio  will  recognize  only  files  with  the  *.MP3  exten- 
sion as  MP3  files.  Non-MP3  files  named  with  the  *.MP3 
extension  may  cause  playback  problems.  The  radio  is 
designed  to  recognize  the  file  as  an  invalid  MP3  and  will 
not  play  the  file. 

When  using  the  MP3  encoder  to  compress  audio  data  to 
an  MP3  file,  the  bit  rate  and  sampling  frequencies  in  the 
following  table  are  supported.  In  addition,  variable  bit 
rates  (VBR)  are  also  supported.  The  majority  of  MP3  files 
use  a 44.1  kHz  sampling  rate  and  a 192,  160,  128,  96  or 
VBR  bit  rate. 


Information  Provided  by: 


290  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


MPEG 

Specification 

Sampling 

Frequency 

(kHz) 

Bit  Rate  (kbps) 

MPEG-1  Audio 
Layer  3 

48,  44.1,  32 

320,  256,  224, 
192,  160,  128, 
112,  96,  80,  64, 
56,  48,  40,  32 

MPEG-2  Audio 
Layer  3 

24,  22.05,  16 

160,  128,  144, 
112,  96,  80,  64, 
56,  48,  40,  32, 
24,  16,  8 

ID3  Tag  information  for  artist,  song  title,  and  album  title 
are  supported  for  version  1 ID3  tags.  ID3  version  2 is  not 
supported  by  the  radios. 


Playlist  files  are  not  supported.  MP3  Pro  files  are  not 
supported. 


Playback  Of  MP3  Files 

When  a medium  containing  MP3  data  is  loaded,  the 
radio  checks  all  files  on  the  medium.  If  the  medium 
contains  a lot  of  folders  or  files,  the  radio  will  take  more 
time  to  start  playing  the  MP3  files. 

Loading  times  for  playback  of  MP3  files  may  be  affected 
by  the  following: 

• Media  - CD-RW  media  may  take  longer  to  load  than 
CD-R  media 

• Medium  formats  - Multisession  discs  may  take  longer 
to  load  than  non-multisession  discs 

• Number  of  files  and  folders  - Loading  times  will 
increase  with  more  files  and  folders 


Information  Provided  by: 


To  increase  the  speed  of  disc  loading,  it  is  recommended 
to  use  CD-R  media  and  single-session  discs.  To  create  a 
single-session  disc,  enable  the  "Disc  at  Once"  option 
before  writing  to  the  disc. 

Operation  Instructions  — Auxiliary  Mode 

The  auxiliary  (AUX)  jack  is  an  audio  input  jack,  which 
allows  the  user  to  plug  in  a portable  device,  such  as  an 
MP3  player,  or  iPod,  and  utilize  the  vehicle's  audio 
system  to  amplify  the  source  and  play  through  the 
vehicle  speakers. 

Pushing  the  DISC /AUX  button  will  change  the  mode  to 
auxiliary  device  if  the  AUX  jack  is  connected. 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  291 

NOTE:  The  AUX  device  must  be  turned  on  and  the 
device's  volume  set  to  proper  level.  If  the  AUX  audio  is 
not  loud  enough,  turn  the  device's  volume  up.  If  the  AUX 
audio  sounds  distorted,  turn  the  device's  volume  down. 

TIME  Button  (Auxiliary  Mode) 

Push  this  button  to  change  the  display  to  time  of  day.  The 
time  of  day  will  display  for  five  seconds  (when  ignition  is 
OFF). 


Information  Provided  by: 

zd=/m 


292  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 

UCONNECT  130  WITH  SATELLITE  RADIO 


Uconnect  130 

Operating  Instructions  — Radio  Mode 

NOTE:  The  ignition  switch  must  be  in  the  ON  or  ACC 
position  to  operate  the  radio. 


Power  Switch/Volume  Control  (Rotary) 

Push  the  ON/ VOLUME  control  knob  to  turn  on  the 
radio.  Push  the  ON/ VOLUME  control  knob  a second 
time  to  turn  off  the  radio. 

Electronic  Volume  Control 

The  electronic  volume  control  turns  continuously  (360 
degrees)  in  either  direction,  without  stopping.  Turning 
the  ON/ VOLUME  control  knob  to  the  right  increases  the 
volume,  and  to  the  left  decreases  it. 

When  the  audio  system  is  turned  on,  the  sound  will  be 
set  at  the  same  volume  level  as  last  played. 

SEEK  Buttons 

Push  and  release  the  SEEK  buttons  to  search  for  the  next 
listenable  station  in  AM/FM  mode.  Push  the  right  switch 
to  seek  up  and  the  left  switch  to  seek  down.  The  radio 
will  remain  tuned  to  the  new  station  until  you  make 


Information 


/XL 


another  selection.  Holding  either  button  will  bypass 
stations  without  stopping,  until  you  release  it. 

Voice  Command  System  (Radio)  — If  Equipped 

Refer  to  "Voice  Command"  in  "Understanding  The  Fea- 
tures Of  Your  Vehicle". 

Voice  Command  Button  Uconnect  Phone  — If 
Equipped 

Push  this  button  to  operate  the  Uconnect  Phone  feature 
(if  equipped).  Refer  to  "Uconnect  Phone"  in  "Under- 
standing The  Features  Of  Your  Vehicle". 

If  your  vehicle  is  not  equipped  with  or  this  feature  is  not 
available  on  your  vehicle,  a "Not  Equipped  With 
Uconnect  Phone"  message  will  display  on  the  radio 
screen. 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  293 
Phone  Button  Uconnect  Phone  — If  Equipped 

Push  this  button  to  operate  the  Uconnect  Phone  feature 
(if  equipped).  Refer  to  "Uconnect  Phone"  in  "Under- 
standing The  Features  Of  Your  Vehicle". 

If  your  vehicle  is  not  equipped  with  or  this  feature  is  not 
available  on  your  vehicle,  a "Not  Equipped  With 
Uconnect  Phone"  message  will  display  on  the  radio 
screen. 

TIME  Button 

Push  the  TIME  button  to  alternate  display  of  the  time  and 
radio  frequency. 

Clock  Setting  Procedure 

1.  Push  and  hold  the  TIME  button  until  the  hours  blink. 

2.  Adjust  the  hours  by  turning  the  right  side  TUNE/ 
SCROLL  control  knob. 


i Provided  by: 


294  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


3.  After  adjusting  the  hours,  push  the  right  side  TUNE/ 
SCROLL  control  knob  to  set  the  minutes.  The  minutes 
will  begin  to  blink. 

4.  Adjust  the  minutes  using  the  right  side  TUNE/ 
SCROLL  control  knob.  Push  the  TUNE /SCROLL  con- 
trol knob  to  save  time  change. 

5.  To  exit,  push  any  button/knob  or  wait  five  seconds. 

The  clock  can  also  be  set  by  pushing  the  SETUP  button. 
For  vehicles  equipped  with  satellite  radio,  push  the 
SETUP  button,  use  the  TUNE/SCROLL  control  to  select 
SET  CLOCK,  and  then  follow  the  above  procedure, 
starting  at  step  2.  For  vehicles  not  equipped  with  satellite 
radio,  push  the  SETUP  button  and  then  follow  the  above 
procedure,  starting  at  step  2. 


INFO  Button 

Push  the  INFO  button  for  an  RDS  station  (one  with  call 
letters  displayed).  The  radio  will  return  a Radio  Text 
message  broadcast  from  an  FM  station  (FM  mode  only). 

RW/FF 

Pushing  the  RW  (Rewind)  or  FF  (Fast  Forward)  buttons 
causes  the  tuner  to  search  for  the  next  frequency  in  the 
direction  of  the  arrows.  This  feature  operates  in  either 
AM  or  FM  frequencies. 

TUNE  Control 

Turn  the  rotary  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  clockwise 
to  increase  or  counterclockwise  to  decrease  the  frequency. 


Information  Provided  by: 


Setting  The  Tone,  Balance  And  Fade 

Push  the  rotary  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  and  BASS 
will  display.  Turn  the  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  to 
the  right  or  left  to  increase  or  decrease  the  bass  tones. 

Push  the  rotary  TUNE  /SCROLL  control  knob  a second 
time  and  MID  will  display.  Turn  the  TUNE /SCROLL 
control  knob  to  the  right  or  left  to  increase  or  decrease  the 
mid-range  tones. 

Push  the  rotary  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  a third 
time  and  TREBLE  will  display.  Turn  the  TUNE /SCROLL 
control  knob  to  the  right  or  left  to  increase  or  decrease  the 
treble  tones. 

Push  the  rotary  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  a fourth 
time  and  BALANCE  will  display.  Turn  the  TUNE/ 
SCROLL  control  knob  to  the  right  or  left  to  adjust  the 
sound  level  from  the  right  or  left  side  speakers. 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  295 

Push  the  rotary  TUNE  /SCROLL  control  knob  a fifth  time 
and  FADE  will  display.  Turn  the  TUNE /SCROLL  control 
knob  to  the  left  or  right  to  adjust  the  sound  level  between 
the  front  and  rear  speakers. 

Push  the  rotary  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  again  to 
exit  setting  tone,  balance,  and  fade. 

MUSIC  TYPE  Button 

Pushing  this  button  once  will  turn  on  the  Music  Type 
mode  for  five  seconds.  Pushing  the  MUSIC  TYPE  button 
or  turning  the  TUNE  /SCROLL  control  knob  within  five 
seconds  will  allow  the  program  format  type  to  be  se- 
lected. Many  radio  stations  do  not  currently  broadcast 
Music  Type  information. 


Provided  by: 


296  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


Toggle  the  MUSIC  TYPE  button  to  select  the  following 
format  types: 


Program  Type 

16-Digit  Character 
Display 

No  program  type  or  un- 
defined 

None 

Adult  Hits 

Adit  Hit 

Classical 

Classicl 

Classic  Rock 

Cls  Rock 

College 

College 

Country 

Country 

Foreign  Language 

Language 

Information 

Inform 

Jazz 

Jazz 

News 

News 

Nostalgia 

Nostalga 

Program  Type 

16-Digit  Character 
Display 

Oldies 

Oldies 

Personality 

Persnlty 

Public 

Public 

Rhythm  and  Blues 

R&B 

Religious  Music 

Rel  Muse 

Religious  Talk 

Rel  Talk 

Rock 

Rock 

Soft 

Soft 

Soft  Rock 

Soft  Rck 

Soft  Rhythm  and  Blues 

Soft  R&B 

Sports 

Sports 

Talk 

Talk 

Top  40 

Top  40 

Weather 

Weather 

UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  297 


By  pushing  the  SEEK  button  when  the  Music  Type  icon  is 
displayed,  the  radio  will  be  tuned  to  the  next  frequency 
station  with  the  same  selected  Music  Type  name.  The 
Music  Type  function  only  operates  when  in  the  FM 
mode. 

If  a preset  button  is  activated  while  in  the  Music  Type 
(Program  Type)  mode,  the  Music  Type  mode  will  be 
exited  and  the  radio  will  tune  to  the  preset  station. 

SETUP  Button 

Pushing  the  SETUP  button  allows  you  to  select  between 
the  following  items: 

• Set  Clock  — Pushing  the  SELECT  button  will  allow 
you  to  set  the  clock.  Adjust  the  hours  by  turning  the 
TUNE/SCROLL  control  knob.  After  adjusting  the 
hours,  push  the  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  to  set 
the  minutes.  The  minutes  will  begin  to  blink.  Adjust 


the  minutes  using  the  right  side  TUNE /SCROLL  con- 
trol knob.  Push  the  TUNE  /SCROLL  control  knob  to 
save  time  change. 

AM/FM  Button 

Push  the  button  to  select  either  AM  or  FM  mode. 

SET/RND  Button  — To  Set  The  Pushbutton 
Memory 

When  you  are  receiving  a station  that  you  wish  to 
commit  to  pushbutton  memory,  push  the  SET/RND 
button.  The  symbol  SET  1 will  now  show  in  the  display 
window.  Select  the  button  (1-6)  you  wish  to  lock  onto  this 
station  and  push  and  release  that  button.  If  a button  is  not 
selected  within  five  seconds  after  pushing  the  SET/RND 
button,  the  station  will  continue  to  play  but  will  not  be 
stored  into  pushbutton  memory. 


O 


l Provided  by: 

AL.SR 


298  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 

You  may  add  a second  station  to  each  pushbutton  by 
repeating  the  above  procedure  with  this  exception:  Push 
the  SET/RND  button  twice  and  SET  2 will  show  in  the 
display  window.  Each  button  can  be  set  for  SET  1 and 
SET  2 in  both  AM  and  FM.  This  allows  a total  of  12  AM 
and  12  FM  stations  to  be  stored  into  pushbutton  memory. 
The  stations  stored  in  SET  2 memory  can  be  selected  by 
pushing  the  pushbutton  twice. 

Every  time  a preset  button  is  used,  a corresponding 
button  number  will  display. 

Buttons  1-6 

These  buttons  tune  the  radio  to  the  stations  that  you 
commit  to  pushbutton  memory  (12  AM  and  12  FM 
stations). 

DISC/AUX  Button 

Pushing  the  DISC/AUX  button  will  allow  you  to  switch 
from  AM/FM  modes  to  DISC/AUX  mode. 


Operation  Instructions  — CD  MODE  For  CD  And 
MP3  Audio  Play 

NOTE: 

• The  ignition  switch  must  be  in  the  ON  or  ACC  position 
to  operate  the  radio. 

• This  radio  is  capable  of  playing  compact  discs  (CD), 
recordable  compact  discs  (CD-R),  rewritable  compact 
discs  (CD-RW),  compact  discs  with  MP3  tracks  and 
multisession  compact  discs  with  CD  and  MP3  tracks. 

Inserting  Compact  Disc(s) 

Gently  insert  one  CD  into  the  CD  player  with  the  CD 
label  facing  up.  The  CD  will  automatically  be  pulled  into 
the  CD  player  and  the  CD  icon  will  illuminate  on  the 
radio  display.  If  a CD  does  not  go  into  the  slot  more  than 
1 inch  (2.5  cm),  a disc  may  already  be  loaded  and  must  be 
ejected  before  a new  disc  can  be  loaded. 


/M 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  299 


If  you  insert  a disc  with  the  ignition  ON  and  the  radio 
ON,  the  unit  will  switch  from  radio  to  CD  mode  and 
begin  to  play  when  you  insert  the  disc.  The  display  will 
show  the  track  number,  and  index  time  in  minutes  and 
seconds.  Play  will  begin  at  the  start  of  track  1. 


CAUTION! 

• This  CD  player  will  accept  4-3/4  inch  (12  cm)  discs 
only.  The  use  of  other  sized  discs  may  damage  the 
CD  player  mechanism. 

• Do  not  use  adhesive  labels.  These  labels  can  peel 
away  and  jam  the  player  mechanism. 

• The  Uconnect  130  is  a single  CD  player.  Do  not 
attempt  to  insert  a second  CD  if  one  is  already  loaded. 

• Dual-media  disc  types  (one  side  is  a DVD,  the 
other  side  is  a CD)  should  not  be  used,  and  they  can 
cause  damage  to  the  player. 


EJECT  Button  — Ejecting  A CD 

Push  the  EJECT  button  to  eject  the  CD. 


If  you  have  ejected  a disc  and  have  not  removed  it  within 
10  seconds,  it  will  be  reloaded.  If  the  CD  is  not  removed, 
the  radio  will  reinsert  the  CD  but  will  not  play  it. 

A disc  can  be  ejected  with  the  radio  and  ignition  OFF. 

NOTE:  Ejecting  with  the  ignition  OFF  is  not  allowed  on 
convertible  or  soft-top  models  (if  equipped.) 

SEEK  Button 

Push  the  right  SEEK  button  for  the  next  selection  on  the 
CD.  Push  the  left  SEEK  button  to  return  to  the  beginning 
of  the  current  selection,  or  return  to  the  beginning  of  the 
previous  selection  if  the  CD  is  within  the  first  second  of 


Information  Provided  by: 


300  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


the  current  selection.  Pushing  and  holding  the  SEEK 
button  will  allow  faster  scrolling  through  the  tracks  in 
CD  and  MP3  modes. 

TIME  Button 

Push  this  button  to  change  the  display  from  a large  CD 
playing  time  display  to  a small  CD  playing  time  display. 

RW/FF 

Push  and  hold  FF  (Fast  Forward)  and  the  CD  player  will 
begin  to  fast  forward  until  FF  is  released  or  RW  or 
another  CD  button  is  pushed.  The  RW  (Reverse)  button 
works  in  a similar  manner. 

AM/FM  Button 

Push  the  button  to  select  either  AM  or  FM  mode. 


SET/RND  Button  (Random  Play  Button) 

Push  this  button  while  the  CD  is  playing  to  activate 
Random  Play.  This  feature  plays  the  selections  on  the 
compact  disc  in  random  order  to  provide  an  interesting 
change  of  pace. 

Push  the  right  SEEK  button  to  move  to  the  next  randomly 
selected  track. 

Push  the  SET  /RND  button  a second  time  to  stop  Random 
Play. 

Notes  On  Playing  MP3  Files 

The  radio  can  play  MP3  files;  however,  acceptable  MP3 
file  recording  media  and  formats  are  limited.  When 
writing  MP3  files,  pay  attention  to  the  following  restric- 
tions. 


Information  Provided  by: 


Supported  Media  (Disc  Types) 

The  MP3  file  recording  media  supported  by  the  radio  are 
CDDA,  CD-R,  CD-RW,  MP3,  and  CDDA+MP3. 

Supported  Medium  Formats  (File  Systems) 

The  medium  formats  supported  by  the  radio  are  ISO  9660 
Level  1 and  Level  2 and  includes  the  Joliet  extension. 
When  reading  discs  recorded  using  formats  other  than 
ISO  9660  Level  1 and  Level  2,  the  radio  may  fail  to  read 
files  properly  and  may  be  unable  to  play  the  file  nor- 
mally. UDF  and  Apple  HFS  formats  are  not  supported. 

The  radio  uses  the  following  limits  for  file  systems: 

• Maximum  number  of  folder  levels:  8 

• Maximum  number  of  files:  255 

• Maximum  number  of  folders.  (The  radio  display  of  file 
names  and  folder  names  is  limited.  For  large  numbers 
of  files  and/or  folders,  the  radio  may  be  unable  to 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  301 

display  the  file  name  and  folder  name,  and  will  assign 
a number  instead.  With  a maximum  number  of  files, 
exceeding  20  folders  will  result  in  this  display.  With 
200  files,  exceeding  50  folders  will  result  in  this  dis- 
play.) 

Maximum  number  of  characters  in  file /folder  names: 

• Level  1:  12  (including  a separator  and  a three- 
character  extension) 

• Level  2:  31  (including  a separator  and  a three- 
character  extension) 

Multi-session  disc  formats  are  supported  by  the  radio. 
Multi-session  discs  may  contain  combinations  of  normal 
CD  audio  tracks  and  computer  files  (including  MP3  files). 
Discs  created  with  an  option  such  as  "keep  disc  open  after 
writing"  are  most  likely  multi-session  discs.  The  use  of 
multi-session  for  CD  audio  or  MP3  playback  may  result 
in  longer  disc  loading  times. 


302  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


Supported  MP3  File  Formats 

The  radio  will  recognize  only  files  with  the  *.MP3  exten- 
sion as  MP3  files.  Non-MP3  files  named  with  the  *.MP3 
extension  may  cause  playback  problems.  The  radio  is 
designed  to  recognize  the  file  as  an  invalid  MP3  and  will 
not  play  the  file. 

When  using  the  MP3  encoder  to  compress  audio  data  to 
an  MP3  file,  the  bit  rate  and  sampling  frequencies  in  the 
following  table  are  supported.  In  addition,  variable  bit 
rates  (VBR)  are  also  supported.  The  majority  of  MP3  files 
use  a 44.1  kHz  sampling  rate  and  a 192,  160,  128,  96  or 
VBR  bit  rates. 


MPEG 

Specification 

Sampling 

Frequency 

(kHz) 

Bit  Rate  (kbps) 

MPEG-1  Audio 
Layer  3 

48,  44.1,  32 

320,  256,  224, 
192,  160,  128, 
112,  96,  80,  64, 
56,  48,  40,  32 

MPEG-2  Audio 
Layer  3 

24,  22.05,  16 

160,  128,  144, 
112,  96,  80,  64, 
56,  48,  40,  32, 
24,  16,  8 

ID3  Tag  information  for  artist,  song  title,  and  album  title 
are  supported  for  version  1 ID3  tags.  ID3  version  2 is  not 
supported  by  the  radios. 


Playlist  files  are  not  supported.  MP3  Pro  files  are  not 
supported. 


Information  Provided  by: 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  303 


Playback  Of  MP3  Files 

When  a medium  containing  MP3  data  is  loaded,  the 
radio  checks  all  files  on  the  medium.  If  the  medium 
contains  a lot  of  folders  or  files,  the  radio  will  take  more 
time  to  start  playing  the  MP3  files. 

Loading  times  for  playback  of  MP3  files  may  be  affected 
by  the  following: 

• Media  - CD-RW  media  may  take  longer  to  load  than 
CD-R  media 

• Medium  formats  - Multisession  discs  may  take  longer 
to  load  than  non-multisession  discs 

• Number  of  files  and  folders  - Loading  times  will 
increase  with  more  files  and  folders 

To  increase  the  speed  of  disc  loading,  it  is  recommended 
to  use  CD-R  media  and  single-session  discs.  To  create  a 
single-session  disc,  enable  the  "Disc  at  Once"  option 
before  writing  to  the  disc. 


LIST  Button  — CD  Mode  For  MP3  Play 

Pushing  the  LIST  button  will  bring  up  a list  of  all  folders 
on  the  disc.  Scrolling  up  or  down  the  list  is  done  by 
turning  the  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob.  Selecting  a 
folder  by  pushing  the  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  will 
begin  playing  the  files  contained  in  that  folder  (or  the 
next  folder  in  sequence  if  the  selection  does  not  contain 
playable  files). 

The  folder  list  will  time  out  after  five  seconds. 

INFO  Button  — CD  Mode  For  MP3  Play 

Pushing  the  INFO  button  repeatedly  will  scroll  through 
the  following  TAG  information:  Song  Title,  Artist,  File 
Name,  and  Folder  Name  (if  available). 

Push  the  INFO  button  once  more  to  return  to  "elapsed 
time"  priority  mode. 

Push  and  hold  the  INFO  button  for  three  seconds  or  more 
and  the  radio  will  display  song  titles  for  each  file. 


304  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


Push  and  hold  the  INFO  button  again  for  three  seconds 
to  return  to  "elapsed  time"  display. 

Operation  Instructions  — Auxiliary  Mode 

The  auxiliary  (AUX)  jack  is  an  audio  input  jack  which 
allows  the  user  to  plug  in  a portable  device  such  as  an 
MP3  player  and  utilize  the  vehicle's  audio  system  to 
amplify  the  source  and  play  through  the  vehicle  speak- 
ers. 

Pushing  the  AUX  button  will  change  the  mode  to  auxil- 
iary device  if  the  AUX  jack  is  connected. 

NOTE:  The  AUX  device  must  be  turned  on  and  the 
device's  volume  set  to  the  proper  level.  If  the  AUX  audio 
is  not  loud  enough,  turn  the  device's  volume  up.  If  the 
AUX  audio  sounds  distorted,  turn  the  device's  volume 
down. 


TIME  Button  (Auxiliary  Mode) 

Push  this  button  to  change  the  display  to  time  of  day.  The 
time  of  day  will  display  for  five  seconds  (when  the 
ignition  is  OFF). 

Uconnect  (Satellite  Radio)  — If  Equipped 

Satellite  radio  uses  direct  satellite-to-receiver  broadcast- 
ing technology  to  provide  clear  digital  sound,  coast  to 
coast.  The  subscription  service  provider  is  Sirius  Satellite 
Radio.  This  service  offers  over  130  channels  of  music, 
sports,  news,  entertainment,  and  programming  for  chil- 
dren, directly  from  its  satellites  and  broadcasting  studios. 

NOTE:  Sirius  service  is  not  available  in  Hawaii  and  has 
limited  coverage  in  Alaska. 


Information  Provided  by: 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  305 


System  Activation 

Sirius  Satellite  Radio  service  is  p re-activated,  and  you 
may  begin  listening  immediately  to  the  one  year  of  audio 
service  that  is  included  with  the  factory-installed  satellite 
radio  system  in  your  vehicle.  Sirius  will  supply  a wel- 
come kit  that  contains  general  information,  including 
how  to  setup  your  on-line  listening  account.  For  further 
information,  call  the  toll-free  number  888-539-7474,  or 
visit  the  Sirius  web  site  at  www.siriusxm.com,  or  at 
www.siriusxm.ca  for  Canadian  residents. 

Electronic  Serial  Number/Sirius  Identification 
Number  (ESN/SID) 

Please  have  the  following  information  available  when 
calling: 

1.  The  Electronic  Serial  Number/Sirius  Identification 
Number  (ESN/SID). 

2.  Your  Vehicle  Identification  Number. 


To  access  the  ESN/ SID,  refer  to  the  following  steps: 

ESN/SID  Access 

With  the  ignition  switch  in  the  ON /RUN  or  ACC  posi- 
tion and  the  radio  on,  push  the  SETUP  button  and  scroll 
using  the  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  until  Sirius  ID  is 
selected.  Push  the  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  and  the 
Sirius  ID  number  will  display.  The  Sirius  ID  number 
display  will  time  out  in  two  minutes.  Push  any  button  on 
the  radio  to  exit  this  screen. 

Selecting  Uconnect  (Satellite)  Mode 

Push  the  SAT  button  until  "SAT"  appears  in  the  display.  A 
CD  may  remain  in  the  radio  while  in  the  Satellite  radio 
mode. 

Satellite  Antenna 

To  ensure  optimum  reception,  do  not  place  items  on  the 
roof  around  the  rooftop  antenna  location.  Metal  objects 
placed  within  the  line  of  sight  of  the  antenna  will  cause 


306  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


decreased  performance.  Larger  luggage  items  such  as 
bikes  should  be  placed  as  far  rearward  as  possible,  within 
the  loading  design  of  the  rack.  Do  not  place  items  directly 
on  or  above  the  antenna. 

Reception  Quality 

Satellite  reception  may  be  interrupted  due  to  one  of  the 
following  reasons: 

• The  vehicle  is  parked  in  an  underground  parking 
structure  or  under  a physical  obstacle. 

• Dense  tree  coverage  may  interrupt  reception  in  the 
form  of  short  audio  mutes. 

• Driving  under  wide  bridges  or  along  tall  buildings  can 
cause  intermittent  reception. 

• Placing  objects  over  or  too  close  to  the  antenna  can 
cause  signal  blockage. 


Operating  Instructions  — Uconnect  (Satellite) 

Mode 

NOTE:  The  ignition  switch  must  be  in  the  ON /RUN  or 
ACC  position  to  operate  the  radio. 

SEEK  Buttons 

Push  and  release  the  SEEK  buttons  to  search  for  the  next 
listenable  station  in  AM/FM  mode.  Push  the  right  switch 
to  seek  up  and  the  left  switch  to  seek  down.  The  radio 
will  remain  tuned  to  the  new  station  until  you  make 
another  selection.  Holding  either  button  will  bypass 
stations  without  stopping,  until  you  release  it. 


Information  Provided  by: 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  307 


SCAN  Button 

Pushing  the  SCAN  button  causes  the  tuner  to  search  for 
the  next  channel,  pausing  for  eight  seconds  before  con- 
tinuing to  the  next.  To  stop  the  search,  push  the  SCAN 
button  a second  time. 

INFO  Button 

Pushing  the  INFO  button  will  cycle  the  display  informa- 
tion between  Artist,  Song  Title,  and  Composer  (if  avail- 
able). Also,  pushing  and  holding  the  INFO  button  for  an 
additional  three  seconds  will  make  the  radio  display  the 
Song  Title  all  of  the  time  (push  and  hold  again  to  return 
to  normal  display). 

RW/FF 

Pushing  the  RW  (Rewind)  or  FF  (Fast  Forward)  buttons 
causes  the  tuner  to  search  for  the  next  channel  in  the 
direction  of  the  arrows. 


TUNE  Control  (Rotary) 

Turn  the  rotary  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  clockwise 
to  increase  or  counterclockwise  to  decrease  the  channel. 

MUSIC  TYPE  Button 

Pushing  this  button  once  will  turn  on  the  Music  Type 
mode  for  five  seconds.  Pushing  the  MUSIC  TYPE  button 
or  turning  the  TUNE /SCROLL  control  knob  within  five 
seconds  will  allow  the  program  format  type  to  be  se- 
lected. 

Toggle  the  MUSIC  TYPE  button  again  to  select  the  music 
type. 

By  pushing  the  SEEK  button  when  the  Music  Type 
function  is  active,  the  radio  will  be  tuned  to  the  next 
channel  with  the  same  selected  Music  Type  name. 

If  a preset  button  is  activated  while  in  the  Music  Type 
(Program  Type)  mode,  the  Music  Type  mode  will  be 
exited  and  the  radio  will  tune  to  the  preset  channel. 


308  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 
SETUP  Button 

Pushing  the  SETUP  button  allows  you  to  select  the 
following  items: 

• Display  Sirius  ID  number  — Push  the  AUDIO/ 
SELECT  button  to  display  the  Sirius  ID  number.  This 
number  is  used  to  activate,  deactivate,  or  change  the 
Sirius  subscription. 

SET  Button  — To  Set  The  Pushbutton  Memory 

When  you  are  receiving  a channel  that  you  wish  to 
commit  to  pushbutton  memory,  push  the  SET  button.  The 
symbol  SET  1 will  now  show  in  the  display  window. 
Select  the  button  (1-6)  you  wish  to  lock  onto  this  channel 
and  push  and  release  that  button.  If  a button  is  not 
selected  within  five  seconds  after  pushing  the  SET  but- 
ton, the  channel  will  continue  to  play  but  will  not  be 
stored  into  pushbutton  memory. 


You  may  add  a second  channel  to  each  pushbutton  by 
repeating  the  above  procedure  with  this  exception:  Push 
the  SET  button  twice  and  SET  2 will  show  in  the  display 
window.  Each  button  can  be  set  for  SET  1 and  SET  2.  This 
allows  a total  of  12  Satellite  channels  to  be  stored  into 
pushbutton  memory.  The  channels  stored  in  SET  2 
memory  can  be  selected  by  pushing  the  pushbutton 
twice. 

Every  time  a preset  button  is  used,  a corresponding 
button  number  will  display. 

Buttons  1-6 

These  buttons  tune  the  radio  to  the  channels  that  you 
commit  to  pushbutton  memory  (12  Satellite  stations). 

Operating  Instructions  (Uconnect  Phone)  — If 
Equipped 

Refer  to  "Uconnect  Phone"  in  "Understanding  The  Fea- 
tures Of  Your  Vehicle". 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  309 


iPod/USB/MP3  CONTROL  — IF  EQUIPPED 

This  feature  allows  an  iPod  or  external  USB  device  to  be 
plugged  into  the  USB  port,  located  in  the  center  console 
or  glove  compartment. 

iPod  control  supports  Mini,  4G,  Photo,  Nano,  5G  iPod 
and  iPhone  devices.  Some  iPod  software  versions  may 
not  fully  support  the  iPod  control  features.  Please  visit 
Apple's  website  for  software  updates. 

NOTE: 

• If  the  radio  has  a USB  port,  refer  to  the  appropriate 
Uconnect  Multimedia  radio  User's  Manual  for  iPod  or 
external  USB  device  support  capability. 

• Connecting  an  iPod  or  consumer  electronic  audio 
device  to  the  AUX  port  located  in  the  radio  faceplate, 
plays  media,  but  does  not  use  the  iPod/ MP3  control 
feature  to  control  the  connected  device. 


Connecting  The  iPod  Or  External  USB  Device 

Use  the  connection  cable  to  connect  an  iPod  or  external 
USB  device  to  the  vehicle's  USB/AUX  connector  port 
which  is  located  in  the  center  console  or  glove  compart- 
ment. 


AUX 


044136844 

AUX/USB  Connector  Ports 


Information  Provided  by: 


310  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


Once  the  audio  device  is  connected  and  synchronized  to 
the  vehicle's  iPod/USB/MP3  control  system  (iPod  or 
external  USB  device  may  take  a few  minutes  to  connect), 
the  audio  device  starts  charging  and  is  ready  for  use  by 
pushing  radio  switches,  as  described  below. 

NOTE:  If  the  audio  device  battery  is  completely  dis- 
charged, it  may  not  communicate  with  the  iPod/USB/ 
MP3  control  system  until  a minimum  charge  is  attained. 
Leaving  the  audio  device  connected  to  the  iPod/USB/ 
MP3  control  system  may  charge  it  to  the  required  level. 

Using  This  Feature 

By  using  an  external  USB  device  to  connect  to  the  USB 
port: 

• The  audio  device  can  be  played  on  the  vehicle's  sound 
system,  providing  metadata  (artist,  track  title,  album, 
etc.)  information  on  the  radio  display. 


• The  audio  device  can  be  controlled  using  the  radio 
buttons  to  Play,  Browse,  and  List  the  iPod  contents. 

• The  audio  device  battery  charges  when  plugged  into 
the  USB/AUX  connector  (if  supported  by  the  specific 
audio  device). 

Controlling  The  iPod  Or  External  USB  Device 
Using  Radio  Buttons 

To  enter  the  iPod/USB/MP3  control  mode  and  access  a 
connected  audio  device,  either  push  the  "AUX"  button 
on  the  radio  faceplate  or  push  the  VR  button  and  say 
"USB"  or  "Switch  to  USB."  Once  in  the  iPod/USB/MP3 
control  mode,  audio  tracks  (if  available  from  audio 
device)  start  playing  over  the  vehicle's  audio  system. 


Provided  by: 


Play  Mode 

When  switched  to  iPod /USB/ MP3  control  mode,  the 
iPod  or  external  USB  device  automatically  starts  Play 
mode.  In  Play  mode,  the  following  buttons  on  the  radio 
faceplate  may  be  used  to  control  the  iPod  or  external  USB 
device  and  display  data: 

• Use  the  TUNE  control  knob  to  select  the  next  or 
previous  track. 

• Turning  it  clockwise  (forward)  by  one  click,  while 
playing  a track,  skips  to  the  next  track  or  push  the  VR 
button  and  say  "Next  Track." 

• Turning  it  counterclockwise  (backward)  by  one  click, 
will  jump  to  the  previous  track  in  the  list  or  push  the 
VR  button  and  say  "Previous  Track." 

• Jump  backward  in  the  current  track  by  pushing  and 
holding  the  « RW  button.  Holding  the  « RW  button 
long  enough  will  jump  to  the  beginning  of  the  current 
track. 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  311 

• Jump  forward  in  the  current  track  by  pushing  and 
holding  the  FF  » button. 

• A single  push  backward  « RW  or  forward  FF  » will 
jump  backward  or  forward  respectively,  for  five  sec- 
onds. 

• Use  the  « SEEK  and  SEEK  » buttons  to  jump  to  the 
previous  or  next  track.  Pushing  the  SEEK  » button 
during  play  mode  will  jump  to  the  next  track  in  the 
list,  or  push  the  VR  button  and  say  "Next  or  Previous 
Track." 

• While  a track  is  playing,  push  the  INFO  button  to  see 
the  associated  metadata  (artist,  track  title,  album,  etc.) 
for  that  track.  Pushing  the  INFO  button  again  jumps  to 
the  next  screen  of  data  for  that  track.  Once  all  screens 
have  been  viewed,  the  last  INFO  button  push  will  go 
back  to  the  play  mode  screen  on  the  radio. 


i Provided  by: 


312  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


• Pushing  the  REPEAT  button  will  change  the  audio 
device  mode  to  repeat  the  current  playing  track  or 
push  the  VR  button  and  say  "Repeat  ON"  or  "Repeat 
Off." 

• Push  the  SCAN  button  to  use  iPod/USB/MP3  device 
scan  mode,  which  will  play  the  first  ten  seconds  of 
each  track  in  the  current  list  and  then  forward  to  the 
next  song.  To  stop  SCAN  mode  and  start  playing  the 
desired  track,  when  it  is  playing  the  track,  push  the 
SCAN  button  again.  During  Scan  mode,  pushing  the 
« SEEK  and  SEEK  » buttons  will  select  the  previous 
and  next  tracks. 

• RND  button  (available  on  sales  code  RES  radio  only): 
Pushing  this  button  toggles  between  Shuffle  ON  and 
Shuffle  OFF  modes  for  the  iPod  or  external  USB 
device,  or  push  the  VR  button  and  say  "Shuffle  ON"  or 
"Shuffle  Off."  If  the  RND  icon  is  showing  on  the  radio 
display,  then  the  shuffle  mode  is  ON. 


List  Or  Browse  Mode 


During  Play  mode,  pushing  any  of  the  buttons  described 
below,  will  bring  up  List  mode.  List  mode  enables 
scrolling  through  the  list  of  menus  and  tracks  on  the 
audio  device. 

TUNE  control  knob:  The  TUNE  control  knob  functions  in 
a similar  manner  as  the  scroll  wheel  on  the  audio  device 
or  external  USB  device. 

• Turning  it  clockwise  (forward)  and  counterclockwise 
(backward)  scrolls  through  the  lists,  displaying  the 
track  detail  on  the  radio  display.  Once  the  track  to  be 
played  is  highlighted  on  the  radio  display,  push  the 
TUNE  control  knob  to  select  and  start  playing  the 
track.  Turning  the  TUNE  control  knob  fast  will  scroll 
through  the  list  faster.  During  fast  scroll,  a slight  delay 
in  updating  the  information  on  the  radio  display  may 
be  noticeable. 


/XL 


During  all  List  modes,  the  iPod  displays  all  lists  in 
"wrap-around"  mode.  So  if  the  track  is  at  the  bottom  of 
the  list,  just  turn  the  wheel  backward  (counterclockwise) 
to  get  to  the  track  faster. 

In  List  mode,  the  radio  PRESET  buttons  are  used  as 
shortcuts  to  the  following  lists  on  the  iPod  or  external 
USB  device: 

• Preset  1 - Playlists 

• Preset  2 - Artists 

• Preset  3 - Albums 

• Preset  4 - Genres 

• Preset  5 - Audiobooks 

• Preset  6 - Podcasts 

Pushing  a PRESET  button  will  display  the  current  list  on 
the  top  line  and  the  first  item  in  that  list  on  the  second 
line. 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  313 

To  exit  List  mode  without  selecting  a track,  push  the 
same  PRESET  button  again  to  go  back  to  Play  mode. 

LIST  button:  The  LIST  button  will  display  the  top  level 
menu  of  the  iPod  or  external  USB  device. 

• Turn  the  TUNE  control  knob  to  list  the  top-menu  item 
to  be  selected  and  push  the  TUNE  control  knob.  This 
will  display  the  next  sub-menu  list  item  on  the  audio 
device,  then  follow  the  same  steps  to  go  to  the  desired 
track  in  that  list.  Not  all  iPod  or  external  USB  device 
sub-menu  levels  are  available  on  this  system. 

MUSIC  TYPE  button:  The  MUSIC  TYPE  button  is 
another  shortcut  button  to  the  genre  listing  on  your  audio 
device. 


314  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


CAUTION! 

• Leaving  the  iPod  or  external  USB  device  (or  any 
supported  device)  anywhere  in  the  vehicle  in  ex- 
treme heat  or  cold  can  alter  the  operation  or  dam- 
age the  device.  Follow  the  device  manufacturer's 
guidelines. 

• Placing  items  on  the  iPod  or  external  USB  device, 
or  connections  to  the  iPod  or  external  USB  device 
in  the  vehicle,  can  cause  damage  to  the  device 
and/or  to  the  connectors. 


WARNING! 

Do  not  plug  in  or  remove  the  iPod  or  external  USB 
device  while  driving.  Failure  to  follow  this  warning 
could  result  in  an  accident. 


Bluetooth  Streaming  Audio  (BTSA) 

Music  can  be  streamed  from  your  cellular  phone  to  the 
Uconnect  phone  system. 

Refer  to  the  Uconnect  Radio  Supplement  for  further 
information  on  Bluetooth  connectivity. 

Controlling  BTSA  Using  Radio  Buttons 

To  enter  BTSA  mode,  push  either  "AUX"  button  on  the 
radio  or  push  the  VR  button  and  say  "Bluetooth 
Streaming  Audio." 

Play  Mode 

When  switched  to  BTSA  mode,  some  audio  devices  can 
start  playing  music  over  the  vehicle's  audio  system,  but 
some  devices  require  the  music  to  be  initiated  on  the 
device  first,  then  it  will  get  streamed  to  the  Uconnect 
phone  system.  Seven  devices  can  be  paired  to  the 
Uconnect  phone  system,  but  just  one  can  be  selected  and 
played. 

/M 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  315 


Selecting  A Different  Audio  Device 

1.  Push  the  Phone  button  to  begin. 

2.  After  the  "Ready"  prompt  and  following  the  beep,  say 
"Setup",  then  say  "Select  Audio  Devices." 

3.  Say  the  name  of  the  audio  device  or  ask  the  Uconnect 
phone  system  to  list  the  audio  devices. 

Next  Track 

Use  the  SEEK  UP  button,  or  push  the  VR  button  on 
the  radio  and  say  "Next  Track,"  to  jump  to  the  next 
music  track  on  your  cellular  phone. 

Previous  Track 

Use  the  SEEK  DOWN  button,  or  push  the  VR  ^button 
on  the  radio  and  say  "Previous  Track,"  to  jump  to  the 
previous  music  track  on  your  cellular  phone. 


Browse 

Browsing  is  not  available  on  a Bluetooth  Streaming 
Audio  (BTSA)  device.  Only  the  current  song  that  is 
playing  will  display  info. 

STEERING  WHEEL  AUDIO  CONTROLS 

The  remote  sound  system  controls  are  located  on  the  rear 
surface  of  the  steering  wheel.  Reach  behind  the  wheel  to 
access  the  switches. 


Information  Provided  by: 


316  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


045033001 

Remote  Sound  System  Controls  (Back  View  Of  Steering 
Wheel) 

The  right-hand  control  is  a rocker-type  switch  with  a 
pushbutton  in  the  center  and  controls  the  volume  and 
mode  of  the  sound  system.  Pushing  the  top  of  the  rocker 
switch  will  increase  the  volume,  and  pushing  the  bottom 
of  the  rocker  switch  will  decrease  the  volume. 


Pushing  the  center  button  will  make  the  radio  switch 
between  the  various  modes  available  (AM/FM/SAT/ 
CD/HDD/AUX/VES,  etc.). 

The  left-hand  control  is  a rocker-type  switch  with  a 
pushbutton  in  the  center.  The  function  of  the  left-hand 
control  is  different  depending  on  which  mode  you  are  in. 

The  following  describes  the  left-hand  control  operation  in 
each  mode. 

Radio  Operation 

Pushing  the  top  of  the  switch  will  "Seek"  up  for  the  next 
listenable  station  and  pushing  the  bottom  of  the  switch 
will  "Seek"  down  for  the  next  listenable  station. 

The  button  located  in  the  center  of  the  left-hand  control 
will  tune  to  the  next  preset  station  that  you  have  pro- 
grammed in  the  radio  preset  button. 


/M_  = F 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  317 


CD  Player 

Pushing  the  top  of  the  switch  once  will  go  to  the  next 
track  on  the  CD.  Pushing  the  bottom  of  the  switch  once 
will  go  to  the  beginning  of  the  current  track,  or  to  the 
beginning  of  the  previous  track  if  it  is  within  eight 
seconds  after  the  current  track  begins  to  play. 

If  you  push  the  switch  up  or  down  twice,  it  plays  the 
second  track;  three  times,  it  will  play  the  third,  etc. 

The  center  button  on  the  left  side  rocker  switch  has  no 
function  for  a single-disc  CD  player.  However,  when  a 
multiple-disc  CD  player  is  equipped  on  the  vehicle,  the 
center  button  will  select  the  next  available  CD  in  the 
player. 


CD/DVD  DISC  MAINTENANCE 

To  keep  a CD /DVD  in  good  condition,  take  the  following 

precautions: 

1.  Handle  the  disc  by  its  edge;  avoid  touching  the 
surface. 

2.  If  the  disc  is  stained,  clean  the  surface  with  a soft  cloth, 
wiping  from  center  to  edge. 

3.  Do  not  apply  paper  or  tape  to  the  disc;  avoid  scratch- 
ing the  disc. 

4.  Do  not  use  solvents  such  as  benzene,  thinner,  cleaners, 
or  anti-static  sprays. 

5.  Store  the  disc  in  its  case  after  playing. 

6.  Do  not  expose  the  disc  to  direct  sunlight. 

7.  Do  not  store  the  disc  where  temperatures  may  become 
too  high. 


318  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


NOTE:  If  you  experience  difficulty  in  playing  a particular 
disc,  it  may  be  damaged  (e.g.,  scratched,  reflective  coat- 
ing removed,  a hair,  moisture  or  dew  on  the  disc) 
oversized,  or  have  protection  encoding.  Try  a known 
good  disc  before  considering  disc  player  service. 

RADIO  OPERATION  AND  MOBILE  DEVICES 

Under  certain  conditions,  the  mobile  device  being  on  in 
your  vehicle  can  cause  erratic  or  noisy  performance  from 
your  radio.  This  condition  may  be  lessened  or  eliminated 
by  relocating  the  mobile  device  antenna.  This  condition  is 
not  harmful  to  the  radio.  If  your  radio  performance  does 
not  satisfactorily  "clear"  by  the  repositioning  of  the 
antenna,  it  is  recommended  that  the  radio  volume  be 
turned  down  or  off  during  mobile  device  operation  when 
not  using  Uconnect  (if  equipped). 


CLIMATE  CONTROLS 


The  air  conditioning  and  heating  system  is  designed  to 
make  you  comfortable  in  all  types  of  weather. 

Manual  Heating  And  Air  Conditioning 


/M 


Manual  Temperature  Controls 


045607535 


The  Manual  Temperature  Controls  consist  of  a series  of 
outer  rotary  dials  and  inner  push  knobs. 

Blower  Control 


045607539 


Rotate  this  control  to  regulate  the 
amount  of  air  forced  through  the  ven- 
tilation system  in  any  mode.  The 
blower  speed  increases  as  you  move 
the  control  to  the  right  from  the  "O" 
(OFF)  position.  There  are  seven  blower 
speeds. 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  319 


Temperature  Control 


045607540 


Rotate  this  control  to  regulate  the  tem- 
perature of  the  air  inside  the  passenger 
compartment.  Rotating  the  dial  left 
into  the  blue  area  of  the  scale  indicates 
cooler  temperatures,  while  rotating 
right  into  the  red  area  indicates 
warmer  temperatures. 


NOTE:  If  your  air  conditioning  performance  seems  lower 
than  expected,  check  the  front  of  the  A/C  condenser 
located  in  front  of  the  radiator  for  an  accumulation  of  dirt 
or  insects.  Clean  with  a gentle  water  spray  from  behind 
the  radiator  and  through  the  condenser.  Fabric  front 
fascia  protectors  may  reduce  airflow  to  the  condenser, 
reducing  air  conditioning  performance. 


/\l 


320  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 
Air  Conditioning  Control 


045607557 


Push  this  button  to  engage  the  Air 
Conditioning.  A light  will  illuminate 
when  the  Air  Conditioning  system  is 
engaged.  Rotating  the  dial  left  into  the 
blue  area  of  the  scale  indicates  cooler 
temperatures,  while  rotating  right  into 
the  red  area  indicates  warmer 


temperatures. 


NOTE:  The  air  conditioning  compressor  will  not  engage 
until  the  engine  has  been  running  for  about  10  seconds. 

• MAXAIC 


For  maximum  cooling  use  the  A/C  and  recirculation 
buttons  at  the  same  time. 


• ECONOMY  MODE 


If  economy  mode  is  desired,  push  the  A/C  button  to  turn 
OFF  the  indicator  light  and  the  A/ C compressor.  Then, 
select  Panel,  Bi-Level  or  Floor  mode  and  move  the 
temperature  control  to  the  desired  temperature. 

Mode  Control  (Air  Direction) 


Rotate  this  control  to  choose  from  sev- 
eral patterns  of  air  distribution.  You 
can  select  either  a primary  mode  as 
identified  by  the  symbols  on  the  con- 
trol, or  a blend  of  two  of  these  modes. 
045607541  The  closer  the  setting  is  to  a particular 
symbol,  the  more  air  distribution  you 
receive  from  that  mode. 


/M. 


• Panel 

-*  • 

Air  is  directed  through  the  outlets  in  the  instru- 
ment panel.  These  outlets  can  be  adjusted  to  direct 
airflow. 

NOTE:  The  center  instrument  panel  outlets  can  be  aimed 
so  that  they  are  directed  toward  the  rear  seat  passengers 
for  maximum  airflow  to  the  rear. 

• Bi-Level 

-4  # 

Air  is  directed  through  the  panel  and  floor  outlets. 


NOTE:  For  all  settings,  except  full  cold  or  full  hot,  there 
is  a difference  in  temperature  between  the  upper  and 
lower  outlets.  The  warmer  air  flows  to  the  floor  outlets. 
This  feature  gives  improved  comfort  during  sunny  but 
cool  conditions. 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  321 


• Floor 

Air  is  directed  through  the  floor  outlets  with  a 
small  amount  flowing  through  the  defrost  and 
side  window  demist  outlets. 


• Mix 

Air  is  directed  through  the  floor,  defrost,  and  side 
~ window  demist  outlets.  This  setting  works  best  in 
cold  or  snowy  conditions  that  require  extra  heat  to  the 
windshield.  This  setting  is  good  for  maintaining  comfort 
while  reducing  moisture  on  the  windshield. 


• Defrost 

Air  is  directed  through  the  windshield  and  side 
window  demist  outlets.  Use  this  mode  with  maxi- 
mum blower  and  temperature  settings  for  best  wind- 
shield and  side  window  defrosting. 


/M 


322  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 

NOTE: 

• The  air  conditioning  compressor  operates  in  Mix, 
Defrost,  or  a blend  of  these  modes,  even  if  the  Air 
Conditioning  (A/C)  button  is  not  pushed.  This  dehu- 
midifies  the  air  to  help  dry  the  windshield.  To  improve 
fuel  economy,  use  these  modes  only  when  necessary. 

• For  information  on  operating  the  Rear  Defrost,  refer  to 
"Rear  Window  Features"  in  "Understanding  The  Fea- 
tures Of  Your  Vehicle". 

• Recirculation  Control 

Pushing  the  Recirculation  Control  button  will 
put  the  system  in  recirculation  mode.  This  can 
be  used  when  outside  conditions  such  as 
smoke,  odors,  dust,  or  high  humidity  are  pres- 
ent. Activating  recirculation  will  cause  the  LED  in  the 
control  button  to  illuminate. 


NOTE: 


• Continuous  use  of  the  Recirculation  mode  may  make 
the  inside  air  stuffy  and  window  fogging  may  occur. 
Extended  use  of  this  mode  is  not  recommended. 

• The  use  of  the  Recirculation  mode  in  cold  or  damp 
weather  will  cause  windows  to  fog  on  the  inside, 
because  of  moisture  buildup  inside  the  vehicle.  Select 
the  outside  air  position  for  maximum  defogging. 

• The  A/ C will  engage  automatically  to  prevent  fogging 
when  the  recirculation  button  is  pushed  and  the  mode 
control  is  set  to  panel  or  panel  / floor. 

• The  A/ C can  be  deselected  manually  without  disturb- 
ing the  mode  control  selection. 

• When  the  ignition  switch  is  turned  to  the  LOCK 
position,  the  recirculation  feature  will  be  cancelled. 


/\i 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  323 


Automatic  Temperature  Control  (ATC)  — If 
Equipped 

The  Automatic  Temperature  Control  system  automati- 
cally maintains  the  climate  in  the  cabin  of  the  vehicle  at 
the  comfort  levels  desired  by  the  driver  and  passenger. 


Automatic  Operation 

Operation  of  the  system  is  quite  simple. 

1.  Turn  the  Mode  Control  knob  (right  knob)  and  the 
Blower  Control  knob  (left  knob)  to  AUTO. 

NOTE:  The  AUTO  position  performs  best  for  front  seat 
occupants  only. 

2.  Dial  in  the  temperature  you  would 
like  the  system  to  maintain  by  ro- 
tating the  Temperature  Control 
knob  (center  knob).  Once  the  com- 
fort level  is  selected,  the  system  will 
maintain  that  level  automatically 
using  the  heating  system.  Should 
the  desired  comfort  level  require  air 
conditioning,  the  system  will  auto- 
matically make  the  adjustment. 


Automatic  Temperature  Controls 


© 


f'k  i=D  = / M_  = i=? 


324  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 

You  will  experience  the  greatest  efficiency  by  simply 
allowing  the  system  to  function  automatically.  Selecting 
the  "O"  (OFF)  position  on  the  blower  control  stops  the 
system  completely  and  closes  the  outside  air  intake. 

The  recommended  setting  for  maximum  comfort  for  the 
average  person  is  7 2°F  (22°C);  however,  this  may  vary. 

NOTE: 

• The  temperature  setting  can  be  adjusted  at  anytime 
without  affecting  automatic  operation. 

• Pushing  the  Air  Conditioning  Control  button  while  in 
AUTO  mode  will  cause  the  LED  in  the  control  button 
to  flash  three  times  and  then  turn  off.  This  indicates 
that  the  system  is  in  AUTO  mode  and  requesting  the 
air  conditioning  is  not  necessary. 


• If  your  air  conditioning  performance  seems  lower  than 
expected,  check  the  front  of  the  A/C  condenser  located 
in  front  of  the  radiator  for  an  accumulation  of  dirt  or 
insects.  Clean  with  a gentle  water  spray  from  behind 
the  radiator  and  through  the  condenser.  Fabric  front 
fascia  protectors  may  reduce  airflow  to  the  condenser, 
reducing  air  conditioning  performance. 

Blower  Control 


045607536 


For  full  automatic  operation  or  for 
automatic  blower  operation,  turn  the 
blower  knob  to  the  AUTO  position.  In 
manual  mode  there  are  seven  blower 
speeds  that  can  be  individual  selected. 
In  off  position  the  blower  will  shut  off. 


/XL 


I — < 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  325 


Manual  Operation  Override 

This  system  offers  a full  complement  of  manual  override 
features,  which  consist  of  Blower  Preferred  Automatic, 
Mode  Preferred  Automatic,  or  Blower  and  Mode  Pre- 
ferred Automatic.  This  means  the  operator  can  override 
the  blower,  the  mode,  or  both.  There  is  a manual  blower 
range  for  times  when  the  AUTO  setting  is  not  desired. 
The  blower  can  be  set  to  any  fixed  blower  speed  by 
rotating  the  Blower  Control  knob  (on  the  left). 

NOTE:  Please  read  the  Automatic  Temperature  Control 
Operation  Chart  that  follows  for  details. 


Information  Provided  by: 

= = 


326  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


Automatic  Temperature 

Control  Operation 

The  system  will... 

Operation 

How 

Blower  Control 

Mode  Control 

Air  Temperature 
Control 

Air  Temperature 
Control 

A/C  Operation 

Full  Automatic  Operation 

Set  blower  knob  to 
Auto.  Set  mode  knob 
to  Auto.  Set  temperature 
knob  for  comfort. 

Automatic 

Automatic 

Automatic 

Automatic  but 
can  be  overridden 
at  any  time 

Automatic 

Blower  Preferred  Automatic 

Set  blower  knob  to  any 
desired  airflow  level  other 
than  Auto.  Set  mode 
knob  to  Auto.  Set  temperature 
knob  for  comfort. 

User  selectable 
to  any  speed. 

Automatic 

Automatic 

Automatic  but 
can  be  overridden 
at  any  time 

Automatic 

Mode  Preferred  Automatic 

Set  mode  knob  to  any  desired 
air  delivery  point  other  than 
Auto.  Set  blower  knob  to 
Auto.  Set  temperature 
knob  for  comfort. 

Automatic 

User  selectable 
to  any  air 
delivery  point. 

Automatic 

User  selectable 
outside  or 
recirculated. 
Not  allowed  in 
Defrost  Mode 

User  selectable 
A/C  on  or  off. 

8lower  and  Mode 
Preferred  Automatic 

Set  blower  knob  to  any 
desired  airflow  level  other 
than  Auto.  Set  mode 
knob  to  any  desired  air 
delivery  point  other  than 
Auto.  Set  temperature  knob 
for  comfort. 

User  selectable 
to  any  speed. 

User  selectable 
to  any  air 
delivery  point. 

Automatic 

User  selectable 
outside  or 
recirculated. 
Not  allowed  in 
Defrost  Mode 

User  selectable 
A/C  on  or  off. 

0456051810 


Information  Provided  by: 


The  operator  can  override  the  AUTO  mode  setting  to 
change  airflow  distribution  by  rotating  the  Mode  Control 
knob  (on  the  right)  to  one  of  the  following  positions. 

• Panel 

■4  • 

^ Air  is  directed  through  the  outlets  in  the  instru- 
ment panel.  These  outlets  can  be  adjusted  to  direct 
airflow. 

NOTE:  The  center  instrument  panel  outlets  can  be  aimed 
so  that  they  are  directed  toward  the  rear  seat  passengers 
for  maximum  airflow  to  the  rear. 

• Bi-Level 

■4  # 

Air  is  directed  through  the  panel  and  floor 
outlets. 

NOTE:  For  all  settings,  except  full  cold  or  full  hot,  there 
is  a difference  in  temperature  between  the  upper  and 
lower  outlets.  The  warmer  air  flows  to  the  floor  outlets. 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  327 

This  feature  gives  improved  comfort  during  sunny  but 
cool  conditions. 

• Floor 

Air  is  directed  through  the  floor  outlets  with  a 
small  amount  flowing  through  the  defrost  and 
side  window  demist  outlets. 


• Mix 

Air  is  directed  through  the  floor,  defrost,  and  side 
window  demist  outlets.  This  setting  works  best  in 
cold  or  snowy  conditions  that  require  extra  heat  to  the 
windshield.  This  setting  is  good  for  maintaining  comfort 
while  reducing  moisture  on  the  windshield. 


• Defrost 

Air  is  directed  through  the  windshield  and  side 
window  demist  outlets.  Use  this  mode  with  maxi- 
mum blower  and  temperature  settings  for  best  wind- 
shield and  side  window  defrosting. 


/XL 


328  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 

• Air  Conditioner  Control 

Push  this  button  to  turn  on  the  air 
conditioning  during  manual  operation 
only.  When  the  air  conditioning  is 
turned  on,  cool  dehumidified  air  will 
flow  through  the  outlets  selected  with 
045638696  the  Mode  control  dial.  Push  this  but- 
ton a second  time  to  turn  OFF  the  air 
conditioning.  An  LED  in  the  button  illuminates  when 
manual  compressor  operation  is  selected. 

• Recirculation  Control 

The  system  will  automatically  control  recircu- 
lation.  However,  pushing  the  Recirculation 
Control  button  will  put  the  system  in  recircu- 
lation mode.  This  can  be  used  when  outside 
conditions  such  as  smoke,  odors,  dust,  or  high  humidity 
are  present.  Activating  recirculation  will  cause  the  LED  in 
the  control  button  to  illuminate. 


NOTE: 

• When  the  ignition  switch  is  turned  to  the  LOCK 
position,  the  recirculation  feature  will  be  cancelled. 

• In  cold  weather,  use  of  the  Recirculation  mode  may 
lead  to  excessive  window  fogging.  The  Recirculation 
mode  is  not  allowed  in  the  defrost  mode  in  order  to 
improve  window  clearing.  Recirculation  will  be  dis- 
abled automatically  if  these  modes  are  selected. 

• Extended  use  of  recirculation  may  cause  the  windows 
to  fog.  If  the  interior  of  the  windows  begins  to  fog, 
push  the  Recirculation  button  to  return  to  outside  air. 
Some  temp /humidity  conditions  will  cause  captured 
interior  air  to  condense  on  windows  and  hamper 
visibility.  For  this  reason,  the  system  will  not  allow 
Recirculation  to  be  selected  while  in  defrost  mode. 
Attempting  to  use  the  recirculation  while  in  these 
modes  will  cause  the  LED  in  the  control  button  to  blink 
and  then  turn  off. 


• Most  of  the  time,  when  in  Automatic  Operation,  you 
can  temporarily  put  the  system  into  Recirculation 
Mode  by  pushing  the  Recirculation  button.  However, 
under  certain  conditions,  while  in  Automatic  Mode, 
the  system  is  blowing  air  out  the  defrost  vents.  When 
these  conditions  are  present,  and  the  Recirculation 
button  is  pushed,  the  indicator  will  flash  and  then  turn 
off.  This  tells  you  that  you  are  unable  to  go  into 
Recirculation  Mode  at  this  time.  If  you  would  like  the 
system  to  go  into  Recirculation  Mode,  you  must  first 
move  the  Mode  knob  to  Panel,  Bi-Level,  Mix,  or  Floor 
and  then  push  the  Recirculation  button.  This  feature 
reduces  the  possibility  of  window  fogging. 

Operating  Tips 

NOTE:  Refer  to  the  chart  at  the  end  of  this  section  for 
suggested  control  settings  for  various  weather  condi- 
tions. 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  329 
Summer  Operation 

The  engine  cooling  system  must  be  protected  with  a 
high-quality  antifreeze  coolant  to  provide  proper  corro- 
sion protection  and  to  protect  against  engine  overheating. 
A solution  of  50%  OAT  (Organic  Additive  Technology) 
coolant  that  meets  the  requirements  of  FCA  Material 
Standard  MS. 90032  and  50%  water  is  recommended. 
Refer  to  "Maintenance  Procedures"  in  "Maintaining  Your 
Vehicle"  for  proper  coolant  selection. 

Winter  Operation 

Use  of  the  air  Recirculation  Mode  during  winter  months  is 
not  recommended  because  it  may  cause  window  fogging. 

Vacation  Storage 

Anytime  you  store  your  vehicle,  or  keep  it  out  of  service 
(i.e.,  vacation)  for  two  weeks  or  more,  run  the  air 
conditioning  system  at  idle  for  about  five  minutes  in  the 
fresh  air  and  high  blower  settings.  This  will  ensure 
adequate  system  lubrication  to  minimize  the  possibility 
of  compressor  damage  when  the  system  is  started  again. 


330  UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL 


Window  Fogging 

Interior  fogging  on  the  windshield  can  be  quickly  re- 
moved by  turning  the  mode  selector  to  Defrost.  The 
Defrost/Floor  mode  can  be  used  to  maintain  a clear 
windshield  and  provide  sufficient  heating.  If  side  win- 
dow fogging  becomes  a problem,  increase  blower  speed. 
Vehicle  windows  tend  to  fog  on  the  inside  in  mild  but 
rainy  or  humid  weather. 

NOTE:  Recirculate  without  A/C  should  not  be  used  for 
long  periods  as  fogging  may  occur. 

Side  Window  Demisters 

A side  window  demister  outlet  is  located  at  each  end  of 
the  instrument  panel.  These  non-adjustable  outlets  direct 
air  toward  the  side  windows  when  the  system  is  in  the 
FLOOR,  MIX,  or  DEFROST  mode.  The  air  is  directed  at 
the  area  of  the  windows  through  which  you  view  the 
outside  mirrors. 


Outside  Air  Intake 

Make  sure  the  air  intake,  located  directly  in  front  of  the 
windshield,  is  free  of  obstructions  such  as  leaves.  Leaves 
collected  in  the  air  intake  may  reduce  airflow,  and  if  they 
enter  the  plenum,  they  could  plug  the  water  drains.  In 
winter  months,  make  sure  the  air  intake  is  clear  of  ice, 
slush,  and  snow. 

A/C  Air  Filter  — If  Equipped 

The  A/C  Filter  prevents  most  dust  and  pollen  from 
entering  the  cabin.  The  filter  acts  on  air  coming  from 
outside  the  vehicle  and  recirculated  air  within  the  pas- 
senger compartment.  Refer  to  "Maintenance  Procedures" 
in  "Maintaining  Your  Vehicle"  for  A/C  Air  Filter  service 
information  or  see  your  authorized  dealer  for  service. 
Refer  to  "Maintenance  Schedules"  in  "Maintaining  Your 
Vehicle"  for  filter  service  intervals. 


Provided  by: 


UNDERSTANDING  YOUR  INSTRUMENT  PANEL  331 


Control  Setting  Suggestions  For  Various  Weather  Conditions 


WEATHER 

CONTROL  SETTINGS 

HOT  WEATHER 
AND  VEHICLE  INTERIOR  IS 
VERY  HOT 

Open  the  windows,  start  the  vehicle,  press  the  |c%3l  button  to  turn  recirculate  off. 
Set  the  Fan  control  to  the  high  position  (full  clockwise) . Press  the  A/C  button. 

Set  the  Mode  control  at  or  between  [ | and  \ . Set  the  temperature  control 

to  full  cool.  After  the  hot  air  is  pushed  from  the  vehicle  press  the  IcSjI  button  to 
turn  recirculate  on  and  roll  up  the  windows.  Once  you  are  comfortable,  press  the 
IcS^I  button  to  turn  recirculate  off  and  adjust  the  temperature  control  for  comfort. 

WARM  WEATHER 

# C^P 

Press  the  |cS)a[  button  to  turn  recirculate  off. 

If  it’s  sunny,  set  the  Mode  control  at  or  near  -yi  \ and  turn  the  air  conditioning  on.  If 
it's  cloudy  or  dark,  set  the  Mode  control  at  or  near  -V  | . 

COOL  OR  COLD 
HUMID  CONDITIONS 

A6 

6644  6 ^ 

V C J3 

Press  the  IcSal  button  to  turn  recirculate  off. 

If  it's  sunny,  set  the  Mode  control  at  or  between  !•£)  1 and  l-yi  1 then  turn  the  air 
conditioning  on.  If  it's  cloudy  or  dark,  set  the  Mode  control  at  or  near  [^?~]  and  turn 
the  air  conditioning  on.  If  the  windows  begin  to  fog,  set  Mode  control  at  or  between 

□Sand  30. 

COLD  DRY 
CONDITIONS 

C^P  I 

Set  the  Mode  control  at  or  near  \^J  1.  If  it  is  sunny,  you  may  want  more  upper  air.  In 
this  case,  set  the  Mode  control  at  or  between  1-y}  | and  | |.  In  very  cold  weather, 

if  you  need  extra  heat  at  the  windshield,  set  the  Mode  control  at  or  near  the  1 |. 

ALER 


045606725 


Information  Provided  by: 

CZ)  = /M_  = ?^ 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


CONTENTS 


■ STARTING  PROCEDURES 337 

□ Manual  Transmission  — If  Equipped  337 

□ Automatic  Transmission  — If  Equipped  338 

□ Normal  Starting 338 

□ Extreme  Cold  Weather 

(Below  -22°F  Or  -30°C)  339 

□ If  Engine  Fails  To  Start  339 

□ After  Starting 339 

■ ENGINE  BLOCK  HEATER  — IF  EQUIPPED  . . .340 


■ MANUAL  TRANSMISSION  — IF  EQUIPPED  . .340 


□ Five-Speed  Manual  Transmission 340 

□ Recommended  Shift  Speeds 342 

□ Downshifting 343 

■ AUTOMATIC  TRANSMISSION  — 

IF  EQUIPPED 343 

□ Key  Ignition  Park  Interlock 345 

□ Brake /Transmission  Shift  Interlock  System  . . .345 

□ Six-Speed  Automatic  Transmission  — 

If  Equipped 345 

□ Continuously  Variable  Automatic  Transmission 

(CVT)  — If  Equipped 352 


334  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


■ AUTOSTICK 357 

□ AutoStick 

(Six-Speed  Automatic  Transmission) 357 

□ AutoStick  (CVT)  — If  Equipped 359 

■ FOUR-WHEEL  DRIVE  OPERATION  — IF 

EQUIPPED 361 

■ ON-ROAD  DRIVING  TIPS 361 

■ OFF-ROAD  DRIVING  TIPS  362 

□ When  To  Use  Low  (L  Off-Road)  With  The  4WD 

Lock  Lever  Engaged  — If  Equipped 363 

□ Driving  In  Snow,  Mud  And  Sand 363 

□ Hill  Climbing 365 

□ Driving  Through  Water 368 

□ After  Driving  Off-Road 370 


POWER  STEERING 371 

□ Power  Steering  Fluid  Check 372 

PARKING  BRAKE 373 

BRAKE  SYSTEM 375 

ELECTRONIC  BRAKE  CONTROL  SYSTEM  . . . .376 

□ Electronic  Brake  Force  Distribution  (EBD)  . . . .376 

□ Brake  System  Warning  Light 377 

□ Anti-Lock  Brake  System  (ABS) 377 

□ Anti-Lock  Brake  Warning  Light 379 

□ Brake  Assist  System  (BAS) 379 

□ Hill  Start  Assist  (HSA)  380 

□ Traction  Control  System  (TCS) 383 

□ Electronic  Stability  Control  (ESC) 383 


□ Electronic  Roll  Mitigation  (ERM)  388 

□ Hill  Descent  Control  (HDC)  — If  Equipped  . . .389 

■ TIRE  SAFETY  INFORMATION 391 

□ Tire  Markings 391 

□ Tire  Identification  Number  (TIN) 394 

□ Tire  Terminology  And  Definitions 396 

□ Tire  Loading  And  Tire  Pressure  397 

■ TIRES  — GENERAL  INFORMATION  402 

□ Tire  Pressure  402 

□ Tire  Inflation  Pressures  403 

□ Tire  Pressures  For  High  Speed  Operation  . . . .405 

□ Radial  Ply  Tires  405 

□ Tire  Types 406 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  335 


□ Run  Flat  Tires  — If  Equipped 408 

□ Spare  Tires  — If  Equipped 408 

□ Tire  Spinning 411 

□ Tread  Wear  Indicators 411 

□ Life  Of  Tire  412 

□ Replacement  Tires 413 

TIRE  CHAINS  (TRACTION  DEVICES)  414 

TIRE  ROTATION  RECOMMENDATIONS  415 

TIRE  PRESSURE  MONITORING  SYSTEM 
(TPMS) 416 

□ Base  System 419 

n Premium  System  — If  Equipped 421 

□ General  Information 


.425 


336  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 

■ FUEL  REQUIREMENTS 426  I 

□ 2.0L  And  2.4L  Engine 426 

n Reformulated  Gasoline  426  I 

□ Gasoline  /Oxygenate  Blends 427 

□ E-85  Usage  In  Non-Flex  Fuel  Vehicles 427 

□ MMT  In  Gasoline 428 

□ Materials  Added  To  Fuel 428 

n Fuel  System  Cautions 429 

□ Carbon  Monoxide  Warnings  430 

■ ADDING  FUEL 430 

□ Fuel  Filler  Cap  (Gas  Cap)  430  ^ 

□ Loose  Fuel  Filler  Cap  Message 432 


VEHICLE  LOADING 433 

□ Vehicle  Certification  Label 433 

TRAILER  TOWING 435 

□ Common  Towing  Definitions 435 

□ Trailer  Hitch  Classification 438 

□ Trailer  Towing  Weights 

(Maximum  Trailer  Weight  Ratings) 439 

□ Trailer  And  Tongue  Weight  440 

□ Towing  Requirements 441 

□ Towing  Tips 446 

RECREATIONAL  TOWING  (BEHIND 
MOTORHOME,  ETC.)  448 

□ Towing  This  Vehicle  Behind  Another  Vehicle  . .448 


ed  by: 


STARTING  PROCEDURES 


Before  starting  your  vehicle,  adjust  your  seat,  adjust  both 
inside  and  outside  mirrors,  and  fasten  your  seat  belts. 


WARNING! 

• Before  exiting  a vehicle,  always  shift  the  transmis- 
sion into  PARK,  apply  the  parking  brake  and 
remove  the  Key  Fob  from  the  ignition.  When 
leaving  the  vehicle,  always  lock  your  vehicle. 

• Never  leave  children  alone  in  a vehicle,  or  with 
access  to  an  unlocked  vehicle. 

• Allowing  children  to  be  in  a vehicle  unattended  is 
dangerous  for  a number  of  reasons.  A child  or 
others  could  be  seriously  or  fatally  injured.  Chil- 
dren should  be  warned  not  to  touch  the  parking 
brake,  brake  pedal  or  the  gear  selector. 


(Continued) 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  337 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Do  not  leave  the  Key  Fob  in  or  near  the  vehicle,  or 
in  a location  accessible  to  children.  A child  could 
operate  power  windows,  other  controls,  or  move 
the  vehicle. 


Manual  Transmission  — If  Equipped 

Before  starting  the  engine  fully  apply  the  parking  brake, 
press  the  clutch  pedal  to  the  floor,  and  place  the  shift 
lever  in  NEUTRAL. 


NOTE: 

• The  engine  will  not  start  unless  the  clutch  pedal  is 
pressed  to  the  floor. 

• If  the  key  will  not  turn  and  the  steering  wheel  is 
locked,  rotate  the  wheel  in  either  direction  to  relieve 
pressure  on  the  locking  mechanism  and  then  turn  the 
key. 


338  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 

Automatic  Transmission  — If  Equipped 

The  shift  lever  must  be  in  the  PARK  or  NEUTRAL 
position  before  you  can  start  the  engine.  Press  the  brake 
pedal  before  shifting  to  any  driving  gear. 

NOTE:  You  must  press  the  brake  pedal  before  shifting 
out  of  PARK. 

Tip  Start 

Do  not  press  the  accelerator.  Turn  the  ignition  switch  to 
the  START  position  and  release  it  as  soon  as  the  starter 
engages.  The  starter  motor  will  continue  to  run,  and  it 
will  disengage  automatically  when  the  engine  is  running. 
If  the  engine  fails  to  start,  the  starter  will  disengage 
automatically  in  10  seconds.  If  this  occurs,  turn  the 
ignition  switch  to  the  LOCK  position,  wait  10  to  15 
seconds,  then  repeat  the  "Normal  Starting"  procedure. 


Normal  Starting 

Normal  starting  of  either  a cold  or  a warm  engine  does 
not  require  pumping  or  pressing  the  accelerator  pedal. 
Simply  turn  the  ignition  switch  to  the  START  position 
and  release  when  the  engine  starts.  If  the  engine  fails  to 
start  within  15  seconds,  turn  the  ignition  switch  to  the 
OFF  position,  wait  10  to  15  seconds,  then  repeat  the 
"Normal  Starting"  procedure. 


WARNING! 

Do  not  attempt  to  push  or  tow  your  vehicle  to  get  it 
started.  Vehicles  equipped  with  an  automatic  trans- 
mission cannot  be  started  this  way.  Unburned  fuel 
could  enter  the  catalytic  converter  and  once  the 
engine  has  started,  ignite  and  damage  the  converter 
and  vehicle.  If  the  vehicle  has  a discharged  battery, 
booster  cables  may  be  used  to  obtain  a start  from 


i Provided  by: 

/M_  = F=? 


(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

another  vehicle.  This  type  of  start  can  be  dangerous  if 
done  improperly,  so  follow  the  procedure  carefully. 
Refer  to  "Jump-Starting"  in  "What  To  Do  In  Emer- 
gencies" for  further  information. 

Extreme  Cold  Weather  (Below  -22 °F  Or  -30 °C) 

To  ensure  reliable  starting  at  these  temperatures,  use  of 
an  externally  powered  electric  engine  block  heater  (avail- 
able from  your  authorized  dealer)  is  recommended. 

If  Engine  Fails  To  Start 

If  the  engine  fails  to  start  after  you  have  followed  the 
"Normal  Starting"  and  "Extreme  Cold  Weather"  proce- 
dures, it  may  be  flooded.  Press  the  accelerator  pedal  all 
the  way  to  the  floor  and  hold  it  there.  Crank  the  engine 
for  no  more  than  15  seconds.  This  should  clear  any  excess 
fuel  in  case  the  engine  is  flooded.  Leave  the  ignition  key 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  339 


in  the  ON  position,  release  the  accelerator  pedal  and 
repeat  the  "Normal  Starting"  procedure. 


WARNING! 

Never  pour  fuel  or  other  flammable  liquid  into  the 
throttle  body  air  inlet  opening  in  an  attempt  to  start 
the  vehicle.  This  could  result  in  flash  fire  causing 
serious  personal  injury. 


CAUTION! 

To  prevent  damage  to  the  starter,  do  not  crank  the 
engine  for  more  than  15  seconds  at  a time.  Wait  10  to 
15  seconds  before  trying  again. 


After  Starting 

The  idle  speed  is  controlled  automatically  and  it  will 
decrease  as  the  engine  warms  up. 


340  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 

ENGINE  BLOCK  HEATER  — IF  EQUIPPED 


MANUAL  TRANSMISSION  — IF  EQUIPPED 


The  engine  block  heater  warms  the  engine,  and  permits 
quicker  starts  in  cold  weather.  Connect  the  cord  to  a 
standard  110-115  Volt  AC  electrical  outlet  with  a 
grounded,  three-wire  extension  cord. 

The  engine  block  heater  must  be  plugged  in  at  least  one 
hour  to  have  an  adequate  warming  effect  on  the  engine. 


WARNING! 

Remember  to  disconnect  the  engine  block  heater 
cord  before  driving.  Damage  to  the  110-115  Volt 
electrical  cord  could  cause  electrocution. 


Five-Speed  Manual  Transmission 


WARNING! 

You  or  others  could  be  injured  if  you  leave  the 
vehicle  unattended  without  having  the  parking 
brake  fully  applied.  The  parking  brake  should  al- 
ways be  applied  when  the  driver  is  not  in  the  vehicle, 
especially  on  an  incline. 

Fully  press  the  clutch  pedal  before  you  shift  gears.  As  you 
release  the  clutch  pedal,  lightly  press  the  accelerator 
pedal. 


80f7bc4b 


Shift  Pattern 

Use  each  gear  in  numerical  order,  do  not  skip  a gear.  Be 
sure  the  transmission  is  in  first  gear,  (not  third),  when 
starting  from  a standing  position.  Damage  to  the  clutch 
can  result  from  starting  in  a gear  higher  than  first  gear. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  341 


CAUTION! 

• Launching  in  any  gear  except  1st  gear  will  result  in 
excessive  slipping  of  the  clutch  and  potentially 
lugging  or  stalling  the  engine. 

• Use  each  gear  in  numerical  order,  do  not  skip  a 
gear.  Be  sure  the  transmission  is  in  first  gear,  (not 
third),  when  starting  from  a standing  position. 
Damage  to  the  clutch  can  result  from  starting  in  a 
gear  higher  than  first  gear. 

For  most  city  driving,  you  will  find  it  easier  to  use  only 
the  lower  gears.  For  steady  highway  driving  with  light 
accelerations,  fifth  gear  is  recommended. 

Never  drive  with  your  foot  resting  on  the  clutch  pedal, 
and  never  try  to  hold  the  vehicle  on  a hill  with  the  clutch 
pedal  partially  engaged.  This  will  cause  abnormal  wear 
on  the  clutch. 


342  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


Never  shift  into  REVERSE  until  the  vehicle  has  come  to  a 
complete  stop. 

NOTE:  During  cold  weather,  until  the  transmission  lu- 
bricant is  warm,  you  may  experience  slightly  higher  shift 
efforts.  This  is  normal  and  not  harmful  to  the  transmis- 
sion. 


Recommended  Shift  Speeds 

To  use  your  manual  transmission  for  optimal  fuel 
economy,  it  should  be  upshifted  as  listed  in  the  following 
table. 


Manual  Transmission  Recommended  Shift  Speeds 


Units  in  mph  (km/h) 


Engine  Size 

Acceleration 

Rate 

1 to  2 

2 to  3 

3 to  4 

4 to  5 

All  Engines 

Accel 

14  (23) 

23  (37) 

29  (47) 

45  (72) 

Cruise 

12  (19) 

18  (29) 

25  (40) 

32  (52) 

Information  Provided  by: 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  343 


Downshifting 

Proper  downshifting  will  improve  fuel  economy  and 
prolong  engine  life. 

CAUTION! 

If  you  skip  a gear  while  downshifting  or  downshift 
at  too  high  of  a vehicle  speed,  these  conditions  may 
cause  the  engine  to  overspeed  if  too  low  of  a gear  is 
selected  and  the  clutch  pedal  is  released.  Damage  to 
the  clutch  and  the  transmission  can  result  from 
skipping  a gear  while  downshifting  or  downshifting 
at  too  high  of  a vehicle  speed  even  if  the  clutch  pedal 
is  held  pressed  (i.e.,  not  released). 

To  maintain  a safe  speed  and  prolong  brake  life,  shift 
down  to  second  or  first  gear  when  descending  a steep 
grade. 


When  turning  a comer  or  driving  up  a steep  grade, 
downshift  early  so  that  the  engine  will  not  be  overbur- 
dened. 

AUTOMATIC  TRANSMISSION  — IF  EQUIPPED 


CAUTION! 

Damage  to  the  transmission  may  occur  if  the  follow- 
ing precautions  are  not  observed: 

• Shift  into  or  out  of  PARK  or  REVERSE  only  after 
the  vehicle  has  come  to  a complete  stop. 

• Do  not  shift  between  PARK,  REVERSE,  NEU- 
TRAL, or  DRIVE  when  the  engine  is  above  idle 
speed. 

• Before  shifting  into  any  gear,  make  sure  your  foot 
is  firmly  pressing  the  brake  pedal. 


5 


Information  Provided  by: 


344  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


NOTE:  You  must  press  and  hold  the  brake  pedal 
shifting  out  of  PARK. 


WARNING! 

• It  is  dangerous  to  shift  out  of  PARK  or  NEUTRAL 
if  the  engine  speed  is  higher  than  idle  speed.  If 
your  foot  is  not  firmly  pressing  the  brake  pedal,  the 
vehicle  could  accelerate  quickly  forward  or  in  re- 
verse. You  could  lose  control  of  the  vehicle  and  hit 
someone  or  something.  Only  shift  into  gear  when 
the  engine  is  idling  normally  and  your  foot  is 
firmly  pressing  the  brake  pedal. 

• Unintended  movement  of  a vehicle  could  injure 
those  in  or  near  the  vehicle.  As  with  all  vehicles, 
you  should  never  exit  a vehicle  while  the  engine  is 
running.  Before  exiting  a vehicle,  always  shift  the 
transmission  into  PARK,  apply  the  parking  brake. 


(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

turn  the  engine  OFF,  and  remove  the  ignition  key. 
Once  the  key  is  removed,  the  transmission  is 
locked  in  PARK,  securing  the  vehicle  against  un- 
wanted movement. 

• When  leaving  the  vehicle,  always  remove  the  igni- 
tion key  from  the  vehicle  and  lock  the  vehicle. 

• Never  leave  children  alone  in  a vehicle,  or  with 
access  to  an  unlocked  vehicle.  Allowing  children  to 
be  in  a vehicle  unattended  is  dangerous  for  a 
number  of  reasons.  A child  or  others  could  be 
seriously  or  fatally  injured.  Children  should  be 
warned  not  to  touch  the  parking  brake,  brake  pedal 
or  the  transmission  gear  selector. 

• Do  not  leave  the  ignition  key  in  or  near  the  vehicle 
(or  in  a location  accessible  to  children).  A child 
could  operate  power  windows,  other  controls,  or 
move  the  vehicle. 

/ided  by: 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  345 


Key  Ignition  Park  Interlock 

This  vehicle  is  equipped  with  a Key  Ignition  Park  Inter- 
lock which  requires  the  transmission  to  be  in  PARK 
before  the  ignition  switch  can  be  turned  to  the  LOCK/ 
OFF  (key  removal)  position.  The  key  can  only  be  re- 
moved from  the  ignition  when  the  ignition  is  in  the 
LOCK/ OFF  position,  and  once  removed  the  transmission 
is  locked  in  PARK. 

NOTE:  If  a malfunction  occurs,  the  system  will  trap  the 
key  in  the  ignition  switch  to  warn  you  that  this  safety 
feature  is  inoperable.  The  engine  can  be  started  and 
stopped  but  the  key  cannot  be  removed  until  you  obtain 
service. 

Brake/Transmission  Shift  Interlock  System 

This  vehicle  is  equipped  with  a Brake  Transmission  Shift 
Interlock  system  (BTSI)  that  holds  the  shift  lever  in  PARK 
unless  the  brakes  are  applied.  To  shift  the  transmission 


out  of  PARK,  the  ignition  switch  must  be  turned  to  the 
ON /RUN  position  (engine  running  or  not)  and  the  brake 
pedal  must  be  pressed. 


Six-Speed  Automatic  Transmission  — If  Equipped 


The  transmission  gear  position  display  (located  in  the 
instrument  cluster)  indicates  the  transmission  gear  range. 
You  must  press  the  brake  pedal  to  move  the  shift  lever 
out  of  PARK  (refer  to  "Brake /Transmission  Shift  Inter- 
lock System"  in  this  section).  To  drive,  move  the  shift 
lever  from  PARK  or  NEUTRAL  to  the  DRIVE  position. 


5 


The  electronically-controlled  transmission  provides  a 
precise  shift  schedule.  The  transmission  electronics  are 
self-calibrating;  therefore,  the  first  few  shifts  on  a new 
vehicle  may  be  somewhat  abrupt.  This  is  a normal 
condition,  and  precision  shifts  will  develop  within  a few 
hundred  miles  (kilometers). 


CD 


1 Provided  by; 


346  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 

Only  shift  from  DRIVE  to  PARK  or  REVERSE  when  the 
accelerator  pedal  is  released  and  the  vehicle  is  stopped. 
Be  sure  to  keep  your  foot  on  the  brake  pedal  when 
shifting  between  these  gears. 

The  transmission  shift  lever  has  only  PARK,  REVERSE, 
NEUTRAL,  and  DRIVE  shift  positions.  Manual  shifts  can 
be  made  using  the  AutoStick  shift  control  (refer  to 
"AutoStick"  in  this  section).  Moving  the  shift  lever  to  the 
left  or  right  (-/+)  while  in  the  DRIVE  position  will 
manually  select  the  transmission  gear,  and  will  display 
the  current  gear  in  the  instrument  cluster  as  1,  2,  3,  etc. 

Gear  Ranges 

DO  NOT  race  the  engine  when  shifting  from  PARK  or 
NEUTRAL  into  another  gear  range. 

NOTE:  After  selecting  any  gear  range,  wait  a moment  to 
allow  the  selected  gear  to  engage  before  accelerating. 
This  is  especially  important  when  the  engine  is  cold. 


PARK  (P) 


This  range  supplements  the  parking  brake  by  locking  the 
transmission.  The  engine  can  be  started  in  this  range. 
Never  attempt  to  use  PARK  while  the  vehicle  is  in 
motion.  Apply  the  parking  brake  when  leaving  the 
vehicle  in  this  range. 

When  parking  on  a level  surface,  you  may  shift  the 
transmission  into  PARK  first,  and  then  apply  the  parking 
brake. 

When  parking  on  a hill,  apply  the  parking  brake  before 
shifting  the  transmission  to  PARK,  otherwise  the  load  on 
the  transmission  locking  mechanism  may  make  it  diffi- 
cult to  move  the  shift  lever  out  of  PARK.  As  an  added 
precaution,  turn  the  front  wheels  toward  the  curb  on  a 
downhill  grade  and  away  from  the  curb  on  an  uphill 
grade. 


i Provided  by: 


AI-SR 


WARNING! 


Never  use  the  PARK  position  as  a substitute  for  the 
parking  brake.  Always  apply  the  parking  brake 
fully  when  parked  to  guard  against  vehicle  move- 
ment and  possible  injury  or  damage. 

Your  vehicle  could  move  and  injure  you  and  others 
if  it  is  not  in  PARK.  Check  by  trying  to  move  the 
gear  selector/shift  lever  out  of  PARK  with  the  brake 
pedal  released.  Make  sure  the  transmission  is  in 
PARK  before  leaving  the  vehicle. 

It  is  dangerous  to  shift  out  of  PARK  or  NEUTRAL 
if  the  engine  speed  is  higher  than  idle  speed.  If 
your  foot  is  not  firmly  pressing  the  brake  pedal,  the 
vehicle  could  accelerate  quickly  forward  or  in  re- 
verse. You  could  lose  control  of  the  vehicle  and  hit 
someone  or  something.  Only  shift  into  gear  when 
the  engine  is  idling  normally  and  your  foot  is 
firmly  pressing  the  brake  pedal. 


(Continued) 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  347 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Unintended  movement  of  a vehicle  could  injure  those 
in  or  near  the  vehicle.  As  with  all  vehicles,  you  should 
never  exit  a vehicle  while  the  engine  is  running.  Before 
exiting  a vehicle,  always  shift  the  transmission  into 
PARK,  apply  the  parking  brake,  turn  the  engine  OFF, 
and  remove  the  ignition  key..  Once  the  key  is  removed, 
the  transmission  is  locked  in  PARK,  securing  the 
vehicle  against  unwanted  movement. 

• When  leaving  the  vehicle,  always  remove  the  igni- 
tion key  from  the  vehicle  and  lock  the  vehicle. 

• Never  leave  children  alone  in  a vehicle,  or  with 
access  to  an  unlocked  vehicle.  Allowing  children  to 
be  in  a vehicle  unattended  is  dangerous  for  a 
number  of  reasons.  A child  or  others  could  be 
seriously  or  fatally  injured.  Children  should  be 
warned  not  to  touch  the  parking  brake,  brake  pedal 
or  the  gear  selector. 


(Continued) 


348  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Do  not  leave  the  ignition  key  in  or  near  the  vehicle 
(or  in  a location  accessible  to  children).  A child 
could  operate  power  windows,  other  controls,  or 
move  the  vehicle. 


CAUTION! 

• Before  moving  the  gear  selector/shift  lever  out  of 
PARK,  you  must  turn  the  ignition  switch  from  the 
LOCK/OFF  position  to  the  ON/RUN  position,  and 
also  press  the  brake  pedal.  Otherwise,  damage  to 
the  gear  selector/shift  lever  could  result. 

• DO  NOT  race  the  engine  when  shifting  from 
PARK  or  NEUTRAL  into  another  gear  range,  as  this 
can  damage  the  drivetrain. 


The  following  indicators  should  be  used  to  ensure  that 
you  have  engaged  the  transmission  into  the  PARK  posi- 
tion: 

• When  shifting  into  PARK,  firmly  move  the  shift  lever 
all  the  way  forward  and  to  the  left  until  it  stops  and  is 
fully  seated. 

• Look  at  the  transmission  gear  position  display  and 
verify  that  it  indicates  the  PARK  position  (P). 

• With  brake  pedal  released,  verify  that  the  shift  lever 
will  not  move  out  of  PARK. 

REVERSE  (R) 

This  range  is  for  moving  the  vehicle  backward.  Shift  into 
REVERSE  only  after  the  vehicle  has  come  to  a complete 
stop. 


NEUTRAL  (N) 


Use  this  range  when  the  vehicle  is  standing  for  prolonged 
periods  with  the  engine  running.  The  engine  may  be 
started  in  this  range.  Apply  the  parking  brake  and  shift 
the  transmission  into  PARK  if  you  must  leave  the  vehicle. 


WARNING! 

Do  not  coast  in  NEUTRAL  and  never  turn  off  the 
ignition  to  coast  down  a hill.  These  are  unsafe 
practices  that  limit  your  response  to  changing  traffic 
or  road  conditions.  You  might  lose  control  of  the 
vehicle  and  have  a collision. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  349 


CAUTION! 

Towing  the  vehicle,  coasting,  or  driving  for  any  other 
reason  with  the  transmission  in  NEUTRAL  can  cause 
severe  transmission  damage.  Refer  to  "Recreational 
Towing"  in  "Starting  And  Operating"  and  "Towing  A 
Disabled  Vehicle"  in  "What  To  Do  In  Emergencies" 
for  further  information. 


DRIVE  (D) 

This  range  should  be  used  for  most  city  and  highway 
driving.  It  provides  the  smoothest  upshifts  and  down- 
shifts, and  the  best  fuel  economy.  The  transmission 
automatically  upshifts  through  underdrive  first,  second, 
third,  and  fourth  gears,  direct  fifth  gear  and  overdrive 
sixth  gear.  The  DRIVE  position  provides  optimum  driv- 
ing characteristics  under  all  normal  operating  conditions. 


350  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


When  frequent  transmission  shifting  occurs  (such  as 
when  operating  the  vehicle  under  heavy  loading  condi- 
tions, in  hilly  terrain,  traveling  into  strong  head  winds,  or 
while  towing  heavy  trailers),  use  the  AutoStick  shift 
control  (refer  to  "AutoStick  (Six-Speed  Automatic  Trans- 
mission)" in  this  section  for  further  information)  to  select 
a lower  gear.  Under  these  conditions,  using  a lower  gear 
will  improve  performance  and  extend  transmission  life 
by  reducing  excessive  shifting  and  heat  buildup. 

If  the  transmission  temperature  exceeds  normal  operat- 
ing limits,  the  transmission  controller  will  modify  the 
transmission  shift  schedule  and  expand  the  range  of 
torque  converter  clutch  engagement.  This  is  done  to 
prevent  transmission  damage  due  to  overheating.  If  the 
transmission  becomes  extremely  hot,  the  "Transmission 
Temperature  Warning  Light"  may  illuminate  and  the 
transmission  may  operate  differently  until  the  transmis- 
sion cools  down. 


During  very  cold  temperatures  (-4°F  [-20°C]  or  below), 
transmission  operation  may  be  modified  depending  on 
engine  and  transmission  temperature  as  well  as  vehicle 
speed.  Normal  operation  will  resume  once  the  transmis- 
sion temperature  has  risen  to  a suitable  level. 

Transmission  Limp  Home  Mode 

Transmission  function  is  monitored  electronically  for 
abnormal  conditions.  If  a condition  is  detected  that  could 
result  in  transmission  damage,  Transmission  Limp  Home 
Mode  is  activated.  In  this  mode,  the  transmission  remains 
in  fourth  gear  regardless  of  which  forward  gear  is 
selected.  PARK,  REVERSE,  and  NEUTRAL  will  continue 
to  operate.  The  Malfunction  Indicator  Light  (MIL)  may  be 
illuminated.  Limp  Home  Mode  allows  the  vehicle  to  be 
driven  to  an  authorized  dealer  for  service  without  dam- 
aging the  transmission. 


iformation  Provided  by: 


In  the  event  of  a momentary  problem,  the  transmission 
can  be  reset  to  regain  all  forward  gears  by  performing  the 
following  steps: 

1.  Stop  the  vehicle. 

2.  Shift  the  transmission  into  PARK. 

3.  Turn  the  ignition  switch  to  the  OFF  position. 

4.  Wait  approximately  10  seconds. 

5.  Restart  the  engine. 

6.  Shift  into  the  desired  gear  range.  If  the  problem  is  no 
longer  detected,  the  transmission  will  return  to  normal 
operation. 

NOTE:  Even  if  the  transmission  can  be  reset,  we  recom- 
mend that  you  visit  your  authorized  dealer  at  your 
earliest  possible  convenience.  Your  authorized  dealer  has 
diagnostic  equipment  to  determine  if  the  problem  could 
recur. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  351 


If  the  transmission  cannot  be  reset,  authorized  dealer 
service  is  required. 


Overdrive  Operation 


The  automatic  transmission  includes  an  electronically 
controlled  Overdrive  (sixth  gear).  The  transmission  will 
automatically  shift  into  Overdrive  if  the  following  con- 
ditions are  present: 

• The  shift  lever  is  in  the  DRIVE  position. 


5 


• The  transmission  fluid  has  reached  an  adequate  tem- 
perature. 


• The  engine  coolant  has  reached  an  adequate  tempera- 
ture. 


• The  vehicle  speed  is  sufficiently  high. 

• The  driver  is  not  heavily  pressing  the  accelerator. 


i Provided  by: 

/\{ EEF3 


352  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


Torque  Converter  Clutch 

A feature  designed  to  improve  fuel  economy  has  been 
included  in  the  automatic  transmission  on  your  vehicle. 
A clutch  within  the  torque  converter  engages  automati- 
cally at  calibrated  speeds.  This  may  result  in  a slightly 
different  feeling  or  response  during  normal  operation  in 
the  upper  gears.  When  the  vehicle  speed  drops  or  during 
some  accelerations,  the  clutch  automatically  disengages. 

NOTE:  Engagement  of  the  torque  converter  clutch  is 
inhibited  at  very  cold  temperatures.  Because  the  engine 
speed  is  higher  when  the  torque  converter  clutch  is  not 
engaged,  it  may  seem  as  if  the  transmission  is  not  shifting 
into  Overdrive  when  cold.  This  is  normal.  The  torque 
converter  clutch  will  function  normally  once  the  trans- 
mission is  sufficiently  warm. 


Continuously  Variable  Automatic  Transmission 
(CVT)  — If  Equipped 

The  transmission  gear  position  display  (located  in  the 
instrument  cluster)  indicates  the  transmission  gear  range. 
You  must  press  the  brake  pedal  to  move  the  shift  lever 
out  of  PARK  (refer  to  "Brake /Transmission  Shift  Inter- 
lock System"  in  this  section).  To  drive,  move  the  shift 
lever  from  PARK  or  NEUTRAL  to  the  DRIVE  position. 

NOTE:  The  Continuously  Variable  Automatic  Transmis- 
sion (CVT)  changes  ratios  in  a continuous  manner.  This 
may  sometimes  "feel"  as  if  it  is  slipping,  but  this  is  normal 
and  does  not  harm  anything. 

Only  shift  from  DRIVE  to  PARK  or  REVERSE  when  the 
accelerator  pedal  is  released  and  the  vehicle  is  stopped. 
Be  sure  to  keep  your  foot  on  the  brake  pedal  when 
shifting  between  these  gears. 


Information  Provided  by: 


The  transmission  shift  lever  has  PARK,  REVERSE,  NEU- 
TRAL, and  DRIVE  shift  positions.  Some  models  include  a 
LOW  position  (the  LOW  position  manually  downshifts 
the  transmission  to  a lower  available  ratio  based  on 
vehicle  speed);  in  others,  manual  shifts  are  made  using 
the  AutoStick  shift  control  (refer  to  "AutoStick"  in  this 
section).  Moving  the  shift  lever  to  the  left  or  right  (-/ +) 
while  in  the  DRIVE  position  (if  equipped  with  AutoStick) 
will  manually  select  from  a set  of  predefined  transmis- 
sion gear  ratios,  and  will  display  the  current  gear  in  the 
instrument  cluster  as  1,  2,  3,  etc. 

Gear  Ranges 

DO  NOT  race  the  engine  when  shifting  from  PARK  or 
NEUTRAL  into  another  gear  range. 

NOTE:  After  selecting  any  gear  range,  wait  a moment  to 
allow  the  selected  gear  to  engage  before  accelerating. 
This  is  especially  important  when  the  engine  is  cold. 


PARK  (P) 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  353 


This  range  supplements  the  parking  brake  by  locking  the 
transmission.  The  engine  can  be  started  in  this  range. 
Never  attempt  to  use  PARK  while  the  vehicle  is  in 
motion.  Apply  the  parking  brake  when  leaving  the 
vehicle  in  this  range. 


When  parking  on  a level  surface,  you  may  shift  the 
transmission  into  PARK  first,  and  then  apply  the  parking 
brake. 


5 


When  parking  on  a hill,  apply  the  parking  brake  before 
shifting  the  transmission  to  PARK,  otherwise  the  load  on 
the  transmission  locking  mechanism  may  make  it  diffi- 
cult to  move  the  shift  lever  out  of  PARK.  As  an  added 
precaution,  turn  the  front  wheels  toward  the  curb  on  a 
downhill  grade  and  away  from  the  curb  on  an  uphill 
grade. 


i Provided  by: 

/M EEF^ 


354  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


WARNING! 

• Never  use  the  PARK  position  as  a substitute  for  the 
parking  brake.  Always  apply  the  parking  brake 
fully  when  parked  to  guard  against  vehicle  move- 
ment and  possible  injury  or  damage. 

• Your  vehicle  could  move  and  injure  you  and  others 
if  it  is  not  in  PARK.  Check  by  trying  to  move  the 
gear  selector/shift  lever  out  of  PARK  with  the  brake 
pedal  released.  Make  sure  the  transmission  is  in 
PARK  before  leaving  the  vehicle. 

• It  is  dangerous  to  shift  out  of  PARK  or  NEUTRAL 
if  the  engine  speed  is  higher  than  idle  speed.  If 
your  foot  is  not  firmly  pressing  the  brake  pedal,  the 
vehicle  could  accelerate  quickly  forward  or  in  re- 
verse. You  could  lose  control  of  the  vehicle  and  hit 
someone  or  something.  Only  shift  into  gear  when 
the  engine  is  idling  normally  and  your  foot  is 
firmly  pressing  the  brake  pedal. 


(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Unintended  movement  of  a vehicle  could  injure  those 
in  or  near  the  vehicle.  As  with  all  vehicles,  you  should 
never  exit  a vehicle  while  the  engine  is  running. 
Before  exiting  a vehicle,  always  shift  the  transmission 
into  PARK,  apply  the  parking  brake,  turn  the  engine 
OFF,  and  remove  the  ignition  key..  Once  the  key  is 
removed,  the  transmission  is  locked  in  PARK,  secur- 
ing the  vehicle  against  unwanted  movement. 

• When  leaving  the  vehicle,  always  remove  the  igni- 
tion key  from  the  vehicle  and  lock  the  vehicle. 

• Never  leave  children  alone  in  a vehicle,  or  with 
access  to  an  unlocked  vehicle.  Allowing  children  to 
be  in  a vehicle  unattended  is  dangerous  for  a 
number  of  reasons.  A child  or  others  could  be 
seriously  or  fatally  injured.  Children  should  be 
warned  not  to  touch  the  parking  brake,  brake  pedal 
or  the  gear  selector. 


(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Do  not  leave  the  ignition  key  in  or  near  the  vehicle 
(or  in  a location  accessible  to  children).  A child 
could  operate  power  windows,  other  controls,  or 
move  the  vehicle. 


CAUTION! 

• Before  moving  the  gear  selector/shift  lever  out  of 
PARK,  you  must  turn  the  ignition  switch  from  the 
LOCK/OFF  position  to  the  ON/RUN  position,  and 
also  press  the  brake  pedal.  Otherwise,  damage  to 
the  gear  selector/shift  lever  could  result. 

• DO  NOT  race  the  engine  when  shifting  from 
PARK  or  NEUTRAL  into  another  gear  range,  as  this 
can  damage  the  drivetrain. 


& 


I = 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  355 


The  following  indicators  should  be  used  to  ensure  that 
you  have  engaged  the  transmission  into  the  PARK  posi- 
tion: 


• When  shifting  into  PARK,  firmly  move  the  shift  lever 
all  the  way  forward  and  to  the  left  until  it  stops  and  is 
fully  seated. 


• Look  at  the  transmission  gear  position  display  and 
verify  that  it  indicates  the  PARK  position  (P). 


5 


• With  brake  pedal  released,  verify  that  the  shift  lever 
will  not  move  out  of  PARK. 


REVERSE  (R) 

This  range  is  for  moving  the  vehicle  backward.  Shift  into 
REVERSE  only  after  the  vehicle  has  come  to  a complete 
stop. 


356  STARTING  AND  OPERATING  1 

NEUTRAL  (N) 

Use  this  range  when  the  vehicle  is  standing  for  prolonged 
periods  with  the  engine  running.  The  engine  may  be 
started  in  this  range.  Apply  the  parking  brake  and  shift 
the  transmission  into  PARK  if  you  must  leave  the  vehicle. 


WARNING! 

Do  not  coast  in  NEUTRAL  and  never  turn  off  the 
ignition  to  coast  down  a hill.  These  are  unsafe 
practices  that  limit  your  response  to  changing  traffic 
or  road  conditions.  You  might  lose  control  of  the 
vehicle  and  have  a collision. 


CAUTION! 


Towing  the  vehicle,  coasting,  or  driving  for  any  other 
reason  with  the  transmission  in  NEUTRAL  can  cause 
severe  transmission  damage.  Refer  to  "Recreational 
Towing"  in  "Starting  And  Operating"  and  "Towing  A 
Disabled  Vehicle"  in  "What  To  Do  In  Emergencies" 
for  further  information. 


DRIVE  (D) 

This  range  should  be  used  for  most  city  and  highway 
driving.  It  provides  the  best  fuel  economy.  The  DRIVE 
position  provides  optimum  driving  characteristics  under 
all  normal  operating  conditions. 

When  frequent  transmission  shifting  occurs  (such  as 
when  operating  the  vehicle  under  heavy  loading  condi- 
tions, in  hilly  terrain,  traveling  into  strong  head  winds,  or 
while  towing  heavy  trailers),  use  the  AutoStick  shift 
control  (refer  to  "AutoStick  (CVT)"  in  this  section  for 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  357 


further  information)  to  select  a lower  gear  ratio.  Under 
these  conditions,  using  a lower  gear  ratio  will  improve 
performance  and  extend  transmission  life  by  reducing 
excessive  shifting  and  heat  buildup. 

During  sustained  high  speed  driving  or  trailer 
towing  up  long  grades  on  hot  days,  the  auto- 
matic transmission  oil  may  become  too  hot.  If 
this  happens,  the  transmission  overheat  indica- 
tor light  will  come  on,  and  the  vehicle  will  slow  slightly 
until  the  transmission  cools  down  enough  to  allow  a 
return  to  the  requested  speed.  This  is  done  to  prevent 
transmission  damage  due  to  overheating.  If  the  high 
speed  is  maintained,  the  overheating  may  reoccur,  as 
before,  in  a cyclic  fashion. 


LOW  (L)  — If  Equipped 

Use  this  range  for  engine  braking  when  descending  very 
steep  grades.  In  this  range,  the  transmission  will  down- 
shift for  maximum  engine  braking,  and  upshifts  will 
occur  only  to  prevent  engine  overspeed. 

AUTOSTICK 

AutoStick  (Six-Speed  Automatic  Transmission) 

AutoStick  is  a driver-interactive  transmission  feature 
providing  manual  shift  control,  giving  you  more  control 
of  the  vehicle.  AutoStick  allows  you  to  maximize  engine 
braking,  eliminate  undesirable  upshifts  and  downshifts, 
and  improve  overall  vehicle  performance.  This  system 
can  also  provide  you  with  more  control  during  passing, 
city  driving,  cold  slippery  conditions,  mountain  driving, 
trailer  towing,  and  many  other  situations. 


358  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


Operation  • 

When  the  shift  lever  is  in  the  DRIVE  position,  the 
transmission  will  operate  automatically,  shifting  between 
the  six  available  gears.  To  engage  AutoStick,  simply  tap  • 
the  shift  lever  to  the  right  or  left  (+/-)  while  in  the  DRIVE 
position.  Tapping  (-)  to  enter  AutoStick  mode  will  down- 
shift the  transmission  to  the  next  lower  gear,  while  using 
(+)  to  enter  AutoStick  mode  will  retain  the  current  gear. 
When  AutoStick  is  active,  the  current  transmission  gear  is 
displayed  in  the  instrument  cluster. 

In  AutoStick  mode,  the  transmission  will  shift  up  or 
down  when  the  driver  moves  the  shift  lever  to  the  right 
(+)  or  left  (-),  unless  an  engine  lugging  or  overspeed 
condition  would  result.  It  will  remain  in  the  selected  gear 
until  another  upshift  or  downshift  is  chosen,  except  as  • 
described  below: 

• The  transmission  will  automatically  upshift  when  nec- 
essary to  prevent  engine  over-speed. 


The  transmission  will  automatically  downshift  as  the 
vehicle  slows  (to  prevent  engine  lugging)  and  will 
display  the  current  gear. 

The  transmission  will  automatically  downshift  to  first 
gear  when  coming  to  a stop.  After  a stop,  the  driver 
should  manually  upshift  (+)  the  transmission  as  the 
vehicle  is  accelerated. 

You  can  start  out,  from  a stop,  in  first  or  second  gear. 
Tapping  (+)  (at  a stop)  will  allow  starting  in  second 
gear.  Starting  out  in  second  gear  can  be  helpful  in 
snowy  or  icy  conditions. 

If  a requested  downshift  would  cause  the  engine  to 
overspeed,  that  shift  will  not  occur. 

Avoid  using  speed  control  when  AutoStick  is  engaged. 

Transmission  shifting  will  be  more  noticeable  when 
AutoStick  is  engaged. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  359 


• The  system  may  revert  to  automatic  shift  mode  if  a 
fault  or  overheat  condition  is  detected. 

To  disengage  AutoStick  mode,  hold  the  shift  lever  to  the 
right  (+)  until  "D"  is  once  again  displayed  in  the  instru- 
ment cluster.  You  can  shift  in  or  out  of  the  AutoStick 
mode  at  any  time  without  taking  your  foot  off  the 
accelerator  pedal. 


WARNING! 

Do  not  downshift  for  additional  engine  braking  on  a 
slippery  surface.  The  drive  wheels  could  lose  their 
grip  and  the  vehicle  could  skid,  causing  a collision  or 
personal  injury. 

AutoStick  (CVT)  — If  Equipped 

AutoStick  is  a driver-interactive  transmission  feature 
providing  six  manually  selectable  gear  ratios,  giving  you 
more  control  of  the  vehicle.  AutoStick  allows  you  to 


maximize  engine  braking,  eliminate  undesirable  upshifts 
and  downshifts,  and  improve  overall  vehicle  perfor- 
mance. This  system  can  also  provide  you  with  more 
control  during  passing,  city  driving,  cold  slippery  condi- 
tions, mountain  driving,  trailer  towing,  and  many  other 
situations. 

Operation 

NOTE:  AutoStick  is  not  available  until  the  CVT  warms 
up  in  cold  weather. 

When  the  shift  lever  is  in  the  DRIVE  position,  AutoStick 
is  activated  by  moving  the  shift  lever  side-to-side.  Mov- 
ing the  shift  lever  to  the  right  (+)  will  activate  AutoStick 
and  shift  up  to  the  next  higher  manual  ratio,  unless  you 
are  already  operating  in  or  near  Overdrive,  in  which  case 
sixth  gear  ratio  will  be  selected.  In  like  manner,  moving 
the  shift  lever  to  the  left  (-)  will  activate  AutoStick  and 
shift  to  the  next  lower  manual  ratio.  The  manually- 
selected  gear  will  be  displayed  in  the  instrument  cluster. 


360  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


In  AutoStick  mode,  the  transmission  will  shift  up  or 
down  when  (+/-)  is  manually  selected  by  the  driver, 
unless  an  engine  lugging  or  overspeed  condition  would 
result.  It  will  remain  in  the  selected  gear  until  another 
upshift  or  downshift  is  chosen,  except  as  described 
below: 

• The  transmission  will  automatically  upshift  when  nec- 
essary to  prevent  engine  over-speed. 

• The  transmission  will  automatically  downshift  as  the 
vehicle  slows  (to  prevent  engine  lugging)  and  will 
display  the  current  gear. 

• The  transmission  will  automatically  downshift  to  first 
gear  when  coming  to  a stop.  After  a stop,  the  driver 
should  manually  upshift  (+)  the  transmission  as  the 
vehicle  is  accelerated. 

• If  a requested  downshift  would  cause  the  engine  to 
overspeed,  that  shift  will  not  occur. 


i=D  = 


• Transmission  shifting  will  be  more  noticeable  when 
AutoStick  is  engaged. 

• Heavy  Anti-Lock  Brake  System  (ABS)  application  will 
disengage  AutoStick  mode. 

• The  system  may  revert  to  automatic  shift  mode  if  a 
fault  or  overheat  condition  is  detected. 

To  disengage  AutoStick  mode,  hold  the  shift  lever  to  the 
right  (+)  until  "D"  is  once  again  displayed  in  the  instru- 
ment cluster.  You  can  shift  in  or  out  of  the  AutoStick 
mode  at  any  time  without  taking  your  foot  off  the 
accelerator  pedal. 


WARNING! 

Do  not  downshift  for  additional  engine  braking  on  a 
slippery  surface.  The  drive  wheels  could  lose  their 
grip  and  the  vehicle  could  skid,  causing  a collision  or 
personal  injury. 

/M_  = i=3 


FOUR-WHEEL  DRIVE  OPERATION  — IF 
EQUIPPED 

This  feature  provides  full  time,  on-demand,  four-wheel 
drive  (4WD). 


Four-Wheel  Drive  Switch 

Where  one  or  more  wheels  have  wheel  spin  or  if  addi- 
tional traction  is  needed  in  sand,  deep  snow,  or  loose 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  361 


traction  surfaces,  activate  the  "4WD  LOCK"  switch  by 
pulling  up  once  and  releasing.  This  locks  the  center 
coupling  allowing  more  torque  to  be  sent  to  the  rear 
wheels.  The  "4WD  Indicator  Light"  will  come  on  in  the 
cluster.  This  can  be  done  on  the  fly,  at  any  vehicle  speed. 
To  deactivate,  simply  pull  on  the  switch  one  more  time. 
The  "4WD  Indicator  Light"  will  then  go  out. 

NOTE:  Refer  to  "Electronic  Brake  Control  System/ 
Electronic  Stability  Control  (ESC)"  in  "Starting  And  Op- 
erating" for  further  information. 


5 


ON-ROAD  DRIVING  TIPS 

Utility  vehicles  have  higher  ground  clearance  and  a 
narrower  track  to  make  them  capable  of  performing  in  a 
wide  variety  of  off- road  applications.  Specific  design 
characteristics  give  them  a higher  center  of  gravity  than 
ordinary  cars. 


/\[ i= 


i=^ 


362  STARTING  AND  OPERATING  1 

An  advantage  of  the  higher  ground  clearance  is  a better 
view  of  the  road,  allowing  you  to  anticipate  problems. 
They  are  not  designed  for  cornering  at  the  same  speeds  as 
conventional  two-wheel  drive  vehicles  any  more  than 
low-slung  sports  cars  are  designed  to  perform  satisfacto- 
rily in  off-road  conditions.  If  at  all  possible,  avoid  sharp 
turns  or  abrupt  maneuvers.  As  with  other  vehicles  of  this 
type,  failure  to  operate  this  vehicle  correctly  may  result  in 
loss  of  control  or  vehicle  rollover. 

OFF-ROAD  DRIVING  TIPS 

You  will  encounter  many  types  of  terrain  driving  off- 
road. You  should  be  familiar  with  the  terrain  and  area 
before  proceeding.  There  are  many  types  of  surface 
conditions:  hard  packed  dirt,  gravel,  rocks,  grass,  sand, 
mud,  snow  and  ice.  Every  surface  has  a different  effect  on 
your  vehicle's  steering,  handling  and  traction.  Control- 
ling your  vehicle  is  one  of  the  keys  to  successful  off-road 
driving,  so  always  keep  a firm  grip  on  the  steering  wheel 


and  maintain  a good  driving  posture.  Avoid  sudden 
accelerations,  turns  or  braking.  In  most  cases  there  are  no 
road  signs,  posted  speed  limits  or  signal  lights.  Therefore 
you  will  need  to  use  your  own  good  judgment  on  what  is 
safe  and  what  is  not.  When  on  a trail,  you  should  always 
be  looking  ahead  for  surface  obstacles  and  changes  in 
terrain.  The  key  is  to  plan  your  future  driving  route  while 
remembering  what  you  are  currently  driving  over. 


CAUTION! 

Never  park  your  vehicle  over  dry  grass  or  other 
combustible  materials.  The  heat  from  your  vehicle 
exhaust  system  could  cause  a fire. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  363 


WARNING! 

Always  wear  your  seat  belt  and  firmly  tie  down 
cargo.  Unsecured  cargo  can  become  projectiles  in  an 
off-road  situation. 

When  To  Use  Low  (L  Off-Road)  With  The  4WD 
Lock  Lever  Engaged  — If  Equipped 

When  driving  off-road,  shift  into  low  (L  Off-Road  [if 
equipped]  ) and  activate  the  4WD  LOCK.  This  will 
provide  additional  traction  and  activates  the  numerous 
off-road  features  to  improve  handling  and  control  on 
slippery  or  difficult  terrain.  Due  to  the  sustained  lower 
gearing,  low  (L  Off-Road  [if  equipped] ) with  4WD  LOCK 
engaged  will  allow  the  engine  to  operate  in  a higher 
power  range.  This  will  allow  you  to  cross  over  obstacles 
and  descend  hills,  with  improved  control  and  less  effort. 


NOTE:  For  maximum  off-road  performance,  premium 
fuel  is  recommended.  While  the  vehicle  will  operate  on 
regular  fuel  when  in  L Off-Road  mode  (if  equipped),  the 
engine  has  been  calibrated  for  maximum  performance 
using  premium  fuel. 

Driving  In  Snow,  Mud  And  Sand 

There  is  a drastic  reduction  in  traction  when  driving  in 
snow,  mud  or  sand.  The  vehicle  will  be  less  responsive  to 
steering,  acceleration  and  braking  inputs.  Therefore,  you 
should  accelerate  slowly,  leave  greater  stopping  distances 
and  avoid  abrupt  vehicle  maneuvers.  You  want  to  keep  a 
slow  constant  steady  pace.  The  key  is  to  maintain  the 
vehicle's  momentum. 

Snow 

In  heavy  snow  or  for  additional  control  and  traction  at 
slower  speeds,  activate  the  4WD  LOCK  and  shift  the 
transaxle  to  low  (L  Off-Road  [if  equipped]  ) if  necessary. 
Do  not  shift  to  a lower  gear  than  necessary  to  maintain 


364  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


headway.  Over-rewing  the  engine  can  spin  the  wheels 
and  traction  will  be  lost.  If  you  start  to  slow  to  a stop,  try 
turning  your  steering  wheel  no  more  than  a 1/4  turn 
quickly  back  and  forth,  while  still  applying  throttle.  This 
will  allow  the  tires  to  get  a fresh  'bite"  and  help  maintain 
your  momentum. 


CAUTION! 

On  icy  or  slippery  roads,  do  not  downshift  at  high 
engine  RPM's  or  vehicle  speeds  because  engine  brak- 
ing may  cause  skidding  and  loss  of  control. 

Mud 

Deep  mud  creates  a great  deal  of  suction  around  the  tires 
and  is  very  difficult  to  get  through.  You  should  use  low  (L 
Off-Road  [if  equipped]  ) with  the  4WD  LOCK  engaged 
and  maintain  your  momentum.  If  you  start  to  slow  to  a 
stop,  try  turning  your  steering  wheel  no  more  than  a 1/4 


turn  quickly  back  and  forth  for  additional  traction.  Mud 
holes  pose  an  increased  threat  of  vehicle  damage  and 
getting  stuck.  They  are  normally  full  of  debris  from 
previous  vehicles  getting  stuck.  As  a good  practice  before 
entering  any  mud  hole,  get  out  and  determine  how  deep 
it  is,  if  there  are  any  hidden  obstacles  and  if  the  vehicle 
can  be  safely  recovered  if  stuck. 

Sand 

Soft  sand  is  very  difficult  to  travel  through  with  full  tire 
pressure.  When  crossing  soft  sandy  spots  in  a trail 
maintain  your  vehicle's  momentum  and  do  not  stop.  The 
key  to  driving  in  soft  sand  is  using  the  appropriate  tire 
pressure,  accelerating  slowly,  avoiding  abrupt  maneu- 
vers and  maintaining  the  vehicle's  momentum.  If  you  are 
going  to  be  driving  on  large  soft  sandy  areas  or  dunes, 
reduce  your  tire  pressure  to  a minimum  of  15  psi 
(103  kPa)  to  allow  for  a greater  tire  surface  area.  You 
should  use  low  (L  Off-Road  [if  equipped] ) with  the  4WD 


q5saI!!sr 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  365 


LOCK  engaged  and  ESC  turned  off.  Reduced  tire  pres- 
sure will  drastically  improve  your  traction  and  handling, 
while  driving  on  the  soft  sand,  but  you  must  return  the 
tires  to  normal  air  pressure  before  driving  on  pavement 
or  other  hard  surfaces.  Be  sure  you  have  a way  to 
reinflate  the  tires  prior  to  reducing  the  pressure. 


CAUTION! 

Reduced  tire  pressures  may  cause  tire  unseating  and 
total  loss  of  air  pressure.  To  reduce  the  risk  of  tire 
unseating,  while  at  a reduced  tire  pressure,  reduce 
your  speed  and  avoid  sharp  turns  or  abrupt  maneu- 
vers. 

Hill  Climbing 

Hill  climbing  requires  good  judgment  and  a good  under- 
standing of  your  abilities  and  your  vehicle's  limitations. 
Hills  can  cause  serious  problems.  Some  are  just  too  steep 


to  climb  and  should  not  be  attempted.  You  should  always 
feel  confident  with  the  vehicle  and  your  abilities.  You 
should  always  climb  hills  straight  up  and  down.  Never 
attempt  to  climb  a hill  on  an  angle. 


Before  Climbing  A Steep  Hill 


As  you  approach  a hill  consider  its  grade  or  steepness. 
Determine  if  it  is  too  steep.  Look  to  see  what  the  traction 
is  on  the  hill  side  trail.  Is  the  trail  straight  up  and  down? 
What  is  on  top  and  the  other  side?  Are  there  ruts,  rocks, 
branches  or  other  obstacles  on  the  path?  Can  you  safely 
recover  the  vehicle  if  something  goes  wrong?  If  every- 
thing looks  good  and  you  feel  confident,  then  you  should 
use  low  (L  Off-Road  [if  equipped])  with  the  4WD  LOCK 
engaged  and  proceed  with  caution  maintaining  your 
momentum  as  you  climb  the  hill. 


5 


CD 


/M_  = F=? 


366  STARTING  AND  OPERATING  1 
Driving  Up  Hill 

Once  you  have  determined  your  ability  to  proceed  and 
have  shifted  into  the  appropriate  gear,  line  your  vehicle 
up  for  the  straightest  possible  run.  Accelerate  with  an 
easy  constant  throttle  and  apply  more  power  as  you  start 
up  the  hill.  Do  not  race  forward  into  a steep  grade;  the 
abrupt  change  of  grade  could  cause  you  to  lose  control.  If 
the  front  end  begins  to  bounce,  ease  off  the  throttle 
slightly  to  bring  all  four  tires  back  on  the  ground.  As  you 
approach  the  crest  of  the  hill,  ease  off  the  throttle  and 
slowly  proceed  over  the  top.  If  the  wheels  start  to  slip  as 
you  approach  the  crest  of  a hill,  ease  off  the  accelerator 
and  maintain  headway  by  turning  the  steering  wheel  no 
more  than  a 1/4  turn  quickly  back  and  forth.  This  will 
provide  a fresh  "bite"  into  the  surface  and  will  usually 
provide  enough  traction  to  complete  the  climb.  If  you  do 
not  make  it  to  the  top,  place  the  vehicle  in  REVERSE  and 
back  straight  down  the  grade  using  engine  resistance 
along  with  the  vehicle  brakes. 


WARNING! 


Never  attempt  to  climb  a hill  at  an  angle  or  turn 
around  on  a steep  grade.  Driving  across  an  incline 
increases  the  risk  of  a rollover,  which  may  result  in 
severe  injury. 

Driving  Down  Hill 

Before  driving  down  a steep  hill  you  need  to  determine  if 
it  is  too  steep  for  a safe  descent.  What  is  the  surface 
traction?  Is  the  grade  too  steep  to  maintain  a slow 
controlled  descent?  Are  there  obstacles?  Is  it  a straight 
descent?  Is  there  plenty  of  distance  at  the  base  of  the  hill 
to  regain  control  if  the  vehicle  descends  to  fast?  If  you  feel 
confident  in  your  ability  to  proceed  then  make  sure  you 
are  in  low  (L  Off-Road  [if  equipped]  ) with  the  4WD 


/\L 


LOCK  engaged  and  proceed  with  caution.  Allow  engine 
and  hill  descent  braking  to  control  the  descent  and  apply 
your  brakes  if  necessary  but  do  not  allow  the  tires  to  lock. 


WARNING! 

Do  not  descend  a steep  grade  in  NEUTRAL.  Use 
vehicle  brakes  in  conjunction  with  engine  braking. 
Descending  a grade  too  fast  could  cause  you  to  lose 
control  and  be  seriously  injured  or  killed. 

Driving  Across  An  Incline 

If  at  all  possible  avoid  driving  across  an  incline.  If  it  is 
necessary  know  your  vehicle's  abilities.  Driving  across 
an  incline  places  more  weight  on  the  down-hill  wheels, 
which  increases  the  possibilities  of  a down-hill  slide  or 
rollover.  Make  sure  the  surface  has  good  traction  with 
firm  and  stable  soils.  If  possible  transverse  the  incline  at 
an  angle  heading  slightly  up  or  down. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  367 


WARNING! 

Driving  across  an  incline  increases  the  risk  of  a 
rollover,  which  may  result  in  severe  injury. 

If  You  Stall  Or  Begin  To  Lose  Headway 


If  you  stall  or  begin  to  lose  headway  while  climbing  a 
steep  hill,  allow  your  vehicle  to  come  to  a stop  and 
immediately  apply  the  brake.  Restart  the  engine  and  shift 
to  REVERSE.  Back  slowly  down  the  hill  allowing  engine 
and  hill  descent  braking  to  control  the  descent  and  apply 
your  brakes  if  necessary,  but  do  not  allow  the  tires  to  lock. 


5 


/\L 


368  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


WARNING! 

If  the  engine  stalls  or  you  lose  headway  or  cannot 
make  it  to  the  top  of  a steep  hill  or  grade,  never 
attempt  to  turn  around.  To  do  so  may  result  in 
tipping  and  rolling  the  vehicle,  which  may  result  in 
severe  injury.  Always  back  carefully  straight  down  a 
hill  in  REVERSE  gear.  Never  back  down  a hill  in 
NEUTRAL  using  only  the  vehicle  brakes.  Never 
drive  diagonally  across  a hill,  always  drive  straight 
up  or  down. 

Driving  Through  Water 

Extreme  care  should  be  taken  crossing  any  type  of  water. 
Water  crossings  should  be  avoided  if  possible,  and  only 
be  attempted  when  necessary  in  a safe  responsible  man- 
ner. You  should  only  drive  through  areas  which  are 
designated  and  approved.  You  should  tread  lightly  and 
avoid  damage  to  the  environment.  You  should  know 


your  vehicles  abilities  and  be  able  to  recover  it  if  some- 
thing goes  wrong.  You  should  never  stop  or  shut  a 
vehicle  off  when  crossing  deep  water  unless  you  ingested 
water  into  the  engine  air  intake.  If  the  engine  stalls,  do 
not  attempt  to  restart  it.  Determine  if  it  has  ingested 
water  first.  The  key  to  any  crossing  is  low  and  slow.  You 
want  to  use  low  (L  Off-Road  [if  equipped] ) with  the  4WD 
LOCK  engaged  and  proceed  very  slowly  with  a constant 
slow  speed  (3-5  mph  [5-8  km/h]  maximum)  and  light 
throttle.  Keep  the  vehicle  moving;  do  not  try  to  accelerate 
through  the  crossing.  After  crossing  any  water  higher 
than  the  bottom  of  the  axle  differentials,  you  should 
inspect  all  of  the  vehicle  fluids  for  signs  of  water  inges- 
tion. 


/M_  = F=? 


CAUTION! 


Water  ingestion  into  the  transaxle,  transfer  case, 
engine  or  vehicle  interior  can  occur  if  you  drive  too 
fast  or  through  too  deep  of  water.  Water  can  cause 
permanent  damage  to  engine,  driveline  or  other 
vehicle  components  and  your  brakes  will  be  less 
effective  once  wet  and/or  muddy. 

Before  You  Cross  Any  Type  Of  Water 

As  you  approach  any  type  of  water,  you  need  to  deter- 
mine if  you  can  cross  it  safely  and  responsibly.  If  neces- 
sary, get  out  and  walk  through  the  water  or  probe  it  with 
a stick.  You  need  to  be  sure  of  its  depth,  approach  angle, 
current  and  bottom  condition.  Be  careful  of  murky  or 
muddy  waters;  check  for  hidden  obstacles.  Make  sure 
you  will  not  be  intruding  on  any  wildlife,  and  you  can 
recover  the  vehicle  if  necessary.  The  key  to  a safe  crossing 
is  the  water  depth,  current  and  bottom  conditions.  On 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  369 


soft  bottoms,  the  vehicle  will  sink  in,  effectively  increas- 
ing the  water  level  on  the  vehicle.  Be  sure  to  consider  this 
when  determining  the  depth  and  the  ability  to  safely 
cross. 


Crossing  Puddles,  Pools,  Flooded  Areas  Or  Other 
Standing  Water 


Puddles,  pools,  flooded  or  other  standing  water  areas 
normally  contain  murky  or  muddy  waters.  These  water 
types  normally  contain  hidden  obstacles  and  make  it 
difficult  to  determine  an  accurate  water  depth,  approach 
angle,  and  bottom  condition.  Murky  or  muddy  water 
holes  are  where  you  want  to  hook  up  tow  straps  prior  to 
entering.  This  makes  for  a faster,  cleaner  and  easier 
vehicle  recovery.  If  you  are  able  to  determine  you  can 
safely  cross,  than  proceed  using  the  low  and  slow 
method. 


5 


i Provided  by: 


370  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


CAUTION! 

Muddy  waters  can  reduce  the  cooling  system  effec- 
tiveness by  depositing  debris  onto  the  radiator. 

After  Driving  Off-Road 

Off-road  operation  puts  more  stress  on  your  vehicle  than 
does  most  on-road  driving.  After  going  off-road,  it  is 
always  a good  idea  to  check  for  damage.  That  way  you 
can  get  any  problems  taken  care  of  right  away  and  have 
your  vehicle  ready  when  you  need  it. 

• Completely  inspect  the  underbody  of  your  vehicle. 
Check  tires,  body  structure,  steering,  suspension,  and 
exhaust  system  for  damage. 

• Inspect  the  radiator  for  mud  and  debris  and  clean  as 
required. 


• Check  threaded  fasteners  for  looseness,  particularly  on 
the  chassis,  drivetrain  components,  steering,  and  sus- 
pension. Retighten  them,  if  required,  and  torque  to  the 
values  specified  in  the  Service  Manual. 

• Check  for  accumulations  of  plants  or  brush.  These 
things  could  be  a fire  hazard.  They  might  hide  damage 
to  fuel  lines,  brake  hoses,  axle  pinion  seals,  and 
propeller  shafts. 

• After  extended  operation  in  mud,  sand,  water,  or 
similar  dirty  conditions,  have  the  radiator,  fan,  brake 
rotors,  wheels,  brake  linings,  and  axle  yokes  inspected 
and  cleaned  as  soon  as  possible. 


Information  Provided  by: 


WARNING! 


Abrasive  material  in  any  part  of  the  brakes  may  cause 
excessive  wear  or  unpredictable  braking.  You  might 
not  have  full  braking  power  when  you  need  it  to 
prevent  a collision.  If  you  have  been  operating  your 
vehicle  in  dirty  conditions,  get  your  brakes  checked 
and  cleaned  as  necessary. 

• If  you  experience  unusual  vibration  after  driving  in 
mud,  slush  or  similar  conditions,  check  the  wheels  for 
impacted  material.  Impacted  material  can  cause  a 
wheel  imbalance  and  freeing  the  wheels  of  it  will 
correct  the  situation. 

POWER  STEERING 

The  electric  power  steering  system  will  give  you  good 
vehicle  response  and  increased  ease  of  maneuverability 
in  tight  spaces.  The  system  will  vary  its  assist  to  provide 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  371 


light  efforts  while  parking  and  good  feel  while  driving.  If 
the  electric  steering  system  experiences  a fault  that 
prevents  it  from  providing  assist,  you  will  still  have  the 
ability  to  steer  the  vehicle  manually. 


Alternate  electric  power  steering  efforts  can  be  selected 
through  the  Uconnect  System.  Refer  to  "Customer  Pro- 
grammable Features"  within  "Uconnect  Settings"  in  "Un- 
derstanding Your  Instrument  Panel"  for  further  informa- 
tion. 


5 


WARNING! 

Continued  operation  with  reduced  assist  could  pose 
a safety  risk  to  yourself  and  others.  Service  should  be 
obtained  as  soon  as  possible. 


372  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


If  the  Electric  Power  Steering  warning  icon  is 
| displayed  and  the  "SERVICE  POWER  STEER- 
v * ING"  or  the  "POWER  STEERING  ASSIST  OFF 
- SERVICE  SYSTEM"  message  is  displayed 
within  the  Driver  Information  Display  (DID),  this  indi- 
cates the  vehicle  needs  to  be  taken  to  the  dealer  for 
service.  Refer  to  "Driver  Information  Display  (DID)"  in 
"Understanding  Your  Instrument  Panel"  for  further  in- 
formation. 


NOTE: 

• Even  if  the  power  steering  assistance  is  no  longer 
operational,  it  is  still  possible  to  steer  the  vehicle. 
Under  these  conditions  there  will  be  a substantial 
increase  in  steering  effort,  especially  at  low  speeds  and 
during  parking  maneuvers. 

• If  the  condition  persists,  see  your  authorized  dealer  for 
service. 


Power  Steering  Fluid  Check 

Checking  the  power  steering  fluid  level  at  a defined 
service  interval  is  not  required.  The  fluid  should  only  be 
checked  if  a leak  is  suspected,  abnormal  noises  are 
apparent,  and/or  the  system  is  not  functioning  as  antici- 
pated. Coordinate  inspection  efforts  through  an  autho- 
rized dealer. 


CAUTION! 

Do  not  use  chemical  flushes  in  your  power  steering 
system  as  the  chemicals  can  damage  your  power 
steering  components.  Such  damage  is  not  covered  by 
the  New  Vehicle  Limited  Warranty. 


/\i 


WARNING! 


Fluid  level  should  be  checked  on  a level  surface  and 
with  the  engine  off  to  prevent  injury  from  moving 
parts  and  to  ensure  accurate  fluid  level  reading.  Do 
not  overfill.  Use  only  manufacturer's  recommended 
power  steering  fluid. 

If  necessary,  add  fluid  to  restore  to  the  proper  indicated 
level.  With  a clean  cloth,  wipe  any  spilled  fluid  from  all 
surfaces.  Refer  to  "Fluids,  Lubricants,  And  Genuine 
Parts"  in  "Maintaining  Your  Vehicle"  for  further  informa- 
tion. 

PARKING  BRAKE 

Before  leaving  the  vehicle,  make  sure  that  the  parking 
brake  is  fully  applied.  Also,  be  certain  to  leave  an 
automatic  transmission  in  PARK,  or  manual  transmission 
in  REVERSE  or  first  gear. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  373 


The  parking  brake  lever  is  located  in  the  center  console. 
To  apply  the  parking  brake,  pull  the  lever  up  as  firmly  as 
possible.  To  release  the  parking  brake,  pull  the  lever  up 
slightly,  push  the  center  button,  then  lower  the  lever 
completely. 


5 


Parking  Brake 


i Provided  by: 


374  STARTING  AND  OPERATING  1 

When  the  parking  brake  is  applied  with  the  ignition 
switch  in  the  ON  position,  the  "Brake  Warning  Light"  in 
the  instrument  cluster  will  illuminate. 

NOTE: 

• When  the  parking  brake  is  applied  and  the  automatic 
transmission  is  placed  in  gear,  the  "Brake  Warning 
Light"  will  flash.  If  vehicle  speed  is  detected,  a chime 
will  sound  to  alert  the  driver.  Fully  release  the  parking 
brake  before  attempting  to  move  the  vehicle. 

• This  light  only  shows  that  the  parking  brake  is  ap- 
plied. It  does  not  show  the  degree  of  brake  application. 

When  parking  on  a hill,  it  is  important  to  turn  the  front 
wheels  toward  the  curb  on  a downhill  grade  and  away 
from  the  curb  on  an  uphill  grade.  For  vehicles  equipped 
with  an  automatic  transmission,  apply  the  parking  brake 
before  placing  the  shift  lever  in  PARK,  otherwise  the  load 
on  the  transmission  locking  mechanism  may  make  it 


difficult  to  move  the  shift  lever  out  of  PARK.  The  parking 
brake  should  always  be  applied  whenever  the  driver  is 
not  in  the  vehicle. 


WARNING! 

• When  leaving  the  vehicle,  always  remove  the  Key 
Fob  from  the  ignition  and  lock  your  vehicle. 

• Never  leave  children  alone  in  a vehicle,  or  with 
access  to  an  unlocked  vehicle. 

• Allowing  children  to  be  in  a vehicle  unattended  is 
dangerous  for  a number  of  reasons.  A child  or 
others  could  be  seriously  or  fatally  injured.  Chil- 
dren should  be  warned  not  to  touch  the  parking 
brake,  brake  pedal  or  the  gear  selector. 

• Do  not  leave  the  Key  Fob  in  or  near  the  vehicle,  or  in 
a location  accessible  to  children.  A child  could  operate 
power  windows,  other  controls,  or  move  the  vehicle. 


/\L 


(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Be  sure  the  parking  brake  is  fully  disengaged 
before  driving;  failure  to  do  so  can  lead  to  brake 
failure  and  a collision. 

• Always  fully  apply  the  parking  brake  when  leav- 
ing your  vehicle  or  it  may  roll  and  cause  damage  or 
injury.  Also,  be  certain  to  leave  an  automatic  trans- 
mission in  PARK,  a manual  transmission  in  RE- 
VERSE or  first  gear.  Failure  to  do  so  may  cause  the 
vehicle  to  roll  and  cause  damage  or  injury. 


CAUTION! 

If  the  Brake  System  Warning  Light  remains  on  with 
the  parking  brake  released,  a brake  system  malfunc- 
tion is  indicated.  Have  the  brake  system  serviced  by 
an  authorized  dealer  immediately. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  375 

BRAKE  SYSTEM 

Your  vehicle  is  equipped  with  power  assisted  brakes  as 
standard  equipment.  In  the  event  power  assist  is  lost  for 
any  reason  (for  example,  repeated  brake  applications 
with  the  engine  off),  the  brakes  will  still  function.  How- 
ever, the  effort  required  to  brake  the  vehicle  will  be  much 
greater  than  that  required  with  the  power  system  oper- 
ating. 


WARNING! 

Riding  the  brakes  can  lead  to  brake  failure  and 
possibly  a collision.  Driving  with  your  foot  resting  or 
riding  on  the  brake  pedal  can  result  in  abnormally 
high  brake  temperatures,  excessive  lining  wear,  and 
possible  brake  damage.  You  would  not  have  your  full 
braking  capacity  in  an  emergency. 


376  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


If  either  of  the  two  hydraulic  systems  lose  normal  capa- 
bility, the  remaining  system  will  still  function  with  some 
loss  of  overall  braking  effectiveness.  This  will  be  evident 
by  increased  pedal  travel  during  application  and  greater 
pedal  force  required  to  slow  or  stop.  In  addition,  if  the 
malfunction  is  caused  by  an  internal  leak,  as  the  brake 
fluid  in  the  master  cylinder  drops,  the  "Brake  Warning 
Light"  will  light. 


WARNING! 

Driving  a vehicle  with  the  "Brake  Warning  Light"  on 
is  dangerous.  A significant  decrease  in  braking  per- 
formance or  vehicle  stability  during  braking  may 
occur.  It  will  take  you  longer  to  stop  the  vehicle  or 
will  make  your  vehicle  harder  to  control.  You  could 
have  a collision.  Have  the  vehicle  checked  immedi- 
ately. 


ELECTRONIC  BRAKE  CONTROL  SYSTEM 

Your  vehicle  is  equipped  with  an  advanced  Electronic 
Brake  Control  system  (EBC).  This  system  includes  Elec- 
tronic Brake  Force  Distribution  (EBD),  Anti-Lock  Brake 
System  (ABS),  Brake  Assist  System  (BAS),  Hill  Start  Assist 
(HSA),  Traction  Control  System  (TCS),  Electronic  Stability 
Control  (ESC),  and  Electronic  Roll  Mitigation  (ERM).  These 
systems  work  together  to  enhance  both  vehicle  stability 
and  control  in  various  driving  conditions. 

Your  vehicle  may  also  be  equipped  with  Hill  Descent 
Control  (HDC). 

Electronic  Brake  Force  Distribution  (EBD) 

This  function  manages  the  distribution  of  the  braking 
torque  between  the  front  and  rear  axles  by  limiting  braking 
pressure  to  the  rear  axle.  This  is  done  to  prevent  overslip  of 
the  rear  wheels  to  avoid  vehicle  instability,  and  to  prevent 
the  rear  axle  from  entering  ABS  before  the  front  axle. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  377 


Brake  System  Warning  Light 

The  red  "Brake  System  Warning  Light"  will  turn  on  when 
the  ignition  switch  is  turned  to  the  ON  position  and  may 
stay  on  for  as  long  as  four  seconds. 

If  the  "Brake  System  Warning  Light"  remains  on  or 
comes  on  while  driving,  it  indicates  that  the  brake  system 
is  not  functioning  properly  and  that  immediate  service  is 
required.  If  the  "Brake  System  Warning  Light"  does  not 
come  on  when  the  ignition  switch  is  turned  to  the  ON 
position,  have  the  light  repaired  as  soon  as  possible. 

Anti-Lock  Brake  System  (ABS) 

The  Anti-Lock  Brake  System  (ABS)  provides  increased 
vehicle  stability  and  brake  performance  under  most 
braking  conditions.  The  system  automatically  prevents 
wheel  lock,  and  enhances  vehicle  control  during  braking. 

The  ABS  performs  a self-check  cycle  to  ensure  that  the 
ABS  is  working  properly  each  time  the  vehicle  is  started 


and  driven.  During  this  self -check  you  may  hear  a slight 
clicking  sound  as  well  as  some  related  motor  noises. 

ABS  is  activated  during  braking  when  the  system  detects 
one  or  more  wheels  begins  to  lock.  Road  conditions  such 
as  ice,  snow,  gravel,  bumps,  railroad  tracks,  loose  debris, 
or  panic  stops  may  increase  the  likelihood  of  ABS  activa- 
tion^). 

You  also  may  experience  the  following  when  ABS  acti- 
vates: 

• The  ABS  motor  noise  (it  may  continue  to  run  for  a 
short  time  after  the  stop). 

• The  clicking  sound  of  solenoid  valves. 

• Brake  pedal  pulsations. 

• A slight  drop  of  the  brake  pedal  at  the  end  of  the  stop. 
These  are  all  normal  characteristics  of  ABS. 


378  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


WARNING! 

• The  ABS  contains  sophisticated  electronic  equip- 
ment that  may  be  susceptible  to  interference 
caused  by  improperly  installed  or  high  output 
radio  transmitting  equipment.  This  interference 
can  cause  possible  loss  of  anti-lock  braking  capa- 
bility. Installation  of  such  equipment  should  be 
performed  by  qualified  professionals. 

• Pumping  of  the  Anti-Lock  Brakes  will  diminish 
their  effectiveness  and  may  lead  to  a collision. 
Pumping  makes  the  stopping  distance  longer.  Just 
press  firmly  on  your  brake  pedal  when  you  need  to 
slow  down  or  stop. 


(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• The  ABS  cannot  prevent  the  natural  laws  of  phys- 
ics from  acting  on  the  vehicle,  nor  can  it  increase 
braking  or  steering  efficiency  beyond  that  afforded 
by  the  condition  of  the  vehicle  brakes  and  tires  or 
the  traction  afforded. 

• The  ABS  cannot  prevent  collisions,  including  those 
resulting  from  excessive  speed  in  turns,  following 
another  vehicle  too  closely,  or  hydroplaning. 

• The  capabilities  of  an  ABS  equipped  vehicle  must 
never  be  exploited  in  a reckless  or  dangerous 
manner  that  could  jeopardize  the  user's  safety  or 
the  safety  of  others. 

ABS  is  designed  to  function  with  the  OEM  tires.  Modifi- 
cation may  result  in  degraded  ABS  performance. 


C: 


I = 


/NL 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  379 


Anti-Lock  Brake  Warning  Light 


Brake  Assist  System  (BAS) 


The  amber  "Anti-Lock  Brake  Warning  Light"  will  turn  on 
when  the  ignition  switch  is  turned  to  the  ON  position 
and  may  stay  on  for  as  long  as  four  seconds. 

If  the  "Anti-Lock  Brake  Warning  Light"  remains  on  or 
comes  on  while  driving,  it  indicates  that  the  anti-lock 
portion  of  the  brake  system  is  not  functioning  and  that 
service  is  required.  However,  the  conventional  brake 
system  will  continue  to  operate  normally  if  the  "Brake 
System  Warning  Light"  is  not  on. 

If  the  "Anti-Lock  Brake  Warning  Light"  is  on,  the  brake 
system  should  be  serviced  as  soon  as  possible  to  restore 
the  benefits  of  anti-lock  brakes.  If  the  "Anti-Lock  Brake 
Warning  Light"  does  not  come  on  when  the  ignition 
switch  is  turned  to  the  ON  position,  have  the  light 
repaired  as  soon  as  possible. 


The  BAS  is  designed  to  optimize  the  vehicle's  braking 
capability  during  emergency  braking  maneuvers.  The 
system  detects  an  emergency  braking  situation  by  sens- 
ing the  rate  and  amount  of  brake  application  and  then 
applies  optimum  pressure  to  the  brakes.  This  can  help 
reduce  braking  distances.  The  BAS  complements  the 
anti-lock  brake  system  (ABS).  Applying  the  brakes  very 
quickly  results  in  the  best  BAS  assistance.  To  receive  the 
benefit  of  the  system,  you  must  apply  continuous  brak- 
ing pressure  during  the  stopping  sequence,  (do  not 
"pump"  the  brakes).  Do  not  reduce  brake  pedal  pressure 
unless  braking  is  no  longer  desired.  Once  the  brake  pedal 
is  released,  the  BAS  is  deactivated. 


5 


Information  Provided  by: 


380  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


WARNING! 

The  Brake  Assist  System  (BAS)  cannot  prevent  the 
natural  laws  of  physics  from  acting  on  the  vehicle, 
nor  can  it  increase  the  traction  afforded  by  prevailing 
road  conditions.  BAS  cannot  prevent  collisions,  in- 
cluding those  resulting  from  excessive  speed  in 
turns,  driving  on  very  slippery  surfaces,  or  hydro- 
planing. The  capabilities  of  a BAS-equipped  vehicle 
must  never  be  exploited  in  a reckless  or  dangerous 
manner,  which  could  jeopardize  the  user's  safety  or 
the  safety  of  others. 

Hill  Start  Assist  (HSA) 

The  HSA  system  is  designed  to  mitigate  roll  back  from  a 
complete  stop  while  on  an  incline.  If  the  driver  releases 
the  brake  while  stopped  on  an  incline,  HSA  will  continue 
to  hold  the  brake  pressure  for  a short  period.  If  the  driver 


does  not  apply  the  throttle  before  this  time  expires,  the 
system  will  release  brake  pressure  and  the  vehicle  will 
roll  down  the  hill  as  normal. 

The  following  conditions  must  be  met  in  order  for  HSA  to 
activate: 

• The  feature  must  be  enabled. 

• The  vehicle  must  be  stopped. 

• Park  brake  must  be  off. 

• Driver  door  must  be  closed. 

• The  vehicle  must  be  on  a sufficient  grade. 

• The  gear  selection  must  match  vehicle  uphill  direction 
(i.e.,  vehicle  facing  uphill  is  in  forward  gear;  vehicle 
backing  uphill  is  in  REVERSE  gear). 

• HSA  will  work  in  REVERSE  gear  and  all  forward 
gears.  The  system  will  not  activate  if  the  transmission 


is  in  PARK  or  NEUTRAL.  For  vehicles  equipped  with 
a manual  transmission  if  the  clutch  is  pressed  HSA  will 
remain  active. 


WARNING! 

There  may  be  situations  where  the  Hill  Start  Assist 
(HSA)  will  not  activate  and  slight  rolling  may  occur, 
such  as  on  minor  hills  or  with  a loaded  vehicle,  or 
while  pulling  a trailer.  HSA  is  not  a substitute  for 
active  driving  involvement.  It  is  always  the  driver's 
responsibility  to  be  attentive  to  distance  to  other 
vehicles,  people,  and  objects,  and  most  importantly 
brake  operation  to  ensure  safe  operation  of  the  ve- 
hicle under  all  road  conditions.  Your  complete  atten- 
tion is  always  required  while  driving  to  maintain 
safe  control  of  your  vehicle.  Failure  to  follow  these 
warnings  can  result  in  a collision  or  serious  personal 
injury. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  381 


Towing  With  HSA 

HSA  will  also  provide  assistance  to  mitigate  roll  back 
while  towing  a trailer. 

WARNING! 

• If  you  use  a trailer  brake  controller  with  your 
trailer,  the  trailer  brakes  may  be  activated  and 
deactivated  with  the  brake  switch.  If  so,  there  may 
not  be  enough  brake  pressure  to  hold  both  the 
vehicle  and  the  trailer  on  a hill  when  the  brake 
pedal  is  released.  In  order  to  avoid  rolling  down  an 
incline  while  resuming  acceleration,  manually  ac- 
tivate the  trailer  brake  or  apply  more  vehicle  brake 
pressure  prior  to  releasing  the  brake  pedal. 

• HSA  is  not  a parking  brake.  Always  apply  the 
parking  brake  fully  when  leaving  your  vehicle. 
Also,  be  certain  to  leave  the  transmission  in  PARK. 


ovlded  by 


(Continued) 


382  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Failure  to  follow  these  warnings  can  result  in  a 
collision  or  serious  personal  injury. 

Disabling  And  Enabling  HSA 

This  feature  can  be  turned  on  or  turned  off.  To  change  the 

current  setting,  proceed  as  follows: 

• For  vehicles  equipped  with  the  Electronic  Vehicle 
Information  Center  (EVIC),  refer  to  "Electronic  Vehicle 
Information  Center  (EVIC)"  in  "Understanding  Your 
Instrument  Panel"  for  further  information. 

• If  disabling  HSA  using  Uconnect  Settings,  refer  to 
"Uconnect  Settings"  in  "Understanding  Your  Instru- 
ment Panel"  for  further  information. 


For  vehicles  not  equipped  with  the  EVIC,  perform  the 

following  steps: 

1.  Center  the  steering  wheel  (front  wheels  pointing 
straight  forward). 

2.  Shift  the  transmission  into  PARK. 

3.  Apply  the  parking  brake. 

4.  Start  the  engine. 

5.  Rotate  the  steering  wheel  slightly  more  than  one-half 
turn  to  the  left. 

6.  Push  the  "ESC  Off"  button  located  in  the  lower  switch 
bank  below  the  climate  control  four  times  within 
twenty  seconds.  The  "ESC  Off  Indicator  Light"  should 
turn  on  and  turn  off  two  times. 

7.  Rotate  the  steering  wheel  back  to  center  and  then  an 
additional  slighty  more  than  one-half  turn  to  the  right. 


/M_  = ?=R 


8.  Turn  the  ignition  switch  to  the  OFF  position  and  then 
back  to  the  ON  position.  If  the  sequence  was  com- 
pleted properly,  the  "ESC  Off  Indicator  Light"  will 
blink  several  times  to  confirm  HSA  is  disabled. 

9.  Repeat  these  steps  if  you  want  to  return  this  feature  to 
its  previous  setting. 

Traction  Control  System  (TCS) 

This  system  monitors  the  amount  of  wheel  spin  of  each  of 
the  driven  wheels.  If  wheel  spin  is  detected,  the  TCS  may 
apply  brake  pressure  to  the  spinning  wheel(s)  and/or 
reduce  engine  power  to  provide  enhanced  acceleration 
and  stability.  A feature  of  the  TCS,  Brake  Limited  Differ- 
ential (BLD),  functions  similar  to  a limited  slip  differen- 
tial and  controls  the  wheel  spin  across  a driven  axle.  If 
one  wheel  on  a driven  axle  is  spinning  faster  than  the 
other,  the  system  will  apply  the  brake  of  the  spinning 
wheel.  This  will  allow  more  engine  torque  to  be  applied 
to  the  wheel  that  is  not  spinning.  BLD  may  remain 
enabled  even  if  TCS  and  ESC  are  in  a reduced  mode. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  383 


Electronic  Stability  Control  (ESC) 

This  system  enhances  directional  control  and  stability  of 
the  vehicle  under  various  driving  conditions.  ESC  cor- 
rects for  over-steering  or  under-steering  of  the  vehicle  by 
applying  the  brake  of  the  appropriate  wheel  to  assist  in 
counteracting  the  over-steering  or  under-steering  condi- 
tion. Engine  power  may  also  be  reduced  to  help  the 
vehicle  maintain  the  desired  path.  ESC  uses  sensors  in 
the  vehicle  to  determine  the  vehicle  path  intended  by  the 
driver  and  compares  it  to  the  actual  path  of  the  vehicle. 
When  the  actual  path  does  not  match  the  intended  path, 
ESC  applies  the  brake  of  the  appropriate  wheel  to  assist 
in  counteracting  the  over-steer  or  under-steer  condition 

• Oversteer  - when  the  vehicle  is  turning  more  than 
appropriate  for  the  steering  wheel  position. 

• Understeer  - when  the  vehicle  is  turning  less  than 
appropriate  for  the  steering  wheel  position. 


384  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


WARNING! 

• The  Electronic  Stability  Control  (ESC)  cannot  pre- 
vent the  natural  laws  of  physics  from  acting  on  the 
vehicle,  nor  can  it  increase  the  traction  afforded  by 
prevailing  road  conditions. 

• ESC  cannot  prevent  accidents,  including  those  re- 
sulting from  excessive  speed  in  turns,  driving  on 
very  slippery  surfaces,  or  hydroplaning.  ESC  also 
cannot  prevent  collisions  resulting  from  loss  of 
vehicle  control  due  to  inappropriate  driver  input 
for  the  conditions.  Only  a safe,  attentive,  and 
skillful  driver  can  prevent  collisions. 

• The  capabilities  of  an  ESC-equipped  vehicle  must 
never  be  exploited  in  a reckless  or  dangerous 
manner,  which  could  jeopardize  the  user's  safety  or 
the  safety  of  others 


(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Vehicle  modifications,  or  failure  to  properly  main- 
tain your  vehicle,  may  change  the  handling  charac- 
teristics of  your  vehicle,  and  may  negatively  affect 
the  performance  of  the  ESC  system.  Changes  to  the 
steering  system,  suspension,  braking  system,  tire 
type  and  size  or  wheel  size  may  adversely  affect  ESC 
performance.  Improperly  inflated  and  unevenly 
worn  tires  may  also  degrade  ESC  performance.  Any 
vehicle  modification  or  poor  vehicle  maintenance 
that  reduces  the  effectiveness  of  the  ESC  system  can 
increase  the  risk  of  loss  of  vehicle  control,  vehicle 
rollover,  personal  injury  and  death. 

ESC  Operating  Modes 

The  ESC  system  has  three  available  operating  modes  for 
four-wheel  drive  equipped  vehicles  and  two  available 
operating  modes  for  two-wheel  drive  equipped  vehicles. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  385 


Full  On  (Four-Wheel  Drive  Models)  Or  On  (Two-Wheel 
Drive  Models) 

This  is  the  normal  operating  mode  for  ESC.  Whenever 
the  vehicle  is  started  the  ESC  system  will  be  in  this  "On" 
mode.  This  mode  should  be  used  for  most  driving 
situations.  ESC  should  only  be  turned  to  "Partial  Off"  or 
"ESC  Off"  for  specific  reasons  as  noted  below. 

Partial  Off  (Four-Wheel  Drive  Models)  Or  On  (Two- 
Wheel  Drive  Models) 

This  mode  is  entered  by  momentarily  pushing  the  "ESC 
Off"  switch.  When  in  "Partial  Off"  mode,  the  TCS  portion 
of  ESC,  except  for  the  "limited  slip"  feature  described  in 
the  TCS  section,  has  been  disabled  and  the  "ESC  OFF 
Indicator  Light"  will  be  illuminated.  All  other  stability 
features  of  ESC  function  normally.  This  mode  is  intended 
to  be  used  if  the  vehicle  is  in  deep  snow,  sand  or  gravel 
conditions  and  more  wheel  spin  than  ESC  would  nor- 
mally allow  is  required  to  gain  traction. 


To  turn  ESC  on  again,  momentarily  push  the  "ESC  Off" 
switch.  This  will  restore  the  normal  "ESC  On"  mode  of 
operation. 

NOTE:  To  improve  the  vehicle's  traction  when  driving 
with  snow  chains,  or  starting  off  in  deep  snow,  sand  or 
gravel,  it  may  be  desirable  to  switch  to  the  "Partial  Off" 
mode  by  pushing  the  "ESC  Off"  switch.  Once  the  situa- 
tion requiring  ESC  to  be  switched  to  the  "Partial  Off" 
mode  is  overcome,  turn  ESC  back  on  by  momentarily 
pushing  the  "ESC  Off"  switch.  This  may  be  done  while 
the  vehicle  is  in  motion. 


386  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


WARNING! 

When  in  "Partial  Off"  mode,  the  TCS  functionality  of 
ESC  (except  for  the  limited  slip  feature  described  in 
the  TCS  section)  has  been  disabled  and  the  "ESC  Off 
Indicator  Light"  will  be  illuminated.  When  in  "Par- 
tial Off"  mode,  the  engine  power  reduction  of  TCS  is 
disabled,  and  the  enhanced  vehicle  stability  offered 
by  the  ESC  system  is  reduced.  Trailer  Sway  control 
(TSC)  (if  equipped)  is  disabled  when  the  ESC  system 
is  in  the  "Partial  Off"  mode. 


Full  Off  (Four-Wheel  Drive  Models  Only) 

This  mode  is  intended  for  off-highway  or  off-road  use 
when  ESC  stability  features  could  inhibit  vehicle  maneu- 
verability due  to  trail  conditions.  This  mode  is  entered  by 
pushing  and  holding  the  "ESC  Off"  switch  for  five 
seconds  when  the  vehicle  is  stopped  and  the  engine  is 
running.  After  five  seconds,  the  "ESC  OFF  Indicator 


Light"  will  illuminate  and  the  "ESC  OFF"  message  will 
appear  in  the  odometer.  Push  and  release  the  Trip  Odom- 
eter button  located  on  the  instrument  cluster  to  clear  this 
message. 

In  this  mode,  ESC  and  TCS,  except  for  the  "limited  slip" 
feature  described  in  the  TCS  section,  are  turned  off  until 
the  vehicle  reaches  a speed  of  35  mph  (56  km/h).  At 
35  mph  (56  km/h)  the  system  returns  to  "Partial  Off" 
mode,  as  described  above.  TCS  remains  off.  When  the 
vehicle  speed  drops  below  30  mph  (48  km/h)  the  ESC 
system  shuts  off.  ESC  is  deactivated  at  low  vehicle  speeds 
so  that  it  will  not  interfere  with  off-road  driving  however, 
ESC  function  returns  to  provide  the  stability  feature  at 
speeds  above  35  mph  (56  km/h).  The  "ESC  OFF  Indicator 
Light"  will  always  be  illuminated  when  ESC  is  off. 

To  turn  ESC  on  again,  momentarily  push  the  "ESC  Off" 
switch.  This  will  restore  the  "ESC  On"  mode  of  operation. 


i Provided  by: 

/M_  = F=? 


NOTE:  The  "ESC  OFF"  message  will  display  and  an 
audible  chime  will  sound  when  the  shift  lever  is  placed 
into  the  PARK  position  from  any  other  position,  and  then 
moved  out  of  the  PARK  position.  This  will  occur  even  if 
the  message  was  previously  cleared. 


WARNING! 

With  the  ESC  in  the  "Full  Off"  mode,  the  engine 
torque  reduction  and  stability  features  are  disabled. 
In  an  emergency  evasive  maneuver,  the  ESC  system 
will  not  engage  to  assist  in  maintaining  stability. 
"ESC  Off"  mode  is  intended  for  off-highway  or 
off-road  use  only. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  387 


ESC  Activation/Malfunction  Indicator  Light  And 
ESC  OFF  Indicator  Light 


The  "ESC  Activation/Malfunction  Indicator 
Light”  in  the  instrument  cluster  will  come  on 
when  the  ignition  switch  is  cycled  to  the  ON/ 
RUN  position.  It  should  go  out  with  the  engine 
running.  If  the  "ESC  Activation/Malfunction  Indicator 
Light"  comes  on  continuously  with  the  engine  running,  a 
malfunction  has  been  detected  in  the  ESC  system.  If  this 
light  remains  on  after  several  ignition  cycles,  and  the 
vehicle  has  been  driven  several  miles  (kilometers)  at 
speeds  greater  than  30  mph  (48  km/h),  see  your  autho- 
rized dealer  as  soon  as  possible  to  have  the  problem 
diagnosed  and  corrected. 


The  "ESC  Activation/Malfunction  Indicator  Light"  (lo- 
cated in  the  instrument  cluster)  starts  to  flash  as  soon  as 
the  tires  lose  traction  and  the  ESC  system  becomes  active. 


388  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 

The  "ESC  Activation/Malfunction  Indicator  Light"  also 
flashes  when  TCS  is  active.  If  the  "ESC  Activation/ 
Malfunction  Indicator  Light"  begins  to  flash  during  ac- 
celeration, ease  up  on  the  accelerator  and  apply  as  little 
throttle  as  possible.  Be  sure  to  adapt  your  speed  and 
driving  to  the  prevailing  road  conditions. 

NOTE: 

• The  "ESC  Off  Indicator  Light"  and  the  "ESC 
Activation/Malfunction  Indicator  Light"  come  on  mo- 
mentarily each  time  the  ignition  switch  is  placed  in  the 
ON  /RUN  position. 

• Each  time  the  ignition  is  cycled  to  the  ON/RUN 
position,  the  ESC  system  will  be  ON  even  if  it  was 
cycled  off  previously,  except  for  when  the  vehicle  is 
started  while  in  4L  Range. 

• The  ESC  system  will  make  buzzing  or  clicking  sounds 
when  it  is  active.  This  is  normal;  the  sounds  will  stop 


when  ESC  becomes  inactive  following  the  maneuver 
that  caused  the  ESC  activation. 


^ The  "ESC  OFF  Indicator  Light"  indicates  the 
^ Electronic  Stability  Control  (ESC)  is  partially 
^ off  or  full  off. 

Electronic  Roll  Mitigation  (ERM) 

This  system  anticipates  the  potential  for  wheel  lift  by 
monitoring  the  driver's  steering  wheel  input  and  the 
speed  of  the  vehicle.  When  ERM  determines  that  the  rate 
of  change  of  the  steering  wheel  angle  and  vehicle's  speed 
are  sufficient  to  potentially  cause  wheel  lift,  it  then 
applies  the  appropriate  brake  and  may  also  reduce 
engine  power  to  lessen  the  chance  that  wheel  lift  will 
occur.  ERM  can  only  reduce  the  chance  of  wheel  lift 
occurring  during  severe  or  evasive  driving  maneuvers;  it 


/XL 


cannot  prevent  wheel  lift  due  to  other  factors,  such  as 
road  conditions,  leaving  the  roadway,  or  striking  objects 
or  other  vehicles. 

NOTE:  ERM  is  disabled  anytime  the  ESC  is  in  "Full  Off" 
mode  (if  equipped).  Refer  to  "Electronic  Stability  Control 
(ESC)"  in  this  section  for  a complete  explanation  of  the 
available  ESC  modes. 


WARNING! 

Many  factors,  such  as  vehicle  loading,  road  condi- 
tions and  driving  conditions,  influence  the  chance 
that  wheel  lift  or  rollover  may  occur.  ERM  cannot 
prevent  all  wheel  lift  or  roll  overs,  especially  those 
that  involve  leaving  the  roadway  or  striking  objects 
or  other  vehicles.  The  capabilities  of  an  ERM- 
equipped  vehicle  must  never  be  exploited  in  a reck- 
less or  dangerous  manner  which  could  jeopardize  the 
user's  safety  or  the  safety  of  others. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  389 


Hill  Descent  Control  (HDC)  — If  Equipped 


This  system  maintains  vehicle  speed  while  descending 
hills  during  off-road  driving  situations.  HDC  will  auto- 
matically apply  the  brakes  to  control  downhill  speed  to 
between  4 mph  (7  km/h)  and  6 mph  (9  km/h)  depending 
on  terrain.  The  system  is  activated  by  placing  the  vehicle 
in  "Off-Road"  mode  and  placing  the  shift  lever  in  LOW 
or  REVERSE.  Refer  to  "Safe  Off-Road  Driving"  in  "Start- 
ing And  Operating"  for  further  information. 


5 


When  HDC  is  properly  enabled,  the  "Hill 
Decent  Control  Light"  in  the  instrument  cluster 
will  be  illuminated. 


HDC  has  the  capability  to  sense  terrain  and  will  only 
activate  when  the  vehicle  is  descending  a hill.  It  will  not 
activate  on  level  ground.  If  desired,  HDC  can  be  fully 
deactivated  by  putting  the  vehicle  into  ESC  "Full  Off" 
mode.  This  is  done  by  pushing  and  holding  the  "ESC 


i Provided  by: 


390  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


Off"  button  for  five  seconds.  Refer  to  "Electronic  Stability 
Control  (ESC)"  in  this  section  of  the  manual. 

HDC  operation  can  be  overridden  with  brake  application 
to  slow  the  vehicle  down  below  the  HDC  control  speed. 
Conversely,  if  more  speed  is  desired  during  HDC  control, 
the  accelerator  pedal  will  increase  vehicle  speed  like 
normal.  When  either  the  brake  or  the  accelerator  is 
released,  HDC  will  control  the  vehicle  back  to  the  origi- 
nal set  speed. 

HDC  is  only  intended  for  low  speed  off-road  driving.  At 
vehicle  speeds  above  31  mph  (50  km/h)  HDC  will  no 
longer  function.  If  the  "HDC  Indicator  Light"  begins  to 
flash  this  indicates  that  the  brakes  are  getting  too  hot  and 
the  vehicle  should  be  stopped  to  allow  the  brakes  to  cool. 


WARNING! 

HDC  is  only  intended  to  assist  the  driver  in  control- 
ling vehicle  speed  when  descending  hills.  The  driver 
must  remain  attentive  to  the  driving  conditions  and 
is  responsible  for  maintaining  a safe  vehicle  speed. 


Information  Provided  b 


TIRE  SAFETY  INFORMATION 


Tire  Markings 


1 — U.S.  DOT  Safety  Standards  4 — Maximum  Load 
Code  (TIN) 

2 — Size  Designation  5 — Maximum  Pressure 

3 — Service  Description  6 — Treadwear,  Traction  and 

Temperature  Grades 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  391 


NOTE: 


• P (Passenger)  — Metric  tire  sizing  is  based  on  U.S. 
design  standards.  P-Metric  tires  have  the  letter  "P" 
molded  into  the  sidewall  preceding  the  size  designa- 
tion. Example:  P215/65R15  95H. 


• European  — Metric  tire  sizing  is  based  on  European 
design  standards.  Tires  designed  to  this  standard  have 
the  tire  size  molded  into  the  sidewall  beginning  with 
the  section  width.  The  letter  "P"  is  absent  from  this  tire 
size  designation.  Example:  215/65R15  96H. 


5 


• LT  (Light  Truck)  — Metric  tire  sizing  is  based  on  U.S. 
design  standards.  The  size  designation  for  LT-Metric 
tires  is  the  same  as  for  P-Metric  tires  except  for  the 
letters  "LT"  that  are  molded  into  the  sidewall  preced- 
ing the  size  designation.  Example:  LT235/85R16. 


:ai_sr 


392  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 

• Temporary  spare  tires  are  designed  for  temporary  • High  flotation  tire  sizing  is  based  on  U.S.  design 
emergency  use  only  Temporary  high  pressure  com-  standards  and  it  begins  with  the  tire  diameter  molded 
pact  spare  tires  have  the  letter  "T"  or  "S"  molded  into  into  the  sidewall.  Example:  31x10.5  R15  LT. 
the  sidewall  preceding  the  size  designation.  Example: 

T145/80D18  103M. 

Tire  Sizing  Chart 

EXAMPLE: 

Example  Size  Designation:  P215/65R15XL  95H,  215/65R15  96H,  LT235/85R16C,  T145/80D18  103M,  31x10.5  R15  LT 

P = Passenger  car  tire  size  based  on  U.S.  design  standards,  or 
"....blank.../'  = Passenger  car  tire  based  on  European  design  standards,  or 
LT  = Light  truck  tire  based  on  U.S.  design  standards,  or 
T or  S = Temporary  spare  tire  or 
31  = Overall  diameter  in  inches  (in) 

215,  235,  145  = Section  width  in  millimeters  (mm) 

65,  85,  80  = Aspect  ratio  in  percent  (%) 

- Ratio  of  section  height  to  section  width  of  tire,  or 
10.5  = Section  width  in  inches  (in) 

QdsaTsr 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  393 


EXAMPLE: 

R = Construction  code 

- "R"  means  radial  construction,  or 

- "D"  means  diagonal  or  bias  construction 
15, 16, 18  = Rim  diameter  in  inches  (in) 

Service  Description: 

95  = Load  Index 

- A numerical  code  associated  with  the  maximum  load  a tire  can  carry 
H = Speed  Symbol 

- A symbol  indicating  the  range  of  speeds  at  which  a tire  can  carry  a load  corresponding  to 
its  load  index  under  certain  operating  conditions 

- The  maximum  speed  corresponding  to  the  speed  symbol  should  only  be  achieved  under 
specified  operating  conditions  (i.e.,  tire  pressure,  vehicle  loading,  road  conditions,  and 
posted  speed  limits) 


5 


Information  Provided  by: 


394  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


EXAMPLE: 

Load  Identification: 

Absence  of  the  following  load  identification  symbols  on  the  sidewall  of  the  tire  indicates  a Standard  Load  (SL) 
tire: 

• XL  = Extra  load  (or  reinforced)  tire,  or 

• LL  = Light  load  tire  or 

• C,  D,  E,  F,  G = Load  range  associated  with  the  maximum  load  a tire  can  carry  at  a specified  pressure 
Maximum  Load  - Maximum  load  indicates  the  maximum  load  this  tire  is  designed  to  carry 

Maximum  Pressure  - Maximum  pressure  indicates  the  maximum  permissible  cold  tire  inflation  pressure  for  this 
tire 

Tire  Identification  Number  (TIN) 

The  TIN  may  be  found  on  one  or  both  sides  of  the  tire, 
however,  the  date  code  may  only  be  on  one  side.  Tires 
with  white  sidewalls  will  have  the  full  TIN,  including  the 
date  code,  located  on  the  white  sidewall  side  of  the  tire. 


— Information  Provided  by: 

= = 


Look  for  the  TIN  on  the  outboard  side  of  black  sidewall 
tires  as  mounted  on  the  vehicle.  If  the  TIN  is  not  found  on 
the  outboard  side,  then  you  will  find  it  on  the  inboard 
side  of  the  tire. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  395 


EXAMPLE: 

DOT  MA  L9  ABCD  0301 

DOT  = Department  of  Transportation 

- This  symbol  certifies  that  the  tire  is  in  compliance  with  the  U.S.  Department  of  Transportation  tire 
safety  standards  and  is  approved  for  highway  use 

MA  = Code  representing  the  tire  manufacturing  location  (two  digits) 

L9  = Code  representing  the  tire  size  (two  digits) 

ABCD  = Code  used  by  the  tire  manufacturer  (one  to  four  digits) 

03  = Number  representing  the  week  in  which  the  tire  was  manufactured  (two  digits) 

- 03  means  the  3rd  week 

01  = Number  representing  the  year  in  which  the  tire  was  manufactured  (two  digits) 

- 01  means  the  year  2001 

- Prior  to  July  2000,  tire  manufacturers  were  only  required  to  have  one  number  to  represent  the  year 
in  which  the  tire  was  manufactured.  Example:  031  could  represent  the  3rd  week  of  1981  or  1991 


5 


Information  Provided  by: 


396  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


Tire  Terminology  And  Definitions 


Term 

Definition 

B-Pillar 

The  vehicle  B-Pillar  is  the  structural  member  of  the  body  located 
behind  the  front  door. 

Cold  Tire  Inflation  Pressure 

Cold  tire  inflation  pressure  is  defined  as  the  tire  pressure  after 
the  vehicle  has  not  been  driven  for  at  least  three  hours,  or  driven 
less  than  1 mile  (1.6  km)  after  sitting  for  a minimum  of  three 
hours.  Inflation  pressure  is  measured  in  units  of  PSI  (pounds  per 
square  inch)  or  kPa  (kilopascals). 

Maximum  Inflation  Pressure 

The  maximum  inflation  pressure  is  the  maximum  permissible 
cold  tire  inflation  pressure  for  this  tire.  The  maximum  inflation 
pressure  is  molded  into  the  sidewall. 

Recommended  Cold  Tire  Inflation  Pres- 

Vehicle  manufacturer's  recommended  cold  tire  inflation  pressure 

sure 

as  shown  on  the  tire  placard. 

Tire  Placard 

A label  permanently  attached  to  the  vehicle  describing  the  vehi- 
cle's loading  capacity,  the  original  equipment  tire  sizes  and  the 
recommended  cold  tire  inflation  pressures. 

Tire  Loading  And  Tire  Pressure 

Tire  And  Loading  Information  Placard  Location 

NOTE:  The  proper  cold  tire  inflation  pressure  is  listed  on 
the  driver's  side  B-Pillar  or  the  rear  edge  of  the  driver's 
side  door. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  397 


Example  Tire  Placard  Location  (Door) 


398  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


Tire  And  Loading  Information  Placard 


Example  Tire  Placard  Location  (B-Pillar) 


32 

SEATING  CAPACITY 


TOTAL  5 FRONT  2 


REAR  3 


THE  COMBINED  WEIGHT  OF  OCCUPANTS  AND  CARGO  SHOULD 
NEVER  EXCEED  XXX  KG,  OR  XXX  IBS. 


f TIRE 

FRONT 

REAR 

SPARE  ^ 

ORIGINAL  TIRE  SIZE 

P195/70R14 

N W '• 

P195/70R14 

T125/70D15 

COLD  TIRE 

INFLATION  PRESSURE 

L 

200kPa,  29PSI 

200kPa.  29PSI 

420kPa,  60PSI 

J 

SEE  OWNER  S MANUAL  FOR  ADDITIONAL  INFORMATION 


4N1 09268 


II 

-2 


3 

■H*4 


811b5a9a 

Tire  And  Loading  Information  Placard 

This  placard  tells  you  important  information  about  the: 


1.  Number  of  people  that  can  be  carried  in  the  vehicle. 

2.  Total  weight  your  vehicle  can  carry. 


Information 


AL 


3.  Tire  size  designed  for  your  vehicle. 

4.  Cold  tire  inflation  pressures  for  the  front,  rear,  and 
spare  tires. 

Loading 

The  vehicle  maximum  load  on  the  tire  must  not  exceed 
the  load  carrying  capacity  of  the  tire  on  your  vehicle.  You 
will  not  exceed  the  tire's  load  carrying  capacity  if  you 
adhere  to  the  loading  conditions,  tire  size,  and  cold  tire 
inflation  pressures  specified  on  the  Tire  and  Loading 
Information  placard  in  "Vehicle  Loading"  in  the  "Starting 
And  Operating"  section  of  this  manual. 

NOTE:  Under  a maximum  loaded  vehicle  condition, 
gross  axle  weight  ratings  (GAWRs)  for  the  front  and  rear 
axles  must  not  be  exceeded.  For  further  information  on 
GAWRs,  vehicle  loading,  and  trailer  towing,  refer  to 
"Vehicle  Loading"  in  the  "Starting  And  Operating"  sec- 
tion of  this  manual. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  399 


To  determine  the  maximum  loading  conditions  of  your 
vehicle,  locate  the  statement  "The  combined  weight  of 
occupants  and  cargo  should  never  exceed  XXX  lbs  or 
XXX  kg"  on  the  Tire  and  Loading  Information  placard. 
The  combined  weight  of  occupants,  cargo /luggage  and 
trailer  tongue  weight  (if  applicable)  should  never  exceed 
the  weight  referenced  here. 

Steps  For  Determining  Correct  Load  Limit 

1.  Locate  the  statement  "The  combined  weight  of  occu- 
pants and  cargo  should  never  exceed  XXX  lbs  or 
XXX  kg"  on  your  vehicle's  placard. 

2.  Determine  the  combined  weight  of  the  driver  and 
passengers  that  will  be  riding  in  your  vehicle. 

3.  Subtract  the  combined  weight  of  the  driver  and  pas- 
sengers from  XXX  lbs  or  XXX  kg. 


Provided  by: 


400  STARTING  AND  OPERATING  1 

4.  The  resulting  figure  equals  the  available  amount  of 
cargo  and  luggage  load  capacity.  For  example,  if 
"XXX"  amount  equals  1,400  lbs  (635  kg)  and  there  will 
be  five  150  lb  (68  kg)  passengers  in  your  vehicle,  the 
amount  of  available  cargo  and  luggage  load  capacity 
is  650  lbs  (295  kg)  (since  5 x 150  lbs  (68  kg)  = 750  lbs 
(340  kg),  and  1400  lbs  (635  kg)  - 750  lbs  (340  kg)  = 
650  lbs  [295  kg]). 

5.  Determine  the  combined  weight  of  luggage  and  cargo 
being  loaded  on  the  vehicle.  That  weight  may  not 
safely  exceed  the  available  cargo  and  luggage  load 
capacity  calculated  in  step  4. 


NOTE: 

• If  your  vehicle  will  be  towing  a trailer,  load  from  your 
trailer  will  be  transferred  to  your  vehicle.  The  follow- 
ing table  shows  examples  on  how  to  calculate  total 
load,  cargo /luggage,  and  towing  capacities  of  your 
vehicle  with  varying  seating  configurations  and  num- 
ber and  size  of  occupants.  This  table  is  for  illustration 
purposes  only  and  may  not  be  accurate  for  the  seating 
and  load  carry  capacity  of  your  vehicle. 

• For  the  following  example,  the  combined  weight  of 
occupants  and  cargo  should  never  exceed  865  lbs 
(392  kg). 


Information  Provided  by: 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  401 


Occupants 

Combined  weight  of 

AVAILABLE 

TOTAL 

FRONT 

REAR 

occupants  and  cargo 
from  Tire  Placard 

MINUS 

Combined  Occupant’s 
weight 

= 

Cargo/Luggage  and 
Trailer  Tongue 

EXAMPLE  3 


Occupant  1 : 200  tbs 
Occupant  2:  200  IPs 
TOTAL  WEIGHT:  400  lbs 

865  lbs  minus  400  lbs  = 465  lbs 


811a4d11 


5 


_ Information  Provided  by: 


402  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


WARNING! 

Overloading  of  your  tires  is  dangerous.  Overloading 
can  cause  tire  failure,  affect  vehicle  handling,  and 
increase  your  stopping  distance.  Use  tires  of  the 
recommended  load  capacity  for  your  vehicle.  Never 
overload  them. 

TIRES  — GENERAL  INFORMATION 
Tire  Pressure 

Proper  tire  inflation  pressure  is  essential  to  the  safe  and 
satisfactory  operation  of  your  vehicle.  Four  primary  areas 
are  affected  by  improper  tire  pressure: 

• Safety  and  Vehicle  Stability 

• Economy 

• Tread  Wear 


Safety 


WARNING! 

• Improperly  inflated  tires  are  dangerous  and  can 
cause  collisions. 

• Underinflation  increases  tire  flexing  and  can  result 
in  overheating  and  tire  failure. 

• Overinflation  reduces  a tire's  ability  to  cushion 
shock.  Objects  on  the  road  and  chuckholes  can 
cause  damage  that  result  in  tire  failure. 

• Overinflated  or  underinflated  tires  can  affect  ve- 
hicle handling  and  can  fail  suddenly,  resulting  in 
loss  of  vehicle  control. 

• Unequal  tire  pressures  can  cause  steering  prob- 
lems. You  could  lose  control  of  your  vehicle. 


(Continued) 


• Ride  Comfort 


| CD  = /M 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  403 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Unequal  tire  pressures  from  one  side  of  the  vehicle 
to  the  other  can  cause  the  vehicle  to  drift  to  the 
right  or  left. 

• Always  drive  with  each  tire  inflated  to  the  recom- 
mended cold  tire  inflation  pressure. 

Both  under-inflation  and  over-inflation  affect  the  stability 
of  the  vehicle  and  can  produce  a feeling  of  sluggish 
response  or  over  responsiveness  in  the  steering. 

NOTE: 

• Unequal  tire  pressures  from  side  to  side  may  cause 
erratic  and  unpredictable  steering  response. 


Fuel  Economy 

Underinflated  tires  will  increase  tire  rolling  resistance 
resulting  in  higher  fuel  consumption. 

Tread  Wear 


Improper  cold  tire  inflation  pressures  can  cause  abnor- 
mal wear  patterns  and  reduced  tread  life,  resulting  in  the 
need  for  earlier  tire  replacement. 


5 


Ride  Comfort  And  Vehicle  Stability 


Proper  tire  inflation  contributes  to  a comfortable  ride. 
Over-inflation  produces  a jarring  and  uncomfortable 
ride. 


Tire  Inflation  Pressures 


• Unequal  tire  pressure  from  side  to  side  may  cause  the  The  proper  cold  tire  inflation  pressure  is  listed  on  the 
vehicle  to  drift  left  or  right.  driver's  side  B-Pillar  or  rear  edge  of  the  driver's  side 

door. 


C: 


| CD  = /M 


404  STARTING  AND  OPERATING  1 

At  least  once  a month: 

• Check  and  adjust  tire  pressure  with  a good  quality 
pocket-type  pressure  gauge.  Do  not  make  a visual 
judgement  when  determining  proper  inflation.  Tires 
may  look  properly  inflated  even  when  they  are  under- 
inflated. 

• Inspect  tires  for  signs  of  tire  wear  or  visible  damage. 


CAUTION! 

After  inspecting  or  adjusting  the  tire  pressure,  al- 
ways reinstall  the  valve  stem  cap.  This  will  prevent 
moisture  and  dirt  from  entering  the  valve  stem, 
which  could  damage  the  valve  stem. 

Inflation  pressures  specified  on  the  placard  are  always 
"cold  tire  inflation  pressure".  Cold  tire  inflation  pressure 
is  defined  as  the  tire  pressure  after  the  vehicle  has  not 
been  driven  for  at  least  three  hours,  or  driven  less  than 


1 mile  (1.6  km)  after  sitting  for  a minimum  of  three  hours. 
The  cold  tire  inflation  pressure  must  not  exceed  the 
maximum  inflation  pressure  molded  into  the  tire  side- 
wall. 

Check  tire  pressures  more  often  if  subject  to  a wide  range 
of  outdoor  temperatures,  as  tire  pressures  vary  with 
temperature  changes. 

Tire  pressures  change  by  approximately  1 psi  (7  kPa)  per 
12°F  (7°C)  of  air  temperature  change.  Keep  this  in  mind 
when  checking  tire  pressure  inside  a garage,  especially  in 
the  Winter. 

Example:  If  garage  temperature  = 68°F  (20°C)  and  the 
outside  temperature  = 32°F  (0°C)  then  the  cold  tire 
inflation  pressure  should  be  increased  by  3 psi  (21  kPa), 
which  equals  1 psi  (7  kPa)  for  every  12°F  (7°C)  for  this 
outside  temperature  condition. 


i Provided  by: 


Tire  pressure  may  increase  from  2 to  6 psi  (13  to  40  kPa) 
during  operation.  DO  NOT  reduce  this  normal  pressure 
build  up  or  your  tire  pressure  will  be  too  low. 

Tire  Pressures  For  High  Speed  Operation 

The  manufacturer  advocates  driving  at  safe  speeds  and 
within  posted  speed  limits.  Where  speed  limits  or  condi- 
tions are  such  that  the  vehicle  can  be  driven  at  high 
speeds,  maintaining  correct  tire  inflation  pressure  is  very 
important.  Increased  tire  pressure  and  reduced  vehicle 
loading  may  be  required  for  high-speed  vehicle  opera- 
tion. Refer  to  your  authorized  tire  dealer  or  original 
equipment  vehicle  dealer  for  recommended  safe  operat- 
ing speeds,  loading  and  cold  tire  inflation  pressures. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  405 


WARNING! 

High  speed  driving  with  your  vehicle  under  maxi- 
mum load  is  dangerous.  The  added  strain  on  your 
tires  could  cause  them  to  fail.  You  could  have  a 
serious  collision.  Do  not  drive  a vehicle  loaded  to  the 
maximum  capacity  at  continuous  speeds  above 
75  mph  (120  km/h). 

Radial  Ply  Tires 


WARNING! 

Combining  radial  ply  tires  with  other  types  of  tires 
on  your  vehicle  will  cause  your  vehicle  to  handle 
poorly.  The  instability  could  cause  a collision.  Al- 
ways use  radial  ply  tires  in  sets  of  four.  Never 
combine  them  with  other  types  of  tires. 


406  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


Tire  Repair 

If  your  tire  becomes  damaged,  it  may  be  repaired  if  it 
meets  the  following  criteria: 

• The  tire  has  not  been  driven  on  when  flat. 

• The  damage  is  only  on  the  tread  section  of  your  tire 
(sidewall  damage  is  not  repairable). 

• The  puncture  is  no  greater  than  a 14  of  an  inch  (6  mm). 

Consult  an  authorized  tire  dealer  for  tire  repairs  and 
additional  information. 

Damaged  Run  Flat  tires,  or  Run  Flat  tires  that  have 
experienced  a loss  of  pressure  should  be  replaced  imme- 
diately with  another  Run  Flat  tire  of  identical  size  and 
service  description  (Load  Index  and  Speed  Symbol). 


Tire  Types 

All  Season  Tires  — If  Equipped 

All  Season  tires  provide  traction  for  all  seasons  (Spring, 
Summer,  Fall  and  Winter).  Traction  levels  may  vary 
between  different  all  season  tires.  All  season  tires  can  be 
identified  by  the  M+S,  M&S,  M/S  or  MS  designation  on 
the  tire  sidewall.  Use  all  season  tires  only  in  sets  of  four; 
failure  to  do  so  may  adversely  affect  the  safety  and 
handling  of  your  vehicle. 

Summer  Or  Three  Season  Tires  — If  Equipped 

Summer  tires  provide  traction  in  both  wet  and  dry 
conditions,  and  are  not  intended  to  be  driven  in  snow  or 
on  ice.  If  your  vehicle  is  equipped  with  Summer  tires,  be 
aware  these  tires  are  not  designed  for  Winter  or  cold 
driving  conditions.  Install  Winter  tires  on  your  vehicle 
when  ambient  temperatures  are  less  than  40°F  (5°C)  or  if 
roads  are  covered  with  ice  or  snow.  For  more  informa- 
tion, contact  an  authorized  dealer. 


Summer  tires  do  not  contain  the  all  season  designation  or 
mountain /snowflake  symbol  on  the  tire  sidewall.  Use 
Summer  tires  only  in  sets  of  four;  failure  to  do  so  may 
adversely  affect  the  safety  and  handling  of  your  vehicle. 


WARNING! 

Do  not  use  Summer  tires  in  snow/ice  conditions.  You 
could  lose  vehicle  control,  resulting  in  severe  injury 
or  death.  Driving  too  fast  for  conditions  also  creates 
the  possibility  of  loss  of  vehicle  control. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  407 


Snow  Tires 


Some  areas  of  the  country  require  the  use  of  snow  tires 
during  the  Winter.  Snow  tires  can  be  identified  by  a 
"mountain/ snowflake"  symbol  on  the  tire  sidewall. 


If  you  need  snow  tires,  select  tires 
equivalent  in  size  and  type  to  the  origi- 
nal equipment  tires.  Use  snow  tires 
only  in  sets  of  four;  failure  to  do  so 
may  adversely  affect  the  safety  and 
handling  of  your  vehicle. 


Snow  tires  generally  have  lower  speed  ratings  than  what 
was  originally  equipped  with  your  vehicle  and  should 
not  be  operated  at  sustained  speeds  over  75  mph 
(120  km/h).  For  speeds  above  75  mph  (120  km/h)  refer  to 
original  equipment  or  an  authorized  tire  dealer  for 
recommended  safe  operating  speeds,  loading  and  cold 
tire  inflation  pressures. 


408  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


While  studded  tires  improve  performance  on  ice,  skid 
and  traction  capability  on  wet  or  dry  surfaces  may  be 
poorer  than  that  of  non-studded  tires.  Some  states  pro- 
hibit studded  tires;  therefore,  local  laws  should  be 
checked  before  using  these  tire  types. 

Run  Flat  Tires  — If  Equipped 

Run  Flat  tires  allow  you  the  capability  to  drive  50  miles 
(80  km)  at  50  mph  (80  km/h)  after  a rapid  loss  of  inflation 
pressure.  This  rapid  loss  of  inflation  is  referred  to  as  the 
Run  Flat  mode.  A Run  Flat  mode  occurs  when  the  tire 
inflation  pressure  is  of/  or  below  14  psi  (96  kPa).  Once  a 
Run  Flat  tire  reaches  the  run  flat  mode  it  has  limited 
driving  capabilities  and  needs  to  be  replaced  immedi- 
ately. A Run  Flat  tire  is  not  repairable. 

It  is  not  recommended  driving  a vehicle  loaded  at  full 
capacity  or  to  tow  a trailer  while  a tire  is  in  the  run  flat 
mode. 


See  the  tire  pressure  monitoring  section  for  more  infor- 
mation. 

Spare  Tires  — If  Equipped 

NOTE:  For  vehicles  equipped  with  Tire  Service  Kit 
instead  of  a spare  tire,  please  refer  to  "Tire  Service  Kit"  in 
"What  To  Do  In  Emergencies"  for  further  information. 


CAUTION! 

Because  of  the  reduced  ground  clearance,  do  not  take 
your  vehicle  through  an  automatic  car  wash  with  a 
compact  or  limited-use  temporary  spare  installed. 
Damage  to  the  vehicle  may  result. 

Spare  Tire  Matching  Original  Equipped  Tire  And 
Wheel  — If  Equipped 

Your  vehicle  may  be  equipped  with  a spare  tire  and 
wheel  equivalent  in  look  and  function  to  the  original 


QdsaC!sr 


equipment  tire  and  wheel  found  on  the  front  or  rear  axle 
of  your  vehicle.  This  spare  tire  may  be  used  in  the  tire 
rotation  for  your  vehicle.  If  your  vehicle  has  this  option, 
refer  to  an  authorized  tire  dealer  for  the  recommended 
tire  rotation  pattern. 

Compact  Spare  Tire  — If  Equipped 

The  compact  spare  is  for  temporary  emergency  use  only. 
You  can  identify  if  your  vehicle  is  equipped  with  a 
compact  spare  by  looking  at  the  spare  tire  description  on 
the  Tire  and  Loading  Information  Placard  located  on  the 
driver's  side  door  opening  or  on  the  sidewall  of  the  tire. 
Compact  spare  tire  descriptions  begin  with  the  letter  "T" 
or  "S"  preceding  the  size  designation.  Example:  T145/ 
80D18  103M. 


T,  S = Temporary  Spare  Tire 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  409 


Since  this  tire  has  limited  tread  life,  the  original  equip- 
ment tire  should  be  repaired  (or  replaced)  and  reinstalled 
on  your  vehicle  at  the  first  opportunity. 

Do  not  install  a wheel  cover  or  attempt  to  mount  a 
conventional  tire  on  the  compact  spare  wheel,  since  the 
wheel  is  designed  specifically  for  the  compact  spare  tire. 
Do  not  install  more  than  one  compact  spare  tire  and 
wheel  on  the  vehicle  at  any  given  time. 


WARNING! 

Compact  spares  are  for  temporary  emergency  use 
only.  With  these  spares,  do  not  drive  more  than 
50  mph  (80  km/h).  Temporary  use  spares  have  limited 
tread  life.  When  the  tread  is  worn  to  the  tread  wear 
indicators,  the  temporary  use  spare  tire  needs  to  be 
replaced.  Be  sure  to  follow  the  warnings,  which 
apply  to  your  spare.  Failure  to  do  so  could  result  in 
spare  tire  failure  and  loss  of  vehicle  control. 


410  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


Full  Size  Spare  — If  Equipped 

The  full  size  spare  is  for  temporary  emergency  use  only. 
This  tire  may  look  like  the  originally  equipped  tire  on  the 
front  or  rear  axle  of  your  vehicle,  but  it  is  not.  This  spare 
tire  may  have  limited  tread  life.  When  the  tread  is  worn 
to  the  tread  wear  indicators,  the  temporary  use  full  size 
spare  tire  needs  to  be  replaced.  Since  it  is  not  the  same  as 
your  original  equipment  tire,  replace  (or  repair)  the 
original  equipment  tire  and  reinstall  on  the  vehicle  at  the 
first  opportunity. 

Limited-Use  Spare  — If  Equipped 

The  limited-use  spare  tire  is  for  temporary  emergency 
use  only.  This  tire  is  identified  by  a label  located  on  the 
limited-use  spare  wheel.  This  label  contains  the  driving 
limitations  for  this  spare.  This  tire  may  look  like  the 
original  equipped  tire  on  the  front  or  rear  axle  of  your 
vehicle,  but  it  is  not.  Installation  of  this  limited-use  spare 
tire  affects  vehicle  handling.  Since  it  is  not  the  same  as 


your  original  equipment  tire,  replace  (or  repair)  the 
original  equipment  tire  and  reinstall  on  the  vehicle  at  the 
first  opportunity. 


WARNING! 

Limited-use  spares  are  for  emergency  use  only.  In- 
stallation of  this  limited-use  spare  tire  affects  vehicle 
handling.  With  this  tire,  do  not  drive  more  than  the 
speed  listed  on  the  limit-use  spare  wheel.  Keep 
inflated  to  the  cold  tire  inflation  pressures  listed  on 
your  Tire  and  Loading  Information  Placard  located 
on  the  driver's  side  B-Pillar  or  the  rear  edge  of  the 
driver's  side  door.  Replace  (or  repair)  the  original 
equipment  tire  at  the  first  opportunity  and  reinstall  it 
on  your  vehicle.  Failure  to  do  so  could  result  in  loss 
of  vehicle  control. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  411 


Tire  Spinning 

When  stuck  in  mud,  sand,  snow,  or  ice  conditions,  do  not 
spin  your  vehicle's  wheels  above  30  mph  (48  km/h)  or 
for  longer  than  30  seconds  continuously  without  stop- 
ping. 

Refer  to  "Freeing  A Stuck  Vehicle"  in  "What  To  Do  In 
Emergencies"  for  further  information. 


WARNING! 

Fast  spinning  tires  can  be  dangerous.  Forces  gener- 
ated by  excessive  wheel  speeds  may  cause  tire  dam- 
age or  failure.  A tire  could  explode  and  injure  some- 
one. Do  not  spin  your  vehicle's  wheels  faster  than 
30  mph  (48  km/h)  for  more  than  30  seconds  continu- 
ously when  you  are  stuck,  and  do  not  let  anyone  near 
a spinning  wheel,  no  matter  what  the  speed. 


Tread  Wear  Indicators 

Tread  wear  indicators  are  in  the  original  equipment  tires  to 
help  you  in  determining  when  your  tires  should  be  replaced. 


055007576 

Tire  Tread 

1 — Worn  Tire 

2 — New  Tire 


rovided  by: 


412  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 

These  indicators  are  molded  into  the  bottom  of  the  tread 
grooves.  They  will  appear  as  bands  when  the  tread  depth 
becomes  a 1/16  of  an  inch  (1.6  mm).  When  the  tread  is 
worn  to  the  tread  wear  indicators,  the  tire  should  be 
replaced.  Refer  to  "Replacement  Tires"  in  this  section  for 
further  information. 

Life  Of  Tire 

The  service  life  of  a tire  is  dependent  upon  varying 
factors  including,  but  not  limited  to: 

• Driving  style. 

• Tire  pressure  - Improper  cold  tire  inflation  pressures 
can  cause  uneven  wear  patterns  to  develop  across  the 
tire  tread.  These  abnormal  wear  patterns  will  reduce 
tread  life,  resulting  in  the  need  for  earlier  tire  replace- 
ment. 

• Distance  driven. 

qBS 


• Performance  tires,  tires  with  a speed  rating  of  V or 
higher,  and  Summer  tires  typically  have  a reduced 
tread  life.  Rotation  of  these  tires  per  the  vehicle  main- 
tenance schedule  is  highly  recommended. 


WARNING! 

Tires  and  the  spare  tire  should  be  replaced  after  six 
years,  regardless  of  the  remaining  tread.  Failure  to 
follow  this  warning  can  result  in  sudden  tire  failure. 
You  could  lose  control  and  have  a collision  resulting 
in  serious  injury  or  death. 

Keep  dismounted  tires  in  a cool,  dry  place  with  as  little 
exposure  to  light  as  possible.  Protect  tires  from  contact 
with  oil,  grease,  and  gasoline. 


Replacement  Tires 

The  tires  on  your  new  vehicle  provide  a balance  of  many 
characteristics.  They  should  be  inspected  regularly  for 
wear  and  correct  cold  tire  inflation  pressures.  The  manu- 
facturer strongly  recommends  that  you  use  tires  equiva- 
lent to  the  originals  in  size,  quality  and  performance 
when  replacement  is  needed.  Refer  to  the  paragraph  on 
"Tread  Wear  Indicator".  Refer  to  the  Tire  and  Loading 
Information  placard  or  the  Vehicle  Certification  Label  for 
the  size  designation  of  your  tire.  The  Load  Index  and 
Speed  Symbol  for  your  tire  will  be  found  on  the  original 
equipment  tire  sidewall.  See  the  Tire  Sizing  Chart  ex- 
ample found  in  the  "Tire  Safety  Information"  section  of 
this  manual  for  more  information  relating  to  the  Load 
Index  and  Speed  Symbol  of  a tire. 

It  is  recommended  to  replace  the  two  front  tires  or  two 
rear  tires  as  a pair.  Replacing  just  one  tire  can  seriously 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  413 


affect  your  vehicle's  handling.  If  you  ever  replace  a 
wheel,  make  sure  that  the  wheel's  specifications  match 
those  of  the  original  wheels. 


It  is  recommended  you  contact  your  authorized  tire 
dealer  or  original  equipment  dealer  with  any  questions 
you  may  have  on  tire  specifications  or  capability.  Failure 
to  use  equivalent  replacement  tires  may  adversely  affect 
the  safety,  handling,  and  ride  of  your  vehicle. 


5 


WARNING! 

• Do  not  use  a tire,  wheel  size  or  rating  other  than 
that  specified  for  your  vehicle.  Some  combinations 
of  unapproved  tires  and  wheels  may  change  sus- 
pension dimensions  and  performance  characteris- 
tics, resulting  in  changes  to  steering,  handling,  and 


(Continued) 


414  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

braking  of  your  vehicle.  This  can  cause  unpredict- 
able handling  and  stress  to  steering  and  suspen- 
sion components.  You  could  lose  control  and  have 
a collision  resulting  in  serious  injury  or  death.  Use 
only  the  tire  and  wheel  sizes  with  load  ratings 
approved  for  your  vehicle. 

• Never  use  a tire  with  a smaller  load  index  or 
capacity,  other  than  what  was  originally  equipped 
on  your  vehicle.  Using  a tire  with  a smaller  load 
index  could  result  in  tire  overloading  and  failure. 
You  could  lose  control  and  have  a collision. 

• Failure  to  equip  your  vehicle  with  tires  having 
adequate  speed  capability  can  result  in  sudden  tire 
failure  and  loss  of  vehicle  control. 


C: 


I CD£ 


CAUTION! 


Replacing  original  tires  with  tires  of  a different  size 
may  result  in  false  speedometer  and  odometer  read- 
ings. 

TIRE  CHAINS  (TRACTION  DEVICES) 

Due  to  limited  clearance,  tire  chains  or  traction  devices 
are  not  recommended. 


CAUTION! 

Damage  to  the  vehicle  may  result  if  tire  chains  are 
used. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  415 


TIRE  ROTATION  RECOMMENDATIONS 

The  tires  on  the  front  and  rear  of  your  vehicle  operate  at 
different  loads  and  perform  different  steering,  driving, 
and  braking  functions.  For  these  reasons,  they  wear  at 
unequal  rates. 


The  suggested  rotation  method  is  the  "rearward  cross" 
shown  in  the  following  diagram.  This  rotation  pattern 
does  not  apply  to  some  directional  tires  that  must  not  be 
reversed. 


These  effects  can  be  reduced  by  timely  rotation  of  tires. 
The  benefits  of  rotation  are  especially  worthwhile  with 
aggressive  tread  designs  such  as  those  on  all  season  type 
tires.  Rotation  will  increase  tread  life,  help  to  maintain 
mud,  snow  and  wet  traction  levels,  and  contribute  to  a 
smooth,  quiet  ride. 

Refer  to  the  "Maintenance  Schedule"  for  the  proper 
maintenance  intervals.  The  reasons  for  any  rapid  or 
unusual  wear  should  be  corrected  prior  to  rotation  being 
performed. 


5 


Tire  Rotation 


055707139 


Oc=AL_c=R 


416  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


TIRE  PRESSURE  MONITORING  SYSTEM  (TPMS) 

The  Tire  Pressure  Monitor  System  (TPMS)  will  warn  the 
driver  of  a low  tire  pressure  based  on  the  vehicle  recom- 
mended cold  placard  pressure. 

The  tire  pressure  will  vary  with  temperature  by  about  1 psi 
(7.0  kPa)  for  every  12°F  (6.5°C).  This  means  that  when  the 
outside  temperature  decreases,  the  tire  pressure  will  de- 
crease. Tire  pressure  should  always  be  set  based  on  "cold 
inflation  tire  pressure".  This  is  defined  as  the  tire  pressure 
after  the  vehicle  has  not  been  driven  for  at  least  three 
hours,  or  driven  less  than  1 mile  (1.6  km)  after  a three  hour 
period.  The  cold  tire  inflation  pressure  must  not  exceed  the 
maximum  inflation  pressure  molded  into  the  tire  sidewall. 
Refer  to  "Tires  - General  Information"  in  "Starting  And 
Operating"  for  information  on  how  to  properly  inflate  the 
vehicle's  tires.  The  tire  pressure  will  also  increase  as  the 
vehicle  is  driven  - this  is  normal  and  there  should  be  no 
adjustment  for  this  increased  pressure. 


The  TPMS  will  warn  the  driver  of  a low  tire  pressure  if 
the  tire  pressure  falls  below  the  low-pressure  warning 
limit  for  any  reason,  including  low  temperature  effects,  or 
natural  pressure  loss  through  the  tire. 

The  TPMS  will  continue  to  warn  the  driver  of  low  tire 
pressure  as  long  as  the  condition  exists,  and  will  not  turn 
off  until  the  tire  pressure  is  at  or  above  the  recommended 
cold  placard  pressure.  Once  the  low  tire  pressure  warn- 
ing (Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale  Light)  illuminates, 
you  must  increase  the  tire  pressure  to  the  recommended 
cold  placard  pressure  in  order  for  the  Tire  Pressure 
Monitoring  Telltale  Light  to  turn  off.  The  system  will 
automatically  update  and  the  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring 
Telltale  Light  will  turn  off  once  the  system  receives  the 
updated  tire  pressures. 


Information  Provided  by: 


NOTE:  When  filling  warm  tires,  the  tire  pressure  may 
need  to  be  increased  up  to  an  additional  4 psi  (30  kPa) 
above  the  recommended  cold  placard  pressure  in  order 
to  turn  the  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale  Light  off. 
The  vehicle  may  need  to  be  driven  for  up  to  10  minutes 
above  15  mph  (24  km/h)  in  order  for  the  TPMS  to  receive 
this  information. 

For  example,  your  vehicle  may  have  a recommended 
cold  (parked  for  more  than  three  hours)  placard  pressure 
of  30  psi  (207  kPa).  If  the  ambient  temperature  is  68°F 
(20°C)  and  the  measured  tire  pressure  is  27  psi  (186  kPa), 
a temperature  drop  to  20°F  (-7°C)  will  decrease  the  tire 
pressure  to  approximately  23  psi  (158  kPa).  This  tire 
pressure  is  sufficiently  low  enough  to  turn  ON  the  Tire 
Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale  Light.  Driving  the  vehicle 
may  cause  the  tire  pressure  to  rise  to  approximately 
27  psi  (186  kPa),  but  the  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale 
Light  will  still  be  ON.  In  this  situation,  the  Tire  Pressure 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  417 


Monitoring  Telltale  Light  will  turn  OFF  only  after  the 
tires  are  inflated  to  the  vehicle's  recommended  cold 
placard  pressure  value. 

NOTE:  When  filling  warm  tires,  the  tire  pressure  may 
need  to  be  increased  up  to  an  additional  4 psi  (30  kPa) 
above  the  recommended  cold  placard  pressure  in  order 
to  turn  the  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale  Light  off. 


CAUTION! 

• The  TPMS  has  been  optimized  for  the  original 
equipment  tires  and  wheels.  TPMS  pressures  and 
warning  have  been  established  for  the  tire  size 
equipped  on  your  vehicle.  Undesirable  system  op- 
eration or  sensor  damage  may  result  when  using 
replacement  equipment  that  is  not  of  the  same  size, 
type,  and/or  style.  Aftermarket  wheels  can  cause 
sensor  damage. 


led  by: 


(Continued) 


418  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


CAUTION!  (Continued) 

• Using  aftermarket  tire  sealants  may  cause  the  Tire 
Pressure  Monitoring  System  (TPMS)  sensor  to  be- 
come inoperable.  After  using  an  aftermarket  tire 
sealant  it  is  recommended  that  you  take  your 
vehicle  to  an  authorized  dealership  to  have  your 
sensor  function  checked. 

• After  inspecting  or  adjusting  the  tire  pressure  al- 
ways reinstall  the  valve  stem  cap.  This  will  prevent 
moisture  and  dirt  from  entering  the  valve  stem, 
which  could  damage  the  TPMS  sensor. 

NOTE: 

• The  TPMS  is  not  intended  to  replace  normal  tire  care 
and  maintenance  or  to  provide  warning  of  a tire  failure 
or  condition. 

• The  TPMS  should  not  be  used  as  a tire  pressure  gauge 
while  adjusting  your  tire  pressure. 


Driving  on  a significantly  under-inflated  tire  causes 
the  tire  to  overheat  and  can  lead  to  tire  failure. 
Under-inflation  also  reduces  fuel  efficiency  and  tire 
tread  life,  and  may  affect  the  vehicle's  handling  and 
stopping  ability. 

The  TPMS  is  not  a substitute  for  proper  tire  mainte- 
nance, and  it  is  the  driver's  responsibility  to  maintain 
correct  tire  pressure  using  an  accurate  tire  gauge,  even 
if  under-inflation  has  not  reached  the  level  to  trigger 
illumination  of  the  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale 
Light. 

Seasonal  temperature  changes  will  affect  tire  pressure, 
and  the  TPMS  will  monitor  the  actual  tire  pressure  in 
the  tire. 


Base  System 


This  is  the  TPMS  warning  indicator  located  in  the 
instrument  cluster. 


The  TPMS  uses  wireless  technology  with  wheel  rim 
mounted  electronic  sensors  to  monitor  tire  pressure  lev- 
els. Sensors,  mounted  to  each  wheel  as  part  of  the  valve 
stem,  transmit  tire  pressure  readings  to  the  Receiver 
Module. 


NOTE:  It  is  particularly  important  for  you  to  check  the 
tire  pressure  in  all  of  the  tires  on  your  vehicle  regularly 
and  to  maintain  the  proper  pressure. 

The  TPMS  consists  of  the  following  components: 

• Receiver  Module. 


• Four  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Sensors. 

• Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale  Light. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  419 


Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Low  Pressure  Warnings 

The  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale  Light  will  illuminate 
in  the  instrument  cluster,  a LOW  TIRE  message  will  be 
displayed  for  a minimum  of  five  seconds,  and  an  audible 
chime  will  be  activated  when  one  or  more  of  the  four  active 
road  tire  pressures  are  low.  Should  this  occur,  you  should 
stop  as  soon  as  possible,  check  the  inflation  pressure  of  each 
tire  on  your  vehicle,  and  inflate  each  tire  to  the  vehicle's 
recommended  cold  placard  pressure  value.  The  system  will 
automatically  update  and  the  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring 
Light  will  extinguish  and  the  LOW  TIRE  message  will  turn 
off  once  the  updated  tire  pressures  have  been  received. 

NOTE:  When  filling  warm  tires,  the  tire  pressure  may 
need  to  be  increased  up  to  an  additional  4 psi  (30  kPa) 
above  the  recommended  cold  placard  pressure  in  order 
to  turn  the  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale  Light  off. 
The  vehicle  may  need  to  be  driven  for  up  to  10  minutes 
above  15  mph  (24  km/h)  to  receive  this  information. 


420  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


Check  TPMS  Warnings 

The  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale  Light  will  flash  on 
and  off  for  75  seconds  and  remain  on  solid  when  a system 
fault  is  detected.  The  system  fault  will  also  sound  a 
chime.  If  the  ignition  key  is  cycled,  this  sequence  will 
repeat  providing  the  system  fault  still  exists.  The  Tire 
Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale  Light  will  turn  off  when  the 
fault  condition  no  longer  exists.  A system  fault  can  occur 
with  any  of  the  following  scenarios: 

1.  Jamming  due  to  electronic  devices  or  driving  next  to 
facilities  emitting  the  same  radio  frequencies  as  the 
TPM  sensors. 

2.  Installing  some  form  of  aftermarket  window  tinting 
that  affects  radio  wave  signals. 

3.  Snow  or  ice  around  the  wheels  or  wheel  housings. 

4.  Using  tire  chains  on  the  vehicle. 


5.  Using  wheels/tires  not  equipped  with  TPM  sensors. 

NOTE:  Your  vehicle  is  equipped  with  a compact  spare 

wheel  and  tire  assembly. 

1.  The  compact  spare  tire  does  not  have  a tire  pressure 
monitoring  sensor.  Therefore,  the  TPMS  will  not  moni- 
tor the  tire  pressure  in  the  compact  spare  tire. 

2.  If  you  install  the  compact  spare  tire  in  place  of  a road 
tire  that  has  a pressure  below  the  low-pressure  warn- 
ing limit,  upon  the  next  ignition  key  cycle,  a chime  will 
sound  and  the  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale  Light 
and  LOW  TIRE  message  will  still  turn  ON  due  to  the 
low  tire. 

3.  However,  after  driving  the  vehicle  for  up  to  20  min- 
utes above  15  mph  (24  km/h),  the  Tire  Pressure 
Monitoring  Telltale  Light  will  flash  on  and  off  for  75 
seconds  and  then  remain  on  solid. 

Provided  by: 

0U_  = FR 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  421 


4.  For  each  subsequent  ignition  key  cycle,  a chime  will 
sound  and  the  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale  Light 
will  flash  on  and  off  for  75  seconds  and  then  remain  on 
solid. 

5.  Once  you  repair  or  replace  the  original  road  tire  and 
reinstall  it  on  the  vehicle  in  place  of  the  compact  spare 
tire,  the  TPMS  will  update  automatically  and  the  Tire 
Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale  Light  will  turn  OFF,  as 
long  as  no  tire  pressure  is  below  the  low-pressure 
warning  limit  in  any  of  the  four  active  road  tires.  The 
vehicle  may  need  to  be  driven  for  up  to  10  minutes 
above  15  mph  (24  km/h)  in  order  for  the  TPMS  to 
receive  this  information. 


Premium  System  — If  Equipped 

The  TPMS  uses  wireless  technology  with  wheel  rim 
mounted  electronic  sensors  to  monitor  tire  pressure  lev- 
els. Sensors,  mounted  to  each  wheel  as  part  of  the  valve 
stem,  transmit  tire  pressure  readings  to  the  receiver 
module. 


NOTE:  It  is  particularly  important  for  you  to  check  the 
tire  pressure  in  all  of  your  tires  regularly  and  to  maintain 
the  proper  pressure. 


5 


The  TPMS  consists  of  the  following  components: 


• Receiver  Module 


• Four  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Sensors 


• Three  Trigger  Modules  (mounted  in  three  of  the  four 
wheel  wells) 


Information  Provided  by: 


422  STARTING  AND  OPERATING  1 

• Various  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  System  Messages, 
which  display  in  the  Electronic  Vehicle  Information 
Center  (EVIC) 

• Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale  Light 

Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Low  Pressure  Warnings 

The  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale  Light  will  illumi- 
nate in  the  instrument  cluster  and  an  audible  chime  will 
be  activated  when  one  or  more  of  the  four  active  road  tire 
pressures  are  low.  The  audible  chime  will  sound  once 
every  ignition  cycle  for  the  first  condition  that  it  detects. 
In  addition,  the  EVIC  will  display  a "LOW  TIRE"  text 
message  for  a minimum  of  five  seconds  and  a graphic  of 
the  pressure  value(s)  with  the  low  tire(s)  flashing. 


■ ■ 
III 


III 

I 

III 


■■■  I ■ II 


■ III  Hill 

■ II 

■ I ■ 

■III  III 

■ I I 
III 

■ I Hill 


Hill 
■ HH 
Hill 


HI  HI  II 


■■  III  III 


Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Display 


Should  a low  tire  condition  occur  on  any  of  the  four 
active  road  tire(s),  you  should  stop  as  soon  as  possible 
and  inflate  all  tires  that  are  flashing  on  the  graphic 
display  to  the  vehicle's  recommended  cold  placard  pres- 
sure value.  The  system  will  automatically  update,  the 
"LOW  TIRE"  text  message  will  no  longer  be  displayed, 


/M 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  423 


the  graphic  display  of  the  pressure  value(s)  will  stop 
flashing,  and  the  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Light  will 
extinguish  once  the  updated  tire  pressure(s)  have  been 
received. 

NOTE:  When  filling  warm  tires,  the  tire  pressure  may 
need  to  be  increased  up  to  an  additional  4 psi  (30  kPa) 
above  the  recommended  cold  placard  pressure  in  order 
to  turn  the  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale  Light  off. 
The  vehicle  may  need  to  be  driven  for  up  to  10  minutes 
above  15  mph  (24  km/h)  to  receive  this  information. 

Service  TPMS  Message 

The  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale  Light  will  flash  on 
and  off  for  75  seconds,  and  remain  on  solid  when  a 
system  fault  is  detected.  The  system  fault  will  also  sound 
a chime.  The  EVIC  will  display  a "SERVICE  TPM  SYS- 
TEM'' message  for  a minimum  of  five  seconds.  This  text 
message  is  then  followed  by  a graphic  display,  with 


in  place  of  the  pressure  value(s)  indicating  which  Tire 
Pressure  Monitoring  Sensor(s)  is  not  being  received. 


II  III  llll 


■II 
■ I 
■II 


■■■ 

■ 

■ II 
I 

■II 

■II 


■II 


III 


i inn 


in  in 


■ ■ 

in  ■■■ 
■ ■ 
in  in 


■ iniiii 
■■  i 


in  in 
■ ■ 

■■■  in 
■ ■ 


i inn 

■ inn 

■ inn 


■ in 
■■  ■ 
■■■iiiii 
■iiini 


■ i 

■■■  in 

■ ■ 
■■■  in 


0558012401 


Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Display 

If  the  ignition  key  is  cycled,  this  sequence  will  repeat, 
providing  the  system  fault  still  exists.  If  the  system  fault 
no  longer  exists,  the  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale 
Light  wih  no  longer  flash,  the  "SERVICE  TPM  SYSTEM" 


424  STARTING  AND  OPERATING  1 

text  message  will  not  be  present,  and  a pressure  value 
will  be  displayed  instead  of  dashes.  A system  fault  can 
occur  with  any  of  the  following  scenarios: 

1.  Jamming  due  to  electronic  devices  or  driving  next  to 
facilities  emitting  the  same  radio  frequencies  as  the 
TPM  sensors. 

2.  Installing  some  form  of  aftermarket  window  tinting 
that  affects  radio  wave  signals. 

3.  Snow  or  ice  around  the  wheels  or  wheel  housings. 

4.  Using  tire  chains  on  the  vehicle. 

5.  Using  wheels/tires  not  equipped  with  TPM  sensors. 

The  EVIC  will  also  display  a "SERVICE  TPM  SYSTEM" 
message  for  a minimum  of  five  seconds  when  a system 
fault  related  to  an  incorrect  sensor  location  fault  is 
detected.  In  this  case,  the  "SERVICE  TPM  SYSTEM" 
message  is  then  followed  with  a graphic  display  with 


pressure  values  still  shown.  This  indicates  that  the  pres- 
sure values  are  still  being  received  from  the  TPM  sensors 
but  they  may  not  be  located  in  the  correct  vehicle 
position.  The  system  still  needs  to  be  serviced  as  long  as 
the  "SERVICE  TPM  SYSTEM"  message  is  displayed. 

NOTE:  Your  vehicle  is  equipped  with  a compact  spare 
wheel  and  tire  assembly. 

1.  The  compact  spare  tire  does  not  have  a tire  pressure 
monitoring  sensor.  Therefore,  the  TPMS  will  not  moni- 
tor the  tire  pressure  in  the  compact  spare  tire. 

2.  If  you  install  the  compact  spare  tire  in  place  of  a road 
tire  that  has  a pressure  below  the  low-pressure  warn- 
ing Emit,  upon  the  next  ignition  key  cycle,  a chime  will 
sound  and  the  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale  Light 
will  still  turn  ON  due  to  the  low  tire.  The  "LOW  TIRE" 
text  message  and  the  graphic  with  the  low  tire  pres- 
sure flashing  will  be  displayed. 


3.  However,  after  driving  the  vehicle  for  up  to  20  min- 
utes above  15  mph  (24  km/h),  the  Tire  Pressure 
Monitoring  Telltale  Light  will  flash  on  and  off  for  75 
seconds  and  then  remain  on  solid.  In  addition,  the 
EVIC  will  display  a "SERVICE  TPM  SYSTEM"  mes- 
sage for  a minimum  of  five  seconds  and  then  display 
dashes  (-  -)  in  place  of  the  pressure  values. 

4.  For  each  subsequent  ignition  key  cycle,  a chime  will 
sound  and  the  Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale  Light 
will  flash  on  and  off  for  75  seconds  and  then  remain  on 
solid,  and  the  EVIC  will  display  a "SERVICE  TPM 
SYSTEM"  message  for  a minimum  of  five  seconds  and 
then  display  dashes  (-  -)  in  place  of  the  pressure 
values. 

5.  Once  you  repair  or  replace  the  original  road  tire  and 
reinstall  it  on  the  vehicle  in  place  of  the  compact  spare 
tire,  the  TPMS  will  update  automatically  and  the  Tire 
Pressure  Monitoring  Telltale  Light  will  turn  OFF,  as 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  425 


long  as  no  tire  pressure  is  below  the  low-pressure 
warning  limit  in  any  of  the  four  active  road  tires.  The 
vehicle  may  need  to  be  driven  for  up  to  10  minutes 
above  15  mph  (24  km/h)  in  order  for  the  TPMS  to 
receive  this  information. 

General  Information 

This  device  complies  with  Part  15  of  the  FCC  rules  and 
RSS-210  of  Industry  Canada.  Operation  is  subject  to  the 
following  two  conditions: 

(1)  This  device  may  not  cause  harmful  interference. 

(2)  This  device  must  accept  any  interference  received, 
including  interference  that  may  cause  undesired  opera- 
tion. 

NOTE:  Changes  or  modifications  not  expressly  approved 
by  the  party  responsible  for  compliance  could  void  the 
user's  authority  to  operate  the  equipment. 


426  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 
FUEL  REQUIREMENTS 
2.0L  And  2.4L  Engine 


These  engines  are  designed  to  meet  all 
emissions  regulations  and  provide  opti- 
mum fuel  economy  and  performance 
when  using  high  quality  unleaded  "Regu- 
lar" gasoline  having  a posted  octane  num- 
ber of  87  as  specified  by  the  (R+M)/2  method.  The  use  of 
higher  octane  "Premium"  gasoline  is  not  required,  as  it 
will  not  provide  any  benefit  over  "Regular"  gasoline  in 
these  engines. 

While  operating  on  gasoline  with  an  octane  number  of 
87,  hearing  a light  knocking  sound  from  the  engine  is  not 
a cause  for  concern.  However,  if  the  engine  is  heard 
making  a heavy  knocking  sound,  see  your  dealer  imme- 
diately. Use  of  gasoline  with  an  octane  number  lower 


Wtnilinia  OCTMW  MT*>1 

87 

eoodtabe 


than  87  can  cause  engine  failure  and  may  void  or  not  be 
covered  by  the  New  Vehicle  Limited  Warranty. 

Poor  quality  gasoline  can  cause  problems  such  as  hard 
starting,  stalling,  and  hesitations.  If  you  experience  these 
symptoms,  try  another  brand  of  gasoline  before  consid- 
ering service  for  the  vehicle. 

Reformulated  Gasoline 

Many  areas  of  the  country  require  the  use  of  cleaner 
burning  gasoline  referred  to  as  "Reformulated  Gasoline". 
Reformulated  gasoline  contains  oxygenates  and  are  spe- 
cifically blended  to  reduce  vehicle  emissions  and  im- 
prove air  quality. 

The  use  of  reformulated  gasoline  is  recommended.  Prop- 
erly blended  reformulated  gasoline  will  provide  im- 
proved performance  and  durability  of  engine  and  fuel 
system  components. 


i Provided  by: 


Gasoline/Oxygenate  Blends 

Some  fuel  suppliers  blend  unleaded  gasoline  with  oxy- 
genates such  as  ethanol. 

CAUTION! 

DO  NOT  use  gasoline  containing  methanol  or  gaso- 
line containing  more  than  15%  ethanol  (E-15).  Use  of 
these  blends  may  result  in  starting  and  drivability 
problems,  damage  critical  fuel  system  components, 
cause  emissions  to  exceed  the  applicable  standard, 
and/or  cause  the  "Malfunction  Indicator  Light"  to 
illuminate.  Please  observe  pump  labels  as  they 
should  clearly  communicate  if  a fuel  contains  greater 
than  15%  ethanol  (E-15). 

Problems  that  result  from  using  gasoline  containing  more 
than  15%  ethanol  (E-15)  or  gasoline  containing  methanol 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  427 


are  not  the  responsibility  of  the  manufacturer  and  may 
void  or  not  be  covered  under  New  Vehicle  Limited 
Warranty. 

E-85  Usage  In  Non-Flex  Fuel  Vehicles 

Non-Flex  Fuel  Vehicles  (FFV)  are  compatible  with  gaso- 
line containing  up  to  15%  ethanol  (E-15).  Gasoline  with 
higher  ethanol  content  may  void  the  New  Vehicle  Lim- 
ited Warranty. 

If  a Non-FFV  vehicle  is  inadvertently  fueled  with  E-85 
fuel,  the  engine  will  have  some  or  all  of  these  symptoms: 

• Operate  in  a lean  mode. 

• OBD  II  "Malfunction  Indicator  Light"  on. 

• Poor  engine  performance. 

• Poor  cold  start  and  cold  drivability. 

• Increased  risk  for  fuel  system  component  corrosion. 


428  STARTING  AND  OPERATING  1 

MMT  In  Gasoline 

Methylcyclopentadienyl  Manganese  Tricarbonyl  (MMT) 
is  a manganese-containing  metallic  additive  that  is 
blended  into  some  gasoline  to  increase  octane.  Gasoline 
blended  with  MMT  provides  no  performance  advantage 
beyond  gasoline  of  the  same  octane  number  without 
MMT.  Gasoline  blended  with  MMT  reduces  spark  plug 
life  and  reduces  emissions  system  performance  in  some 
vehicles.  The  manufacturer  recommends  that  gasoline 
without  MMT  be  used  in  your  vehicle.  The  MMT  content 
of  gasoline  may  not  be  indicated  on  the  gasoline  pump, 
therefore,  you  should  ask  your  gasoline  retailer  whether 
the  gasoline  contains  MMT.  MMT  is  prohibited  in  Federal 
and  California  reformulated  gasoline. 


Materials  Added  To  Fuel 


Besides  using  unleaded  gasoline  with  the  proper  octane 
rating,  gasolines  that  contain  detergents,  corrosion  and 
stability  additives  are  recommended.  Using  gasolines 
that  have  these  additives  will  help  improve  fuel 
economy,  reduce  emissions,  and  maintain  vehicle  perfor- 
mance. Designated  TOP  TIER  Detergent  Gasoline  con- 
tains a higher  level  of  detergents  to  further  aide  in 
minimizing  engine  and  fuel  system  deposits.  When  avail- 
able the  usage  of  Top  Tier  Detergent  gasoline  is  recom- 
mended. Visit  www.toptiergas.com  for  a list  of  TOP  TIER 
Detergent  Gasoline  Retailers. 

Indiscriminate  use  of  fuel  system  cleaning  agents  should 
be  avoided.  Many  of  these  materials  intended  for  gum 
and  varnish  removal  may  contain  active  solvents  or 
similar  ingredients.  These  can  harm  fuel  system  gasket 
and  diaphragm  materials. 


/\i 


Fuel  System  Cautions 


CAUTION! 

Follow  these  guidelines  to  maintain  your  vehicle's 

performance: 

• The  use  of  leaded  gasoline  is  prohibited  by  Federal 
law.  Using  leaded  gasoline  can  impair  engine  per- 
formance and  damage  the  emissions  control  sys- 
tem. 

• An  out-of-tune  engine  or  certain  fuel  or  ignition 
malfunctions  can  cause  the  catalytic  converter  to 
overheat.  If  you  notice  a pungent  burning  odor  or 
some  light  smoke,  your  engine  may  be  out  of  tune 
or  malfunctioning  and  may  require  immediate  ser- 
vice. Contact  your  authorized  dealer  for  service 
assistance. 


(Continued) 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  429 


CAUTION!  (Continued) 

• The  use  of  fuel  additives,  which  are  now  being 
sold  as  octane  enhancers,  is  not  recommended. 
Most  of  these  products  contain  high  concentrations 
of  methanol.  Fuel  system  damage  or  vehicle  perfor- 
mance problems  resulting  from  the  use  of  such 
fuels  or  additives  is  not  the  responsibility  of  the 
manufacturer  and  may  void  or  not  be  covered 
under  the  New  Vehicle  Limited  Warranty. 


5 


NOTE:  Intentional  tampering  with  the  emissions  control 
system  can  result  in  civil  penalties  being  assessed  against 
you. 


E/M 


430  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 

Carbon  Monoxide  Warnings 

WARNING! 

Carbon  monoxide  (CO)  in  exhaust  gases  is  deadly. 

Follow  the  precautions  below  to  prevent  carbon 

monoxide  poisoning: 

• Do  not  inhale  exhaust  gases.  They  contain  carbon 
monoxide,  a colorless  and  odorless  gas,  which  can 
kill.  Never  run  the  engine  in  a closed  area,  such  as 
a garage,  and  never  sit  in  a parked  vehicle  with  the 
engine  running  for  an  extended  period.  If  the 
vehicle  is  stopped  in  an  open  area  with  the  engine 
running  for  more  than  a short  period,  adjust  the 
ventilation  system  to  force  fresh,  outside  air  into 
the  vehicle. 

(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Guard  against  carbon  monoxide  with  proper  main- 
tenance. Have  the  exhaust  system  inspected  every 
time  the  vehicle  is  raised.  Have  any  abnormal 
conditions  repaired  promptly.  Until  repaired,  drive 
with  all  side  windows  fully  open. 

ADDING  FUEL 

Fuel  Filler  Cap  (Gas  Cap) 

The  gas  cap  is  behind  the  fuel  filler  door,  on  the  left  side 
of  the  vehicle.  If  the  gas  cap  is  lost  or  damaged,  be  sure 
the  replacement  cap  is  for  use  with  this  vehicle. 


— 


/\L 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  431 


After  removing  the  gas  cap,  place  the  gas  cap  tether  cable 
over  a hook  on  the  inside  of  the  fuel  door.  This  keeps  the 
gas  cap  suspended  away  from  and  protects  the  vehicle's 
surface. 


CAUTION! 

• Damage  to  the  fuel  system  or  emission  control 
system  could  result  from  using  an  improper  fuel 
tank  filler  cap.  A poorly  fitting  cap  could  let 
impurities  into  the  fuel  system. 

• A poorly  fitting  fuel  filler  cap  may  cause  the 
"Malfunction  Indicator  Light  (MIL)"  to  turn  on. 

• To  avoid  fuel  spillage  and  overfilling,  do  not  "top 
off"  the  fuel  tank  after  filling. 


5 


CD  = /M_E=;=R 


Fuel  Filler  Cap 


432  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


WARNING! 

• Never  have  any  smoking  materials  lit  in  or  near  the 
vehicle  when  the  gas  cap  is  removed  or  the  tank  is 
being  filled. 

• Never  add  fuel  when  the  engine  is  running.  This  is 
in  violation  of  most  state  and  federal  fire  regula- 
tions and  may  cause  the  MIL  to  turn  on. 

• A fire  may  result  if  gasoline  is  pumped  into  a 
portable  container  that  is  inside  of  a vehicle.  You 
could  be  burned.  Always  place  gas  containers  on 
the  ground  while  filling. 

NOTE: 

• When  the  fuel  nozzle  "clicks"  or  shuts  off,  the  fuel  tank 
is  full. 

• Tighten  the  gas  cap  about  14  turn  until  you  hear  one  click. 
This  is  an  indication  that  cap  is  properly  tightened. 


• If  the  gas  cap  is  not  tightened  properly,  the  MIL  will 
come  on.  Be  sure  the  gas  cap  is  tightened  every  time 
the  vehicle  is  refueled. 

Loose  Fuel  Filler  Cap  Message 

If  the  vehicle  diagnostic  system  determines  that  the  fuel 
filler  cap  is  loose  or  improperly  installed,  a "gASCAP" 
message  will  be  displayed  in  the  Odometer /Trip  Odom- 
eter in  the  instrument  cluster.  Refer  to  "Instrument 
Cluster  Description"  in  "Understanding  Your  Instrument 
Panel"  for  further  information.  Tighten  the  fuel  filler  cap 
properly  and  push  the  odometer/trip  odometer  RESET 
button  to  turn  the  message  off.  If  the  problem  continues, 
the  message  will  appear  the  next  time  the  vehicle  is 
started.  Refer  to  "Onboard  Diagnostic  System"  in  "Main- 
taining Your  Vehicle"  for  further  information. 


E/M 


VEHICLE  LOADING 


As  required  by  National  Highway  Traffic  Safety  Admin- 
istration regulations,  your  vehicle  has  a certification  label 
affixed  to  the  driver's  side  door  or  B-Pillar. 

Vehicle  Certification  Label 

Your  vehicle  has  a Vehicle  Certification  Label  attached  to 
the  driver's  door  B-Pillar. 

The  label  contains  the  following  information: 

• Name  of  manufacturer 

• Month  and  year  of  manufacture 

• Gross  Vehicle  Weight  Rating  (GVWR) 

• Vehicle  Identification  Number  (VIN) 

• Type  of  Vehicle 

• Month,  Day  and  Hour  of  Manufacture  (MDH) 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  433 


The  bar  code  allows  a computer  scanner  to  read  the 
Vehicle  Identification  Number  (VIN). 

Gross  Vehicle  Weight  Rating  (GVWR) 

The  GVWR  is  the  total  allowable  weight  of  your  vehicle. 
This  includes  driver,  passengers,  and  cargo.  The  total 
load  must  be  limited  so  that  you  do  not  exceed  the 
GVWR. 

Tire  Size 

The  tire  size  on  the  Vehicle  Certification  Label  represents 
the  actual  tire  size  on  your  vehicle.  Replacement  tires 
must  be  equal  to  the  load  capacity  of  this  tire  size. 

Rim  Size 

This  is  the  rim  size  that  is  appropriate  for  the  tire  size 
listed. 


Provided  by: 


434  STARTING  AND  OPERATING  1 
Inflation  Pressure 

This  is  the  cold  tire  inflation  pressure  for  your  vehicle  for 
all  loading  conditions  up  to  full  GAWR. 

Curb  Weight 

The  curb  weight  of  a vehicle  is  defined  as  the  total  weight 
of  the  vehicle  with  all  fluids,  including  vehicle  fuel,  at  full 
capacity  conditions,  and  with  no  occupants  or  cargo 
loaded  into  the  vehicle.  The  front  and  rear  curb  weight 
values  are  determined  by  weighing  your  vehicle  on  a 
commercial  scale  before  any  occupants  or  cargo  are 
added. 

Overloading 

The  load  carrying  components  (springs,  tires,  wheels, 
etc.)  of  your  vehicle  will  provide  satisfactory  service  as 
long  as  you  do  not  exceed  the  GVWR. 


The  best  way  to  figure  out  the  total  weight  of  your 
vehicle  is  to  weigh  it  when  it  is  fully  loaded  and  ready  for 
operation.  Weigh  it  on  a commercial  scale  to  ensure  that 
it  is  not  over  the  GVWR. 

Overloading  can  cause  potential  safety  hazards  and 
shorten  useful  service  life.  Heavier  suspension  compo- 
nents do  not  necessarily  increase  the  vehicle's  GVWR. 

Loading 

To  load  your  vehicle  properly,  first  figure  out  its  empty 
weight.  Store  heavier  items  down  low  and  be  sure  you 
distribute  their  weight  as  evenly  as  possible.  Stow  all 
loose  items  securely  before  driving.  Improper  weight 
distribution  can  have  an  adverse  effect  on  the  way  your 
vehicle  steers  and  handles,  and  the  way  the  brakes 
operate. 


Information  Provided  by: 


CAUTION! 


Do  not  load  your  vehicle  any  heavier  than  the 
GVWR.  If  you  do,  parts  on  your  vehicle  can  break,  or 
it  can  change  the  way  your  vehicle  handles.  This 
could  cause  you  to  lose  control.  Also,  overloading  can 
shorten  the  life  of  your  vehicle. 


TRAILER  TOWING 

In  this  section  you  will  find  safety  tips  and  information 
on  limits  to  the  type  of  towing  you  can  reasonably  do 
with  your  vehicle.  Before  towing  a trailer,  carefully 
review  this  information  to  tow  your  load  as  efficiently 
and  safely  as  possible. 

To  maintain  the  New  Vehicle  Limited  Warranty  coverage, 
follow  the  requirements  and  recommendations  in  this 
manual  concerning  vehicles  used  for  trailer  towing. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  435 


Common  Towing  Definitions 

The  following  trailer  towing  related  definitions  will  assist 
you  in  understanding  the  following  information: 


Gross  Vehicle  Weight  Rating  (GVWR) 


The  GVWR  is  the  total  allowable  weight  of  your  vehicle. 
This  includes  driver,  passengers,  cargo  and  tongue 
weight.  The  total  load  must  be  limited  so  that  you  do  not 
exceed  the  GVWR.  Refer  to  "Vehicle  Loading/Vehicle 
Certification  Label"  in  "Starting  And  Operating"  for 
further  information. 


5 


Gross  Trailer  Weight  (GTW) 

The  GTW  is  the  weight  of  the  trailer  plus  the  weight  of  all 
cargo,  consumables  and  equipment  (permanent  or  tem- 
porary) loaded  in  or  on  the  trailer  in  its  "loaded  and 
ready  for  operation"  condition. 


i Provided  by: 


436  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


The  recommended  way  to  measure  GTW  is  to  put  your 
fully  loaded  trailer  on  a vehicle  scale.  The  entire  weight 
of  the  trailer  must  be  supported  by  the  scale. 

Gross  Combination  Weight  Rating  (GCWR) 

The  GCWR  is  the  total  permissible  weight  of  your  vehicle 
and  trailer  when  weighed  in  combination. 

Gross  Axle  Weight  Rating  (GAWR) 

The  GAWR  is  the  maximum  capacity  of  the  front  and  rear 
axles.  Distribute  the  load  over  the  front  and  rear  axles 
evenly.  Make  sure  that  you  do  not  exceed  either  front  or 
rear  GAWR.  Refer  to  "Vehicle  Loading/Vehicle  Certifica- 
tion Label"  in  "Starting  And  Operating"  for  further 
information. 


WARNING! 

It  is  important  that  you  do  not  exceed  the  maximum 
front  or  rear  GAWR.  A dangerous  driving  condition 
can  result  if  either  rating  is  exceeded.  You  could  lose 
control  of  the  vehicle  and  have  a collision. 


Tongue  Weight  (TW) 

The  tongue  weight  is  the  downward  force  exerted  on  the 
hitch  ball  by  the  trailer.  The  recommended  tongue  weight 
is  10%  to  15%  of  the  vehicle's  GTW  for  a conventional 
hitch.  You  must  consider  this  as  part  of  the  load  on  your 
vehicle. 

Frontal  Area 

The  frontal  area  is  the  maximum  height  multiplied  by  the 
maximum  width  of  the  front  of  a trailer. 


Trailer  Sway  Control 

The  trailer  sway  control  is  a telescoping  link  that  can  be 
installed  between  the  hitch  receiver  and  the  trailer  tongue 
that  typically  provides  adjustable  friction  associated  with 
the  telescoping  motion  to  dampen  any  unwanted  trailer 
swaying  motions  while  traveling. 

Weight-Carrying  Hitch 

A weight-carrying  hitch  supports  the  trailer  tongue 
weight,  just  as  if  it  were  luggage  located  at  a hitch  ball  or 
some  other  connecting  point  of  the  vehicle.  These  kinds 
of  hitches  are  the  most  popular  on  the  market  today  and 
they  are  commonly  used  to  tow  small  and  medium  sized 
trailers. 

Weight-Distributing  Hitch 

A weight-distributing  system  works  by  applying  lever- 
age through  spring  (load)  bars.  They  are  typically  used 
for  heavier  loads  to  distribute  trailer  tongue  weight  to  the 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  437 


tow  vehicle's  front  axle  and  the  trailer  axle(s).  When  used 
in  accordance  with  the  manufacturer's  directions,  it  pro- 
vides for  a more  level  ride,  offering  more  consistent 
steering  and  brake  control  thereby  enhancing  towing 
safety.  The  addition  of  a friction /hydraulic  sway  control 
also  dampens  sway  caused  by  traffic  and  crosswinds  and 
contributes  positively  to  tow  vehicle  and  trailer  stability. 
Trailer  sway  control  and  a weight  distributing  (load 
equalizing)  hitch  are  recommended  for  heavier  Tongue 
Weights  (TW)  and  may  be  required  depending  on  vehicle 
and  trailer  configuration/loading  to  comply  with  Gross 
Axle  Weight  Rating  (GAWR)  requirements. 


WARNING! 

• An  improperly  adjusted  Weight  Distributing  Hitch 
system  may  reduce  handling,  stability,  braking 
performance,  and  could  result  in  a collision. 


(Continued) 


438  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

Trailer  Hitch  Classification 

• Weight  Distributing  Systems  may  not  be  compat- 
ible with  Surge  Brake  Couplers.  Consult  with  your 
hitch  and  trailer  manufacturer  or  a reputable  Rec- 
reational Vehicle  dealer  for  additional  information. 

The  following  chart  provides  the  industry  standard  for 
the  maximum  trailer  weight  a given  trailer  hitch  class  can 
tow  and  should  be  used  to  assist  you  in  selecting  the 
correct  trailer  hitch  for  your  intended  towing  condition. 

Trailer  Hitch  Classification  Definitions 


Class 

Max.  Trailer  Hitch  Industry  Standards 

Class  I - Light  Duty 

2,000  lbs  (907  kg) 

Class  II  - Medium  Duty 

3,500  lbs  (1  587  kg) 

Class  III  - Heavy  Duty 

5,000  lbs  (2  268  kg) 

Class  IV  - Extra  Heavy  Duty 

10,000  lbs  (4  540  kg) 

Refer  to  the  "Trailer  Towing  Weights  (Maximum  Trailer  Weight  Ratings)"  chart  for  the  Maximum  Gross  Trailer 
Weight  (GTW)  towable  for  your  given  drivetrain. 


All  trailer  hitches  should  be  professionally  installed  on  your  vehicle. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  439 


Trailer  Towing  Weights  (Maximum  Trailer  Weight 
Ratings) 

The  following  chart  provides  the  maximum  trailer 
weight  ratings  towable  for  your  given  drivetrain. 


Engine/Transmission 

Frontal  Area 

Maximum  GTW  (Gross 
Trailer  Wt.) 

Maximum  Tongue  Wt. 
(See  Note) 

2.0L  Auto/Man 

22  sq  ft  (2.04  sq  m) 

1,000  lbs  (450  kg) 

150  lbs  (68  kg) 

2.4L  Auto/Man 

22  sq  ft  (2.04  sq  m) 

1,000  lbs  (450  kg) 

150  lbs  (68  kg) 

2.4L  Auto/Man  with 
Trailer  Tow  Prep  Package 
(AHC) 

32  sq  ft  (3.0  sq  m) 

2,000  lbs  (907  kg) 

300  lbs  (136  kg) 

2.4L  Auto  With  Freedom 
Drive  II  Off  Road  Pack- 
age (AWL) 

32  sq  ft  (3.0  sq  m) 

2,000  lbs  (907  kg) 

300  lbs  (136  kg) 

Refer  to  local  laws  for  maximum  trailer  towing  speeds. 

Information  Provided  by: 


440  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


NOTE:  The  trailer  tongue  weight  must  be  considered  as 
part  of  the  combined  weight  of  occupants  and  cargo,  and 
should  never  exceed  the  weight  referenced  on  the  Tire 
and  Loading  Information  placard.  Refer  to  "Tire  Safety 
Information"  in  "Starting  and  Operating"  for  further 
information. 

Trailer  And  Tongue  Weight 

Always  load  a trailer  with  60%  to  65%  of  the  weight  in 
the  front  of  the  trailer.  This  places  10%  to  15%  of  the 
Gross  Trailer  Weight  (GTW)  on  the  tow  hitch  of  your 
vehicle.  Loads  balanced  over  the  wheels  or  heavier  in  the 
rear  can  cause  the  trailer  to  sway  severely  side  to  side 
which  will  cause  loss  of  control  of  the  vehicle  and  trailer. 
Failure  to  load  trailers  heavier  in  front  is  the  cause  of 
many  trailer  collisions. 

Never  exceed  the  maximum  tongue  weight  stamped  on 
your  bumper  or  trailer  hitch. 


Consider  the  following  items  when  computing  the 
weight  on  the  rear  axle  of  the  vehicle: 

• The  tongue  weight  of  the  trailer. 

• The  weight  of  any  other  type  of  cargo  or  equipment 
put  in  or  on  your  vehicle. 

• The  weight  of  the  driver  and  all  passengers. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  441 


NOTE:  Remember  that  everything  put  into  or  on  the 
trailer  adds  to  the  load  on  your  vehicle.  Also,  additional 
factory-installed  options  or  dealer-installed  options  must 
be  considered  as  part  of  the  total  load  on  your  vehicle. 
Refer  to  the  "Tire  And  Loading  Information"  placard  for 
the  maximum  combined  weight  of  occupants  and  cargo 
for  your  vehicle. 

Towing  Requirements 

To  promote  proper  break-in  of  your  vehicle  drivetrain 
components,  the  following  guidelines  are  recommended: 


CAUTION! 

• Do  not  tow  a trailer  at  all  during  the  first  500  miles 
(805  km)  the  new  vehicle  is  driven.  The  engine,  axle 
or  other  parts  could  be  damaged. 

• Then,  during  the  first  500  miles  (805  km)  that  a 
trailer  is  towed,  do  not  drive  over  50  mph  (80  km/h) 
and  do  not  make  starts  at  full  throttle.  This  helps 
the  engine  and  other  parts  of  the  vehicle  wear  in  at 
the  heavier  loads. 


5 


Perform  the  maintenance  listed  in  the  "Maintenance 
Schedule".  Refer  to  "Maintenance  Schedule"  for  further 
information.  When  towing  a trailer,  never  exceed  the 
GAWR,  or  GCWR,  ratings. 


Information  Provided  by: 


442  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


WARNING! 

Improper  towing  can  lead  to  a collision.  Follow  these 
guidelines  to  make  your  trailer  towing  as  safe  as 
possible: 

• Make  certain  that  the  load  is  secured  in  the  trailer  and 
will  not  shift  during  travel.  When  trailering  cargo  that 
is  not  fully  secured,  dynamic  load  shifts  can  occur  that 
may  be  difficult  for  the  driver  to  control.  You  could 
lose  control  of  your  vehicle  and  have  a collision. 

• When  hauling  cargo  or  towing  a trailer,  do  not 
overload  your  vehicle  or  trailer.  Overloading  can 
cause  a loss  of  control,  poor  performance  or  dam- 
age to  brakes,  axle,  engine,  transmission,  steering, 
suspension,  chassis  structure  or  tires. 

• Safety  chains  must  always  be  used  between  your 
vehicle  and  trailer.  Always  connect  the  chains  to 
the  frame  or  hook  retainers  of  the  vehicle  hitch. 


(Continued) 

£ -!  =e 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

Cross  the  chains  under  the  trailer  tongue  and  allow 
enough  slack  for  turning  corners. 

• Vehicles  with  trailers  should  not  be  parked  on  a grade. 
When  parking,  apply  the  parking  brake  on  the  tow 
vehicle.  Put  the  tow  vehicle  automatic  transmission  in 
PARK.  Always  block  or  "chock"  the  trailer  wheels. 

• GCWR  must  not  be  exceeded. 

• Total  weight  must  be  distributed  between  the  tow 
vehicle  and  the  trailer  such  that  the  following  four 
ratings  are  not  exceeded: 

1.  GVWR 

2.  GTW 

3.  GAWR 

4.  Tongue  weight  rating  for  the  trailer  hitch  uti- 
lized. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  443 


Towing  Requirements  — Tires 

• Do  not  attempt  to  tow  a trailer  while  using  a compact 
spare  tire. 

• Proper  tire  inflation  pressures  are  essential  to  the  safe 
and  satisfactory  operation  of  your  vehicle.  Refer  to 
"Tires  - General  Information"  in  "Starting  And  Oper- 
ating" for  proper  tire  inflation  procedures. 

• Check  the  trailer  tires  for  proper  tire  inflation  pres- 
sures before  trailer  usage. 

• Check  for  signs  of  tire  wear  or  visible  tire  damage 
before  towing  a trailer.  Refer  to  "Tires  - General 
Information"  in  "Starting  And  Operating"  for  the 
proper  inspection  procedure. 

• When  replacing  tires,  refer  to  "Tires  - General  Infor- 
mation" in  "Starting  And  Operating"  for  the  proper 


tire  replacement  procedures.  Replacing  tires  with  a 
higher  load  carrying  capacity  will  not  increase  the 
vehicle's  GVWR  and  GAWR  limits. 


Towing  Requirements  — Trailer  Brakes 


• Do  not  interconnect  the  hydraulic  brake  system  or 
vacuum  system  of  your  vehicle  with  that  of  the  trailer. 
This  could  cause  inadequate  braking  and  possible 
personal  injury. 


5 


• An  electronically  actuated  trailer  brake  controller  is 
required  when  towing  a trailer  with  electronically 
actuated  brakes.  When  towing  a trailer  equipped  with 
a hydraulic  surge  actuated  brake  system,  an  electronic 
brake  controller  is  not  required. 


• Trailer  brakes  are  recommended  for  trailers  over 

1.000  lbs  (454  kg)  and  required  for  trailers  in  excess  of 

2.000  lbs  (907  kg). 


Information  Provided  by: 


444  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


WARNING! 

• Do  not  connect  trailer  brakes  to  your  vehicle's 
hydraulic  brake  lines.  It  can  overload  your  brake 
system  and  cause  it  to  fail.  You  might  not  have 
brakes  when  you  need  them  and  could  have  a 
collision. 

• Towing  any  trailer  will  increase  your  stopping 
distance.  When  towing  you  should  allow  for  addi- 
tional space  between  your  vehicle  and  the  vehicle 
in  front  of  you.  Failure  to  do  so  could  result  in  a 
collision. 


CAUTION! 


If  the  trailer  weighs  more  than  1,000  lbs  (454  kg) 
loaded,  it  should  have  its  own  brakes  and  they 
should  be  of  adequate  capacity.  Failure  to  do  this 
could  lead  to  accelerated  brake  lining  wear,  higher 
brake  pedal  effort,  and  longer  stopping  distances. 

Towing  Requirements  — Trailer  Lights  And  Wiring 

Whenever  you  pull  a trailer,  regardless  of  the  trailer  size, 
stoplights  and  turn  signals  on  the  trailer  are  required  for 
motoring  safety. 

The  Trailer  Tow  Package  may  include  a four-  and  seven- 
pin  wiring  harness.  Use  a factory  approved  trailer  har- 
ness and  connector. 

NOTE:  Do  not  cut  or  splice  wiring  into  the  vehicles 
wiring  harness. 


/\i 


The  electrical  connections  are  all  complete  to  the  vehicle 
but  you  must  mate  the  harness  to  a trailer  connector. 
Refer  to  the  following  illustrations. 


1 — Female  Pins 

2 — Male  Pin 

3 — Ground 


4 — Park 

5 — Left  Stop  /Turn 

6 — Right  Stop /Turn 


1 

2 

3 

4 


i Provided  b 

/m 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  445 


Battery 

Backup  Lamps 
Right  Stop  /Turn 
Electric  Brakes 


5 — Ground 

6 — Left  Stop /Turn 

7 — Running  Lamps 


446  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


Towing  Tips 

Before  setting  out  on  a trip,  practice  turning,  stopping, 
and  backing  up  the  trailer  in  an  area  located  away  from 
heavy  traffic. 

Manual  Transmission  — If  Equipped 

If  using  a manual  transmission  vehicle  for  trailer  towing, 
all  starts  must  be  in  first  gear  to  avoid  excessive  clutch 
slippage. 

Automatic  Transmission  — If  Equipped 

The  DRIVE  range  can  be  selected  when  towing.  How- 
ever, if  frequent  shifting  or  changes  in  engine  speed  occur 
while  in  this  range,  use  the  AutoStick  shift  control  (if 
equipped)  to  select  a lower  gear  ratio. 


NOTE: 

• Using  a lower  gear  ratio  while  operating  the  vehicle 
under  heavy  loading  conditions,  will  improve  perfor- 
mance and  extend  transmission  life  by  reducing  exces- 
sive shifting  and  heat  buildup.  This  action  will  also 
provide  better  engine  braking. 

• If  you  REGULARLY  tow  a trailer  for  more  than  45 
minutes  of  continuous  operation,  then  change  the 
transmission  fluid  and  filter  as  specified  for  "police, 
taxi,  fleet,  or  frequent  trailer  towing".  Refer  to  the 
"Maintenance  Schedule"  for  the  proper  maintenance 
intervals. 


Information  Provided  by: 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  447 


AutoStick  — If  Equipped 

When  using  the  AutoStick  shift  control,  select  the  highest 
gear  that  allows  for  adequate  performance  and  avoids 
frequent  downshifts.  For  example,  choose  "4"  if  the 
desired  speed  can  be  maintained.  Choose  "3"  or  "2"  if 
needed  to  maintain  the  desired  speed. 

To  prevent  excess  heat  generation,  avoid  continuous 
driving  at  high  RPM.  Reduce  vehicle  speed  as  necessary 
to  avoid  extended  driving  at  high  RPM.  Return  to  a 
higher  gear  or  vehicle  speed  when  grade  and  road 
conditions  allow. 

Electronic  Speed  Control  — If  Equipped 

• Do  not  use  in  hilly  terrain  or  with  heavy  loads. 

• When  using  the  speed  control,  if  you  experience  speed 
drops  greater  than  10  mph  (16  km/h),  disengage  until 
you  can  get  back  to  cruising  speed. 


• Use  speed  control  in  flat  terrain  and  with  light  loads  to 
maximize  fuel  efficiency. 

Cooling  System 

To  reduce  potential  for  engine  and  transmission  over- 
heating, take  the  following  actions: 


City  Driving 

When  stopped  for  short  periods  of  time,  shift  the  trans- 
mission into  NEUTRAL  and  increase  engine  idle  speed. 


5 


Highway  Driving 


Reduce  speed. 

Air  Conditioning 

Turn  off  temporarily. 


Information  Provided  by: 


448  STARTING  AND  OPERATING 


RECREATIONAL  TOWING  (BEHIND  MOTORHOME,  ETC.) 
Towing  This  Vehicle  Behind  Another  Vehicle 


Towing  Condition 

Wheels  OFF  the  Ground 

Manual  Transmission 

Automatic  Transmission 

Flat  Tow 

None 

• Transmission  in  NEU- 
TRAL 

• Key  in  ACC  Position 

NOT  ALLOWED 

Dolly  Tow 

Front 

FWD  Models  ONLY 

FWD  Models  ONLY 

Rear 

NOT  ALLOWED 

NOT  ALLOWED 

On  Trailer 

All 

OK 

OK 

NOTE: 

• When  recreationally  towing  your  vehicle,  always  fol- 
low applicable  state  and  provincial  laws.  Contact  state 
and  provincial  Highway  Safety  offices  for  additional 
details. 


Vehicles  equipped  with  manual  transmissions  may  be 
recreationally  towed  (flat  towed)  at  any  legal  highway 
speed,  for  any  distance,  if  the  manual  transmission  is 
in  NEUTRAL  and  the  ignition  key  is  in  the  ACC 
position. 


Information  Provided  by: 


CAUTION! 


• DO  NOT  flat  tow  any  vehicle  equipped  with  an 
automatic  transmission.  Damage  to  the  drivetrain 
will  result.  If  these  vehicles  require  towing,  make 
sure  all  drive  wheels  are  OFF  the  ground. 

• DO  NOT  dolly  tow  any  4WD  vehicle.  Internal 
damage  to  the  transmission  or  transfer  case  will 
occur  if  a dolly  is  used  when  recreational  towing. 


Information 

= 


i Providi 

/M. 


STARTING  AND  OPERATING  449 


5 


Information  Provided  by: 

CZ)  = /M_  = ?^ 


WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES 


CONTENTS 

■ HAZARD  WARNING  FLASHERS 453  □ Road  Tire  Installation 465 


■ IF  YOUR  ENGINE  OVERHEATS 453 

■ WHEEL  AND  TIRE  TORQUE 

SPECIFICATIONS 454 

□ Torque  Specifications  454 

■ JACKING  AND  TIRE  CHANGING 456 

□ Jack  Location 457 

□ Spare  Tire  Stowage 457 

□ Preparations  For  Jacking 457 

□ Jacking  Instructions  458 


■ TIRE  SERVICE  KIT  — IF  EQUIPPED 467 

□ Tire  Service  Kit  Storage 467 

□ Tire  Service  Kit  Components  And  Operation  . .468 

□ Tire  Service  Kit  Usage  Precautions 469 

□ Sealing  A Tire  With  Tire  Service  Kit  471 

■ JUMP-STARTING  PROCEDURES 477 

□ Preparations  For  Jump-Start 478 

□ Jump-Starting  Procedure 480 

■ FREEING  A STUCK  VEHICLE  482 


452  WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES  H 

■ SHIFT  LEVER  OVERRIDE 

■ TOWING  A DISABLED  VEHICLE 


483  □ With  Ignition  Key 

484 


Information  Provided  by: 

-'1  0 = = 


HAZARD  WARNING  FLASHERS 


The  Hazard  Warning  flasher  switch  is  located  on  the 
instrument  panel  below  the  climate  controls. 


A Push  the  switch  to  turn  on  the  Hazard  Warning 
flasher.  When  the  switch  is  activated,  all  direc- 
tional turn  signals  will  flash  on  and  off  to  warn  oncoming 
traffic  of  an  emergency.  Push  the  switch  a second  time  to 
turn  off  the  Hazard  Warning  flashers. 


This  is  an  emergency  warning  system  and  it  should  not 
be  used  when  the  vehicle  is  in  motion.  Use  it  when  your 
vehicle  is  disabled  and  it  is  creating  a safety  hazard  for 
other  motorists. 


When  you  must  leave  the  vehicle  to  seek  assistance,  the 
Hazard  Warning  flashers  will  continue  to  operate  even 
though  the  ignition  is  placed  in  the  OFF  position. 

NOTE:  With  extended  use  the  Hazard  Warning  flashers 
may  wear  down  your  battery. 


WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES  453 


IF  YOUR  ENGINE  OVERHEATS 

In  any  of  the  following  situations,  you  can  reduce  the 

potential  for  overheating  by  taking  the  appropriate  action. 

• On  the  highways  — slow  down. 

• In  city  traffic  — while  stopped,  place  the  transmission 
in  NEUTRAL,  but  do  not  increase  engine  idle  speed. 

NOTE:  There  are  steps  that  you  can  take  to  slow  down 

an  impending  overheat  condition: 

• If  your  air  conditioner  (A/C)  is  on,  turn  it  off.  The  A/C 
system  adds  heat  to  the  engine  cooling  system  and 
turning  the  A/C  off  can  help  remove  this  heat. 

• You  can  also  turn  the  temperature  control  to  maximum 
heat,  the  mode  control  to  floor  and  the  blower  control 
to  high.  This  allows  the  heater  core  to  act  as  a 
supplement  to  the  radiator  and  aids  in  removing  heat 
from  the  engine  cooling  system. 


454  WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES 


CAUTION! 

Driving  with  a hot  cooling  system  could  damage 
your  vehicle.  If  the  pointer  rises  to  the  H (red)  mark, 
the  instrument  cluster  will  sound  a chime.  When 
safe,  pull  over  and  stop  the  vehicle  with  the  engine  at 
idle.  Turn  off  the  air  conditioning  and  wait  until  the 
pointer  drops  back  into  the  normal  range.  If  the 
pointer  remains  on  the  H (red)  mark  for  more  than  a 
minute,  turn  the  engine  off  immediately  and  call  for 
service. 


WARNING! 

You  or  others  can  be  badly  burned  by  hot  engine 
coolant  (antifreeze)  or  steam  from  your  radiator.  If 
you  see  or  hear  steam  coming  from  under  the  hood, 
do  not  open  the  hood  until  the  radiator  has  had  time 


(Continued) 

u , 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

to  cool.  Never  try  to  open  a cooling  system  pressure 
cap  when  the  radiator  or  coolant  bottle  is  hot. 


WHEEL  AND  TIRE  TORQUE  SPECIFICATIONS 

Proper  lug  nut/bolt  torque  is  very  important  to  ensure 
that  the  wheel  is  properly  mounted  to  the  vehicle.  Any 
time  a wheel  has  been  removed  and  reinstalled  on  the 
vehicle  the  lug  nuts/bolts  should  be  torqued  using  a 
properly  calibrated  torque  wrench. 

Torque  Specifications 


Lug  Nut/Bolt  Torque 

**Lug  Nut/ 
Bolt  Size 

Lug  Nut/ 
Bolt 
Socket 
Size 

100  Ft-Lbs  (135  N-m) 

M12  x 1.5 

19  mm 

i Provided  by: 


WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES  455 


**Use  only  your  Authorized  Dealer  recommended  lug  Tighten  the  lug  nuts/bolts  in  a star  pattern  until  each 

nuts/bolts  and  clean  or  remove  any  dirt  or  oil  before  nut/bolt  has  been  tightened  twice. 

tightening. 


Inspect  the  wheel  mounting  surface  prior  to  mounting 
the  tire  and  remove  any  corrosion  or  loose  particles. 


Wheel  Mounting  Surface 


0605006372 


Torque  Patterns 

After  25  miles  (40  km)  check  the  lug  nut/bolt  torque  to  be 
sure  that  all  the  lug  nuts/bolts  are  properly  seated 
against  the  wheel. 


^ ^ Information  Provided  by: 

o = = 


456  WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES 


WARNING! 

To  avoid  the  risk  of  forcing  the  vehicle  off  the  jack, 
do  not  tighten  the  lug  nuts  fully  until  the  vehicle  has 
been  lowered.  Failure  to  follow  this  warning  may 
result  in  personal  injury. 


JACKING  AND  TIRE  CHANGING 


WARNING! 

• Do  not  attempt  to  change  a tire  on  the  side  of  the 
vehicle  close  to  moving  traffic.  Pull  far  enough  off 
the  road  to  avoid  the  danger  of  being  hit  when 
operating  the  jack  or  changing  the  wheel. 


(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Being  under  a jacked-up  vehicle  is  dangerous.  The 
vehicle  could  slip  off  the  jack  and  fall  on  you.  You 
could  be  crushed.  Never  put  any  part  of  your  body 
under  a vehicle  that  is  on  a jack.  If  you  need  to  get 
under  a raised  vehicle,  take  it  to  a service  center 
where  it  can  be  raised  on  a lift. 

• Never  start  or  run  the  engine  while  the  vehicle  is 
on  a jack. 

• The  jack  is  designed  to  be  used  as  a tool  for 
changing  tires  only.  The  jack  should  not  be  used  to 
lift  the  vehicle  for  service  purposes.  The  vehicle 
should  be  jacked  on  a firm  level  surface  only. 
Avoid  ice  or  slippery  areas. 


C: 


| CD  = /M 


Jack  Location 


The  jack  and  jack-handle  are  stowed  under  the  load  floor 
in  the  cargo  area. 


Spare  Tire  And  Jack  Stowage 


060563271 


WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES  457 


Spare  Tire  Stowage 

The  compact  spare  tire  is  stowed  under  the  rear  load  floor 
in  the  cargo  area. 

Spare  Tire  Removal 

Lift  up  the  load  floor  cover  and  remove  the  hold  down. 

Preparations  For  Jacking 


1.  Park  the  vehicle  on  a firm  level  surface,  avoiding  ice  or 
slippery  areas. 


6 


WARNING! 


Do  not  attempt  to  change  a tire  on  the  side  of  the 
vehicle  close  to  moving  traffic,  pull  far  enough  off 
the  road  to  avoid  the  danger  of  being  hit  when 
operating  the  jack  or  changing  the  wheel. 


2.  Turn  on  the  Hazard  Warning  flasher. 


i Provided  by: 


458  WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES 


3.  Set  the  parking  brake. 

4.  Place  the  shift  lever  in  PARK  (automatic  transmission) 
or  REVERSE  (manual  transmission). 

5.  Turn  OFF  the  ignition. 

6.  Block  both  the  front  and  rear  of  the  wheel  diagonally 
opposite  of  the  jacking  position.  For  ex- 
ample, if  changing  the  right  front  tire, 
block  the  left  rear  wheel. 

ommsi«  NOTE:  Passengers  should  not  remain  in  the 
vehicle  while  the  vehicle  is  being  jacked. 


Jacking  Instructions 


WARNING! 

Carefully  follow  these  tire  changing  warnings  to 

help  prevent  personal  injury  or  damage  to  your 

vehicle: 

• Always  park  on  a firm,  level  surface  as  far  from  the 
edge  of  the  roadway  as  possible  before  raising  the 
vehicle. 

• Turn  on  the  Hazard  Warning  flasher. 

• Block  the  wheel  diagonally  opposite  the  wheel  to 
be  raised. 

• Set  the  parking  brake  firmly  and  set  an  automatic 
transmission  in  PARK;  a manual  transmission  in 
REVERSE. 

• Never  start  or  run  the  engine  with  the  vehicle  on  a 
jack. 


i Provided  by: 


(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Do  not  let  anyone  sit  in  the  vehicle  when  it  is  on  a 
jack. 

• Do  not  get  under  the  vehicle  when  it  is  on  a jack.  If 
you  need  to  get  under  a raised  vehicle,  take  it  to  a 
service  center  where  it  can  be  raised  on  a lift. 

• Only  use  the  jack  in  the  positions  indicated  and  for 
lifting  this  vehicle  during  a tire  change. 

• If  working  on  or  near  a roadway,  be  extremely 
careful  of  motor  traffic. 

• To  assure  that  spare  tires,  flat  or  inflated,  are 
securely  stowed,  spares  must  be  stowed  with  the 
valve  stem  facing  the  ground. 


WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES  459 


Jack  Warning  Label 

CAUTION! 

Do  not  attempt  to  raise  the  vehicle  by  jacking  on 
locations  other  than  those  indicated  in  the  Jacking 
Instructions  for  this  vehicle. 


6 


NOTE:  Refer  to  "Tires  — General  Information"  in  "Start- 
ing And  Operating"  for  further  information  about  the 
spare  tire,  it's  use,  and  operation. 


460  WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES 


1.  Remove  the  scissors  jack  and  lug  wrench  from  the 
spare  wheel  as  an  assembly.  Turn  the  jack  screw  to  the 
left  to  loosen  the  lug  wrench  and  remove  the  wrench 
from  the  jack  assembly. 

NOTE:  The  jack  handle  attaches  to  the  side  of  the  jack 
with  two  attachment  points.  When  the  jack  is  partially 
expanded,  the  tension  between  the  two  attachment 
points  holds  the  jack  handle  in  place. 


Removing  Jack  Handle  From  Jack 

2.  Loosen,  but  do  not  remove,  the  wheel  nuts  by  turning 
them  to  the  left  one  turn  while  the  wheel  is  still  on  the 
ground. 


WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES  461 


NOTE:  There  are  front  and  rear  jacking  locations  on  each 
side  of  the  body.  The  front  locations  are  outlined  by  two 
triangular  cutouts  on  one  of  the  flanges  in  the  sill  flange 
assembly.  The  rear  location  is  the  same  but  with  two 
rectangular  cutouts.  For  vehicles  equipped  with  plastic 
trim,  the  plastic  has  been  cut  away  to  expose  the  jacking 
locations  in  the  body. 


Jacking  Locations 


Information  Provided  by: 


462  WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES 


CD  = /M_E=;=R 


Front  Jacking  Location 


WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES  463 


Do  not  raise  the  vehicle  until  you  are  sure  the  jack  is 
securely  engaged. 

3.  Turn  the  jack  screw  to  the  left  until  the  jack  can  be 
placed  under  the  jacking  location.  Once  the  jack  is 
positioned,  turn  the  jack  screw  to  the  right  until  the 
jack  head  is  properly  engaged  with  the  lift  area  closest 
to  the  wheel  to  be  changed. 


WARNING! 

Raising  the  vehicle  higher  than  necessary  can  make 
the  vehicle  less  stable.  It  could  slip  off  the  jack  and 
hurt  someone  near  it.  Raise  the  vehicle  only  enough 
to  remove  the  tire. 


4.  Using  the  swivel  wrench  raise  the  vehicle  by  turning 
the  jack  screw  to  the  right.  Raise  the  vehicle  only  until 
the  tire  just  clears  the  surface  and  enough  clearance  is 
obtained  to  install  the  spare  tire.  Minimum  tire  lift 
provides  maximum  stability. 


5.  Remove  the  wheel  nuts  and  pull  the  wheel  and  wheel 
covers,  where  applicable,  off  the  hub.  Install  the  spare 
wheel  and  wheel  nuts  with  the  cone  shaped  end  of  the 
nuts  toward  the  wheel.  Lightly  tighten  the  nuts. 


WARNING! 

To  avoid  the  risk  of  forcing  the  vehicle  off  the  jack, 
do  not  tighten  the  wheel  nuts  fully  until  the  vehicle 
has  been  lowered.  Failure  to  follow  this  warning  may 
result  in  serious  injury. 


6 


C: 


| CD  = /M 


464  WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES 


060633619 


Mounting  Spare  Tire 

CAUTION! 

Be  sure  to  mount  the  spare  tire  with  the  valve  stem 
facing  outward.  The  vehicle  could  be  damaged  if  the 
spare  tire  is  mounted  incorrectly. 


£31  =E 


WARNING! 


To  avoid  possible  personal  injury,  handle  the  wheel 
covers  with  care  to  avoid  contact  with  any  sharp 
edges. 

NOTE:  The  wheel  cover  is  held  on  the  wheel  by  the 
wheel  nuts.  When  reinstalling  the  original  wheel,  prop- 
erly align  the  wheel  cover  to  the  valve  stem,  place  the 
wheel  cover  onto  the  wheel,  then  install  the  wheel  nuts. 

6.  Lower  the  vehicle  by  turning  the  jack  screw  to  the  left. 

7.  Finish  tightening  the  lug  nuts.  Push  down  on  the 
wrench  while  at  the  end  of  the  handle  for  increased 
leverage.  Tighten  the  lug  nuts  in  a star  pattern  until 
each  lug  nut  has  been  tightened  twice.  Refer  to 
"Torque  Specifications"  in  this  section  for  proper  lug 
nut  torque. 


/M 


8.  Remove  the  wheel  blocks  and  lower  the  jack  until  it  is 
free.  Release  the  parking  brake.  Reassemble  the  lug 
wrench  to  the  jack  assembly  and  stow  it  in  the  spare 
tire  area.  Secure  the  assembly  using  the  means  pro- 
vided. 


WARNING! 

A loose  tire  or  jack  thrown  forward  in  a collision  or 
hard  stop  could  endanger  the  occupants  of  the  ve- 
hicle. Always  stow  the  jack  parts  and  the  spare  tire  in 
the  places  provided. 

9.  Place  the  deflated  (flat)  tire  in  the  cargo  area,  have  the 
tire  repaired  or  replaced  as  soon  as  possible. 


WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES  465 


WARNING! 

A loose  tire  thrown  forward  in  a collision  or  hard 
stop  could  injure  the  occupants  in  the  vehicle.  Have 
the  deflated  (flat)  tire  repaired  or  replaced  immedi- 
ately. 


10.  Check  the  spare  tire  pressure  as  soon  as  possible. 
Correct  the  tire  pressure  as  required. 

11.  After  25  miles  (40  km)  check  the  lug  nut  torque  with 
a torque  wrench  to  ensure  that  all  lug  nuts  are 
properly  seated  against  the  wheel. 


6 


Road  Tire  Installation 


Vehicles  Equipped  With  Wheel  Covers 

1.  Mount  the  road  tire  on  the  axle. 


466  WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES 


2.  Align  the  valve  notch  in  the  wheel  cover  with  the  valve 
stem  on  the  wheel.  Install  the  cover  by  hand.  Do  not  use 
a hammer  or  excessive  force  to  install  the  cover. 


060668307 

Tire  And  Wheel  Cover  Or  Center  Cap 

1 — Valve  Stem  4 — Wheel  Cover 

2 — Valve  Notch  5 — Road  Wheel 

3 — Wheel  Lug  Nut 


3.  Install  the  five  wheel  lug  nuts  with  the  cone  shaped  end  of 
the  nut  toward  the  wheel.  Lightly  tighten  the  lug  nuts. 


WARNING! 

To  avoid  the  risk  of  forcing  the  vehicle  off  the  jack, 
do  not  tighten  the  lug  nuts  fully  until  the  vehicle  has 
been  lowered.  Failure  to  follow  this  warning  may 
result  in  serious  injury. 

4.  Lower  the  vehicle  to  the  ground  by  turning  the  jack 
handle  counterclockwise. 

5.  Finish  tightening  the  lug  nuts.  Push  down  on  the 
wrench  while  at  the  end  of  the  handle  for  increased 
leverage.  Refer  to  "Torque  Specifications"  in  this  sec- 
tion for  correct  lug  nut  torque. 

6.  After  25  miles  (40  km)  check  the  lug  nut  torque  with  a 
torque  wrench  to  ensure  that  all  lug  nuts  are  properly 
seated  against  the  wheel. 


Vehicles  Without  Wheel  Covers 

1.  Mount  the  road  tire  on  the  axle. 

2.  Install  the  remaining  lug  nuts  with  the  cone  shaped  end 
of  the  nut  toward  the  wheel.  Lightly  tighten  the  lug  nuts. 


WARNING! 

To  avoid  the  risk  of  forcing  the  vehicle  off  the  jack, 
do  not  fully  tighten  the  lug  nuts  until  the  vehicle  has 
been  lowered.  Failure  to  follow  this  warning  may 
result  in  serious  injury. 

3.  Lower  the  vehicle  to  the  ground  by  turning  the  jack 
handle  counterclockwise. 

4.  Finish  tightening  the  lug  nuts.  Push  down  on  the 
wrench  while  at  the  end  of  the  handle  for  increased 
leverage.  Refer  to  "Torque  Specifications"  in  this  sec- 
tion for  correct  lug  nut  torque. 


WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES  467 


5.  After  25  miles  (40  km)  check  the  lug  nut  torque  with  a 
torque  wrench  to  ensure  that  all  lug  nuts  are  properly 
seated  against  the  wheel. 

TIRE  SERVICE  KIT  — IF  EQUIPPED 

Small  punctures  up  to  1/4  inch  (6  mm)  in  the  tire  tread 
can  be  sealed  with  Tire  Service  Kit.  Foreign  objects  (e.g., 
screws  or  nails)  should  not  be  removed  from  the  tire.  Tire 
Service  Kit  can  be  used  in  outside  temperatures  down  to 
approximately  -4°F  (-20°C). 

This  kit  will  provide  a temporary  tire  seal,  allowing  you 
to  drive  your  vehicle  up  to  100  miles  (160  km)  with  a 
maximum  speed  of  55  mph  (90  km/h). 

Tire  Service  Kit  Storage 

The  Tire  Service  Kit  is  located  under  the  load  floor  in  the 
cargo  area. 


468  WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES 


Tire  Service  Kit  Components  And  Operation 


Tire  Service  Kit  Components 


Using  The  Mode  Select  Knob  And  Hoses 

Your  Tire  Service  Kit  is  equipped  with  the  following 
symbols  to  indicate  the  air  or  sealant  mode. 

Selecting  Air  Mode 

-/  Push  in  the  Mode  Select  Knob  (5)  and  turn  to  this 
position  for  air  pump  operation  only.  Use  the 
Black  Air  Pump  Hose  (7)  when  selecting  this  mode. 

Selecting  Sealant  Mode 

TL  Push  in  the  Mode  Select  Knob  (5)  and  turn  to  this 
position  to  inject  the  Tire  Service  Kit  Sealant  and 
to  inflate  the  tire.  Use  the  Sealant  Hose  (clear  hose)  (6) 
when  selecting  this  mode. 


1 — Sealant  Bottle 

2 — Deflation  Button 

3 — Pressure  Gauge 

4 — Power  Button 


5 — Mode  Select  Knob 

6 — Sealant  Hose  (Clear) 

7 — Air  Pump  Hose  (Black) 

8 — Power  Plug  (located  on  the 
bottom  side  of  the  Tire  Service  Kit) 


Using  The  Power  Button 

Push  and  release  the  Power  Button  (4)  once  to 
turn  On  the  Tire  Service  Kit.  Push  and  release  the  Power 
Button  (4)  again  to  turn  Off  the  Tire  Service  Kit. 


cz>=/M_a 


Using  The  Deflation  Button 

^ Push  the  Deflation  Button  (2)  to  reduce  the  air 
pressure  in  the  tire  if  it  becomes  over-inflated. 

Tire  Service  Kit  Usage  Precautions 

• Replace  the  Tire  Service  Kit  Sealant  Bottle  (1)  and 
Sealant  Hose  (6)  prior  to  the  expiration  date  (printed  at 
the  lower  right  hand  corner  on  the  bottle  label)  to 
assure  optimum  operation  of  the  system.  Refer  to 
"Sealing  a Tire  with  Tire  Service  Kit"  section  (F) 
"Sealant  Bottle  and  Hose  Replacement". 


WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES  469 


Tire  Service  Kit  Expiration  Date  Location 

The  Sealant  Bottle  (1)  and  Sealant  Hose  (6)  are  a one 
tire  application  use  and  need  to  be  replaced  after  each 
use.  Always  replace  these  components  immediately  at 
your  original  equipment  vehicle  dealer. 


470  WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES 


• When  the  Tire  Service  Kit  sealant  is  in  a liquid  form, 
clean  water,  and  a damp  cloth  will  remove  the  material 
from  the  vehicle  or  tire  and  wheel  components.  Once 
the  sealant  dries,  it  can  easily  be  peeled  off  and 
properly  discarded. 

• For  optimum  performance,  make  sure  the  valve  stem 
on  the  wheel  is  free  of  debris  before  connecting  the  Tire 
Service  Kit. 

• You  can  use  the  Tire  Service  Kit  air  pump  to  inflate 
bicycle  tires.  The  kit  also  comes  with  two  needles, 
located  in  the  Accessory  Storage  Compartment  (on  the 
bottom  of  the  air  pump)  for  inflating  sport  balls,  rafts, 
or  similar  inflatable  items.  However,  use  only  the  Air 
Pump  Hose  (7)  and  make  sure  the  Mode  Select  Knob 
(5)  is  in  the  Air  Mode  when  inflating  such  items  to 
avoid  injecting  sealant  into  them.  The  Tire  Service  Kit 
Sealant  is  only  intended  to  seal  punctures  less  than  1/4 
inch  (6  mm)  diameter  in  the  tread  of  your  vehicle. 


• Do  not  lift  or  carry  the  Tire  Service  Kit  by  the  hoses. 


WARNING! 

• Do  not  attempt  to  seal  a tire  on  the  side  of  the 
vehicle  closest  to  traffic.  Pull  far  enough  off  the 
road  to  avoid  the  danger  of  being  hit  when  using 
the  Tire  Service  Kit. 

• Do  not  use  Tire  Service  Kit  or  drive  the  vehicle 
under  the  following  circumstances: 

- If  the  puncture  in  the  tire  tread  is  approximately 
1/4  inch  (6  mm)  or  larger. 

- If  the  tire  has  any  sidewall  damage. 

-If  the  tire  has  any  damage  from  driving  with 
extremely  low  tire  pressure. 

- If  the  tire  has  any  damage  from  driving  on  a flat 
tire. 

- If  the  wheel  has  any  damage. 


(Continued) 


WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES  471 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

- If  you  are  unsure  of  the  condition  of  the  tire  or 
the  wheel. 

• Keep  Tire  Service  Kit  away  from  open  flames  or 
heat  source. 

• A loose  Tire  Service  Kit  thrown  forward  in  a 
collision  or  hard  stop  could  endanger  the  occupants 
of  the  vehicle.  Always  stow  the  Tire  Service  Kit  in 
the  place  provided.  Failure  to  follow  these  warn- 
ings can  result  in  injuries  that  are  serious  or  fatal  to 
you,  your  passengers,  and  others  around  you. 

• Take  care  not  to  allow  the  contents  of  Tire  Service 
Kit  to  come  in  contact  with  hair,  eyes,  or  clothing. 
Tire  Service  Kit  sealant  is  harmful  if  inhaled, 
swallowed,  or  absorbed  through  the  skin.  It  causes 
skin,  eye,  and  respiratory  irritation.  Flush  immedi- 
ately with  plenty  of  water  if  there  is  any  contact 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

with  eyes  or  skin.  Change  clothing  as  soon  as 
possible,  if  there  is  any  contact  with  clothing. 

• Tire  Service  Kit  Sealant  solution  contains  latex.  In 
case  of  an  allergic  reaction  or  rash,  consult  a phy- 
sician immediately.  Keep  Tire  Service  Kit  out  of 
reach  of  children.  If  swallowed,  rinse  mouth  imme- 
diately with  plenty  of  water  and  drink  plenty  of 
water.  Do  not  induce  vomiting!  Consult  a physician 
immediately. 

Sealing  A Tire  With  Tire  Service  Kit 

(A)  Whenever  You  Stop  To  Use  Tire  Service  Kit: 

1.  Pull  over  to  a safe  location  and  turn  on  the  vehicle's 
Hazard  Warning  flashers. 


(Continued) 


472  WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES 


2.  Verify  that  the  valve  stem  (on  the  wheel  with  the 
deflated  tire)  is  in  a position  that  is  near  to  the  ground. 
This  will  allow  the  Tire  Service  Kit  Hoses  (6)  and  (7)  to 
reach  the  valve  stem  and  keep  the  Tire  Service  Kit  flat 
on  the  ground.  This  will  provide  the  best  positioning 
of  the  kit  when  injecting  the  sealant  into  the  deflated 
tire  and  running  the  air  pump.  Move  the  vehicle  as 
necessary  to  place  the  valve  stem  in  this  position 
before  proceeding. 

3.  Place  the  transmission  in  PARK  (auto  transmission)  or 
in  Gear  (manual  transmission)  and  place  the  ignition 
in  the  OFF  position. 

4.  Set  the  parking  brake. 

(B)  Setting  Up  To  Use  Tire  Service  Kit: 

1.  Push  in  the  Mode  Select  Knob  (5)  and  turn  to  the 
Sealant  Mode  position. 


2.  Uncoil  the  Sealant  Hose  (6)  and  then  remove  the  cap 
from  the  fitting  at  the  end  of  the  hose. 

3.  Place  the  Tire  Service  Kit  flat  on  the  ground  next  to  the 
deflated  tire. 

4.  Remove  the  cap  from  the  valve  stem  and  then  screw 
the  fitting  at  the  end  of  the  Sealant  Hose  (6)  onto  the 
valve  stem. 

5.  Uncoil  the  Power  Plug  (8)  and  insert  the  plug  into  the 
vehicle's  12  Volt  power  outlet. 

NOTE:  Do  not  remove  foreign  objects  (e.g.,  screws  or 

nails)  from  the  tire. 

(C)  Injecting  Tire  Service  Kit  Sealant  Into  The 

Deflated  Tire: 

• Always  start  the  engine  before  turning  ON  the  Tire 
Service  Kit. 


Information  Provided  by: 


WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES  473 


NOTE:  Manual  transmission  vehicles  must  have  the 
parking  brake  engaged  and  the  shift  lever  in  NEUTRAL. 

• After  pushing  the  Power  Button  (4),  the  sealant  (white 
fluid)  will  flow  from  the  Sealant  Bottle  (1)  through  the 
Sealant  Hose  (6)  and  into  the  tire. 

NOTE:  Sealant  may  leak  out  through  the  puncture  in  the 
tire. 

If  the  sealant  (white  fluid)  does  not  flow  within  0-10 
seconds  through  the  Sealant  Hose  (6): 

1.  Push  the  Power  Button  (4)  to  turn  Off  the  Tire  Service 
Kit.  Disconnect  the  Sealant  Hose  (6)  from  the  valve 
stem.  Make  sure  the  valve  stem  is  free  of  debris. 
Reconnect  the  Sealant  Hose  (6)  to  the  valve  stem. 
Check  that  the  Mode  Select  Knob  (5)  is  in  the  Sealant 
Mode  position  and  not  Air  Mode.  Push  the  Power 
Button  (4)  to  turn  On  the  Tire  Service  Kit. 


2.  Connect  the  Power  Plug  (8)  to  a different  12  Volt 
power  outlet  in  your  vehicle  or  another  vehicle,  if 
available.  Make  sure  the  engine  is  running  before 
turning  ON  the  Tire  Service  Kit. 

3.  The  Sealant  Bottle  (1)  may  be  empty  due  to  previous 
use.  Call  for  assistance. 


NOTE:  If  the  Mode  Select  Knob  (5)  is  on  Air  Mode  and 
the  pump  is  operating,  air  will  dispense  from  the  Air 
Pump  Hose  (7)  only,  not  the  Sealant  Hose  (6). 


6 


If  the  sealant  (white  fluid)  does  flow  through  the 
Sealant  Hose  (6): 


1.  Continue  to  operate  the  pump  until  sealant  is  no 
longer  flowing  through  hose  (typically  takes  30  - 70 
seconds).  As  the  sealant  flows  through  the  Sealant 
Hose  (6),  the  Pressure  Gauge  (3)  can  read  as  high  as 
70  psi  (4.8  Bar).  The  Pressure  Gauge  (3)  will  decrease 


5/M 


474  WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES 


quickly  from  approximately  70  psi  (4.8  Bar)  to  the 
actual  tire  pressure  when  the  Sealant  Bottle  (1)  is 
empty. 

2.  The  pump  will  start  to  inject  air  into  the  tire  immedi- 
ately after  the  Sealant  Bottle  (1)  is  empty.  Continue  to 
operate  the  pump  and  inflate  the  tire  to  the  pressure 
indicated  on  the  tire  pressure  label  on  the  driver-side 
latch  pillar  (recommended  pressure).  Check  the  tire 
pressure  by  looking  at  the  Pressure  Gauge  (3). 

If  the  tire  does  not  inflate  to  at  least  26  psi  (1.8  Bar) 
pressure  within  15  minutes: 

• The  tire  is  too  badly  damaged.  Do  not  attempt  to  drive 
the  vehicle  further.  Call  for  assistance. 

NOTE:  If  the  tire  becomes  over- inflated,  push  the  Defla- 
tion Button  to  reduce  the  tire  pressure  to  the  recom- 
mended inflation  pressure  before  continuing. 


If  the  tire  inflates  to  the  recommended  pressure  or  is  at 

least  26  psi  (1.8  Bar)  pressure  within  15  minutes: 

1.  Push  the  Power  Button  (4)  to  turn  off  the  Tire  Service 
Kit. 

2.  Remove  the  Speed  Limit  sticker  from  the  top  of  the 
Sealant  Bottle  (1)  and  place  the  sticker  on  the  instru- 
ment panel. 

3.  Immediately  disconnect  the  Sealant  Hose  (6)  from  the 
valve  stem,  reinstall  the  cap  on  the  fitting  at  the  end  of  the 
hose,  and  place  the  Tire  Service  Kit  in  the  vehicle  storage 
location.  Quickly  proceed  to  (D)  "Drive  Vehicle." 


Information  Provided  by: 


CAUTION! 


• The  metal  end  fitting  from  Power  Plug  (8)  may  get 
hot  after  use,  so  it  should  be  handled  carefully. 

• Failure  to  reinstall  the  cap  on  the  fitting  at  the  end 
of  the  Sealant  Hose  (6)  can  result  in  sealant  con- 
tacting your  skin,  clothing,  and  the  vehicle's  inte- 
rior. It  can  also  result  in  sealant  contacting  internal 
Tire  Service  Kit  components  which  may  cause 
permanent  damage  to  the  kit. 

(D)  Drive  Vehicle: 

Immediately  after  injecting  sealant  and  inflating  the  tire, 
drive  the  vehicle  5 miles  (8  km)  or  10  minutes  to  ensure 
distribution  of  the  Tire  Service  Kit  Sealant  within  the  tire. 
Do  not  exceed  55  mph  (90  km/h). 


WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES  475 


WARNING! 

Tire  Service  Kit  is  not  a permanent  flat  tire  repair. 
Have  the  tire  inspected  and  repaired  or  replaced  after 
using  Tire  Service  Kit.  Do  not  exceed  55  mph 
(90  km/h)  until  the  tire  is  repaired  or  replaced.  Failure 
to  follow  this  warning  can  result  in  injuries  that  are 
serious  or  fatal  to  you,  your  passengers,  and  others 
around  you. 

(E)  After  Driving: 

Pull  over  to  a safe  location.  Refer  to  "Whenever  You  Stop 
to  Use  Tire  Service  Kit"  before  continuing. 

1.  Push  in  the  Mode  Select  Knob  (5)  and  turn  to  the  Air 
Mode  position. 

2.  Uncoil  the  power  plug  and  insert  the  plug  into  the 
vehicle's  12  Volt  power  outlet. 


/M 


476  WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES 

3.  Uncoil  the  Air  Pump  Hose  (7)  (black  in  color)  and 
screw  the  fitting  at  the  end  of  hose  (7)  onto  the  valve 
stem. 

4.  Check  the  pressure  in  the  tire  by  reading  the  Pressure 
Gauge  (3). 

If  tire  pressure  is  less  than  19  psi  (1.3  Bar): 

The  tire  is  too  badly  damaged.  Do  not  attempt  to  drive 

the  vehicle  further.  Call  for  assistance. 

If  the  tire  pressure  is  19  psi  (1.3  Bar)  or  higher: 

1.  Push  the  Power  Button  (4)  to  turn  on  Tire  Service  Kit 
and  inflate  the  tire  to  the  pressure  indicated  on  the  tire 
and  loading  information  label  on  the  driver-side  door 
opening. 

NOTE:  If  the  tire  becomes  over- inflated,  push  the  Defla- 
tion Button  to  reduce  the  tire  pressure  to  the  recom- 
mended inflation  pressure  before  continuing. 


2.  Disconnect  the  Tire  Service  Kit  from  the  valve  stem, 
reinstall  the  cap  on  the  valve  stem  and  unplug  from  12 
Volt  outlet. 

3.  Place  the  Tire  Service  Kit  in  its  proper  storage  area  in 
the  vehicle. 

4.  Have  the  tire  inspected  and  repaired  or  replaced  at  the 
earliest  opportunity  at  an  authorized  dealer  or  tire 
service  center. 

5.  Remove  the  Speed  Limit  sticker  from  the  instrument 
panel  after  the  tire  has  been  repaired. 

6.  Replace  the  Sealant  Bottle  (1)  and  Sealant  Hose  (6) 
assembly  at  your  authorized  dealer  as  soon  as  pos- 
sible. Refer  to  (F)  "Sealant  Bottle  and  Hose  Replace- 
ment". 

NOTE:  When  having  the  tire  serviced,  advise  the  autho- 
rized dealer  or  service  center  that  the  tire  has  been  sealed 

using  the  Tire  Service  Kit. 


WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES  477 


(F)  Sealant  Bottle  And  Hose  Replacement: 

1.  Uncoil  the  Sealant  Hose  (6)  (clear  in  color). 

2.  Locate  the  round  Sealant  Bottle  release  button  in  the 
recessed  area  under  the  sealant  bottle. 

3.  Push  the  Sealant  Bottle  release  button.  The  Sealant 
Bottle  (1)  will  pop  up.  Remove  the  bottle  and  dispose 
of  it  accordingly. 

4.  Clean  any  remaining  sealant  from  the  Tire  Service  Kit 
housing. 

5.  Position  the  new  Sealant  Bottle  (1)  in  the  housing  so 
that  the  Sealant  Hose  (6)  aligns  with  the  hose  slot  in 
the  front  of  the  housing.  Push  the  bottle  into  the 
housing.  An  audible  click  will  be  heard  indicating  the 
bottle  is  locked  into  place. 


6.  Verify  that  the  cap  is  installed  on  the  fitting  at  the  end 
of  the  Sealant  Hose  (6)  and  return  the  hose  to  its 
storage  area  (located  on  the  bottom  of  the  air  pump). 

7.  Return  the  Tire  Service  Kit  to  its  storage  location  in  the 
vehicle. 


JUMP-STARTING  PROCEDURES 


If  your  vehicle  has  a discharged  battery  it  can  be  jump- 
started  using  a set  of  jumper  cables  and  a battery  in 
another  vehicle  or  by  using  a portable  battery  booster 
pack.  Jump-starting  can  be  dangerous  if  done  improperly 
so  please  follow  the  procedures  in  this  section  carefully. 


6 


NOTE:  When  using  a portable  battery  booster  pack 
follow  the  manufacturer's  operating  instructions  and 
precautions. 


Information  Provided  by: 


478  WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES 


CAUTION! 

Do  not  use  a portable  battery  booster  pack  or  any 
other  booster  source  with  a system  voltage  greater 
than  12  Volts  or  damage  to  the  battery,  starter  motor, 
alternator  or  electrical  system  may  occur. 


WARNING! 

Do  not  attempt  jump-starting  if  the  battery  is  frozen. 
It  could  rupture  or  explode  and  cause  personal  injury. 

Preparations  For  Jump-Start 

The  battery  in  your  vehicle  is  located  in  the  front  of  the 
engine  compartment  below  the  air  intake  duct.  To  access 
the  battery  remove  the  air  intake  duct  by  turning  the  two 
finger  screws,  located  on  the  radiator  support. 


Air  Intake  Finger  Screws 


/NL 


WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES  479 


Positive  Battery  Post 


WARNING! 


Take  care  to  avoid  the  radiator  cooling  fan  when- 
ever the  hood  is  raised.  It  can  start  anytime  the 
ignition  switch  is  ON.  You  can  be  injured  by 
moving  fan  blades. 

Remove  any  metal  jewelry  such  as  rings,  watch 
bands  and  bracelets  that  could  make  an  inadvertent 
electrical  contact.  You  could  be  seriously  injured. 
Batteries  contain  sulfuric  acid  that  can  burn  your 
skin  or  eyes  and  generate  hydrogen  gas  which  is 
flammable  and  explosive.  Keep  open  flames  or 
sparks  away  from  the  battery. 


1.  Set  the  parking  brake,  shift  the  automatic  transmission 
into  PARK  (manual  transmission  to  NEUTRAL)  and 
turn  the  ignition  to  LOCK. 


2.  Turn  off  the  heater,  radio,  and  all  unnecessary  electri- 
cal accessories. 


480  WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES 

3.  If  using  another  vehicle  to  jump-start  the  battery,  park 
the  vehicle  within  the  jumper  cables  reach,  set  the 
parking  brake  and  make  sure  the  ignition  is  OFF. 


WARNING! 

Do  not  allow  vehicles  to  touch  each  other  as  this 
could  establish  a ground  connection  and  personal 
injury  could  result. 

Jump-Starting  Procedure 


WARNING! 

Failure  to  follow  this  jump-starting  procedure  could 
result  in  personal  injury  or  property  damage  due  to 
battery  explosion. 


CAUTION! 

Failure  to  follow  these  procedures  could  result  in 
damage  to  the  charging  system  of  the  booster  vehicle 
or  the  discharged  vehicle. 

NOTE:  Remove  Air  Intake  before  proceeding  with  this 

Jump-Starting  procedure. 

Connecting  The  Jumper  Cables 

1.  Connect  the  positive  (+)  end  of  the  jumper  cable  to  the 
positive  (+)  post  of  the  discharged  vehicle. 

2.  Connect  the  opposite  end  of  the  positive  (+)  jumper 
cable  to  the  positive  (+)  post  of  the  booster  battery. 

3.  Connect  the  negative  end  (-)  of  the  jumper  cable  to  the 
negative  (-)  post  of  the  booster  battery. 


4.  Connect  the  opposite  end  of  the  negative  (-)  jumper 
cable  to  a good  engine  ground  (exposed  metal  part  of 
the  discharged  vehicle's  engine)  away  from  the  battery 
and  the  fuel  injection  system. 


WARNING! 

Do  not  connect  the  jumper  cable  to  the  negative  (-) 
post  of  the  discharged  battery.  The  resulting  electri- 
cal spark  could  cause  the  battery  to  explode  and 
could  result  in  personal  injury.  Only  use  the  specific 
ground  point,  do  not  use  any  other  exposed  metal 
parts. 

5.  Start  the  engine  in  the  vehicle  that  has  the  booster 
battery,  let  the  engine  idle  a few  minutes,  and  then 
start  the  engine  in  the  vehicle  with  the  discharged 
battery. 


@ss 


WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES  481 

6.  Once  the  engine  is  started,  remove  the  jumper  cables 
in  the  reverse  sequence: 

Disconnecting  The  Jumper  Cables 


1.  Disconnect  the  negative  (-)  end  of  the  jumper  cable 
from  the  engine  ground  of  the  vehicle  with  the  dis- 
charged battery. 


2.  Disconnect  the  opposite  end  of  the  negative  (-)  jumper 
cable  from  the  negative  (-)  post  of  the  booster  battery. 

3.  Disconnect  the  positive  (+)  end  of  the  jumper  cable 
from  the  positive  (+)  post  of  the  booster  battery. 


6 


4.  Disconnect  the  opposite  end  of  the  positive  (+)  jumper 
cable  from  the  positive  (+)  post  of  the  vehicle  with  the 
discharged  battery. 


5.  Reinstall  the  air  intake  duct. 


482  WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES 

If  frequent  jump-starting  is  required  to  start  your  vehicle 
you  should  have  the  battery  and  charging  system  in- 
spected at  your  authorized  dealer. 


CAUTION! 

Accessories  plugged  into  the  vehicle  power  outlets 
draw  power  from  the  vehicle's  battery,  even  when  not 
in  use  (i.e.,  cellular  devices,  etc.).  Eventually,  if 
plugged  in  long  enough  without  engine  operation, 
the  vehicle's  battery  will  discharge  sufficiently  to 
degrade  battery  life  and/or  prevent  the  engine  from 
starting. 


FREEING  A STUCK  VEHICLE 

If  your  vehicle  becomes  stuck  in  mud,  sand  or  snow,  it 
can  often  be  moved  using  a rocking  motion.  Turn  the 
steering  wheel  right  and  left  to  clear  the  area  around  the 
front  wheels.  Then  shift  back  and  forth  between  DRIVE 


and  REVERSE  (with  automatic  transmission)  or  2nd  gear 
and  REVERSE  (with  manual  transmission),  while  gently 
pressing  the  accelerator.  Use  the  least  amount  of  accel- 
erator pedal  pressure  that  will  maintain  the  rocking 
motion,  without  spinning  the  wheels,  or  racing  the 
engine. 


CAUTION! 

Racing  the  engine  or  spinning  the  wheels  may  lead  to 
transmission  overheating  and  failure.  Allow  the  en- 
gine to  idle  with  the  transmission  in  NEUTRAL  for  at 
least  one  minute  after  every  five  rocking-motion 
cycles.  This  will  minimize  overheating  and  reduce 
the  risk  of  clutch  or  transmission  failure  during 
prolonged  efforts  to  free  a stuck  vehicle. 


NOTE:  Push  the  "ESC  Off"  switch,  to  place  the  Electronic 
Stability  Control  (ESC)  system  in  "Partial  Off"  mode, 
before  rocking  the  vehicle.  Refer  to  "Electronic  Brake 
Control"  in  "Starting  And  Operating"  for  further  infor- 
mation. Once  the  vehicle  has  been  freed,  push  the  "ESC 
Off"  switch  again  to  restore  "ESC  On"  mode. 


CAUTION! 

• When  "rocking"  a stuck  vehicle  by  shifting  be- 
tween DRIVE/2nd  gear  and  REVERSE,  do  not  spin 
the  wheels  faster  than  15  mph  (24  km/h),  or  drive- 
train  damage  may  result. 

• Revving  the  engine  or  spinning  the  wheels  too  fast 
may  lead  to  transmission  overheating  and  failure. 
It  can  also  damage  the  tires.  Do  not  spin  the  wheels 
above  30  mph  (48  km/h)  while  in  gear  (no  trans- 
mission shifting  occurring). 


WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES  483 


WARNING! 

Fast  spinning  tires  can  be  dangerous.  Forces  gener- 
ated by  excessive  wheel  speeds  may  cause  damage,  or 
even  failure,  of  the  axle  and  tires.  A tire  could 
explode  and  injure  someone.  Do  not  spin  your  vehi- 
cle's wheels  faster  than  30  mph  (48  km/h)  or  for 
longer  than  30  seconds  continuously  without  stop- 
ping when  you  are  stuck  and  do  not  let  anyone  near 
a spinning  wheel,  no  matter  what  the  speed. 


6 


SHIFT  LEVER  OVERRIDE 


If  a malfunction  occurs  and  the  shift  lever  cannot  be 
moved  out  of  the  PARK  position,  you  can  use  the 
following  procedure  to  temporarily  move  the  shift  lever: 

1.  Turn  the  engine  OFF. 

2.  Firmly  apply  the  parking  brake. 


/M = 


484  WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES 


3.  Using  a small  screwdriver  or  similar  tool,  remove  the 
shift  lever  override  access  cover  (located  on  the  right 
side  of  the  shift  lever  housing). 


Shift  Lever  Override  Access  Cover 


4.  Turn  the  ignition  switch  to  the  ACC  or  ON/RUN 
position,  but  do  not  start  the  engine. 

5.  Press  and  maintain  firm  pressure  on  the  brake  pedal. 

6.  Insert  the  screwdriver  or  similar  tool  into  the  access 
port,  and  push  and  hold  the  override  release  lever 
forward. 

7.  Move  the  shift  lever  to  the  NEUTRAL  position. 

8.  The  vehicle  may  then  be  started  in  NEUTRAL. 

9.  Reinstall  the  shift  lever  override  access  cover. 

TOWING  A DISABLED  VEHICLE 

This  section  describes  procedures  for  towing  a disabled 

vehicle  using  a commercial  towing  service. 


Dc=AL_c=r? 


WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES  485 


Towing 

Condition 

Wheels  OFF 
the  Ground 

Manual 

Transmission 

6-Speed  Automatic 
(FWD  Only) 

6-Speed  Automatic 
4WD 

CVT  Auto- 
matic Trans- 
mission 

Flat  Tow 

NONE 

• Transmis- 
sion in 
NEUTRAL 

• Key  in 
ACC  or 
ON/RUN 
position 

If  transmission  is 
operable: 

• Transmission  in 
NEUTRAL 

• 25  mph 

(40  km/h)  max 
speed 

• 15  miles  (24  km) 
max  distance 

If  transmission  is 
operable: 

• Transmission  in 
NEUTRAL 

• 25  mph 

(40  km/h)  max 
speed 

• 15  miles  (24  km) 
max  distance 

NOT 

ALLOWED 

Wheel  Lift  or 
Dolly  Tow 

Rear 

NOT 

ALLOWED 

NOT  ALLOWED 

NOT 

ALLOWED 

Front 

FWD  Models 

ONLY 

OK 

NOT  ALLOWED 

FWD  Models 

ONLY 

Flatbed 

ALL 

BEST 

METHOD 

BEST  METHOD 

BEST  METHOD 

BEST 

METHOD 

C-^  Information  Provided  by: 


486  WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES 

With  Ignition  Key 

Automatic  Transmission 

• Front  Wheel  Drive  (FWD)  vehicles  can  be  towed  with 
the  front  wheels  elevated,  or  on  a flatbed  truck  (all  four 
wheels  OFF  the  ground). 

• Four-Wheel  Drive  (4WD)  vehicles  can  be  towed  on  a 
flatbed  truck  (all  four  wheels  OFF  the  ground). 

If  the  transmission  is  operable.  Front  Wheel  Drive  (FWD) 
and  Four  Wheel  Drive  (4WD)  vehicles,  with  the  6-speed 
automatic  transmission  only  ( NOT  the  Continuously 
Variable  automatic  transmission  [CVT]),  may  be  flat 
towed  (with  all  four  wheels  on  the  ground)  under  the 
following  conditions: 

• The  transmission  must  be  in  NEUTRAL. 

• The  towing  speed  must  not  exceed  25  mph  (40  km/h). 

• The  towing  distance  must  not  exceed  15  miles  (24  km). 


Front  Wheel  Drive  (FWD)  models  (with  6-speed  auto- 
matic only)  may  also  be  towed  (under  the  same  limita- 
tions shown  above)  with  the  rear  wheels  elevated. 


CAUTION! 

• DO  NOT  flat  tow  any  vehicle  equipped  with  a 
CVT  automatic  transmission.  Damage  to  the  drive- 
train  will  result.  If  these  vehicles  require  towing, 
make  sure  all  drive  wheels  are  OFF  the  ground. 

• Towing  this  vehicle  in  violation  of  the  above  re- 
quirements can  cause  severe  transmission  and/or 
transfer  case  damage.  Damage  from  improper  tow- 
ing is  not  covered  under  the  New  Vehicle  Limited 
Warranty.. 

If  the  vehicle's  battery  is  discharged,  refer  to  "Shift  Lever 
Override"  in  this  section  for  instructions  on  shifting  the 
automatic  transmission  out  of  PARK  for  towing. 


/XL 


WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES  487 


Manual  Transmission 

• Front  Wheel  Drive  (FWD)  or  Four-Wheel  Drive  (4WD) 
vehicles  can  be  flat  towed  (all  four  wheels  on  the 
ground)  with  the  transmission  in  NEUTRAL. 

• FWD  vehicles  can  be  towed  with  the  front  wheels 
elevated. 

• FWD  or  4WD  vehicles  can  be  towed  on  a flatbed  truck 
(all  wheels  OFF  the  ground). 


CAUTION! 

• DO  NOT  flat  tow  any  disabled  vehicle  if  condition 
is  related  to  the  clutch,  transmission  or  driveline. 
Additional  damage  to  the  drivetrain  could  result. 

• Towing  this  vehicle  in  violation  of  the  above  re- 
quirements can  cause  severe  engine,  transmission, 
or  drivetrain  damage.  Damage  from  improper  tow- 
ing is  not  covered  under  the  New  Vehicle  Limited 
Warranty. 


6 


All  Transmissions 


If  you  must  use  the  accessories  (wipers,  defroster,  etc.) 
while  being  towed,  the  key  must  be  in  the  ON /RUN 
position,  not  the  ACC  position.  Make  certain  the  trans- 
mission remains  in  NEUTRAL. 


Information  Provided  by: 


488  WHAT  TO  DO  IN  EMERGENCIES 


CAUTION! 

• Do  not  use  sling-type  equipment  when  towing. 
Vehicle  damage  may  occur. 

• When  securing  the  vehicle  to  a flatbed  truck,  do  not 
attach  to  front  or  rear  suspension  components. 
Damage  to  your  vehicle  may  result  from  improper 
towing. 

Without  The  Ignition  Key 

Special  care  must  be  taken  when  the  vehicle  is  towed 
with  the  ignition  in  the  LOCK /OFF  position.  The  only 
approved  method  of  towing  without  the  ignition  key  is 
with  a flatbed  truck.  Proper  towing  equipment  is  neces- 
sary to  prevent  damage  to  the  vehicle. 


Information  Provided  by: 

cd=/m 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


CONTENTS 

■ ENGINE  COMPARTMENT  — 2.0L 491 

■ ENGINE  COMPARTMENT  — 2.4L 492 

■ ONBOARD  DIAGNOSTIC  SYSTEM  — OBD  II  . .493 

□ Loose  Fuel  Filler  Cap  Message 493 

■ EMISSIONS  INSPECTION  AND  MAINTENANCE 

PROGRAMS 494 

■ REPLACEMENT  PARTS 495 

■ DEALER  SERVICE 496 

■ MAINTENANCE  PROCEDURES  496 

□ Engine  Oil 497 


□ Engine  Oil  Filter 500 

□ Engine  Air  Cleaner  Filter 500 

□ Maintenance-Free  Battery  501 

□ Air  Conditioner  Maintenance 502 

□ Body  Lubrication  504 

□ Windshield  Wiper  Blades  505 

□ Adding  Washer  Fluid  505 

□ Exhaust  System  506 

□ Cooling  System  509 

□ Brake  System 514 


490  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


□ Automatic  Transmission  (Six- Speed)  — If 

Equipped 517 

□ Automatic  Transmission  (CVT)  — 

If  Equipped 519 

□ Manual  Transmission  — If  Equipped  520 

□ Rear  Drive  Assembly  (RDA)  — AWD/ 4WD 

Models  Only  521 

□ Power  Transfer  Unit  (PTU)  — AWD/ 4WD  Models 

Only 522 

□ Appearance  Care  And  Protection  From 

Corrosion 522 

■ FUSES  529 

□ Integrated  Power  Module  (IPM) 530 

■ VEHICLE  STORAGE 535 


■ REPLACEMENT  BULBS  535 

■ BULB  REPLACEMENT  536 

□ Headlamps  536 

□ Fog  Lamps 537 

□ Rear  Turn  Signal  And  Backup  Lamp 537 

□ License  Lamps 538 

□ Center  High-Mounted  Stoplamp  538 

■ FLUID  CAPACITIES  538 

■ FLUIDS,  LUBRICANTS,  AND  GENUINE 

PARTS  539 

□ Engine 539 

□ Chassis  541 


iformation  Provided  by: 


ENGINE  COMPARTMENT  — 2.0L 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  491 


1 — Washer  Fluid  Reservoir 

2 — Power  Steering  Fluid  Reservoir 

3 — Engine  Oil  Fill 

4 — Brake  Fluid  Reservoir 

5 — Integrated  Power  Module  (Fuses) 


6 — Air  Cleaner  Filter 

7 — Coolant  Pressure  Cap 

8 — Engine  Oil  Dipstick 

9 — Engine  Coolant  Reservoir 


Information  Provided  by: 

0 = ^1—  = ?:? 


492  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 

ENGINE  COMPARTMENT  — 2.4L 


1 — Washer  Fluid  Reservoir 

2 — Power  Steering  Fluid  Reservoir 

3 — Engine  Oil  Fill 

4 — Brake  Fluid  Reservoir 

5 — Integrated  Power  Module  (Fuses) 


6 — Air  Cleaner  Filter 

7 — Coolant  Pressure  Cap 

8 — Engine  Oil  Dipstick 

9 — Engine  Coolant  Reservoir 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  493 


ONBOARD  DIAGNOSTIC  SYSTEM  — OBD  II 

Your  vehicle  is  equipped  with  a sophisticated  onboard 
diagnostic  system  called  OBD  II.  This  system  monitors 
the  performance  of  the  emissions,  engine,  and  automatic 
transmission  control  systems.  When  these  systems  are 
operating  properly,  your  vehicle  will  provide  excellent 
performance  and  fuel  economy,  as  well  as  engine  emis- 
sions well  within  current  government  regulations. 

If  any  of  these  systems  require  service,  the  OBD  II  system 
will  turn  on  the  "Malfunction  Indicator  Light"  (MIL).  It 
will  also  store  diagnostic  codes  and  other  information  to 
assist  your  service  technician  in  making  repairs.  Al- 
though your  vehicle  will  usually  be  drivable  and  not 
need  towing,  see  your  authorized  dealer  for  service  as 
soon  as  possible. 


CAUTION! 

• Prolonged  driving  with  the  MIL  on  could  cause 
further  damage  to  the  emission  control  system.  It 
could  also  affect  fuel  economy  and  driveability. 
The  vehicle  must  be  serviced  before  any  emissions 
tests  can  be  performed. 

• If  the  MIL  is  flashing  while  the  engine  is  running, 
severe  catalytic  converter  damage  and  power  loss 
will  soon  occur.  Immediate  service  is  required. 

Loose  Fuel  Filler  Cap  Message 

After  fuel  is  added,  the  vehicle  diagnostic  system  can 
determine  if  the  fuel  filler  cap  is  possibly  loose  or 
improperly  installed.  A "gASCAP"  message  will  be  dis- 
played in  the  instrument  cluster.  Tighten  the  gas  cap  until 
a "clicking"  sound  is  heard.  This  is  an  indication  that  the 
gas  cap  is  properly  tightened.  Push  the  trip  odometer 
RESET  button  to  turn  off  the  message.  If  the  problem 


494  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


persists,  the  message  will  appear  the  next  time  the 
vehicle  is  started.  This  might  indicate  a damaged  cap.  If 
the  problem  is  detected  twice  in  a row,  the  system  will 
turn  on  the  MIL.  Resolving  the  problem  will  turn  the  MIL 
light  off. 


EMISSIONS  INSPECTION  AND  MAINTENANCE 
PROGRAMS 


In  some  localities,  it  may  be  a legal  requirement  to  pass 
an  inspection  of  your  vehicle's  emissions  control  system. 
Failure  to  pass  could  prevent  vehicle  registration. 


OFor  states  that  require  an  Inspection  and  Mainte- 
nance (I/M),  this  check  verifies  the  "Malfunction 
Indicator  Light  (MIL)"  is  functioning  and  is  not 
on  when  the  engine  is  running,  and  that  the  OBD  II 
system  is  ready  for  testing. 


Normally,  the  OBD  II  system  will  be  ready.  The  OBD  II 
system  may  not  be  ready  if  your  vehicle  was  recently 
serviced,  recently  had  a dead  battery  or  a battery  replace- 
ment. If  the  OBD  II  system  should  be  determined  not 
ready  for  the  I/M  test,  your  vehicle  may  fail  the  test. 

Your  vehicle  has  a simple  ignition  actuated  test,  which 
you  can  use  prior  to  going  to  the  test  station.  To  check  if 
your  vehicle's  OBD  II  system  is  ready,  you  must  do  the 
following: 

1.  Cycle  the  ignition  switch  to  the  ON  position,  but  do 
not  crank  or  start  the  engine. 

NOTE:  If  you  crank  or  start  the  engine,  you  will  have  to 
start  this  test  over. 

2.  As  soon  as  you  cycle  the  ignition  switch  to  the  ON 
position,  you  will  see  the  Malfunction  Indicator  Light 
(MIL)  symbol  come  on  as  part  of  a normal  bulb  check. 


/XL 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  495 


3.  Approximately  15  seconds  later,  one  of  two  things  will 
happen: 

• The  MIL  will  flash  for  about  10  seconds  and  then 
return  to  being  fully  illuminated  until  you  turn  OFF 
the  ignition  or  start  the  engine.  This  means  that  your 
vehicle's  OBD  II  system  is  not  ready  and  you  should 
not  proceed  to  the  I/M  station. 

• The  MIL  will  not  flash  at  all  and  will  remain  fully 
illuminated  until  you  place  the  ignition  in  the  off 
position  or  start  the  engine.  This  means  that  your 
vehicle's  OBD  II  system  is  ready  and  you  can  proceed 
to  the  I/M  station. 

If  your  OBD  II  system  is  not  ready,  you  should  see  your 
authorized  dealer  or  repair  facility.  If  your  vehicle  was 
recently  serviced  or  had  a battery  failure  or  replacement, 
you  may  need  to  do  nothing  more  than  drive  your 
vehicle  as  you  normally  would  in  order  for  your  OBD  II 


system  to  update.  A recheck  with  the  above  test  routine 
may  then  indicate  that  the  system  is  now  ready. 

Regardless  of  whether  your  vehicle's  OBD  II  system  is 
ready  or  not,  if  the  MIL  is  illuminated  during  normal 
vehicle  operation  you  should  have  your  vehicle  serviced 
before  going  to  the  I/M  station.  The  I/M  station  can  fail 
your  vehicle  because  the  MIL  is  on  with  the  engine 
running. 

REPLACEMENT  PARTS 

Use  of  genuine  MOPAR  parts  for  normal/scheduled 
maintenance  and  repairs  is  highly  recommended  to  en- 
sure the  designed  performance.  Damage  or  failures 
caused  by  the  use  of  non-MOPAR  parts  for  maintenance 
and  repairs  will  not  be  covered  by  the  New  Vehicle 
Limited  Warranty. 


496  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 
DEALER  SERVICE 

Your  authorized  dealer  has  the  qualified  service  person- 
nel, special  tools,  and  equipment  to  perform  all  service 
operations  in  an  expert  manner.  Service  Manuals  are 
available  which  include  detailed  service  information  for 
your  vehicle.  Refer  to  these  Service  Manuals  before 
attempting  any  procedure  yourself. 

NOTE:  Intentional  tampering  with  emissions  control 
systems  may  void  your  warranty  and  could  result  in  civil 
penalties  being  assessed  against  you. 


WARNING! 

You  can  be  badly  injured  working  on  or  around  a 
motor  vehicle.  Only  do  service  work  for  which  you 
have  the  knowledge  and  the  proper  equipment.  If  you 
have  any  doubt  about  your  ability  to  perform  a service 
job,  take  your  vehicle  to  a competent  mechanic. 


MAINTENANCE  PROCEDURES 


The  pages  that  follow  contain  the  required  maintenance 
services  determined  by  the  engineers  who  designed  your 
vehicle. 

Besides  those  maintenance  items  specified  in  the  fixed 
"Maintenance  Schedule",  there  are  other  components 
which  may  require  servicing  or  replacement  in  the  future. 


CAUTION! 

• Failure  to  properly  maintain  your  vehicle  or  per- 
form repairs  and  service  when  necessary  could 
result  in  more  costly  repairs,  damage  to  other 
components  or  negatively  impact  vehicle  perfor- 
mance. Immediately  have  potential  malfunctions 
examined  by  an  authorized  dealer  or  qualified 
repair  center. 


i Provided  by: 


(Continued) 


CAUTION!  (Continued) 

• Your  vehicle  has  been  built  with  improved  fluids 
that  protect  the  performance  and  durability  of  your 
vehicle  and  also  allow  extended  maintenance  inter- 
vals. Do  not  use  chemical  flushes  in  these  compo- 
nents as  the  chemicals  can  damage  your  engine, 
transmission,  or  air  conditioning.  Such  damage  is 
not  covered  by  the  New  Vehicle  Limited  Warranty. 
If  a flush  is  needed  because  of  component  malfunc- 
tion, use  only  the  specified  fluid  for  the  flushing 
procedure. 

Engine  Oil 

Checking  Oil  Level 

To  assure  proper  engine  lubrication,  the  engine  oil  must 
be  maintained  at  the  correct  level.  Check  the  oil  level  at 
regular  intervals,  such  as  every  fuel  stop.  The  best  time  to 
check  the  engine  oil  level  is  about  five  minutes  after  a 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  497 


fully  warmed  engine  is  shut  off.  Do  not  check  oil  level 
before  starting  the  engine  after  it  has  sat  overnight. 
Checking  engine  oil  level  when  the  engine  is  cold  will 
give  you  an  incorrect  reading. 


Checking  the  oil  while  the  vehicle  is  on  level  ground  and 
only  when  the  engine  is  hot,  will  improve  the  accuracy  of 
the  oil  level  readings.  Maintain  the  oil  level  between  the 
range  markings  on  the  dipstick.  The  range  markings  will 
consist  of  a crosshatch  zone  which  depicts  the  MIN  at  the 
low  end  of  the  range  and  MAX  at  the  high  end  of  the 
range.  Adding  1 quart  (1  liter)  of  oil  when  the  reading  is 
at  the  low  end  of  the  indicated  range  will  result  in  the  oil 
level  at  the  full  end  of  the  indicator  range. 


i Provided  by: 

/M_  = 7=? 


498  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


CAUTION! 

Do  not  overfill  the  engine.  Overfilling  the  engine 
will  cause  oil  aeration,  which  can  lead  to  loss  of  oil 
pressure  and  an  increase  in  oil  temperature.  This 
could  damage  your  engine.  Also,  be  sure  the  oil  fill 
cap  is  replaced  and  tightened  after  adding  oil. 

Change  Engine  Oil 

The  oil  change  indicator  system  will  remind  you  that  it  is 
time  to  take  your  vehicle  in  for  scheduled  maintenance. 
Refer  to  the  "Maintenance  Schedule"  for  further  informa- 
tion. 

NOTE:  Under  no  circumstances  should  oil  change  inter- 
vals exceed  10,000  miles  (16,000  km),  twelve  months  or 
350  hours  of  engine  run  time,  whichever  comes  first.  The 
350  hours  of  engine  run  or  idle  time  is  generally  only  a 
concern  for  fleet  customers. 


Engine  Oil  Selection 

For  best  performance  and  maximum  protection  under  all 
types  of  operating  conditions,  the  manufacturer  only 
recommends  engine  oils  that  are  API  Certified  and  meet 
the  requirements  of  FCA  US  Material  Standard  MS-6395. 

American  Petroleum  Institute  (API)  Engine  Oil 
Identification  Symbol 


This  symbol  means  that  the  oil  has 
been  certified  by  the  American 
Petroleum  Institute  (API).  The 
manufacturer  only  recommends 
API  Certified  engine  oils. 

This  symbol  certifies  0W-20,  5W- 
20,  0W-30,  5W-30  and  10W-30  en- 
gine oils. 


/M_  = F=! 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  499 


CAUTION! 

Do  not  use  chemical  flushes  in  your  engine  oil  as  the 
chemicals  can  damage  your  engine.  Such  damage  is 
not  covered  by  the  New  Vehicle  Limited  Warranty. 

Engine  Oil  Viscosity  (SAE  Grade)  — 2.0L,  2.4L 
Engine 

MOPAR  SAE  5W-20  engine  oil  approved  to  FCA  US 
Material  Standard  MS-6395  such  as  Pennzoil,  Shell  Helix 
or  equivalent  is  recommended  for  all  operating  tempera- 
tures. This  engine  oil  improves  low  temperature  starting 
and  vehicle  fuel  economy. 

The  engine  oil  filler  cap  also  shows  the  recommended 
engine  oil  viscosity  for  your  engine.  For  information  on 
engine  oil  filler  cap  location,  refer  to  "Engine  Compart- 
ment" in  this  section. 


Lubricants  which  do  not  have  both  the  engine  oil  certi- 
fication mark  and  the  correct  SAE  viscosity  grade  num- 
ber should  not  be  used. 

Synthetic  Engine  Oils 

You  may  use  synthetic  engine  oils  provided  the  recom- 
mended oil  quality  requirements  are  met,  and  the  recom- 
mended maintenance  intervals  for  oil  and  filter  changes 
are  followed. 

Synthetic  engine  oils  which  do  not  have  both  the  engine 
oil  certification  mark  and  the  correct  SAE  viscosity  grade 
number  should  not  be  used. 

Materials  Added  To  Engine  Oil 

The  manufacturer  strongly  recommends  against  the  ad- 
dition of  any  additives  (other  than  leak  detection  dyes)  to 
the  engine  oil.  Engine  oil  is  an  engineered  product  and  its 
performance  may  be  impaired  by  supplemental  addi- 
tives. 


500  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 

Disposing  Of  Used  Engine  Oil  And  Oil  Filters 

Care  should  be  taken  in  disposing  of  used  engine  oil  and 
oil  filters  from  your  vehicle.  Used  oil  and  oil  filters, 
indiscriminately  discarded,  can  present  a problem  to  the 
environment.  Contact  your  authorized  dealer,  service 
station  or  governmental  agency  for  advice  on  how  and 
where  used  oil  and  oil  filters  can  be  safely  discarded  in 
your  area. 

Engine  Oil  Filter 

The  engine  oil  filter  should  be  replaced  with  a new  filter 
at  every  engine  oil  change. 

Engine  Oil  Filter  Selection 

This  manufacturer's  engines  have  a full-flow  type  oil 
filter.  Use  a filter  of  this  type  for  replacement.  The  quality 
of  replacement  filters  varies  considerably.  Only  high 
quality  filters  should  be  used  to  assure  most  efficient 
service.  MOPAR  engine  oil  filters  are  a high  quality  oil 
filter  and  are  recommended. 


Engine  Air  Cleaner  Filter 

Refer  to  the  "Maintenance  Schedule"  in  the  "Mainte- 
nance Schedules"  section  for  the  proper  maintenance 
intervals. 


WARNING! 

The  air  induction  system  (air  cleaner,  hoses,  etc.)  can 
provide  a measure  of  protection  in  the  case  of  engine 
backfire.  Do  not  remove  the  air  induction  system  (air 
cleaner,  hoses,  etc.)  unless  such  removal  is  necessary 
for  repair  or  maintenance.  Make  sure  that  no  one  is 
near  the  engine  compartment  before  starting  the 
vehicle  with  the  air  induction  system  (air  cleaner, 
hoses,  etc.)  removed.  Failure  to  do  so  can  result  in 
serious  personal  injury. 


/\L 


Engine  Air  Cleaner  Filter  Selection 

The  quality  of  replacement  engine  air  cleaner  filters 
varies  considerably.  Only  high  quality  filters  should  be 
used  to  assure  most  efficient  service.  MOPAR  engine  air 
cleaner  filters  are  a high  quality  filter  and  are  recom- 
mended. 

Maintenance-Free  Battery 

Your  vehicle  is  equipped  with  a maintenance-free  battery. 
You  will  never  have  to  add  water,  nor  is  periodic  main- 
tenance required. 


WARNING! 

• Battery  fluid  is  a corrosive  acid  solution  and  can 
burn  or  even  blind  you.  Do  not  allow  battery  fluid 
to  contact  your  eyes,  skin,  or  clothing.  Do  not  lean 
over  a battery  when  attaching  clamps.  If  acid 


(Continued) 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  501 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

splashes  in  eyes  or  on  skin,  flush  the  area  imme- 
diately with  large  amounts  of  water.  Refer  to 
"Jump-Starting  Procedures"  in  "What  To  Do  In 
Emergencies"  for  further  information. 

• Battery  gas  is  flammable  and  explosive.  Keep 
flame  or  sparks  away  from  the  battery.  Do  not  use 
a booster  battery  or  any  other  booster  source  with 
an  output  greater  than  12  Volts.  Do  not  allow  cable 
clamps  to  touch  each  other. 

• Battery  posts,  terminals,  and  related  accessories 
contain  lead  and  lead  compounds.  Wash  hands 
after  handling. 

• The  battery  in  this  vehicle  has  a vent  hose  that 
should  not  be  disconnected  and  should  only  be 
replaced  with  a battery  of  the  same  type  (vented). 


502  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


CAUTION! 

• It  is  essential  when  replacing  the  cables  on  the 
battery  that  the  positive  cable  is  attached  to  the 
positive  post  and  the  negative  cable  is  attached  to 
the  negative  post.  Battery  posts  are  marked  positive 
(+)  and  negative  (-)  and  are  identified  on  the 
battery  case.  Cable  clamps  should  be  tight  on  the 
terminal  posts  and  free  of  corrosion. 

• If  a "fast  charger"  is  used  while  the  battery  is  in  the 
vehicle,  disconnect  both  vehicle  battery  cables  be- 
fore connecting  the  charger  to  the  battery.  Do  not 
use  a "fast  charger"  to  provide  starting  voltage. 

Air  Conditioner  Maintenance 

For  best  possible  performance,  your  air  conditioner  should 
be  checked  and  serviced  by  an  authorized  dealer  at  the  start 
of  each  warm  season.  This  service  should  include  cleaning  of 


the  condenser  fins  and  a performance  test.  Drive  belt  tension 
should  also  be  checked  at  this  time. 


WARNING! 

• Use  only  refrigerants  and  compressor  lubricants 
approved  by  the  manufacturer  for  your  air  condi- 
tioning system.  Some  unapproved  refrigerants  are 
flammable  and  can  explode,  injuring  you.  Other 
unapproved  refrigerants  or  lubricants  can  cause  the 
system  to  fail,  requiring  costly  repairs.  Refer  to 
Warranty  Information  Book,  located  on  the  DVD, 
for  further  warranty  information. 

• The  air  conditioning  system  contains  refrigerant 
under  high  pressure.  To  avoid  risk  of  personal 
injury  or  damage  to  the  system,  adding  refrigerant 
or  any  repair  requiring  lines  to  be  disconnected 
should  be  done  by  an  experienced  technician. 


/M 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  503 


CAUTION! 

Do  not  use  chemical  flushes  in  your  air  conditioning 
system  as  the  chemicals  can  damage  your  air  condi- 
tioning components.  Such  damage  is  not  covered  by 
the  New  Vehicle  Limited  Warranty. 

Refrigerant  Recovery  And  Recycling 

R-134a  Air  Conditioning  Refrigerant  is  a hydrofluoro- 
carbon (HFC)  that  is  endorsed  by  the  Environmental 
Protection  Agency  and  is  an  ozone-saving  product.  How- 
ever, the  manufacturer  recommends  that  air  conditioning 
service  be  performed  by  authorized  dealer  or  other 
service  facilities  using  recovery  and  recycling  equipment. 

NOTE:  Use  only  manufacturer  approved  A/C  system 
PAG  compressor  oil  and  refrigerants. 


A/C  Air  Filter 

Refer  to  the  "Maintenance  Schedule"  for  the  proper 
maintenance  intervals. 

WARNING! 

Do  not  remove  the  A/C  air  filter  while  the  blower  is 
operating  or  personal  injury  may  result. 

The  A/C  air  filter  is  located  in  the  fresh  air  inlet  behind 
the  glove  box.  Perform  the  following  procedure  to  re- 
place the  filter: 

1.  Open  the  glove  compartment  and  remove  all  contents. 

2.  Push  in  on  the  sides  of  the  glove  compartment  and 
lower  the  door. 

3.  Pivot  the  glove  compartment  downward. 


504  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


4.  Disengage  the  two  retaining  tabs  that  secure  the  filter 
cover  to  the  HVAC  housing,  and  remove  the  cover. 


A/C  Air  Filter  Replacement 

5.  Remove  the  A/C  air  filter  by  pulling  it  straight  out  of 
the  housing. 


6.  Install  the  A/C  air  filter  with  the  arrow  on  the  filter 
pointing  toward  the  floor.  When  installing  the  filter 
cover,  make  sure  the  retaining  tabs  fully  engage  the 
cover. 


CAUTION! 

The  A/C  air  filter  is  identified  with  an  arrow  to 
indicate  airflow  direction  through  the  filter.  Failure 
to  properly  install  the  filter  will  result  in  the  need  to 
replace  it  more  often. 

7.  Rotate  the  glove  compartment  door  back  into  position. 

Body  Lubrication 

Locks  and  all  body  pivot  points,  including  such  items  as 
seat  tracks,  door  hinge  pivot  points  and  rollers,  liftgate, 
tailgate,  decklid,  sliding  doors  and  hood  hinges,  should 
be  lubricated  periodically  with  a lithium  based  grease, 
such  as  MOPAR  Spray  White  Lube  to  assure  quiet,  easy 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  505 


operation  and  to  protect  against  rust  and  wear.  Prior  to 
the  application  of  any  lubricant,  the  parts  concerned 
should  be  wiped  clean  to  remove  dust  and  grit;  after 
lubricating  excess  oil  and  grease  should  be  removed. 
Particular  attention  should  also  be  given  to  hood  latching 
components  to  ensure  proper  function.  When  performing 
other  underhood  services,  the  hood  latch,  release  mecha- 
nism and  safety  catch  should  be  cleaned  and  lubricated. 

The  external  lock  cylinders  should  be  lubricated  twice  a 
year,  preferably  in  the  Fall  and  Spring.  Apply  a small 
amount  of  a high  quality  lubricant,  such  as  MOPAR  Lock 
Cylinder  Lubricant  directly  into  the  lock  cylinder. 

Windshield  Wiper  Blades 

Clean  the  rubber  edges  of  the  wiper  blades  and  the 
windshield  periodically  with  a sponge  or  soft  cloth  and  a 
mild  nonabrasive  cleaner.  This  will  remove  accumula- 
tions of  salt  or  road  film. 


Operation  of  the  wipers  on  dry  glass  for  long  periods 
may  cause  deterioration  of  the  wiper  blades.  Always  use 
washer  fluid  when  using  the  wipers  to  remove  salt  or  dirt 
from  a dry  windshield. 

Avoid  using  the  wiper  blades  to  remove  frost  or  ice  from 
the  windshield.  Keep  the  blade  rubber  out  of  contact  with 
petroleum  products  such  as  engine  oil,  gasoline,  etc. 

NOTE:  Life  expectancy  of  wiper  blades  varies  depend- 
ing on  geographical  area  and  frequency  of  use.  Poor 
performance  of  blades  may  be  present  with  chattering, 
marks,  water  lines  or  wet  spots.  If  any  of  these  conditions 
are  present,  clean  the  wiper  blades  or  replace  as  neces- 
sary. 

Adding  Washer  Fluid 

The  washer  fluid  reservoir  is  located  in  the  engine 
compartment,  and  the  fluid  level  should  be  checked  at 
regular  intervals.  Fill  the  reservoir  with  windshield 
washer  solvent  only  (not  radiator  antifreeze). 


506  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


When  refilling  the  washer  fluid  reservoir,  take  some 
washer  fluid  and  apply  it  to  a cloth  or  towel  and  wipe 
clean  the  wiper  blades,  this  will  help  blade  performance. 
To  prevent  freeze-up  of  your  windshield  washer  system 
in  cold  weather,  select  a solution  or  mixture  that  meets  or 
exceeds  the  temperature  range  of  your  climate.  This 
rating  information  can  be  found  on  most  washer  fluid 
containers. 


WARNING! 

Commercially  available  windshield  washer  solvents 
are  flammable.  They  could  ignite  and  burn  you.  Care 
must  be  exercised  when  filling  or  working  around 
the  washer  solution. 


Exhaust  System 

The  best  protection  against  carbon  monoxide  entry  into 
the  vehicle  body  is  a properly  maintained  engine  exhaust 
system. 

If  you  notice  a change  in  the  sound  of  the  exhaust  system; 
or  if  the  exhaust  fumes  can  be  detected  inside  the  vehicle; 
or  when  the  underside  or  rear  of  the  vehicle  is  damaged; 
have  an  authorized  technician  inspect  the  complete  ex- 
haust system  and  adjacent  body  areas  for  broken,  dam- 
aged, deteriorated,  or  mispositioned  parts.  Open  seams 
or  loose  connections  could  permit  exhaust  fumes  to  seep 
into  the  passenger  compartment.  In  addition,  have  the 
exhaust  system  inspected  each  time  the  vehicle  is  raised 
for  lubrication  or  oil  change.  Replace  as  required. 


C: 


| CD  = /M 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  507 


WARNING! 

• Exhaust  gases  can  injure  or  kill.  They  contain 
carbon  monoxide  (CO),  which  is  colorless  and 
odorless.  Breathing  it  can  make  you  unconscious 
and  can  eventually  poison  you.  To  avoid  breathing 
CO,  refer  to  "Safety  Tips/Exhaust  Gas"  in  "Things 
To  Know  Before  Starting  Your  Vehicle"  for  further 
information. 

• A hot  exhaust  system  can  start  a fire  if  you  park 
over  materials  that  can  burn.  Such  materials  might 
be  grass  or  leaves  coming  into  contact  with  your 
exhaust  system.  Do  not  park  or  operate  your  ve- 
hicle in  areas  where  your  exhaust  system  can  con- 
tact anything  that  can  burn. 


CAUTION! 

• The  catalytic  converter  requires  the  use  of  un- 
leaded fuel  only.  Leaded  gasoline  will  destroy  the 
effectiveness  of  the  catalyst  as  an  emissions  control 
device  and  may  seriously  reduce  engine  perfor- 
mance and  cause  serious  damage  to  the  engine. 

• Damage  to  the  catalytic  converter  can  result  if  your 
vehicle  is  not  kept  in  proper  operating  condition. 
In  the  event  of  engine  malfunction,  particularly 
involving  engine  misfire  or  other  apparent  loss  of 
performance,  have  your  vehicle  serviced  promptly. 
Continued  operation  of  your  vehicle  with  a severe 
malfunction  could  cause  the  converter  to  overheat, 
resulting  in  possible  damage  to  the  converter  and 
vehicle. 


C: 


I = 


/NL 


508  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Under  normal  operating  conditions,  the  catalytic  con- 
verter will  not  require  maintenance.  However,  it  is  im- 
portant to  keep  the  engine  properly  tuned  to  assure 
proper  catalyst  operation  and  prevent  possible  catalyst 
damage. 

NOTE:  Intentional  tampering  with  emissions  control 
systems  can  result  in  civil  penalties  being  assessed 
against  you. 

In  unusual  situations  involving  grossly  malfunctioning 
engine  operation,  a scorching  odor  may  suggest  severe 
and  abnormal  catalyst  overheating.  If  this  occurs,  stop 
the  vehicle,  turn  off  the  engine  and  allow  it  to  cool. 
Service,  including  a tune-up  to  manufacturer's  specifica- 
tions, should  be  obtained  immediately. 


To  minimize  the  possibility  of  catalytic  converter  dam- 
age: 

• Do  not  shut  off  the  engine  or  interrupt  the  ignition, 
when  the  transmission  is  in  gear  and  the  vehicle  is  in 
motion. 

• Do  not  try  to  start  the  engine  by  pushing  or  towing  the 
vehicle. 

• Do  not  idle  the  engine  with  any  spark  plug  wires 
disconnected  or  removed,  such  as  when  diagnostic 
testing,  or  for  prolonged  periods  during  very  rough 
idle  or  malfunctioning  operating  conditions. 


Information  Provided  by: 


Cooling  System 


WARNING! 

• When  working  near  the  radiator  cooling  fan,  dis- 
connect the  fan  motor  lead  or  turn  the  ignition 
switch  to  the  OFF  position.  The  fan  is  temperature 
controlled  and  can  start  at  any  time  the  ignition 
switch  is  in  the  ON  position. 

• You  or  others  can  be  badly  burned  by  hot  engine 
coolant  (antifreeze)  or  steam  from  your  radiator.  If 
you  see  or  hear  steam  coming  from  under  the  hood, 
do  not  open  the  hood  until  the  radiator  has  had 
time  to  cool.  Never  try  to  open  a cooling  system 
pressure  cap  when  the  radiator  is  hot. 

Coolant  Checks 

Check  engine  coolant  (antifreeze)  protection  every  12 
months  (before  the  onset  of  freezing  weather,  where 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  509 


applicable).  If  the  engine  coolant  (antifreeze)  is  dirty  or 
rusty  in  appearance,  the  system  should  be  drained, 
flushed,  and  refilled  with  fresh  engine  coolant  (anti- 
freeze). Check  the  front  of  the  A/C  condenser  for  any 
accumulation  of  bugs,  leaves,  etc.  If  dirty,  clean  by  gently 
spraying  water  from  a garden  hose  vertically  down  the 
face  of  the  condenser. 

Check  the  coolant  recovery  bottle  tubing  for  brittle  rub- 
ber, cracking,  tears,  cuts,  and  tightness  of  the  connection 
at  the  bottle  and  radiator.  Inspect  the  entire  system  for 
leaks. 

Cooling  System  — Drain,  Flush  And  Refill 

NOTE:  Some  vehicles  require  special  tools  to  add  coolant 
properly.  Failure  to  fill  these  systems  properly  could  lead 
to  severe  internal  engine  damage.  If  any  coolant  is 
needed  to  be  added  to  the  system  please  contact  your 
local  authorized  dealer. 


AL 


510  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


If  the  engine  coolant  (antifreeze)  is  dirty  or  contains 
visible  sediment,  have  an  authorized  dealer  clean  and 
flush  with  OAT  coolant  (antifreeze)  (conforming  to 
MS.90032). 

Refer  to  the  "Maintenance  Schedule"  for  the  proper 
maintenance  intervals. 

Selection  Of  Coolant 

Refer  to  "Fluids,  Lubricants,  And  Genuine  Parts"  in 
"Maintaining  Your  Vehicle"  for  further  information. 


CAUTION! 

• Mixing  of  engine  coolant  (antifreeze)  other  than 
specified  Organic  Additive  Technology  (OAT)  en- 
gine coolant  (antifreeze),  may  result  in  engine 
damage  and  may  decrease  corrosion  protection. 


(Continued) 


CAUTION!  (Continued) 

Organic  Additive  Technology  (OAT)  engine  cool- 
ant is  different  and  should  not  be  mixed  with 
Hybrid  Organic  Additive  Technology  (HOAT)  en- 
gine coolant  (antifreeze)  or  any  "globally  compat- 
ible" coolant  (antifreeze).  If  a non-OAT  engine 
coolant  (antifreeze)  is  introduced  into  the  cooling 
system  in  an  emergency,  the  cooling  system  will 
need  to  be  drained,  flushed,  and  refilled  with  fresh 
OAT  coolant  (conforming  to  MS.90032),  by  an  au- 
thorized dealer  as  soon  as  possible. 

• Do  not  use  water  alone  or  alcohol-based  engine 
coolant  (antifreeze)  products.  Do  not  use  additional 
rust  inhibitors  or  antirust  products,  as  they  may  not 
be  compatible  with  the  radiator  engine  coolant  and 
may  plug  the  radiator. 


ovided  by: 


(Continued) 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  511 


CAUTION!  (Continued) 

• This  vehicle  has  not  been  designed  for  use  with 
propylene  glycol-based  engine  coolant  (antifreeze). 
Use  of  propylene  glycol-based  engine  coolant  (an- 
tifreeze) is  not  recommended. 

Adding  Coolant 

Your  vehicle  has  been  built  with  an  improved  engine  coolant 
(OAT  coolant  conforming  to  MS.90032)  that  allows  extended 
maintenance  intervals.  This  engine  coolant  (antifreeze)  can 
be  used  up  to  ten  years  or  150,000  miles  (240,000  km)  before 
replacement.  To  prevent  reducing  this  extended  mainte- 
nance period,  it  is  important  that  you  use  the  same  engine 
coolant  (OAT  coolant  conforming  to  MS.90032)  throughout 
the  life  of  your  vehicle. 

Please  review  these  recommendations  for  using  Organic 
Additive  Technology  (OAT)  engine  coolant  (antifreeze)  that 
meets  the  requirements  of  FCA  Material  Standard  MS.90032. 
When  adding  engine  coolant  (antifreeze): 


• We  recommend  using  MOPAR  Antifreeze/ Coolant  10 
Year/150,000  Mile  Formula  OAT  (Organic  Additive 
Technology)  that  meets  the  requirements  of  FCA  Ma- 
terial Standard  MS.90032. 

• Mix  a minimum  solution  of  50%  OAT  engine  coolant 
that  meets  the  requirements  of  FCA  Material  Standard 
MS.90032  and  distilled  water.  Use  higher  concentra- 
tions (not  to  exceed  70%)  if  temperatures  below  -34°F 
(-37°C)  are  anticipated. 

• Use  only  high  purity  water  such  as  distilled  or  deion- 
ized water  when  mixing  the  water /engine  coolant 
(antifreeze)  solution.  The  use  of  lower  quality  water 
will  reduce  the  amount  of  corrosion  protection  in  the 
engine  cooling  system. 

Please  note  that  it  is  the  owner's  responsibility  to  main- 
tain the  proper  level  of  protection  against  freezing  ac- 
cording to  the  temperatures  occurring  in  the  area  where 
the  vehicle  is  operated. 


512  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 

NOTE: 


• Some  vehicles  require  special  tools  to  add  coolant 
properly.  Failure  to  fill  these  systems  properly  could 
lead  to  severe  internal  engine  damage.  If  any  coolant  is 
needed  to  be  added  to  the  system,  please  contact  your 
local  authorized  dealer. 

• Mixing  engine  coolant  (antifreeze)  types  is  not  recom- 
mended and  can  result  in  cooling  system  damage.  If 
HOAT  and  OAT  coolant  are  mixed  in  an  emergency, 
have  a authorized  dealer  drain,  flush,  and  refill  with 
OAT  coolant  (conforming  to  MS.90032)  as  soon  as 
possible. 

Cooling  System  Pressure  Cap 

The  cap  must  be  fully  tightened  to  prevent  loss  of  engine 
coolant  (antifreeze),  and  to  ensure  that  engine  coolant 
(antifreeze)  will  return  to  the  radiator  from  the  coolant 
recovery  bottle. 


The  cap  should  be  inspected  and  cleaned  if  there  is  any 
accumulation  of  foreign  material  on  the  sealing  surfaces. 


WARNING! 

• The  warning  words  "DO  NOT  OPEN  HOT"  on  the 
cooling  system  pressure  cap  are  a safety  precaution. 
Never  add  engine  coolant  (antifreeze)  when  the 
engine  is  overheated.  Do  not  loosen  or  remove  the 
cap  to  cool  an  overheated  engine.  Heat  causes 
pressure  to  build  up  in  the  cooling  system.  To 
prevent  scalding  or  injury,  do  not  remove  the 
pressure  cap  while  the  system  is  hot  or  under 
pressure. 

• Do  not  use  a pressure  cap  other  than  the  one 
specified  for  your  vehicle.  Personal  injury  or  en- 
gine damage  may  result. 


/XL 


Disposal  Of  Used  Engine  Coolant 

Used  ethylene  glycol-based  engine  coolant  (antifreeze)  is 
a regulated  substance  requiring  proper  disposal.  Check 
with  your  local  authorities  to  determine  the  disposal 
rules  for  your  community.  To  prevent  ingestion  by  ani- 
mals or  children,  do  not  store  ethylene  glycol-based 
engine  coolant  in  open  containers  or  allow  it  to  remain  in 
puddles  on  the  ground.  If  ingested  by  a child  or  pet,  seek 
emergency  assistance  immediately.  Clean  up  any  ground 
spills  immediately. 

Coolant  Level 

The  coolant  bottle  provides  a quick  visual  method  for 
determining  that  the  coolant  level  is  adequate.  With  the 
engine  idling  and  warm  to  normal  operating  tempera- 
ture, the  level  of  the  engine  coolant  (antifreeze)  in  the 
bottle  should  be  between  the  "ADD"  and  "FULL"  lines 
shown  on  the  bottle. 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  513 


The  radiator  normally  remains  completely  full,  so  there  is 
no  need  to  remove  the  radiator  cap  unless  checking  for 
the  coolant  freeze  point  or  replacing  the  engine  coolant 
(antifreeze).  Advise  your  service  attendant  of  this.  As 
long  as  the  engine  operating  temperature  is  satisfactory, 
the  coolant  bottle  need  only  be  checked  once  a month. 

When  additional  engine  coolant  (antifreeze)  is  needed  to 
maintain  the  proper  level,  it  should  be  added  to  the 
coolant  bottle.  Do  not  overfill. 

Points  To  Remember 

NOTE:  When  the  vehicle  is  stopped  after  a few  miles/ 
kilometers  of  operation,  you  may  observe  vapor  coming 
from  the  front  of  the  engine  compartment.  This  is  nor- 
mally a result  of  moisture  from  rain,  snow,  or  high 
humidity  accumulating  on  the  radiator  and  being  vapor- 
ized when  the  thermostat  opens,  allowing  hot  engine 
coolant  (antifreeze)  to  enter  the  radiator. 


/\i 


514  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


If  an  examination  of  your  engine  compartment  shows  no 
evidence  of  radiator  or  hose  leaks,  the  vehicle  may  be 
safely  driven.  The  vapor  will  soon  dissipate. 

• Do  not  overfill  the  coolant  expansion  bottle. 

• Check  the  coolant  freeze  point  in  the  radiator  and  in 
the  coolant  expansion  bottle.  If  engine  coolant  (anti- 
freeze) needs  to  be  added,  the  contents  of  the  coolant 
expansion  bottle  must  also  be  protected  against  freez- 
ing. 

• If  frequent  engine  coolant  (antifreeze)  additions  are 
required,  the  cooling  system  should  be  pressure  tested 
for  leaks. 

• Maintain  engine  coolant  (antifreeze)  concentration  at  a 
minimum  of  50%  OAT  coolant  (conforming  to 
MS.90032)  and  distilled  water  for  proper  corrosion 
protection  of  your  engine  which  contains  aluminum 
components. 


• Make  sure  that  the  coolant  expansion  bottle  overflow 
hoses  are  not  kinked  or  obstructed. 

• Keep  the  front  of  the  radiator  clean.  If  your  vehicle  is 
equipped  with  air  conditioning,  keep  the  front  of  the 
condenser  clean. 

• Do  not  change  the  thermostat  for  Summer  or  Winter 
operation.  If  replacement  is  ever  necessary,  install 
ONLY  the  correct  type  thermostat.  Other  designs  may 
result  in  unsatisfactory  engine  coolant  (antifreeze) 
performance,  poor  gas  mileage,  and  increased  emis- 
sions. 

Brake  System 

In  order  to  assure  brake  system  performance,  all  brake 

system  components  should  be  inspected  periodically. 

Refer  to  the  "Maintenance  Schedule"  for  the  proper 

maintenance  intervals. 

Provided  by: 


WARNING! 


Riding  the  brakes  can  lead  to  brake  failure  and 
possibly  a collision.  Driving  with  your  foot  resting  or 
riding  on  the  brake  pedal  can  result  in  abnormally 
high  brake  temperatures,  excessive  lining  wear,  and 
possible  brake  damage.  You  would  not  have  your  full 
braking  capacity  in  an  emergency. 

Brake  Master  Cylinder 

The  fluid  level  in  the  master  cylinder  should  be  checked 
when  performing  under  hood  services,  or  immediately  if 
the  brake  system  warning  light  is  on. 

Be  sure  to  clean  the  top  of  the  master  cylinder  area  before 
removing  the  cap.  If  necessary,  add  fluid  to  bring  the 
fluid  level  up  to  the  requirements  described  on  the  brake 
fluid  reservoir.  Fluid  level  can  be  expected  to  fall  as  the 
brake  pads  wear.  The  brake  fluid  level  should  be  checked 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  515 


when  the  pads  are  replaced.  However,  low  fluid  level 
may  be  caused  by  a leak  and  a checkup  may  be  needed. 

NOTE:  If  your  vehicle  is  equipped  with  a manual 
transmission,  the  brake  fluid  reservoir  supplies  fluid  to 
both  the  brake  system  and  the  clutch  release  system.  The 
two  systems  are  separated  in  the  reservoir,  and  a leak  in 
one  system  will  not  affect  the  other  system.  The  manual 
transmission  clutch  release  system  should  not  require 
fluid  replacement  during  the  life  of  the  vehicle.  If  the 
brake  fluid  reservoir  is  low  and  the  brake  system  does 
not  indicate  any  leaks  or  other  problems,  it  may  be  a 
result  of  a leak  in  the  hydraulic  clutch  release  system.  See 
your  local  authorized  dealer  for  service. 

Use  only  manufacturer's  recommended  brake  fluid.  Re- 
fer to  "Fluids,  Lubricants,  And  Genuine  Parts"  in  "Main- 
taining Your  Vehicle"  for  further  information. 


516  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


WARNING! 

• Use  only  manufacturer's  recommended  brake 
fluid.  Refer  to  "Fluids,  Lubricants,  And  Genuine 
Parts"  in  "Maintaining  Your  Vehicle"  for  further 
information.  Using  the  wrong  type  of  brake  fluid 
can  severely  damage  your  brake  system  and/or 
impair  its  performance.  The  proper  type  of  brake 
fluid  for  your  vehicle  is  also  identified  on  the 
original  factory  installed  hydraulic  master  cylinder 
reservoir. 

• To  avoid  contamination  from  foreign  matter  or 
moisture,  use  only  new  brake  fluid  or  fluid  that  has 
been  in  a tightly  closed  container.  Keep  the  master 
cylinder  reservoir  cap  secured  at  all  times.  Brake 
fluid  in  a open  container  absorbs  moisture  from  the 
air  resulting  in  a lower  boiling  point.  This  may 


(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

cause  it  to  boil  unexpectedly  during  hard  or  pro- 
longed braking,  resulting  in  sudden  brake  failure. 
This  could  result  in  a collision. 

• Overfilling  the  brake  fluid  reservoir  can  result  in 
spilling  brake  fluid  on  hot  engine  parts,  causing 
the  brake  fluid  to  catch  fire.  Brake  fluid  can  also 
damage  painted  and  vinyl  surfaces,  care  should  be 
taken  to  avoid  its  contact  with  these  surfaces. 

• Do  not  allow  petroleum  based  fluid  to  contaminate 
the  brake  fluid.  Brake  seal  components  could  be 
damaged,  causing  partial  or  complete  brake  failure. 
This  could  result  in  a collision. 


E/M 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  517 


CAUTION! 

Use  of  improper  brake  fluids  will  affect  overall  clutch 
system  performance.  Improper  brake  fluids  may  dam- 
age the  clutch  system  resulting  in  loss  of  clutch  func- 
tion and  the  ability  to  shift  the  transmission. 

Automatic  Transmission  (Six-Speed)  — If 
Equipped 

Selection  Of  Lubricant  (Six-Speed  Transmission) 

It  is  important  to  use  the  proper  transmission  fluid  to 
ensure  optimum  transmission  performance  and  life.  Use 
only  the  manufacturer's  specified  transmission  fluid. 
Refer  to  "Fluids,  Lubricants,  And  Genuine  Parts"  in  this 
section  for  fluid  specifications.  It  is  important  to  maintain 
the  transmission  fluid  at  the  correct  level  using  the 
recommended  fluid. 


CAUTION! 

Using  a transmission  fluid  other  than  the  manufac- 
turer's recommended  fluid  may  cause  deterioration 
in  transmission  shift  quality  and/or  torque  converter 
shudder.  Refer  to  "Fluids,  Lubricants,  And  Genuine 
Parts"  in  this  section  for  fluid  specifications. 

Special  Additives 

The  manufacturer  strongly  recommends  against  using 
any  special  additives  in  the  transmission. 

Automatic  Transmission  Fluid  (ATF)  is  an  engineered 
product  and  its  performance  may  be  impaired  by  supple- 
mental additives.  Therefore,  do  not  add  any  fluid  addi- 
tives to  the  transmission.  The  only  exception  to  this 
policy  is  the  use  of  special  dyes  for  diagnosing  fluid 
leaks.  Avoid  using  transmission  sealers  as  they  may 
adversely  affect  seals. 


No  chemical  flushes  should  be  used  in  any  transmission; 
only  the  approved  lubricant  should  be  used. 

i=D  = /M. 


t • 


518  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


CAUTION! 

Do  not  use  chemical  flushes  in  your  transmission  as 
the  chemicals  can  damage  your  transmission  compo- 
nents. Such  damage  is  not  covered  by  the  New 
Vehicle  Limited  Warranty. 

Fluid  Level  Check 

The  fluid  level  is  preset  at  the  factory  and  does  not 
require  adjustment  under  normal  operating  conditions. 
Routine  fluid  level  checks  are  not  required,  therefore  the 
transmission  filler  tube  is  capped  and  no  dipstick  is 
provided.  Your  authorized  dealer  can  check  your  trans- 
mission fluid  level  using  special  service  tools.  If  you 
notice  fluid  leakage  or  transmission  malfunction,  visit 
you  authorized  dealer  immediately  to  have  the  fluid  level 
checked.  Operating  the  vehicle  with  an  improper  fluid 
level  can  cause  severe  transmission  damage. 


CAUTION! 


If  a transmission  fluid  leak  occurs,  visit  your  autho- 
rized dealer  immediately.  Severe  transmission  dam- 
age may  occur.  Your  authorized  dealer  has  the  proper 
tools  to  adjust  the  fluid  level  accurately. 

Fluid  And  Filter  Changes 

Under  normal  operating  conditions,  the  fluid  installed  at 
the  factory  will  provide  satisfactory  lubrication  for  the 
life  of  the  vehicle.  However,  if  the  vehicle  is  frequently 
driven  on  rough  or  unpaved  roads,  on  mountain  roads, 
on  short  trips,  or  in  heavy  city  traffic  during  hot  weather, 
or  is  used  for  frequent  trailer  towing,  police,  fleet,  taxi, 
etc.,  change  the  fluid  as  indicated  in  the  Maintenance 
Schedule.  In  addition,  change  the  fluid  and  filter  if  the 
fluid  becomes  contaminated  (with  water,  etc.),  or  if  the 
transmission  is  disassembled  for  any  reason. 


/XL 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  519 


Automatic  Transmission  (CVT)  — If  Equipped 

Selection  Of  Lubricant  (CVT) 

It  is  important  to  use  the  proper  transmission  fluid  to 
ensure  optimum  transmission  performance  and  life.  Use 
only  the  manufacturer's  specified  transmission  fluid 
which  has  the  special  friction  coefficient  additives  neces- 
sary for  proper  steel  belt  traction  on  the  drive  and  driven 
pulleys.  Refer  to  "Fluids,  Lubricants,  And  Genuine  Parts" 
in  this  section  for  fluid  specifications.  It  is  important  to 
maintain  the  transmission  fluid  at  the  correct  level  using 
the  recommended  fluid. 

No  chemical  flushes  should  be  used  in  any  transmission; 
only  the  approved  lubricant  should  be  used. 


CAUTION! 

Using  a transmission  fluid  other  than  the  manufac- 
turer's recommended  fluid  may  cause  belt  slip  and 
result  in  a complete  transmission  failure!  Refer  to 
"Fluids,  Lubricants,  And  Genuine  Parts"  in  this  sec- 
tion for  fluid  specifications. 

Special  Additives 

The  manufacturer  strongly  recommends  against  using 
any  special  additives  in  the  transmission. 

Automatic  Transmission  Fluid  (ATF)  is  an  engineered 
product  and  its  performance  may  be  impaired  by  supple- 
mental additives.  Therefore,  do  not  add  any  fluid  addi- 
tives to  the  transmission.  The  only  exception  to  this 
policy  is  the  use  of  special  dyes  for  diagnosing  fluid 
leaks.  Avoid  using  transmission  sealers  as  they  may 
adversely  affect  seals. 


520  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


CAUTION! 

Do  not  use  chemical  flushes  in  your  transmission  as 
the  chemicals  can  damage  your  transmission  compo- 
nents. Such  damage  is  not  covered  by  the  New 
Vehicle  Limited  Warranty. 

Fluid  Level  Check 

The  fluid  level  is  preset  at  the  factory  and  does  not 
require  adjustment  under  normal  operating  conditions. 

Routine  fluid  level  checks  are  not  required,  therefore  the 
transmission  filler  tube  is  capped  and  no  dipstick  is  pro- 
vided. Your  authorized  dealer  can  check  your  transmission 
fluid  level  using  special  service  tools.  If  you  notice  fluid 
leakage  or  transmission  malfunction,  visit  your  authorized 
dealer  immediately  to  have  the  transmission  fluid  level 
checked.  Operating  the  vehicle  with  an  improper  fluid 
level  can  cause  severe  transmission  damage. 


CAUTION! 


If  a transmission  fluid  leak  occurs,  visit  your  autho- 
rized dealer  immediately.  Severe  transmission  dam- 
age may  occur.  Your  authorized  dealer  has  the  proper 
tools  to  adjust  the  fluid  level  accurately. 

Fluid  And  Filter  Changes 

Refer  to  the  "Maintenance  Schedule"  for  the  proper 
maintenance  intervals.  In  addition,  change  the  fluid  and 
filter  if  the  fluid  becomes  contaminated  (with  water,  etc.), 
or  if  the  transmission  is  disassembled  for  any  reason. 

Manual  Transmission  — If  Equipped 

Lubricant  Selection 

Use  only  the  manufacturers  recommended  transmission 
fluid.  Refer  to  "Fluids,  Lubricants,  And  Genuine  Parts"  in 
"Maintaining  Your  Vehicle"  for  further  information. 


/\L 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  521 


Fluid  Level  Check 

Check  the  fluid  level  by  removing  the  fill  plug.  The  fluid 
level  should  be  between  the  bottom  of  the  fill  hole  and  a 
point  not  more  than  3/16  inch  (4.7  mm)  below  the  bottom 
of  the  hole. 

Add  fluid,  if  necessary,  to  maintain  the  proper  level. 
Please  see  your  authorized  dealer  for  service. 

Frequency  Of  Fluid  Change 

Under  normal  operating  conditions,  the  fluid  installed  at 
the  factory  will  give  satisfactory  lubrication  for  the  life  of 
the  vehicle.  Fluid  changes  are  not  necessary  unless  lubri- 
cant has  become  contaminated  with  water. 

NOTE:  If  contaminated  with  water,  the  fluid  should  be 
changed  immediately. 


Rear  Drive  Assembly  (RDA)  — AWD/4WD  Models 
Only 

Lubricant  Selection 

Use  only  the  manufacturers  recommended  transmission 
fluid.  Refer  to  "Fluids,  Lubricants,  And  Genuine  Parts"  in 
"Maintaining  Your  Vehicle"  for  further  information. 

Fluid  Level  Check 

Visually  inspect  the  unit  at  each  oil  change  for  leakage.  If 
leakage  is  detected,  check  the  fluid  level  by  removing  the 
fill  plug.  The  fluid  level  should  be  maintained  between 
the  bottom  of  the  fill  hole  to  1/8  inch  (4  mm)  below  the 
fiU  hole. 

Add  fluid,  if  necessary,  to  maintain  the  proper  level. 

Frequency  Of  Fluid  Change 

Refer  to  the  "Maintenance  Schedule"  for  the  proper 
maintenance  intervals. 


QdsaTsr 


522  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 

Power  Transfer  Unit  (PTU)  — AWD/4WD  Models 
Only 

Lubricant  Selection 

Use  only  the  manufacturer's  recommended  fluid.  Refer 
to  "Fluids,  Lubricants,  And  Genuine  Parts"  in  "Maintain- 
ing Your  Vehicle"  for  further  information. 

Fluid  Level  Check 

Visually  inspect  the  unit  at  each  oil  change  for  leakage.  If 
leakage  is  detected,  Check  the  fluid  level  by  removing  the 
fill  plug.  The  fluid  level  should  be  maintained  between 
the  bottom  of  the  fill  hole  to  1/8  inch  (4  mm)  below  the 
fill  hole. 

Add  fluid,  if  necessary,  to  maintain  the  proper  level. 

Frequency  Of  Fluid  Change 

Refer  to  the  "Maintenance  Schedule"  for  the  proper 
maintenance  intervals. 


Appearance  Care  And  Protection  From  Corrosion 

Protection  Of  Body  And  Paint  From  Corrosion 

Vehicle  body  care  requirements  vary  according  to  geo- 
graphic locations  and  usage.  Chemicals  that  make  roads 
passable  in  snow  and  ice  and  those  that  are  sprayed  on 
trees  and  road  surfaces  during  other  seasons  are  highly 
corrosive  to  the  metal  in  your  vehicle.  Outside  parking, 
which  exposes  your  vehicle  to  airborne  contaminants, 
road  surfaces  on  which  the  vehicle  is  operated,  extreme 
hot  or  cold  weather  and  other  extreme  conditions  will 
have  an  adverse  effect  on  paint,  metal  trim,  and  under- 
body protection. 

The  following  maintenance  recommendations  will  enable 
you  to  obtain  maximum  benefit  from  the  corrosion 
resistance  built  into  your  vehicle. 


i Provided  by: 

/M EEF3 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  523 


What  Causes  Corrosion? 

Corrosion  is  the  result  of  deterioration  or  removal  of 

paint  and  protective  coatings  from  your  vehicle. 

The  most  common  causes  are: 

• Road  salt,  dirt  and  moisture  accumulation. 

• Stone  and  gravel  impact. 

• Insects,  tree  sap  and  tar. 

• Salt  in  the  air  near  seacoast  localities. 

• Atmospheric  fallout/industrial  pollutants. 

Washing 

• Wash  your  vehicle  regularly.  Always  wash  your  ve- 
hicle in  the  shade  using  MOPAR  Car  Wash,  or  a mild 
car  wash  soap,  and  rinse  the  panels  completely  with 
clear  water. 


• If  insects,  tar,  or  other  similar  deposits  have  accumu- 
lated on  your  vehicle,  use  MOPAR  Super  Kleen  Bug 
and  Tar  Remover  to  remove. 

• Use  a high  quality  cleaner  wax,  such  as  MOPAR 
Cleaner  Wax  to  remove  road  film,  stains  and  to  protect 
your  paint  finish.  Take  care  never  to  scratch  the  paint. 

• Avoid  using  abrasive  compounds  and  power  buffing 
that  may  diminish  the  gloss  or  thin  out  the  paint  finish. 


CAUTION! 

• Do  not  use  abrasive  or  strong  cleaning  materials 
such  as  steel  wool  or  scouring  powder  that  will 
scratch  metal  and  painted  surfaces. 

• Use  of  power  washers  exceeding  1,200  psi  (8  274  kPa) 
can  result  in  damage  or  removal  of  paint  and  decals. 


Information  Provided  by: 


524  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Special  Care 

• If  you  drive  on  salted  or  dusty  roads  or  if  you  drive 
near  the  ocean,  hose  off  the  undercarriage  at  least  once 
a month. 

• It  is  important  that  the  drain  holes  in  the  lower  edges 
of  the  doors,  rocker  panels,  and  trunk  be  kept  clear  and 
open. 

• If  you  detect  any  stone  chips  or  scratches  in  the  paint, 
touch  them  up  immediately.  The  cost  of  such  repairs  is 
considered  the  responsibility  of  the  owner. 

• If  your  vehicle  is  damaged  due  to  a collision  or  similar 
cause  that  destroys  the  paint  and  protective  coating, 
have  your  vehicle  repaired  as  soon  as  possible.  The 
cost  of  such  repairs  is  considered  the  responsibility  of 
the  owner. 


• If  you  carry  special  cargo  such  as  chemicals,  fertilizers, 
de-icer  salt,  etc.,  be  sure  that  such  materials  are  well 
packaged  and  sealed. 

• If  a lot  of  driving  is  done  on  gravel  roads,  consider 
mud  or  stone  shields  behind  each  wheel. 

• Use  MOPAR  Touch  Up  Paint  on  scratches  as  soon  as 
possible.  Your  authorized  dealer  has  touch  up  paint  to 
match  the  color  of  your  vehicle. 

Wheel  And  Wheel  Trim  Care 

• All  wheels  and  wheel  trim,  especially  aluminum  and 
chrome  plated  wheels,  should  be  cleaned  regularly 
with  a mild  soap  and  water  to  prevent  corrosion. 

• To  remove  heavy  soil  and/ or  excessive  brake  dust,  use 
MOPAR  Wheel  Cleaner. 


Information  Provided  by: 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  525 


NOTE:  If  your  vehicle  is  equipped  with  Dark  Vapor  or 
Black  Satin  Chrome  wheels  DO  NOT  USE  wheel  cleaners, 
abrasives  or  polishing  compounds.  They  will  perma- 
nently damage  this  finish  and  such  damage  is  not  cov- 
ered by  the  New  Vehicle  Limited  Warranty.  USE  ONLY 
MILD  SOAP  AND  WATER  WITH  A SOFT  CLOTH.  Used 
on  a regular  basis  this  is  all  that  is  required  to  maintain 
this  finish. 


CAUTION! 

Do  not  use  scouring  pads,  steel  wool,  a bristle  brush, 
or  metal  polishes.  Do  not  use  oven  cleaner.  These 
products  may  damage  the  wheel's  protective  finish. 
Avoid  automatic  car  washes  that  use  acidic  solutions 
or  harsh  brushes  that  may  damage  the  wheel's  pro- 
tective finish.  Only  MOPAR  Wheel  Cleaner  or 
equivalent  is  recommended. 


Stain  Repel  Fabric  Cleaning  Procedure  — If 

Equipped 

Stain  Repel  seats  may  be  cleaned  in  the  following  man- 
ner: 

• Remove  as  much  of  the  stain  as  possible  by  blotting 
with  a clean,  dry  towel. 

• Blot  any  remaining  stain  with  a clean,  damp  towel. 

• For  tough  stains,  apply  MOPAR  Total  Clean,  or  a mild 
soap  solution  to  a clean,  damp  cloth  and  remove  stain. 
Use  a fresh,  damp  towel  to  remove  soap  residue. 

• For  grease  stains,  apply  MOPAR  Multi-Purpose 
Cleaner  to  a clean,  damp  cloth  and  remove  stain.  Use 
a fresh,  damp  towel  to  remove  soap  residue. 

• Do  not  use  any  harsh  solvents  or  any  other  form  of 
protectants  on  Stain  Repel  products. 


Information  Provided  by: 


526  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 
Interior  Care 

Use  MOPAR  Total  Clean  to  clean  fabric  upholstery  and 
carpeting. 

Use  MOPAR  Total  Clean  to  clean  vinyl  upholstery. 

MOPAR  Total  Clean  is  specifically  recommended  for 
leather  upholstery. 

Your  leather  upholstery  can  be  best  preserved  by  regular 
cleaning  with  a damp  soft  cloth.  Small  particles  of  dirt 
can  act  as  an  abrasive  and  damage  the  leather  upholstery 
and  should  be  removed  promptly  with  a damp  cloth. 
Stubborn  soils  can  be  removed  easily  with  a soft  cloth 
and  MOPAR  Total  Clean.  Care  should  be  taken  to  avoid 
soaking  your  leather  upholstery  with  any  liquid.  Please 
do  not  use  polishes,  oils,  cleaning  fluids,  solvents,  deter- 
gents, or  ammonia-based  cleaners  to  clean  your  leather 
upholstery.  Application  of  a leather  conditioner  is  not 
required  to  maintain  the  original  condition. 


WARNING! 


Do  not  use  volatile  solvents  for  cleaning  purposes. 
Many  are  potentially  flammable,  and  if  used  in 
closed  areas  they  may  cause  respiratory  harm. 


CAUTION! 

Direct  contact  of  air  fresheners,  insect  repellents, 
suntan  lotions,  or  hand  sanitizers  to  the  plastic, 
painted,  or  decorated  surfaces  of  the  interior  may 
cause  permanent  damage.  Wipe  away  immediately. 


CAUTION! 

Damage  caused  by  these  type  of  products  may  not  be 
covered  by  your  New  Vehicle  Limited  Warranty. 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  527 


CAUTION! 

Do  not  use  Alcohol  and  Alcohol-based  and/or  Keton 
based  cleaning  products  to  clean  leather  seats,  as 
damage  to  the  seat  may  result. 

Cleaning  Headlights 

Your  vehicle  has  plastic  headlights  that  are  lighter  and 
less  susceptible  to  stone  breakage  than  glass  headlights. 

Plastic  is  not  as  scratch  resistant  as  glass  and  therefore 
different  lens  cleaning  procedures  must  be  followed. 

To  minimize  the  possibility  of  scratching  the  lenses  and 
reducing  light  output,  avoid  wiping  with  a dry  cloth.  To 
remove  road  dirt,  wash  with  a mild  soap  solution  fol- 
lowed by  rinsing. 

Do  not  use  abrasive  cleaning  components,  solvents,  steel 
wool  or  other  aggressive  material  to  clean  the  lenses. 


Glass  Surfaces 

All  glass  surfaces  should  be  cleaned  on  a regular  basis 
with  MOPAR  Glass  Cleaner,  or  any  commercial 
household-type  glass  cleaner.  Never  use  an  abrasive  type 
cleaner.  Use  caution  when  cleaning  the  inside  rear  win- 
dow equipped  with  electric  defrosters  or  windows 
equipped  with  radio  antennas.  Do  not  use  scrapers  or 
other  sharp  instrument  that  may  scratch  the  elements. 

When  cleaning  the  rear  view  mirror,  spray  cleaner  on  the 
towel  or  cloth  that  you  are  using.  Do  not  spray  cleaner 
directly  on  the  mirror. 

Instrument  Panel  Cover 

The  instrument  panel  cover  has  a low  glare  surface  which 
minimizes  reflections  on  the  windshield.  Do  not  use 
protectants  or  other  products  which  may  cause  undesir- 
able reflections.  Use  soap  and  warm  water  to  restore  the 
low  glare  surface. 


gDSAUSR 


528  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 
Instrument  Panel  Bezels 

CAUTION! 

When  installing  hanging  air  fresheners  in  your  ve- 
hicle, read  the  installation  instructions  carefully. 
Some  air  fresheners  will  damage  the  finish  of 
painted  or  decorated  parts  if  allowed  to  directly 
contact  any  surface. 

Cleaning  Plastic  Instrument  Cluster  Lenses 

The  lenses  in  front  of  the  instruments  in  this  vehicle  are 
molded  in  clear  plastic.  When  cleaning  the  lenses,  care 
must  be  taken  to  avoid  scratching  the  plastic. 

1.  Clean  with  a wet  soft  cloth.  A mild  soap  solution  may 
be  used,  but  do  not  use  high  alcohol  content  or 
abrasive  cleaners.  If  soap  is  used,  wipe  clean  with  a 
clean  damp  cloth. 

qBS 


2.  Dry  with  a soft  cloth. 

Seat  Belt  Maintenance 

Do  not  bleach,  dye,  or  clean  the  belts  with  chemical 
solvents  or  abrasive  cleaners.  This  will  weaken  the  fabric. 
Sun  damage  can  also  weaken  the  fabric. 

If  the  belts  need  cleaning,  use  MOPAR  Total  Clean,  a mild 
soap  solution,  or  lukewarm  water.  Do  not  remove  the 
belts  from  the  vehicle  to  wash  them.  Dry  with  a soft  cloth. 

Replace  the  belts  if  they  appear  frayed  or  worn  or  if  the 
buckles  do  not  work  properly. 


WARNING! 

A frayed  or  torn  belt  could  rip  apart  in  a collision  and 
leave  you  with  no  protection.  Inspect  the  belt  system 
periodically,  checking  for  cuts,  frays,  or  loose  parts. 


(Continued) 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

Damaged  parts  must  be  replaced  immediately.  Do  not 
disassemble  or  modify  the  system.  Seat  belt  assem- 
blies must  be  replaced  after  a collision  if  they  have 
been  damaged  (i.e.,  bent  retractor,  torn  webbing,  etc.). 


FUSES 


WARNING! 

• When  replacing  a blown  fuse,  always  use  an  appro- 
priate replacement  fuse  with  the  same  amp  rating  as 
the  original  fuse.  Never  replace  a fuse  with  another 
fuse  of  higher  amp  rating.  Never  replace  a blown 
fuse  with  metal  wires  or  any  other  material.  Failure 
to  use  proper  fuses  may  result  in  serious  personal 
injury,  fire  and/or  property  damage. 


(Continued) 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  529 


WARNING!  (Continued) 

• Before  replacing  a fuse,  make  sure  that  the  ignition 
is  off  and  that  all  the  other  services  are  switched  off 
and/or  disengaged. 

• If  the  replaced  fuse  blows  again,  contact  an  autho- 
rized dealer. 

• If  a general  protection  fuse  for  safety  systems  (air 
bag  system,  braking  system),  power  unit  systems 
(engine  system,  gearbox  system)  or  steering  system 
blows,  contact  an  authorized  dealer. 


530  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Integrated  Power  Module  (IPM) 

The  Integrated  Power  Module  is  located  in  the  engine 
compartment  near  the  air  cleaner  assembly.  This  center 
contains  cartridge  fuses  and  mini-fuses.  A label  that 
identifies  each  component  may  be  printed  on  the  inside 
of  the  cover.  Refer  to  "Engine  Compartment"  in  "Main- 
taining Your  Vehicle"  for  further  information. 


Integrated  Power  Module 


i=D  = /M_E=F=? 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  531 


Cavity 

Cartridge  Fuse 

Mini-Fuse 

Description 

1 

20  Amp  Blue 

- 

Trailer  Tow  - If  Equipped 

2 

15  Amp  Lt  Blue 

AWD/4WD  Control  Module  - 
If  Equipped 

3 

10  Amp  Red 

Rear  Center  Brake  Light 
Switch 

4 

- 

10  Amp  Red 

Ignition  Switch/Clock  Spring 

5 

- 

15  Amp  Lt  Blue 

Battery  Feed  For  Power  Tech 

6 

10  Amp  Red 

Power  Mirror/Steering  Control 
Satellite  Radio /Hands-Free 
Phone 

7 

- 

30  Amp  Green 

Ignition  Off  Draw 

8 

- 

30  Amp  Green 

Ignition  Off  Draw 

9 

40  Amp  Green 

- 

Power  Seats 

10 

- 

20  Amp  Yellow 

Power  Locks /Interior  Lighting 

11 

- 

15  Amp  Lt  Blue 

Power  Outlet 

QDSATes 


532  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Cavity 

Cartridge  Fuse 

Mini-Fuse 

Description 

12 

20  Amp  Yellow 

115V  AC  Inverter  - If 
Equipped 

13 

- 

20  Amp  Yellow 

Cigar  Lighter 

14 

- 

10  Amp  Red 

Instrument  Cluster 

15 

40  Amp  Green 

- 

Radiator  Fan 

16 

15  Amp  Lt  Blue 

Dome  Lamp/Sunroof /Rear 
Wiper  Motor 

17 

- 

10  Amp  Red 

Wireless  Control  Module 

18 

40  Amp  Green 

- 

Auto  Shutdown  Relay 

19 

- 

20  Amp  Yellow 

Radio  Amplifiers 

20 

- 

15  Amp  Lt  Blue 

Radio 

21 

10  Amp  Red 

Intrusion  Module  /Siren  - If 
Equipped 

22 

- 

10  Amp  Red 

Heating,  AC /Compass 

23 

- 

15  Amp  Lt  Blue 

Auto  Shutdown  Relay 

MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  533 


Cavity 

Cartridge  Fuse 

Mini-Fuse 

Description 

24 

- 

15  Amp  Lt  Blue 

Power  Sunroof  - If  Equipped 

25 

- 

10  Amp  Red 

Heated  Mirror  - If  Equipped 

26 

- 

15  Amp  Lt  Blue 

Auto  Shutdown  Relay 

27 

- 

10  Amp  Red 

Airbag  Control  Module 

28 

10  Amp  Red 

Airbag  Control  Module/ 
Occupant  Classification  Mod- 
ule 

29 

Hot  Vehicle  (No  Fuse  Re- 
quired) 

30 

- 

20  Amp  Yellow 

Heated  Seat  - If  Equipped 

31 

10  Amp  Red 

Headlamp  Washer  - If 
Equipped 

32 

30  Amp  Pink 

- 

Auto  Shutdown  Relay 

Information  Provided  by: 


534  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Cavity 

Cartridge  Fuse 

Mini-Fuse 

Description 

33 

10  Amp  Red 

J1962  Conn/Powertrain  Con- 
trol Module 

34 

30  Amp  Pink 

- 

Antilock  Brake  Valve 

35 

40  Amp  Green 

- 

Antilock  Brake  Pump 

36 

30  Amp  Pink 

Headlamp /Washer  Control/ 
Smart  Glass  - If  Equipped 

37 

25  Amp  Clear 

Diesel  Heater  and  H2/MOD 
power  top 

CAUTION! 

• When  installing  the  IPM  cover,  it  is  important  to 
ensure  the  cover  is  properly  positioned  and  fully 
latched.  Failure  to  do  so  may  allow  water  to  get  into 
the  IPM,  and  possibly  result  in  an  electrical  system 
failure. 


(Continued) 


CAUTION!  (Continued) 

• When  replacing  a blown  fuse,  it  is  important  to  use 
only  a fuse  having  the  correct  amperage  rating.  The 
use  of  a fuse  with  a rating  other  than  indicated  may 
result  in  a dangerous  electrical  system  overload.  If 
a properly  rated  fuse  continues  to  blow,  it  indicates 
a problem  in  the  circuit  that  must  be  corrected. 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  535 


VEHICLE  STORAGE 

If  you  will  not  be  using  your  vehicle  for  more  than  21 
days,  you  may  want  to  take  steps  to  preserve  your 
battery. 

• Disengage  the  mini-fuse  in  the  Power  Distribution 
Center  labeled  IOD  (Ignition  Off-Draw). 

• Or  disconnect  the  negative  cable  from  the  battery. 

REPLACEMENT  BULBS 

Interior  Bulbs 


• Anytime  you  store  your  vehicle,  or  keep  it  out  of 
service  (i.e.,  vacation)  for  two  weeks  or  more,  run  the 
air  conditioning  system  at  idle  for  about  five  minutes 
in  the  fresh  air  and  high  blower  setting.  This  will 
ensure  adequate  system  lubrication  to  minimize  the 
possibility  of  compressor  damage  when  the  system  is 
started  again. 


Bulb  Number 

Front  Header  Lamp 

T578 

Center  Dome  Lamp 

T578 

Rear  Cargo  Lamp /Flashlight 

8-A35LFAA 

Information  Provided  by: 


536  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 
Exterior  Bulbs 


Bulb  Number 

Low  Beam/High  Beam  Headlamp 

H13 

Front  Park/Turn  Signal/Side  Marker  Lamp 

3757KA 

Front  Fog  Lamp 

PSX24W 

Center  High  Mounted  Stop  Lamp  (CHMSL) 

LED  Assembly  (Serviced  At  Authorized  Dealer) 

Rear  Tail /Turn /Stop  Lamp 

3157 

Backup  Lamp 

W16W  (921) 

License  Lamp 

W5W 

BULB  REPLACEMENT  Headlamps 


NOTE:  Lens  fogging  can  occur  under  certain  atmo- 
spheric conditions.  This  will  usually  clear  as  atmospheric 
conditions  change  to  allow  the  condensation  to  change 
back  into  a vapor.  Turning  the  lamps  on  will  usually 
accelerate  the  clearing  process. 


1.  Raise  the  hood  and  locate  the  connector  behind  the 
headlamp. 

2.  Reach  into  the  engine  compartment  and  pull  the  red 
lock  out  at  the  green  connector. 


Information  Provided  by: 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  537 


3.  Remove  green  connector  from  back  of  bulb  by  pulling 
straight  back. 

4.  Twist  the  bulb  to  the  left. 

5.  Pull  bulb  outward  from  assembly. 

NOTE:  These  are  halogen  bulbs.  Take  care  not  to  touch 
the  bulb  with  your  fingers.  Body  oils  from  your  fingers 
could  cause  excessive  heat  buildup  which  reduces  bulb 
life. 

Fog  Lamps 

1.  Access  lamp  through  the  lower  fascia  cutout. 

2.  Remove  electrical  connector  from  bulb. 

3.  Remove  bulb  from  housing. 

Rear  Turn  Signal  And  Backup  Lamp 

1.  Remove  the  two  push-pins  from  the  taillamp  housing. 


Taillamp  Push-Pins 

2.  Grasp  the  taillamp  and  pull  firmly  to  disengage  the 
lamp  from  the  aperture  panel. 

3.  Twist  and  remove  socket  from  lamp. 

4.  Remove  bulb  from  socket  and  replace. 


538  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 

License  Lamps  Center  High-Mounted  Stoplamp 

1.  Use  a screw  driver  to  gently  pry  against  the  side  of  the  This  light  is  an  LED  assembly.  See  your  authorized  dealer 

snap  tab  to  remove  the  lamp  from  the  liftgate.  for  replacement. 

2.  Rotate  the  socket  1/4  turn  counterclockwise. 

3.  Pull  bulb  from  socket. 

FLUID  CAPACITIES 


U.S. 

Metric 

Fuel  (Approximate) 

13.6  Gallons 

51  Liters 

Engine  Oil  with  Filter 

2.0L  and  2.4L  Engine  (SAE  5W-20,  API  Certified) 

4.5  Quarts 

4.26  Liters 

Cooling  System  * 

2.0L  and  2.4L  Engine  (MOPAR  Antifreeze/Engine 
Coolant  10  Year/ 150,000  Mile  Formula  or  equivalent) 

7.2  Quarts 

6.8  Liters 

* Includes  heater  and  coolant  recovery  bottle  filled  to  MAX  level. 

Information  Provided  by: 

-'j|  0 = /M_  = F^ 


FLUIDS,  LUBRICANTS,  AND  GENUINE  PARTS 
Engine 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  539 


Component 

Fluid,  Lubricant,  or  Genuine  Part 

Engine  Coolant 

We  recommend  you  use  MOPAR  Antifreeze /Coolant  10  Year/150,000  Mile 
Formula  OAT  (Organic  Additive  Technology)  or  equivalent  meeting  the 
requirements  of  FCA  Material  Standard  MS. 90032. 

Engine  Oil 

We  recommend  you  use  API  Certified  SAE  5W-20  Engine  Oil,  meeting  the 
requirements  of  FCA  US  Material  Standard  MS-6395  such  as  MOPAR, 
Pennzoil,  and  Shell  Helix.  Refer  to  your  engine  oil  filler  cap  for  correct  SAE 
grade. 

Engine  Oil  Filter 

We  recommend  you  use  MOPAR  Engine  Oil  Filter  or  equivalent. 

Spark  Plugs 

We  recommend  you  use  MOPAR  Spark  Plugs. 

Fuel  Selection 

87  Octane,  0-15%  Ethanol. 

Information  Provided  by: 


540  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


CAUTION! 

• Mixing  of  engine  coolant  (antifreeze)  other  than 
specified  Organic  Additive  Technology  (OAT)  en- 
gine coolant  (antifreeze),  may  result  in  engine 
damage  and  may  decrease  corrosion  protection. 
Organic  Additive  Technology  (OAT)  engine  cool- 
ant is  different  and  should  not  be  mixed  with 
Hybrid  Organic  Additive  Technology  (HOAT)  en- 
gine coolant  (antifreeze)  or  any  "globally  compat- 
ible" coolant  (antifreeze).  If  a non-OAT  engine 
coolant  (antifreeze)  is  introduced  into  the  cooling 
system  in  an  emergency,  the  cooling  system  will 
need  to  be  drained,  flushed,  and  refilled  with  fresh 
OAT  coolant  (conforming  to  MS.90032),  by  an  au- 
thorized dealer  as  soon  as  possible. 


(Continued) 


CAUTION!  (Continued) 


• Do  not  use  water  alone  or  alcohol-based  engine 
coolant  (antifreeze)  products.  Do  not  use  additional 
rust  inhibitors  or  antirust  products,  as  they  may  not 
be  compatible  with  the  radiator  engine  coolant  and 
may  plug  the  radiator. 

• This  vehicle  has  not  been  designed  for  use  with 
propylene  glycol-based  engine  coolant  (antifreeze). 
Use  of  propylene  glycol-based  engine  coolant  (an- 
tifreeze) is  not  recommended. 


Provided  by: 


MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE  541 

Chassis 


Component 

Fluid,  Lubricant,  or  Genuine  Part 

Automatic  Transmission  (CVT)  — If  Equipped 

Use  only  MOPAR  CVTF+4  Continuously  Variable  Transmis- 
sion Fluid  or  equivalent.  Failure  to  use  the  correct  fluid  may 
affect  the  function  or  performance  of  your  transmission. 

Automatic  Transmission  (Six-Speed)  — If 
Equipped 

Use  only  MOPAR  SP-IV  M Automatic  Transmission  Fluid  or 
equivalent.  Failure  to  use  the  correct  fluid  may  affect  the 
function  or  performance  of  your  transmission. 

Manual  Transmission  — If  Equipped 

We  recommend  you  use  MOPAR  ATF+4  Automatic  Transmis- 
sion Fluid. 

Rear  Drive  Assembly  (RDA) 

We  recommend  you  use  MOPAR  Gear  & Axle  Lubricant  SAE 
80W-90  API  GL  5. 

Power  Transfer  Unit  (PTU) 

We  recommend  you  use  MOPAR  Gear  & Axle  Lubricant  SAE 
80W-90  API  GL  5. 

Information  Provided  by: 

542  MAINTAINING  YOUR  VEHICLE 


Component 

Fluid,  Lubricant,  or  Genuine  Part 

Brake  Master  Cylinder 

We  recommend  you  use  MOPAR  DOT  3,  SAE  J1703  should  be 
used.  If  DOT  3,  SAE  J1703  brake  fluid  is  not  available,  then 
DOT  4 is  acceptable. 

Power  Steering  Reservoir 

We  recommend  you  use  MOPAR  Power  Steering  Fluid  +4, 
MOPAR  ATF+4  Automatic  Transmission  Fluid. 

Information  Provided  by: 


MAINTENANCE  SCHEDULES 


CONTENTS 

■ MAINTENANCE  SCHEDULE 544  □ Maintenance  Chart 547 


8 


-ft  Information  Provided  by: 


544  MAINTENANCE  SCHEDULES 

MAINTENANCE  SCHEDULE 

Your  vehicle  is  equipped  with  an  automatic  oil  change 
indicator  system.  The  oil  change  indicator  system  will 
remind  you  that  it  is  time  to  take  your  vehicle  in  for 
scheduled  maintenance. 

Based  on  engine  operation  conditions,  the  oil  change 
indicator  message  will  illuminate.  This  means  that  ser- 
vice is  required  for  your  vehicle.  Operating  conditions 
such  as  frequent  short-trips,  trailer  tow,  extremely  hot  or 
cold  ambient  temperatures  will  influence  when  the 
"Change  Oil"  or  "Oil  Change  Required"  message  is 
displayed.  Severe  Operating  Conditions  can  cause  the 
change  oil  message  to  illuminate  as  early  as  3,500  miles 
(5,600  km)  since  last  reset.  Have  your  vehicle  serviced  as 
soon  as  possible,  within  the  next  500  miles  (805  km). 


On  Electronic  Vehicle  Information  Center  (EVIC) 
equipped  vehicles,  "Oil  Change  Required"  will  be  dis- 
played in  the  EVIC  and  a single  chime  will  sound, 
indicating  that  an  oil  change  is  necessary. 

On  Non-EVIC  equipped  vehicles,  "Change  Oil"  will  flash 
in  the  instrument  cluster  odometer  and  a single  chime 
will  sound,  indicating  that  an  oil  change  is  necessary. 

Your  authorized  dealer  will  reset  the  oil  change  indicator 
message  after  completing  the  scheduled  oil  change.  If  a 
scheduled  oil  change  is  performed  by  someone  other 
than  your  authorized  dealer,  the  message  can  be  reset  by 
referring  to  the  steps  described  under  "Instrument  Clus- 
ter Descriptions"  or  "Electronic  Vehicle  Information  Cen- 
ter (EVIC)"  in  "Understanding  Your  Instrument  Panel" 
for  further  information. 


Information  Provided  by: 


MAINTENANCE  SCHEDULES  545 


NOTE:  Under  no  circumstances  should  oil  change  inter- 
vals exceed  10,000  miles  (16,000  km),  twelve  months  or 
350  hours  of  engine  run  time,  whichever  comes  first.  The 
350  hours  of  engine  run  or  idle  time  is  generally  only  a 
concern  for  fleet  customers. 

Severe  Duty  All  Models 

Change  Engine  Oil  at  4,000  miles  (6,500  km)  if  the  vehicle 
is  operated  in  a dusty  and  off  road  environment  or  is 
operated  predominately  at  idle  or  only  very  low  engine 
RPM's.  This  type  of  vehicle  use  is  considered  Severe 
Duty. 


Once  A Month  Or  Before  A Long  Trip: 

• Check  engine  oil  level 

• Check  windshield  washer  fluid  level 

• Check  the  tire  inflation  pressures  and  look  for  unusual 
wear  or  damage 

• Check  the  fluid  levels  of  the  coolant  reservoir,  brake 
master  cylinder,  power  steering  and  fill  as  needed 

• Check  function  of  all  interior  and  exterior  lights 


8 


Information  Provided  by: 


546  MAINTENANCE  SCHEDULES 


Required  Maintenance  Intervals. 

Refer  to  the  maintenance  schedules  on  the  following 
page  for  the  required  maintenance  intervals. 


At  Every  Oil  Change  Interval  As  Indicated  By  Oil 
Change  Indicator  System: 

• Change  oil  and  filter. 

• Rotate  the  tires.  Rotate  at  the  first  sign  of  irregu- 
lar wear,  even  if  it  occurs  before  the  oil  indicator 
system  turns  on. 

• Inspect  battery  and  clean  and  tighten  terminals  as 
required. 

• Inspect  brake  pads,  shoes,  rotors,  drums,  hoses 
and  park  brake. 

• Inspect  engine  cooling  system  protection  and 
hoses. 

• Inspect  exhaust  system. 

• Inspect  engine  air  cleaner  if  using  in  dusty  or 
off-road  conditions. 


Information  Provided  by: 


MAINTENANCE  SCHEDULES  547 

Maintenance  Chart 

Refer  to  the  Maintenance  Schedules  on  the  following 
pages  for  the  required  maintenance  intervals. 


Mileage  or  time  passed  (whichever  comes  first) 

O 

O 

O 

O 

CM 

30,000 

o 

o 

o 

o 

50,000 

60,000 

70,000 

O 

o 

o 

© 

00 

90,000 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

O 

O 

o 

o 

120,000 

130,000 

o 

o 

o 

o 

'Sf 

150,000 

Or  Years: 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

Or  Kilometers: 

32,000 

O 

o 

o 

CO 

o 

o 

o 

CO 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CO 

96,000 

112,000 

o 

o 

o 

CO 

CM 

o 

o 

o 

160,000 

176,000 

192,000 

208,000 

224,000 

O 

o 

o 

o 

CM 

Additional  Inspections 

Inspect  the  C V joints. 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Inspect  front  suspension,  boot  seals,  tie  rod  ends, 
and  replace  if  necessary. 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Inspect  brake  linings,  replace  if  necessary.  Check 
park  brake  function,  adjust  if  necessary. 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Information  Provided  by: 

0 = /M_  = F=? 


548  MAINTENANCE  SCHEDULES 


Mileage  or  time  passed  (whichever  comes  first) 

O 

O 

O 

O 

CM 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CO 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

in 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CD 

o 

o 

o 

o 

1^ 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CO 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o> 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CM 

130,000 

o 

o 

o 

o 

150,000 

Or  Years: 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

Or  Kilometers: 

o 

o 

o 

cm" 

CO 

o 

o 

o 

CO 

o 

o 

o 

CD 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CO 

o 

o 

o 

CD 

o> 

o 

o 

o 

cm" 

o 

o 

o 

co" 

CM 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CD 

o 

o 

o 

CD 

o 

o 

o 

cm" 

O) 

o 

o 

o 

co" 

o 

CM 

o 

o 

o 

CM 

CM 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CM 

Additional  Maintenance 

Replace  engine  air  cleaner  filter. 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Replace  air  conditioning/cabin  air  filter. 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Replace  spark  plugs** 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Flush  and  replace  the  engine  coolant  at  10  years 
or  150,000  miles  (240,000  km)  whichever  comes 
first. 

X 

X 

Replace  rear  drive  assembly  (RDA)  fluid. 

X 

X 

Replace  power  transfer  unit  (PTU)  fluid. 

X 

X 

Change  automatic  transmission  fluid  and  filter  if 
using  your  vehicle  for  any  of  the  following:  police, 
taxi,  fleet,  or  frequent  trailer  towing.  (CVT  only) 

X 

X 

MAINTENANCE  SCHEDULES  549 


Mileage  or  time  passed  (whichever  comes  first) 

O 

O 

O 

O 

CM 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CO 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

in 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CD 

O 

o 

o 

o 

1^ 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CO 

o 

o 

o 

o 

O) 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CM 

130,000 

o 

o 

o 

o 

150,000 

Or  Years: 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

Or  Kilometers: 

o 

o 

o 

cm" 

CO 

o 

o 

o 

CO 

<3- 

o 

o 

o 

CD 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CO 

o 

o 

o 

CD 

o> 

o 

o 

o 

cm" 

o 

o 

o 

co" 

CM 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CD 

o 

o 

o 

CD 

o 

o 

o 

cm" 

O) 

o 

o 

o 

co" 

o 

CM 

o 

o 

o 

CM 

CM 

o 

o 

o 

o 

^r 

CM 

Change  the  automatic  transmission  fluid  and  filter. 
(CVT  only) 

X 

Change  the  automatic  transmission  fluid  (six-speed 
only)  if  you  frequently  drive:  on  rough  or  unpaved 
roads,  on  mountain  roads,  on  short  trips,  in  heavy 
city  traffic  during  hot  weather,  or  if  you  use  the  ve- 
hicle for  police,  taxi,  fleet,  or  frequent  trailer  towing. 

X 

X 

— Information  Provided  by: 

‘'t  = = 


550  MAINTENANCE  SCHEDULES 


Mileage  or  time  passed  (whichever  comes  first) 

O 

O 

O 

O 

CM 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CO 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

in 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CD 

o 

o 

o 

o 

1^ 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CO 

o 

o 

o 

o 

O) 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CM 

130,000 

o 

o 

o 

o 

150,000 

Or  Years: 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

Or  Kilometers: 

o 

o 

o 

cm" 

CO 

o 

o 

o 

CO 

o 

o 

o 

CD 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CO 

o 

o 

o 

CD 

O) 

o 

o 

o 

cm" 

o 

o 

o 

co" 

CM 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CD 

o 

o 

o 

CD 

r^- 

o 

o 

o 

cm" 

O) 

o 

o 

o 

co" 

o 

CM 

o 

o 

o 

CM 

CM 

o 

o 

o 

o 

CM 

Change  the  manual  transmission  fluid  if  using  your 
vehicle  for  any  of  the  following:  trailer  towing, 
heavy  loading,  taxi,  police,  delivery  service  (com- 
mercial service),  off-road,  desert  operation  or  more 
than  50%  of  your  driving  is  at  sustained  high 
speeds  during  hot  weather,  above  90°F  (32°C). 

X 

X 

X 

Inspect  and  replace  PCV  valve  if  necessary. 

X 

**  The  spark  plug  change  interval  is  mileage  based  only, 
yearly  intervals  do  not  apply. 


— Information  Provided  by: 

-'A  0 = = 


WARNING! 


• You  can  be  badly  injured  working  on  or  around  a 
motor  vehicle.  Do  only  service  work  for  which  you 
have  the  knowledge  and  the  right  equipment.  If 
you  have  any  doubt  about  your  ability  to  perform  a 
service  job,  take  your  vehicle  to  a competent  me- 
chanic. 

• Failure  to  properly  inspect  and  maintain  your  ve- 
hicle could  result  in  a component  malfunction  and 
effect  vehicle  handling  and  performance.  This 
could  cause  an  accident. 


MAINTENANCE  SCHEDULES  551 


8 


Information  Provided  by: 

CZ)  = /M_  = ?^ 


IF  YOU  NEED  CONSUMER  ASSISTANCE 


CONTENTS 


■ SUGGESTIONS  FOR  OBTAINING  SERVICE  FOR 


YOUR  VEHICLE 555 

□ Prepare  For  The  Appointment 555 

□ Prepare  A List 555 

□ Be  Reasonable  With  Requests 555 

■ IF  YOU  NEED  ASSISTANCE  555 

□ FCA  US  LLC  Customer  Center 556 

□ FCA  Canada  Inc.  Customer  Center 556 

□ In  Mexico  Contact 557 

□ Puerto  Rico  And  U.S.  Virgin  Islands 557 


□ Customer  Assistance  For  The  Hearing  Or  Speech 


Impaired  (TDD/TTY) 557 

□ Service  Contract 557 

■ WARRANTY  INFORMATION  559 

■ MOPAR  PARTS 559 

■ REPORTING  SAFETY  DEFECTS 559 

□ In  The  50  United  States  And  Washington,  D.C. . . .559 

□ In  Canada 559 

■ PUBLICATION  ORDER  FORMS 560 


554  IF  YOU  NEED  CONSUMER  ASSISTANCE 

■ DEPARTMENT  OF  TRANSPORTATION  UNIFORM 


TIRE  QUALITY  GRADES 561 

□ Treadwear 561 


n Traction  Grades 562 

□ Temperature  Grades 562 


Information  Provided  by: 

cd=/m 


SUGGESTIONS  FOR  OBTAINING  SERVICE  FOR 
YOUR  VEHICLE 

Prepare  For  The  Appointment 

If  you  are  having  warranty  work  done,  be  sure  to  have 
the  right  papers  with  you.  Take  your  warranty  folder.  All 
work  to  be  performed  may  not  be  covered  by  the 
warranty.  Discuss  additional  charges  with  the  service 
manager.  Keep  a maintenance  log  of  your  vehicle's 
service  history.  This  can  often  provide  a clue  to  the 
current  problem. 

Prepare  A List 

Make  a written  list  of  your  vehicle's  problems  or  the 
specific  work  you  want  done.  If  you've  had  an  accident 
or  work  done  that  is  not  on  your  maintenance  log,  let  the 
service  advisor  know. 


IF  YOU  NEED  CONSUMER  ASSISTANCE  555 

Be  Reasonable  With  Requests 

If  you  list  a number  of  items  and  you  must  have  your 
vehicle  by  the  end  of  the  day,  discuss  the  situation  with 
the  service  advisor  and  list  the  items  in  order  of  priority. 
At  many  authorized  dealers,  you  may  obtain  a rental 
vehicle  at  a minimal  daily  charge.  If  you  need  a rental,  it 
is  advisable  to  make  these  arrangements  when  you  call 
for  an  appointment. 

IF  YOU  NEED  ASSISTANCE 

The  manufacturer  and  its  authorized  dealer  are  vitally 
interested  in  your  satisfaction.  We  want  you  to  be  happy 
with  our  products  and  services. 

Warranty  service  must  be  done  by  an  authorized  dealer. 
We  strongly  recommend  that  you  take  the  vehicle  to  an 
authorized  dealer.  They  know  your  vehicle  the  best,  and 
are  most  concerned  that  you  get  prompt  and  high  quality 
service.  The  manufacturer's  authorized  dealer  have  the 


556  IF  YOU  NEED  CONSUMER  ASSISTANCE 


facilities,  factory-trained  technicians,  special  tools,  and 
the  latest  information  to  ensure  the  vehicle  is  fixed 
correctly  and  in  a timely  manner. 

This  is  why  you  should  always  talk  to  an  authorized 
dealer  service  manager  first.  Most  matters  can  be  re- 
solved with  this  process. 

• If  for  some  reason  you  are  still  not  satisfied,  talk  to  the 
general  manager  or  owner  of  the  authorized  dealer. 
They  want  to  know  if  you  need  assistance. 

• If  an  authorized  dealer  is  unable  to  resolve  the  con- 
cern, you  may  contact  the  manufacturer's  customer 
center. 

Any  communication  to  the  manufacturer's  customer  cen- 
ter should  include  the  following  information: 

• Owner's  name  and  address 

• Owner's  telephone  number  (home  and  office) 


• Authorized  dealer  name 

• Vehicle  Identification  Number  (VIN) 

• Vehicle  delivery  date  and  mileage 

FCA  US  LLC  Customer  Center 

P.O.  Box  21-8004 
Auburn  Hills,  MI  48321-8004 
Phone:  (877)  426-5337 

FCA  Canada  Inc.  Customer  Center 

P.O.  Box  1621 

Windsor,  Ontario  N9A  4H6 

Phone:  (800)  465-2001  English  / (800)  387-9983  French 


Information  Provided  by: 


In  Mexico  Contact 

Av.  Prolongacion  Paseo  de  la  Reforma,  1240 
Sante  Fe  C.P  05109 
Mexico,  D.  F. 

In  Mexico  City:  5081-7568 

Outside  Mexico  City:  1-800-505-1300 

Puerto  Rico  And  U.S.  Virgin  Islands 

Customer  Service  Chrysler  International  Services  LLC 

PO.  Box  191857 

San  Juan  00919-1857 

Tel.:  (787)  782-5757 

Fax:  (787)  782-3345 


IF  YOU  NEED  CONSUMER  ASSISTANCE  557 

Customer  Assistance  For  The  Hearing  Or  Speech 
Impaired  (TDD/TTY) 


To  assist  customers  who  have  hearing  difficulties,  the 
manufacturer  has  installed  special  TDD  (Telecommuni- 
cation Devices  for  the  Deaf)  equipment  at  its  customer 
center.  Any  hearing  or  speech  impaired  customer,  who 
has  access  to  a TDD  or  a conventional  teletypewriter 
(TTY)  in  the  United  States,  can  communicate  with  the 
manufacturer  by  dialing  1-800-380-CF1RY. 


Canadian  residents  with  hearing  difficulties  that  require 
assistance  can  use  the  special  needs  relay  service  offered 
by  Bell  Canada.  For  TTY  teletypewriter  users,  dial  711 
and  for  Voice  callers,  dial  1-800-855-0511  to  connect  with 
a Bell  Relay  Service  operator. 

Service  Contract 


9 


You  may  have  purchased  a service  contract  for  a vehicle 
to  help  protect  you  from  the  high  cost  of  unexpected 
repairs  after  the  manufacturer's  New  Vehicle  Limited 


558  IF  YOU  NEED  CONSUMER  ASSISTANCE 

Warranty  expires.  The  manufacturer  stands  behind  only 
the  manufacturer's  service  contracts.  If  you  purchased  a 
manufacturer's  service  contract,  you  will  receive  Plan 
Provisions  and  an  Owner  Identification  Card  in  the  mail 
within  three  weeks  of  the  vehicle  delivery  date.  If  you 
have  any  questions  about  the  service  contract,  call  the 
manufacturer's  Service  Contract  National  Customer 
Hotline  at  1-800-521-9922  (Canadian  residents,  call  (800) 
465-2001  English  / (800)  387-9983  French). 

The  manufacturer  will  not  stand  behind  any  service 
contract  that  is  not  the  manufacturer's  service  contract.  It 
is  not  responsible  for  any  service  contract  other  than  the 
manufacturer's  service  contract.  If  you  purchased  a ser- 
vice contract  that  is  not  a manufacturer's  service  contract, 
and  you  require  service  after  the  manufacturer's  New 
Vehicle  Limited  Warranty  expires,  please  refer  to  the 
contract  documents,  and  contact  the  person  listed  in 
those  documents. 


We  appreciate  that  you  have  made  a major  investment 
when  you  purchased  the  vehicle.  An  authorized  dealer 
has  also  made  a major  investment  in  facilities,  tools,  and 
training  to  assure  that  you  are  absolutely  delighted  with 
the  ownership  experience.  You  will  be  pleased  with  their 
sincere  efforts  to  resolve  any  warranty  issues  or  related 
concerns. 


WARNING! 

Engine  exhaust  (internal  combustion  engines  only), 
some  of  its  constituents,  and  certain  vehicle  compo- 
nents contain,  or  emit,  chemicals  known  to  the  State 
of  California  to  cause  cancer  and  birth  defects,  or 
other  reproductive  harm.  In  addition,  certain  fluids 
contained  in  vehicles  and  certain  products  of  compo- 
nent wear  contain,  or  emit,  chemicals  known  to  the 
State  of  California  to  cause  cancer  and  birth  defects, 
or  other  reproductive  harm. 


/M_  = F=? 


WARRANTY  INFORMATION 


See  the  Warranty  Information  Booklet,  located  on  the 
DVD,  for  the  terms  and  provisions  of  FCA  US  LLC 
warranties  applicable  to  this  vehicle  and  market. 

MOPAR  PARTS 

MOPAR  fluids,  lubricants,  parts,  and  accessories  are 
available  from  an  authorized  dealer.  They  are  recom- 
mended for  your  vehicle  in  order  to  help  keep  the  vehicle 
operating  at  its  best. 

REPORTING  SAFETY  DEFECTS 

In  The  50  United  States  And  Washington,  D.C. 

If  you  believe  that  your  vehicle  has  a defect  that  could 
cause  a crash  or  cause  injury  or  death,  you  should 
immediately  inform  the  National  Highway  Traffic  Safety 
Administration  (NHTSA)  in  addition  to  notifying  the 
manufacturer. 


IF  YOU  NEED  CONSUMER  ASSISTANCE  559 

If  NHTSA  receives  similar  complaints,  it  may  open  an 
investigation,  and  if  it  finds  that  a safety  defect  exists  in 
a group  of  vehicles,  it  may  order  a recall  and  remedy 
campaign.  However,  NHTSA  cannot  become  involved  in 
individual  problems  between  you,  your  authorized 
dealer,  and  the  manufacturer. 

To  contact  NHTSA,  you  may  either  call  the  Auto  Safety 
Hotline  toll  free  at  1-888-327-4236  (TTY:  1-800-424-9153), 
or  go  to  http://www.safercar.gov;  or  write  to:  Adminis- 
trator, NHTSA,  1200  New  Jersey  Avenue,  SE.,  West 
Building,  Washington,  D.C.  20590. 

You  can  also  obtain  other  information  about  motor 
vehicle  safety  from  http:/ /www.safercar.gov. 

In  Canada 

If  you  believe  that  your  vehicle  has  a safety  defect,  you 
should  contact  the  Customer  Service  Department  imme- 
diately. Canadian  customers  who  wish  to  report  a safety 


560  IF  YOU  NEED  CONSUMER  ASSISTANCE 


defect  to  the  Canadian  government  should  contact  Trans- 
port Canada,  Motor  Vehicle  Defect  Investigations  and 
Recalls  at  1-800-333-0510  or  go  to  http:/ /www.tc.gc.ca/ 
roadsafety/ 

PUBLICATION  ORDER  FORMS 

To  order  the  following  manuals,  you  may  use  either  the 
website  or  the  phone  numbers  listed  below.  Visa,  Mas- 
tercard, American  Express,  and  Discover  orders  are  ac- 
cepted. If  you  prefer  mailing  your  payment,  please  call 
for  an  order  form. 

NOTE:  A street  address  is  required  when  ordering 
manuals  (no  RO.  Boxes). 


Service  Manuals 


These  comprehensive  Service  Manuals  provide  the  infor- 
mation that  students  and  professional  technicians  need  in 
diagnosing /troubleshooting,  problem  solving,  maintain- 
ing, servicing,  and  repairing  FCA  US  LLC  vehicles.  A 
complete  working  knowledge  of  the  vehicle,  system, 
and/or  components  is  written  in  straightforward  lan- 
guage with  illustrations,  diagrams,  and  charts. 

Diagnostic  Procedure  Manuals 

Diagnostic  Procedure  Manuals  are  filled  with  diagrams, 
charts  and  detailed  illustrations.  These  practical  manuals 
make  it  easy  for  students  and  technicians  to  find  and  fix 
problems  on  computer-controlled  vehicle  systems  and 
features.  They  show  exactly  how  to  find  and  correct 
problems  the  first  time,  using  step-by-step  troubleshoot- 
ing and  drivability  procedures,  proven  diagnostic  tests 
and  a complete  list  of  all  tools  and  equipment. 


Owner's  Manuals 


These  Owner's  Manuals  have  been  prepared  with  the 
assistance  of  service  and  engineering  specialists  to  ac- 
quaint you  with  specific  FCA  US  LLC  vehicles.  Included 
are  starting,  operating,  emergency  and  maintenance  pro- 
cedures as  well  as  specifications,  capabilities  and  safety 
tips. 

Call  toll  free  at: 

• 1-800-890-4038  (U.S.) 

• 1-800-387-1143  (Canada) 

Or 

Visit  us  on  the  Worldwide  Web  at: 


www.techauthority.com 


IF  YOU  NEED  CONSUMER  ASSISTANCE  561 

DEPARTMENT  OF  TRANSPORTATION  UNIFORM 
TIRE  QUALITY  GRADES 

The  following  tire  grading  categories  were  established  by 
the  National  Highway  Traffic  Safety  Administration.  The 
specific  grade  rating  assigned  by  the  tire's  manufacturer 
in  each  category  is  shown  on  the  sidewall  of  the  tires  on 
your  vehicle. 

All  passenger  vehicle  tires  must  conform  to  Federal 
safety  requirements  in  addition  to  these  grades. 

Treadwear 

The  Treadwear  grade  is  a comparative  rating,  based  on 
the  wear  rate  of  the  tire  when  tested  under  controlled 
conditions  on  a specified  government  test  course.  For 
example,  a tire  graded  150  would  wear  one  and  one-half 
times  as  well  on  the  government  course  as  a tire  graded 
100.  The  relative  performance  of  tires  depends  upon  the 
actual  conditions  of  their  use,  however,  and  may  depart 


562  IF  YOU  NEED  CONSUMER  ASSISTANCE 


significantly  from  the  norm  due  to  variations  in  driving 
habits,  service  practices,  and  differences  in  road  charac- 
teristics and  climate. 

Traction  Grades 

The  Traction  grades,  from  highest  to  lowest,  are  AA,  A,  B, 
and  C.  These  grades  represent  the  tire's  ability  to  stop  on 
wet  pavement,  as  measured  under  controlled  conditions 
on  specified  government  test  surfaces  of  asphalt  and 
concrete.  A tire  marked  C may  have  poor  traction  perfor- 
mance. 


WARNING! 

The  traction  grade  assigned  to  this  tire  is  based  on 
straight-ahead  braking  traction  tests,  and  does  not 
include  acceleration,  cornering,  hydroplaning,  or 
peak  traction  characteristics. 


Temperature  Grades 

The  temperature  grades  are  A (the  highest),  B,  and  C, 
representing  the  tire's  resistance  to  the  generation  of  heat 
and  its  ability  to  dissipate  heat,  when  tested  under 
controlled  conditions  on  a specified  indoor  laboratory 
test  wheel.  Sustained  high  temperature  can  cause  the 
material  of  the  tire  to  degenerate  and  reduce  tire  life,  and 
excessive  temperature  can  lead  to  sudden  tire  failure.  The 
grade  C corresponds  to  a level  of  performance,  which  all 
passenger  vehicle  tires  must  meet  under  the  Federal 
Motor  Vehicle  Safety  Standard  No.  109.  Grades  B and  A 
represent  higher  levels  of  performance  on  the  laboratory 
test  wheel,  than  the  minimum  required  by  law. 


/XL 


WARNING! 


The  temperature  grade  for  this  tire  is  established  for 
a tire  that  is  properly  inflated  and  not  overloaded. 
Excessive  speed,  under-inflation,  or  excessive  load- 
ing, either  separately  or  in  combination,  can  cause 
heat  buildup  and  possible  tire  failure. 


i Provided  b 


IF  YOU  NEED  CONSUMER  ASSISTANCE  563 


9 


Information  Provided  by: 

CZ)  = /M_  = ?^ 


INDEX 


Information  Provided  by: 


10 


566  INDEX 


Adding  Engine  Coolant  (Antifreeze) 511 

Adding  Fuel 430 

Adding  Washer  Fluid 505 

Additives,  Fuel 428 

Adjust 

Down  151 

Forward 151 

Rearward 151 

Up  151 

Air  Bag 61 

Advance  Front  Air  Bag 63 

Air  Bag  Operation  64 

Air  Bag  Warning  Light 72 

Enhanced  Accident  Response 71 

Event  Data  Recorder  (EDR) 74 

Front  Air  Bag 61 

If  A Deployment  Occurs 70 

Knee  Impact  Bolsters  65 

Maintaining  Your  Air  Bag  System  73 


Side  Air  Bags 65 

Transporting  Pets 96 

Air  Bag  Deployment 61 

Air  Bag  Light 72,  99,  225 

Air  Bag  Maintenance 73 

Air  Cleaner,  Engine  (Engine  Air  Cleaner  Filter)  . . . .500 

Air  Conditioner  Maintenance 502 

Air  Conditioning 318 

Air  Conditioning  Controls 318 

Air  Conditioning  Filter 330,  503 

Air  Conditioning,  Operating  Tips 329,  331 

Air  Conditioning  Refrigerant 502,  503 

Air  Conditioning  System 318,  323,  502 

Air  Pressure,  Tires 403 

Alarm  (Security  Alarm) 228 

Alarm  System  (Security  Alarm) 18 

Alterations /Modifications,  Vehicle 8 

Antenna,  Satellite  Radio 278,  305 

Antifreeze  (Engine  Coolant) 510,  538 


INDEX  567 


Capacities  

Disposal 

Anti-Lock  Brake  System  (ABS) 

Anti-Lock  Warning  Light 

Appearance  Care 

Assistance  Towing 

Assist,  Hill  Start 

Automatic  Dimming  Mirror 

Automatic  Door  Locks 

Automatic  Temperature  Control  (ATC) 

Automatic  Transaxle 

Fluid  Level  Check 

Automatic  Transmission 

Autostick 

Fluid  And  Filter  Changes  

Fluid  Level  Check 

Fluid  Type  

Gear  Ranges  

Special  Additives 


538 

513 

377 

240 

522 

126 

380 

108 

32,  33 

323 

12 

520 

.343,  345,  517,  519 

357 

518,  520 

518 

517,  519,  541 

346,  353 

517,  519 


Autostick 357,  359 

Axle  Fluid 541 

Battery 231,  501 

Charging  System  Light 231 

Keyless  Transmitter  Replacement  (RKE) 25 

Belts,  Seat 99 

Body  Mechanism  Lubrication 504 

B-Pillar  Location 397 

Brake  Assist  System 379 

Brake  Fluid 541 

Brake,  Parking 373 

Brakes 375 

Brake  System 375,  514 

Master  Cylinder 515 

Parking 373 

Warning  Light  226 

Brake /Transmission  Interlock 345 

Bulb  Replacement 535,  536 


568  INDEX 


Bulbs,  Light 101,  535 

Calibration,  Compass 259 

Camera,  Rear 179 

Capacities,  Antifreeze  (Engine  Coolant) 538 

Capacities,  Fluid 538 

Caps,  Filler 

Fuel 430 

Oil  (Engine)  491,  492,  499 

Power  Steering 372 

Radiator  (Coolant  Pressure) 512 

Carbon  Monoxide  Warning 98,  430 

Cargo  Area  Cover 203 

Cargo  Area  Features 203 

Cargo  Compartment 203 

Light 203 

Luggage  Carrier 209 

Cargo  Light 203 

Cargo  Load  Floor 205 


Cargo  Tie-Downs 205 

Car  Washes 523 

Cellular  Phone 112 

Center  High  Mounted  Stop  Light 538 

Chains,  Tire 414 

Changing  A Flat  Tire 456 

Chart,  Tire  Sizing 392 

Check  Engine  Light  (Malfunction  Indicator  Light)  . .494 

Checking  Your  Vehicle  For  Safety 97 

Checks,  Safety 97 

Child  Restraint 75 

Child  Restraints 

Booster  Seats 80 

Child  Restraints 75 

Child  Seat  Installation 93 

How  To  Stow  An  Unused  ALR  Seat  Belt 89 

Infants  And  Child  Restraints 78 

Install  A LATCH-Compatible  Child  Restraint  ...  .88 


Installing  Child  Restraints  Using  The  Vehicle  Seat 


Belt 90 

Lower  Anchors  And  Tethers  For  Children 82 

Older  Children  And  Child  Restraints 78 

Seating  Positions  81 

Child  Safety  Locks 34 

Clean  Air  Gasoline 426 

Cleaning 

Wheels 524 

Climate  Control 318 

Clock 263,  283,  293 

Clutch 515 

Clutch  Fluid 515 

Coin  Holder 201 

Cold  Weather  Operation 339 

Compact  Disc  (CD)  Maintenance 317 

Compact  Spare  Tire 409 

Compass 247 

Compass  Calibration 259 


INDEX  569 


Compass  Variance 259 

Connector 

UCI 309 

Universal  Consumer  Interface  (UCI) 309 

Console 201 

Contract,  Service 557 

Coolant  (Antifreeze) 538 

Coolant  Pressure  Cap  (Radiator  Cap) 512 

Cooling  System 509 

Adding  Coolant  (Antifreeze)  511 

Coolant  Level  509,  513 

Disposal  Of  Used  Coolant 513 

Drain,  Flush,  And  Refill 509 

Inspection  513 

Points  To  Remember 513 

Pressure  Cap  512 

Radiator  Cap 512 

Selection  Of  Coolant  (Antifreeze) 510,  539 

Corrosion  Protection 522 


570  INDEX 


Cupholders 201 

Customer  Assistance 555 

Data  Recorder,  Event 74 

Dealer  Service 496 

Defroster,  Rear  Window 208 

Defroster,  Windshield 99,  321,  327 

Delay  (Intermittent)  Wipers 172 

Diagnostic  System,  Onboard 493 

Dimmer  Switch,  Headlight 167 

Dipsticks 

Power  Steering 372 

Disposal 

Antifreeze  (Engine  Coolant) 513 

Door  Locks 

Child-Protection  Door  Lock  — Rear  Doors 34 

Door  Locks  30 

Key  Fob 30 

Remote 30 


Remote  Keyless  Entry  (RKE) 30 

Door  Locks,  Automatic 32 

Door  Opener,  Garage 181 

Downshifting 343 

Driver's  Seat  Back  Tilt 155 

Driving 361 

Off-Pavement 362 

Off-Road 362 

Electrical  Power  Outlets 194 

Electric  Remote  Mirrors 110 

Electronic  Brake  Control  System 376 

Anti-Lock  Brake  System  377 

Electronic  Roll  Mitigation  388 

Traction  Control  System 383 

Electronic  Speed  Control  (Cruise  Control) 175 

Electronic  Stability  Control  (ESC) 383 

Electronic  Throttle  Control  Warning  Light 232 

Electronic  Vehicle  Information  Center  (EVIC) 249 


Emergency,  In  Case  Of 

Jacking 

Jump  Starting 

Towing  

Emission  Control  System  Maintenance 

Engine 491, 

Air  Cleaner  

Block  Heater  

Break-In  Recommendations 


Checking  Oil  Level 

Coolant  (Antifreeze) 509, 

Cooling 

Exhaust  Gas  Caution 98, 

Fuel  Requirements  

Jump  Starting 

Oil 497,  538, 

Oil  FiUer  Cap  491,492, 

Oil  Filter  

Oil  Selection 


INDEX  571 

Oil  Synthetic  499 

Overheating 453 

Enhanced  Accident  Response  Feature 71 

Ethanol 427 

Event  Data  Recorder 74 

Exhaust  Gas  Caution 98,  430 

Exhaust  System 98,  506 

Exterior  Lights 101 

Filters 

Air  Cleaner  500 

Air  Conditioning 330,  503 

Engine  Oil 500,  539 

Engine  Oil  Disposal  500 

Flashers 

Hazard  Warning 453 

Turn  Signal 101,  244,  537 

Flooded  Engine  Starting 339 

Fluid,  Brake 541 


.456 

.477 

.484 

.494 

492 

.500 

.340 

.96 

.497 

539 

.509 

430 

.426 

.477 

539 

499 

.500 

.498 


572  INDEX 


Fluid  Capacities 538 

Fluid  Leaks 101 

Fluid  Level  Checks 

Automatic  Transaxle 520 

Automatic  Transmission  518 

Cooling  System 509 

Power  Steering 372 

Fluids,  Lubricants  And  Genuine  Parts 539 

Fog  Lights 166,  537 

Folding  Rear  Seat 160 

Folding  Rear  Seat  (Sedan) 160 

Four-Way  Flazard  Flasher 453 

Four  Wheel  Drive 241,  361 

Systems 361 

Four  Wheel  Drive  Operation 361 

Freeing  A Stuck  Vehicle 482 

Fuel 426 

Adding 430 

Additives 428 


Capacity  538 

Clean  Air 426 

Ethanol 427 

Filler  Cap  (Gas  Cap) 430 

Gasoline 426 

Gauge 241 

Materials  Added 428 

Methanol 427 

Octane  Rating  426,  539 

Requirements 426 

Tank  Capacity 538 

Fueling 430 

Fuses 529 

Garage  Door  Opener  (FlomeLink) 181, 188 

Gas  Cap  (Fuel  Filler  Cap) 430,  432,  493 

Gasoline,  Clean  Air 426 

Gasoline  (Fuel) 426,  538 

Gasoline,  Reformulated 426 


QdsaCsr 


Gauges 

Fuel 

Gear  Ranges 346, 

Gear  Select  Lever  Override 

General  Information 

Glass  Cleaning 

Gross  Axle  Weight  Rating 

Gross  Vehicle  Weight  Rating 433, 

GVWR 

Hands-Free  Phone  (Uconnect) 

Hazard  Warning  Flasher 

Headlights 

Cleaning  

High  Beam/ Low  Beam  Select  Switch 

On  With  Wipers 168, 

Passing  

Replacing 

Switch 


INDEX  573 


Head  Restraints 156 

Heated  Mirrors Ill 

Heated  Seats 152 

Heater 318 

Heater,  Engine  Block 340 

High  Beam/Low  Beam  Select  (Dimmer)  Switch . . . .167 

Hill  Descent  Control 247,  389 

Hill  Start  Assist 380 

Hitches 

Trailer  Towing  438 

HomeLink  (Garage  Door  Opener) 181 

Hood  Release 162 

Ignition 12 

Key 12 

Ignition  Key  Removal 12 

Immobilizer  (Sentry  Key) 15 

Information  Center,  Vehicle 249 

Inside  Rearview  Mirror 108 


.241 

353 

.483 

.143 

.527 

.436 

435 

.433 

.112 

.453 

.536 

.527 

.167 

173 

.167 

.536 

.164 


574  INDEX 

Instrument  Cluster 229,  230,  244 

Instrument  Panel  And  Controls 217 

Instrument  Panel  Cover 527 

Instrument  Panel  Lens  Cleaning 528 

Integrated  Power  Module  (Fuses) 530 

Interior  Appearance  Care 526 

Intermittent  Wipers  (Delay  Wipers) 172 

Introduction 4 

iPod /USB/ MP3  Control 

Bluetooth  Streaming  Audio 147,  314 

Jacking  Instructions 458 

Jack  Location 457 

Jack  Operation 456,  458 

Jump  Starting 477 

Key-In  Reminder 14 

Keyless  Entry  System  (Sedan) 20 

Key,  Programming 17 


Key,  Replacement 16 

Keys 12 

Key,  Sentry  (Immobilizer) 15 

Lane  Change  And  Turn  Signals 537 

Lane  Change  Assist 167 

Lap  /Shoulder  Belts 44 

Latches 101 

Hood 162 

Lead  Free  Gasoline 426 

Leaks,  Fluid 101 

Life  Of  Tires 412 

Liftgate  (Sedan) 39 

Liftgate  Window  Wiper/Washer 207 

Light  Bulbs 101,  535 

Lights 101, 164 

Air  Bag 72,99,225 

Back-Up 537 

Brake  Assist  Warning  387 


QdsaTIsr 


Brake  Warning 226 

Bulb  Replacement 536 

Cargo  203 

Center  Mounted  Stop  538 

Daytime  Running 165 

Dimmer  Switch,  Headlight 164,  167 

Engine  Temperature  Warning 229 

Exterior 101 

Fog 166,  537 

Four-Wheel  Drive  Indicator 241 

Hazard  Warning  Flasher 453 

Headlights 164 

Headlights  On  With  Wipers 168,  173 

Headlight  Switch  164 

High  Beam 167 

High  Beam/Low  Beam  Select 167 

Instrument  Cluster 164 

License  538 

Lights  On  Reminder 165 


INDEX  575 

Malfunction  Indicator  (Check  Engine) 233 

Map  Reading 169 

Park  245 

Seat  Belt  Reminder 224 

Security  Alarm  18,  228 

Service 536 

Tire  Pressure  Monitoring  (TPMS) 235 

Traction  Control 387 

Turn  Signal 101,  164,  166,  244,  537 

Warning  (Instrument  Cluster  Description)  . . .229,  244 

Loading  Vehicle 433,  434 

Capacities  434 

Tires  397 

Locks 30 

Automatic  Door 32 

Child  Protection 34 

Door 30 

Power  Door 31 

Lubrication,  Body 504 


576  INDEX 


Luggage  Rack  (Roof  Rack) 

Lug  Nuts 

Lumbar  Support 

Maintenance  Free  Battery 

Maintenance  Procedures 

Maintenance  Schedule 

Malfunction  Indicator  Light  (Check  Engine)  . . .233, 


Manual,  Service 

Manual  Transaxle 

Fluid  Level  Check  521, 

Lubricant  Selection 

Manual  Transmission 340, 

Fluid  Level  Check 

Frequency  Of  Fluid  Change 

Lubricant  Selection  520,  521, 

Map /Reading  Lights 

Master  Cylinder  (Brakes) 

Methanol 


Mini-Trip  Computer 247 

Mirrors 108 

Automatic  Dimming 108 

Electric  Powered 110 

Exterior  Folding 110 

Heated Ill 

Outside 109 

Rearview 108 

Vanity Ill 

Modifications /Alterations,  Vehicle 8 

Monitor,  Tire  Pressure  System 416 

MOPAR  Parts 495,  559 

MTBE/ETBE 427 

Multi-Function  Control  Lever 164 

New  Vehicle  Break-In  Period 96 

Occupant  Restraints 40 

Octane  Rating,  Gasoline  (Fuel) 426 


.209 

.454 

.155 

.501 

.496 

.544 

494 

.560 

522 

.522 

520 

.521 

.521 

541 

.169 

.515 

.427 


Oil  Change  Indicator 252 

Oil  Change  Indicator,  Reset 252 

Oil,  Engine 497,  538,  539 

Capacity  538 

Change  Interval 498 

Checking 497 

Disposal 500 

Filter 500,  539 

Filter  Disposal  500 

Identification  Logo 498 

Materials  Added  To 499 

Pressure  Warning  Light 228 

Recommendation 498,  538 

Synthetic 499 

Viscosity  499 

Oil  Filter,  Change 500 

Oil  Filter,  Selection 500 

Oil  Pressure  Light 228 

Onboard  Diagnostic  System 493 


INDEX  577 


Opener,  Garage  Door  (HomeLink) 181 

Operating  Precautions 493 

Operator  Manual  (Owner's  Manual) 5 

Overheating,  Engine 453 

Owner's  Manual  (Operator  Manual) 5,  560 

Paint  Care 522 

Panic  Alarm 24 

Parking  Brake 373 

Passing  Light 167 

Personal  Settings 255 

Pets 96 

Phone,  Cellular 112 

Phone,  Hands-Free  (Uconnect) 112 

Placard,  Tire  And  Loading  Information 398 

Power 

Door  Locks  31 

Mirrors  110 

Outlet  (Auxiliary  Electrical  Outlet) 194 


578  INDEX 


Steering 371,  372 

Sunroof 191 

Transfer  Unit  522 

Windows 36 

Power  Seats 

Down  151 

Forward 151 

Rearward 151 

Tilt  151 

Up  151 

Power  Steering  Fluid 541 

Power  Transfer  Unit 522,  541 

Pregnant  Women  And  Seat  Belts 54 

Preparation  For  Jacking 457 

Pretensioners 

Seat  Belts 55 

Programmable  Electronic  Features 255 


Radiator  Cap  (Coolant  Pressure  Cap) 512 

Radio  Frequency 

General  Information 18,  26,  29 

Radio  Operation 261,  318 

Radio  (Sound  Systems) 261 

Rear  Axle  (Differential) 521 

Rear  Camera 179 

Rear  Drive  Assembly 521 

Rear  Liftgate  (Sedan) 39 

Rear  Seat,  Folding 160 

Rearview  Mirrors 108 

Rear  Window  Defroster 208 

Rear  Window  Features 207 

Rear  Wiper /Washer 207 

Recorder,  Event  Data 74 

Recreational  Towing 448 

Reformulated  Gasoline 426 

Refrigerant 503 

Reminder,  Seat  Belt 43 


Radial  Ply  Tires 


405 


Remote  Control 

Door  Locks  20 

Security  Alarm 18 

Remote  Keyless  Entry  (Sedan) 20 

Remote  Sound  System  (Radio)  Controls 315 

Remote  Starting  System 26 

Replacement  Bulbs 535 

Replacement  Keys 16 

Replacement  Parts 495 

Replacement  Tires 413 

Reporting  Safety  Defects 559 

Restraint,  Head 156 

Restraints,  Child 75 

Retractable  Cargo  Area  Cover 203 

Roll  Over  Warning 4 

Roof  Type  Carrier 209 

Rotation,  Tires 415 

Safety  Checks  Inside  Vehicle 99 


INDEX  579 


Safety  Checks  Outside  Vehicle 101 

Safety  Defects,  Reporting 559 

Safety,  Exhaust  Gas 98 

Safety  Information,  Tire 391 

Safety  Tips 97 

Satellite  Radio  Antenna 278,  305 

Schedule,  Maintenance 544 

Seat  Belt 

Adjustable  Upper  Shoulder  Belt  Anchorage 50 

Automatic  Locking  Retractor  (ALR) 55 

Energy  Management  Feature 55 

Lap  /Shoulder  Belt  Operation 47 

Lap /Shoulder  Belts 44 

Lap  /Shoulder  Belt  Untwisting 49 

Pregnant  Women 54 

Seat  Belt  Extender  53 

Seat  Belt  Pretensioner 55 

Seat  Belt  Reminder 43 

Seat  Belt  Maintenance 528 


580  INDEX 

Seat  Belt  Reminder 43 

Seat  Belts 42,  99 

Adjustable  Shoulder  Belt 50 

Adjustable  Upper  Shoulder  Anchorage 50 

Child  Restraint 75 

Extender 53 

Front  Seat 42,  44,  47 

Inspection 99 

Operating  Instructions  47 

Pregnant  Women 54 

Pretensioners 55 

Rear  Seat 44 

Reminder 224 

Untwisting  Procedure 49 

Seats 149, 151 

Adjustment 149, 151, 153 

Heated 152 

Lumbar  Support 155 

Rear  Folding  160 


Rear  Folding  (Sedan) 160 

Seatback  Release 155 

Tilting 155 

Security  Alarm 18,  228 

Selection  Of  Coolant  (Antifreeze) 539 

Sentry  Key  (Immobilizer) 15 

Sentry  Key  Programming 17 

Sentry  Key  Replacement 16 

Service  Assistance 555 

Service  Contract 557 

Service  Manuals 560 

Settings,  Personal 255 

Setting  The  Clock 263,  283,  293 

Shift  Lever  Override 483 

Shift  Speeds,  Manual  Transmission 342 

Shoulder  Belts 44 

Side  Window  Demisters  (Defrosters) 330 

Signals,  Turn 101,  244,  537 

Snow  Chains  (Tire  Chains) 414 


INDEX  581 


Snow  Tires 

Spare  Tire 408,  409,  410, 

Spark  Plugs 

Speed  Control 

Accel/Decel 

Cancel 

Resume 

Speed  Control  (Cruise  Control) 

Starting 

Automatic  Transmission  

Cold  Weather 

Engine  Fails  To  Start 

Manual  Transmission  

Remote 

Starting  Procedures 

Steering 

Power 371, 

Tilt  Column 

Steering  Wheel  Audio  Controls 


Steering  Wheel  Mounted  Sound  System  Controls . . .315 

Storage 535 

Storage  Bin 200 

Storage,  Vehicle 329 

Stuck,  Freeing 482 

Sun  Roof 191 

Sun  Visor  Extension Ill 

Supplemental  Restraint  System  - Air  Bag 61 

Synthetic  Engine  Oil 499 

System,  Remote  Starting 26 

Temperature  Control,  Automatic  (ATC) 323 

Tie  Down  Hooks,  Cargo 205 

Tilt 

Down  151 

Up  151 

Tilt  Steering  Column 174 

Tire  And  Loading  Information  Placard 397,  398 

Tire  Markings 391 


.407 

457 

.539 

.178 

.177 

.177 

.175 

.337 

.338 

.339 

.339 

.337 

.26 

.337 

372 

.174 

.315 


582  INDEX 

Tires 101,402,408, 

Aging  (Life  Of  Tires) 

Air  Pressure 

Chains 

Changing 

Compact  Spare 

General  Information 402, 

High  Speed  

Inflation  Pressures 

Jacking 

Life  Of  Tires 

Load  Capacity 397, 

Pressure  Monitor  System  (TPMS) 

Pressure  Warning  Light 

Quality  Grading 

Radial 

Replacement 

Rotation 

Safety 391, 


Sizes 392 

Snow  Tires 407 

Spare  Tire 408,  410,  457 

Spinning  411 

Trailer  Towing  443 

Tread  Wear  Indicators 411 

Tire  Safety  Information 391 

Tire  Service  Kit 467,  468,  469,  471,  472,  475,  477 

Tongue  Weight /Trailer  Weight 440 

Towing 435 

24-Hour  Towing  Assistance 126 

Disabled  Vehicle 484 

Guide  439 

Recreational 448 

Weight 439 

Towing  Assistance 126 

Towing  Vehicle  Behind  A Motorhome 448 

Traction  Control 383 

Trailer  Towing 435 


561 

.412 

.402 

.414 

.456 

.409 

408 

.405 

.403 

.456 

.412 

399 

.416 

.235 

.561 

.405 

.413 

.415 

402 


Cooling  System  Tips 

Hitches  

Minimum  Requirements  

Tips 

Trailer  And  Tongue  Weight  

Wiring 

Trailer  Towing  Guide 

Trailer  Weight 

Transaxle 

Automatic 

Transmission 

Automatic  343,  345,  517, 

Fluid  517,519, 

Manual 

Transmitter  Battery  Service  (Remote  Keyless  Entry)  . 

Transmitter,  Garage  Door  Opener  (HomeLink) 

Transporting  Pets 

Tread  Wear  Indicators 

Trip  Computer 


INDEX  583 

Turn  Signals 166,  244,  537 

UCI  Connector 309 

Uconnect 

Advanced  Phone  Connectivity 130 

Operation 114 

Phone  Call  Features  121 

Phone  Features 125 

Things  You  Should  Know  About  Your  Uconnect 

Phone 132 

Uconnect  130 

Operating  Instructions  Auxiliary  Mode 291 

Operating  Instructions  CD  Mode 286 

Operating  Instructions  Radio  Mode 282,  292 

Playing  MP3  Files 288 

Uconnect  130  With  Satellite  Radio 

Multimedia  Satellite  Radio  277,  304 

Operating  Instructions  CD  Mode 298 

Operating  Instructions  Radio  Mode  292 


.447 

.438 

.441 

.446 

.440 

.444 

.439 

.439 

.12 

519 

541 

.340 

.25 

.181 

.96 

.411 

.247 


584  INDEX 


Playing  MP3  Files 300 

Uconnect  (Hands-Free  Phone) 112 

Understanding  Your  Instrument  Panel 217 

Uniform  Tire  Quality  Grades 561 

Universal  Consumer  Interface  (UCI)  Connector  . . . .309 

Universal  Transmitter 181 

Unleaded  Gasoline 426 

Untwisting  Procedure,  Seat  Belt 49 

Vanity  Mirrors Ill 

Variance,  Compass 259 

Vehicle  Certification  Label 433 

Vehicle  Identification  Number  (VIN) 7 

Vehicle  Loading 399,  433,  434 

Vehicle  Modifications /Alterations 8 

Vehicle  Security  Alarm  (Security  Alarm) 18 

Vehicle  Storage 329,  535 

Voice  Command 

Commands 145 


System  Operation 143 

Voice  Training  149 

Voice  Recognition  System  (VR) 143 

Warning,  Roll  Over 4 

Warnings  And  Cautions 7 

Warranty  Information 559 

Washer 

Adding  Fluid 505 

Washers,  Windshield 172 

Washing  Vehicle 523 

Wheel  And  Wheel  Trim 524 

Wheel  And  Wheel  Trim  Care 524 

Wind  Buffeting 193 

Window  Fogging 330 

Windows 36 

Power 36 

Windshield  Defroster 99,  321,  327 

Windshield  Washers 170,  172 


INDEX  585 


Windshield  Wiper  Blades 505 

Windshield  Wipers 170 

Wiper  Blade  Replacement 505 

Wipers,  Intermittent 172 


Information  Provided  by: 

= / M_  = F=? 


INSTALLATION  OF  RADIO  TRANSMITTING 
EQUIPMENT 

Special  design  considerations  are  incorporated  into  this 
vehicle's  electronic  system  to  provide  immunity  to  radio 
frequency  signals.  Mobile  two-way  radios  and  telephone 
equipment  must  be  installed  properly  by  trained  person- 
nel. The  following  must  be  observed  during  installation. 

The  positive  power  connection  should  be  made  directly 
to  the  battery  and  fused  as  close  to  the  battery  as  possible. 
The  negative  power  connection  should  be  made  to  body 
sheet  metal  adjacent  to  the  negative  battery  connection. 
This  connection  should  not  be  fused. 

Antennas  for  two-way  radios  should  be  mounted  on  the 
roof  or  the  rear  area  of  the  vehicle.  Care  should  be  used 
in  mounting  antennas  with  magnet  bases.  Magnets  may 
affect  the  accuracy  or  operation  of  the  compass  on 
vehicles  so  equipped. 


The  antenna  cable  should  be  as  short  as  practical  and 
routed  away  from  the  vehicle  wiring  when  possible.  Use 
only  fully  shielded  coaxial  cable. 

Carefully  match  the  antenna  and  cable  to  the  radio  to 
ensure  a low  Standing  Wave  Ratio  (SWR). 

Mobile  radio  equipment  with  output  power  greater  than 
normal  may  require  special  precautions. 

All  installations  should  be  checked  for  possible  interfer- 
ence between  the  communications  equipment  and  the 
vehicle's  electronic  systems. 


STICK  WITH  THE  SPECIALISTS® 


16MK49-126-AB 

©2015  FCA  US  LLC.  All  Rights  Reserved. 

Jeep  is  a registered  trademark  of  FCA  US  LLC. 


cm 

Second  Edition 
Printed  in  U.S.A.